加载中...
共找到 3,087 条相关资讯
Adam Castleton: Good morning. Thank you for joining LSL's Interim Results Presentation. I'm Adam Castleton, LSL's Group CEO, and I'm here with David Wolffe, Interim Group CFO. I'll first cover highlights, market context and progress we've made in our divisions. David will then take you through a financial review. I'll then talk about outlook and some key takeaways, and we'll take questions at the end. We're recording this event and a replay will be available on the LSL IR website. These are my maiden set of results as Group CEO. I'm really pleased to report the results are in line with expectations, and we continue to make good operational progress. Revenue and profit are up with operating margin maintained at a 15-year high. Return on capital employed of 31% for the last 12 months is much higher than historical levels. These reflect the improvements we've achieved following the transformation of the group in recent years, and this was achieved while continuing to invest for growth. This performance underlines that our capital-light resilient model is delivering consistently while we are reinvesting for the future and the full year outlook remains unchanged. Moving to key financial highlights. Group revenue increased by 5% to GBP 89.7 million, and we maintained our strong market share. Group underlying operating profit was up 3% to GBP 14.8 million, while we continue to invest strategically in our business and absorb the national insurance increase. We are a highly cash-generative business. Our cash conversion for the last 12 months was 95%. This is at the upper end of our target range of 75% to 100%. We performed well in a recovering market. Total mortgage lending in the market increased by 5% with a very different picture in new lending, which was up 22%, whilst product transfers rebalanced back 10% year-on-year. We gained market share with our new mortgage lending up 23%. U.K. residential sales were up 17% with a pull forward of demand given the stamp duty changes. We maintained our market share of this market. Mortgage approvals increased 10%, with the change in our lender mix slightly reducing our estimated share in surveying and valuations with revenue up 9%. We operate 3 divisions with leading market positions, each benefit from strong long-standing client relationships with scale and strength in their markets as well as expertise and deep domain knowledge. Each delivered operational progress during the period. In Surveying & Valuation, productivity per surveyor increased by 8%. B2C revenue increased by 43%, and we renewed a top 5 lender contract and started working with another new lender. In Financial Services, new mortgage lending was up 23%. Revenue per adviser increased by 8% and the implementation of the new CRM is progressing well. In our Estate Agency Franchising division, we increased the size of our lettings portfolio, making 3 acquisitions during the period with a strong pipeline, and we added 3 new branches to our franchise network. In summary, each division continues to execute well while maintaining discipline on margins and returns. I'll now hand over to David to take you through the financial review in more detail. David Wolffe: Thank you, Adam. Good morning. I'm David Wolffe, Interim CFO at LSL, previously CFO at a number of high-growth, tech-driven and listed businesses. Let's look at the group's financial performance in more detail. In the half year, revenue grew 5% to GBP 89.7 million, driven by 9% growth in our largest division, Surveying & Valuation. Underlying operating profit increased to GBP 14.8 million, up 3% year-on-year, and I'll come back to that increase in just a moment. Operating margin remained strong at 17% at the upper end of our historical range. Cash from operations at GBP 7.4 million reflects shareholder distributions, planned investment and some working capital timing. Again, more on that shortly. Return on capital employed for the last 12 months increased to 31%, very strong compared to historical levels. So the first half has delivered continuing growth while maintaining a high return on capital profile. Coming back to that operating profit increase, there are 2 main points to highlight. First, we have made positive operating performance progress with an underlying increase of GBP 3 million before strategic and investment decisions. This progress is driven by our volume growth across the business, improved pricing and the first positive contribution from the Pivotal Joint Venture. Second, we made strategic decisions in 2 areas, which reduced profit in the period. We stepped away from some protection-only business as we rebalanced our adviser firms towards mortgage and protection or composite firms, and we made investment across Financial Services and Surveying to drive future growth. So the headline growth of 3% is a combination of that underlying progress and the growth investment. Turning now to cash flow and capital allocation. In the half, we delivered positive operating cash flow of GBP 7.4 million after working capital movements around the 2024 year-end. I'll come back to this in just a moment. We deployed capital in 2 key areas in the period. First, in shareholder returns, we distributed GBP 9 million in dividends and share buybacks. The interim dividend is maintained at 4.0p, and the buyback program continues with GBP 3 million deployed to date. Second, in strategic investment, GBP 3.6 million of cash was spent across CRM development, data and lettings books acquisitions to drive future growth. Our balance sheet remains robust. With June cash at GBP 22 million and a GBP 60 million unutilized facility, we have strong liquidity and our capital-light model ensures ongoing flexibility. Looking at the positive operating cash flow and working capital in a bit more detail now. The line at the bottom of this slide shows our adjusted cash from operations performance over the last few half periods. The GBP 7.4 million we reported in H1 presents as a lower number than last year, but we had a timing effect of GBP 4 million excess working capital inflow just before the 2024 year-end that then unwound into an outflow into 2025. You can see this in the lines above. In operating profit, we have stable progression. Depreciation is flat and low, reflecting our capital-light operating model. Cash on lease liabilities continues to moderate after the transformation of the Estate Agency business. But on working capital, H2 2024 inflow of GBP 5.9 million you'll see in the box was an outlier, which illustrates these timing effects around the year-end. The unwind in H1 of 2025 makes our cash conversion look suppressed in the half, even though on a rolling 12 months basis, we made really good progress. We expect that the second half and full year 2025 cash conversion should be normalizing towards our target of 75% to 100%. Taking each division in turn, let's run through the story of the half. In Surveying & Valuation, revenue grew 9% to GBP 53.2 million, within which B2C was up 43%. Underlying operating profit was GBP 11.9 million, with margins at 22%. This is down on the elevated levels of H1 last year with Surveyor commissions now normalized, and this effect is in line with what we have flagged before. But in sequential performance compared to the second half of 2024, we have made good margin progress, up 200 basis points. Volumes grew with jobs up 7%. Fee per job was up 2% with better terms and more B2C activity, and we improved Surveyor productivity in jobs per surveyor, which was up 8%. In Financial Services, revenue was flat overall, but this illustrates the combination of mortgage-related revenue up 21% and protection revenue down 12%, following our strategic repositioning away from protection-only brokers. As a result, adviser numbers were down to 2,637, but adviser productivity increased 8% in completions per adviser, and we grew fee per completion by 3%. But overall, at a divisional level, despite the broker repositioning and some P&L investment in CRM, operating profit grew 23% to GBP 4.8 million, with Pivotal making that positive contribution. In Estate Agency Franchising, revenue overall grew 1%, but while residential sales revenue was up 24% and lettings revenue up 4%, our land and new homes business was pushed back by a contract change. As a result, underlying operating profit margin remained flat at 24%. We are expecting improvement in the second half with cost savings feeding through. Branches grew by 1% after 3 more openings in the half, with overall sales income per branch up 22%. The lettings portfolio now stands at over 37,400 properties after 7 lettings books acquisitions since mid-2024, with overall income per property now up 1%. So with progress in each of the divisions, the group delivered on expectations in the first half, whilst at the same time, positioning itself for stronger growth in the second half of the year. And with that, I'll hand you back to Adam to take you through the outlook. Adam Castleton: Thank you, David. Expectations for the full year remain unchanged. In the second half, we expect a sequential step-up in profit in each division with an increase in refinancing activity, a strong activity in 2-year and 5-year mortgages in 2020 and 2023 mature in large numbers. We've already seen this in July and August, with July the strongest refinancing month for us this year. We also came into the half with residential sales pipelines increased from this time last year. We will continue to invest in our business in the second half, for example, in lettings books and the FS CRM system. Indeed, in September, we've already completed a further 3 lettings books. When I presented our preliminary results back in April, just before I started out as Group CEO, I set out my early thoughts and priorities. These remain unchanged, and I'm pleased with early progress. Our senior leadership teams are responding well and are raising their sights and ambitions even higher for the future. We continue our investments in technology and data, notably the new CRM in FS and data in Surveying & Valuations, whilst we are also trialing new AI-enabled solutions to improve productivity. I'm already working closely with our divisional business leaders on the opportunity to leverage group strengths, and I'm encouraged by the early signs that I'm seeing. I'm working very hard and even more transparent and clear communication, both internally and to the market. For example, we've just rolled out the first wave of updates to our IR website, adding some fresh new elements to allow greater accessibility and transparency. This is all steady, deliberate progress, and I look forward to sharing news of our ongoing progress. We are a diversified, resilient cash-generative group, strategically positioned for growth. We're delivering, performing in line with expectations, and we're investing carefully while maintaining shareholder distributions. We're building consistently. The LSL of today is stronger and leaner, delivering higher-quality earnings. It is early days in my tenure as CEO, and I'm excited about the growth opportunities open to us as a group. With 2025 on track, we're looking ahead with renewed ambition and with confidence about our future. With that, operator, can we please move to Q&A. Operator: Thank you. [Operator Instructions] There appears to be no questions at this time. So I'd like to hand the call back over for questions via the webcast. Unknown Executive: Okay. Thank you. We've got a number of questions on the webcast. I'll ask them one at a time. The first question is from Glynis at Jefferies. Glynis asks about the Surveying division and the year-on-year movement in the operating margin. You talked about this as -- in the second half of 2024, you're talking about it again today. How should people think about the first half 2025 margin? And what sort of level is considered normal? Adam Castleton: Yes. Thank you, Glynis. Thank you for your question. So last year, as we flagged at the interims and the prelims, we had enhanced margins in the first half of last year as we came into the year in 2024. We had a burst of activity, and we didn't bring back the surveyor incentives immediately. And secondly, there were some administrative heads that we didn't bring back immediately as well. Therefore, there was quite an enhanced margin for the first half of, I think it was 25%, sequentially then that fell in H2 and has now recovered to about 21%, 22%. We expect that really to be the norm. So at the moment, 21%, 22% is really the norm for our margin going forward, the 25% was elevated in the very top end of what we might normally expect to see. Unknown Executive: Great. Thank you, Adam. The second question comes from Jonathan, who's at Edison. Jonathan asks about the impact of changes in stamp duty. Have you seen any material changes in demand in the month since the stamp duty changes came into effect? Adam Castleton: Yes. Thank you. Thank you for your question. Yes, there was a spike, particularly in March with the stamp duty changes. So we saw for the whole half, 17% up for the overall market, which we tracked. March was particularly strong. It was actually 170,000 transactions in the market for that month. What we've seen since then is a good market as we expected. In fact, because H1 2024 was a bit softer, the 17% looks very high. But in fact, the second half of this year will be a little bit more in transactions than it was in the first half. So we see sequential rises, notwithstanding the spike. So certainly, if the question is which -- from time to time, people have asked whether somehow there was a spike and then it sort of hollowed everything out, it certainly didn't. We entered this half year with increased pipelines, which is great. As I said, we expect residential sales to be a little bit more in the second half than it was in the first half, notwithstanding the spike duty spike. Unknown Executive: Great. Thanks, Adam. We have a follow-up question or a second question rather, sorry, from Glynis at Jefferies. There's been a lot of talk in recent weeks about potential government policy changes. How has this impacted your business in recent weeks? And if some of the changes that are being speculated in the press were put into place, what are the implications for the group? Adam Castleton: Thank you again, Glynis, for the question. Obviously, something that we're all reading in the newspapers. The autumn budget is obviously a couple of months away in November, and we read, as you do, Glynis, all the various either ideas or kites that are being flown, it's hard to tell which they are. I don't think I'll comment on speculating what may not come through and what that might mean. Obviously, as a business, we stay very close to what will happen, what we focus on are the facts that we have at hand and as a business that covers the whole range of services in the property and lending markets, we've got really deep knowledge and deep data. So if we look at all the information that we have across Surveying Financial Services and Estate Agency covering mortgage applications, completions, fall-throughs, which are when agreed sales fall through sometimes because the chain has fallen through because people pull out. We're seeing nothing of any of our metrics and -- because I expected some of these questions rather than checking these numbers once a day, I'm checking them twice a day with people and ringing people up. We're not seeing anything at the moment. Whether there's a question of sentiment, I can't say, but certainly, all of our metrics are showing no change of customer behavior. And I think depending on what does or doesn't transpire in the budget, as we've demonstrated over many, many years, we're a dynamic business. We're very quick to react and to change the market. We're well positioned for that. And for any negative shocks that comes to the market in the future, of course, following our franchising restructure, we're a lot more even in our earnings, less volatile. And so we're certainly less spiky. And we're very, very quick to react. And as I said, the data that we have is very, very specific. Just as a little example, when our friends across the water introduced the tariffs, I made a call and said, could they pull out fall-through data from Solihull, which is where the Land Rover factory is and in the Northeast where the Toyota factory is just in case people felt nervous because of the tariffs. So we really stay on top of data closely. And whilst I can't tell what may happen tomorrow or the day after in the budget, certainly, everything we've seen demonstrating that the customer behavior is unchanged and in line with what our expectations are. Unknown Executive: Great. We're actually going to move back to the conference call. We've had a question on the conference call, and then I've got another 2 questions on the web platform. Operator: And we take a question from Robert Sanders from Shore Capital. Robert Sanders: Just I suppose following on from that question about the government and sort of the other aspect of the market that's been a bit open to surveys has been the lettings market and [indiscernible] whatever saying that there's a downturn. Is that something that you're experiencing? And what do you think the outlook is going to be for the lettings market given renters rights [indiscernible] as we move into the next year? And then as a follow-on question, can I also ask you about what your -- you talked about the technology and data innovation and what you're seeing as the opportunities, particularly in the Surveying & Valuation division for the use of AI? Adam Castleton: Certainly, yes. Thank you. Thanks very much. Good question about the lettings market. The first thing I'll say is the lettings market is extremely resilient. If you actually look at the number of privately rented dwellings in the country, it's been very stable at GBP 5.4 million, GBP 5.5 million for the last few years, so we've seen no change of that. From our perspective, we have slightly increased our lettings portfolio, as David said, to over 37,000. And actually, as legislation, you mentioned the renters rights becomes a bit tighter. What we're seeing is that there's more interest from landlords who are self-managing to move towards a managed service. And we're starting to see that movement and that interest and we're certainly marketing to those landlords. It's interesting, you mentioned some of the metrics and the headlines that we see that forecast problems for the lettings market. I would just say that if you note some of those metrics, they don't necessarily show what they may appear to on the face of it. The first thing is there's been some publicity about lettings instructions being down, which is actually something we've seen over a number of years. One of the main reasons for that is that people are staying in their properties for longer, and therefore, there are less instructions than historically they were. Landlords will keep a good paying regular tenant and tenants will -- with everything going on in the market, will prefer to stay where they are. So that's certainly the reason -- one of the main reasons that instructions are down. It's not demonstrating that things are leaving the market. And also, we hear metrics quoted around there being more properties for sale that were previously rented. And whilst that might be the case, of course, those rental properties are often bought by other buy-to-let landlords. So certainly, we don't see a big change in the numbers of properties rented. We see opportunities for further growth. As David said, since the middle of '24, we've done to the end of the period 7. And actually, we did 3 lettings books during the half. And since the end of the half, actually in September, we've done 3 and just about to close to 4. So we see some good opportunities there. It's certainly not buoyant as it was when originally buy-to-let really grew quite strongly, but we're seeing no material change in the numbers of properties, dwellings that are privately let. In terms of the renters rights, as you mentioned, and as I say, just to reiterate, a, we don't see that changing materially the structure of the market. As I said, it may certainly lead to an opportunity for us to bring landlords who are currently self-managing over to a managed service. And that's probably a general point to make around regulation and regulatory changes. As a larger player, we're well placed to make the investments required to cover any changes necessary. And obviously, our deep relationships with whether it be our franchisees or our financial services, we're able to give our sort of trusted advices we have for many, many years. Unknown Executive: I've got 2 questions here from Robin from Zeus. Again, I'll ask them one at a time. In terms of the first question, could you please provide some more detail on Pivotal Growth in terms of current run rate of advisers, revenue, trading performance? Adam Castleton: Yes, Pivotals -- the Pivotal investments is scaling very well in terms of EBITDA, which is the actual entity results in the first half, that was -- again, these are within the interims, these are about GBP 3 million, GBP 4 million of EBITDA. So on a decent run rate for the year. So it's scaling up well. There were 2 small acquisitions during the half that we announced in the interims. And actually, in the post balance sheet note, you'll see that there was one further acquisition that completed after the end of the period. So scaling up nicely with over 500 advisers, the EBITDA run rate is going well. We're looking forward to continued growth and eventual realization of our investments. Certainly, we expect that to be well over our return on our weighted average cost of capital. Unknown Executive: Great. Thanks, Adam. And then there's a second question from Robin also about Pivotal growth. So Robin's question is, can you please expand on your reference about LSL being founded 21 years ago and it's being built on -- success being built on operational resilience, opportunistic dealmaking and entrepreneurial culture. What are LSL's strengths? And how does Pivotal fit into these strengths? Adam Castleton: Okay. That's okay, interesting. So yes, I mean, I won't repeat the words, but the business has -- it's quite entrepreneurial. It's very agile and it's very dynamic. We're very quick to move and to take opportunities. One of the examples actually I often use is when the pandemic hit at the same time that we were planning for the worst case for a year where we would have no business, we were also planning for the state agency to open immediately, and we're planning for both. And in the end, we really, really farmed the market well as it recovers. So very, very quick, and we're always agile. The opportunity -- the opportunistic element of Pivotal when it was founded was for a buy and build within the broking business, which exists in many other industries as we know, and there's an opportunity for us in the broking business, which we have launched. So really, it is an opportunistic approach to buy and build within a sector that had not seen it before. And so far, we're pleased with the scaling. And as I said, we expect a realization of our investments in due course. Unknown Executive: Great. That's all the questions covered on the web platform. No further questions. That's it. Back to you, Adam, for closing remarks. Adam Castleton: Listen, thank you for all the questions. I apologize for my colleague, David. They've all been pointed at me and I've answered them all. So I'm sorry that your -- all your numbers are not... David Wolffe: [indiscernible] Adam Castleton: Thank you very much. So listen, thank you for the questions. We're really excited about the opportunities ahead for the group. We're available for any follow-up that you may need. And I thank you all for your questions, your interest, and I look forward to carrying on the dialogue with you. Thank you.
Operator: Good day, and thank you for standing by. Welcome to the Scholastic reports, First Quarter, Fiscal Year 2026 Results. [Operator Instructions] I would now like to hand the conference over to your speaker today, Jeffrey Matthews, Executive Vice President and Chief Growth Officer. Jeffrey Mathews: Hello, and welcome, everyone, to Scholastic's Fiscal 2026 First Quarter Earnings Call. Today on the call, I'm joined by Peter Warwick, our President and Chief Executive Officer; and Haji Glover, our Chief Financial Officer and Executive Vice President. As usual, we posted this call's investor presentation on our IR website at investor.scholastic.com, which you may download now if you've not already done so. We would like to point out that certain statements made today will be forward-looking. These forward-looking statements, by their nature, are subject to various risks and uncertainties and actual results may differ materially from those currently anticipated. In addition, we will be discussing some non-GAAP financial measures, as defined in Regulation G. The reconciliations of those measures to the most directly comparable GAAP measures may be found in the company's earnings release and accompanying financial tables, filed this afternoon on a Form 8-K. This earnings release has also been posted to our Investor Relations website. We encourage you to review the disclaimers in the release and investor presentation and to review the risk factors disclosed in the company's annual and quarterly reports, filed with the SEC. Should you have any questions, after today's call, please send them directly to our IR e-mail address, investor_relations@scholastic.com. And now, I'd like to turn the call over to Peter Warwick, to begin this afternoon's presentation. Peter Warwick: Thank you, Jeff, and good afternoon, everyone. Scholastic had a productive summer, as we prepared for the back-to-school season and advanced important initiatives. As expected, our first quarter reflected the normal seasonality of our business, with an operating loss in line with previous years. We continue to make strong progress on our previously announced real estate monetization process, with significant investor interest in both our SoHo headquarters and our Jefferson City distribution center. We remain on track, with the time line, we outlined in July. Haji will share further details in his remarks. At the same time, we're driving greater financial discipline and operational leverage across the company, while affirming our full year guidance. These actions position us well, for profitable growth in the quarters and years ahead. In our Children's Book Publishing and Distribution segment last quarter, trade sales were solid, strong continued demand for our global franchises drove unit sales in excess of the overall growth in the children's and young adult markets. Suzanne Collins: Sunrise on the reaping, has now sold 3.7 million copies worldwide, since its March release. Looking ahead, in October, we're excited to release the 25th title in Lauren Tarshis's, I Survived series, another middle-grade best seller along with the illustrated addition of Catching Fire and the interactive illustrated edition of Harry Potter and the Goblet of fire. In November, we will publish a collector's edition of Sunrise on the reaping, to sustain momentum ahead of Lionsgate's feature film adaptation in 2026. We're also building towards another major global release, with Dave Pilkey's, Dogman, big Jim believes. Preorders are tracking in line with the last dogman, positioning this newest title for a strong on sale. The Dog Man franchise has more than 70 million copies in print, across 48 languages. And next spring, Dave Pilkey's Captain Underpants returns in an entirely new format, with the first Epic manga, illustrated by Motojero. In book fairs, quarter 1 represents only a small portion of annual revenue, given the school summer vacations, but early indicators are encouraging. Fall bookings are strong and ahead of last year's bookings. Redemption of Scholastic dollars, our reward currency in book fairs is high, indicating good engagement with book fair hosts. We're also making progress in booking more larger fairs and reducing churn. In book clubs, quarter 1 also represents a small portion of annual revenue with year-over-year change, reflecting the timing of mailings. With the integration of trade fairs and clubs into the new Children's Book group, we now have one aligned organization coordinating editorial, merchandising, marketing and distribution to maximize the reach and value of our publishing, across both our proprietary and retail channels. Our initial priority has been streamlining operations and infrastructure, enhancing data analytics, optimizing inventory and overhead and driving early cost savings while building a foundation for long-term profitable growth. Turning to Scholastic Entertainment. We're positioned for renewed growth, as industry greenlighting accelerates and our 360-degree IP strategy gains traction. Now with the capabilities and assets of 9-story Media Group fully integrated into our strategy and organization. We're using YouTube as a launch pad for new properties after integrating all 9 story branded channels under the Scholastic banner. Clifford remains a cornerstone franchise, both in traditional linear and on digital platforms. We expect to surpass 10 million monthly views by calendar year-end, of classic Clifford content on YouTube and we're supporting this with new publishing consumer products and promotional partnerships to lay the groundwork for Clifford's next phase of growth. The trailer for Paris Hilton's Paris & Pups dropped on all social media platforms and has been viewed more than 1.8 million times. The Series YouTube launch is coming September 23, with episodes releasing weekly and toys launching in fall 2026, with Playmates Toys, as they announced this morning. Scholastic holds global publishing rights with tie-in books also scheduled for fall 2026. This approach, pairing digital-first content with publishing is central to our strategy. It not only expands the reach of our IP, but also builds brand affinity that flows back into book sales. As just announced, we've also launched the first ever Scholastic branded streaming app, in partnership with Future today. The app offers families a free, safe and trusted destination, to enjoy beloved scholastic programming on demand, with nearly 400 half hours of content and will scale to more than 1,300 half hours by fiscal 2027. A significant marketing campaign begins this month to build awareness and adoption. Together, these initiatives are expanding the reach of Scholastic's IP, creating high-margin digital revenue streams and strengthening our position at the intersection of Publishing and media. In Scholastic Education, sales were pressured in the quarter, by a volatile funding environment, reflecting the delay of some federal education grants and cancellation of others. Further, several states are facing budget impasses. In this challenging environment, we continue taking steps to strengthen this business for the long term. Under new leadership, the team is refocusing our go-to-market functions on our core strengths, rationalizing the product portfolio and prioritizing investments in high-impact offerings, like Knowledge library. While near-term results remain constrained by the market, education continues to be central to Scholastic's mission, we remain confident in its long-term potential. International results reflected continued portfolio rationalization and a focus on margin improvement. We see growth opportunities, in expanding English as a second language programs and in growing markets like India and the Philippines. Overall, Scholastic delivered a solid start to fiscal 2026. We advanced our strategy, including recent reorganizations, investing in some of our strongest franchises and IP, made progress on our potential real estate monetization and prepared for the important back-to-school season. With these actions, we're affirming our full year guidance and remain confident in our ability to deliver meaningful profit growth, while continuing to create long-term value for our shareholders and lasting impact for children worldwide. Thank you. And I'll now turn it over to Haji. Haji Glover: Thank you, Peter, and good afternoon, everyone. As usual, I will refer to our adjusted results for the first quarter, excluding onetime items unless otherwise indicated. Please refer to our press release tables and SEC filings for a complete discussion of onetime items. As Peter discussed earlier, our first quarter reflected the normal seasonality of our business, during the quiet summer months. I'm proud of our team's hard work, preparing for the back-to-school season and we are well positioned to achieve our plan, this fiscal year and beyond. Beginning with our consolidated financial results and our typically small summer first quarter, when our school reading events division had minimum sales, revenues decreased 5% to $225.6 million. Our seasonally adjusted operating loss improved to $81.9 million from $85.6 million, in the prior year period. Reflecting cost-saving initiatives, adjusted EBITDA was a loss of $55.7 million, an improvement from a loss of $60.5 million a year ago. Net loss was $63.3 million compared to $60.3 million, in the prior year period. On a per diluted share basis, adjusted loss increased to $2.52 compared to a loss of $2.13 last year, primarily reflecting lower shares outstanding due to share buybacks. As a reminder, Scholastic results are highly seasonal. In addition to first quarter, we also generally recorded an operating loss in our third quarter with profitable second and fourth quarters. Turning to our segment results. In Children's Book Publishing and Distribution, revenues for the first quarter increased 4% to $109.4 million, reflecting growth in school book fairs. Segment adjusted operating loss improved to $34.3 million from $36.6 million in the prior year period. Book fair revenue were $34.1 million in the quarter, an increase of 18%, driven by higher Scholastic dollar redemptions. Book Clubs revenue were $1.8 million in the quarter compared to $2.7 million a year ago, reflecting the timing of mailings, as Peter discussed. In our Trade Publishing division, revenues were $73.5 million in the first quarter, essentially flat with prior year period, reflecting continued strong demand for Hunger Games and Harry Potter titles. We are optimistic in our publishing plan for this fiscal year, which features many exciting new titles in upcoming quarters. Turning to Scholastic Education, Segment revenues were $40.1 million in the first quarter versus $55.7 million in the prior year period, reflecting lower spending on supplemental curriculum products and the timing of state sponsored program revenues. Segment adjusted operating loss was $21.2 million in the first quarter compared to a loss of $17 million in the prior year period, reflecting lower gross profit, partly offset by cost cuts and careful expense control. Turning to our Entertainment segment. Revenues decreased by $3 million to $13.6 million compared to $16.6 million in the prior year, primarily driven by fewer episodic deliveries, as anticipated. Segment adjusted operating loss was $4 million, a decline of $5.2 million from the prior year quarter. The current year period includes $700,000 in incremental amortization expense on intangible assets related to the timing of the acquisition in the prior year period. As Peter discussed, we remain encouraged by recent momentum and are positioned for renewed growth, as industry green lighting accelerates. International segment revenues were $59.4 million in the first quarter, up from $56.8 million a year ago. Excluding the $0.2 million year-over-year impact of favorable foreign currency exchange, segment revenues were up $2.4 million primarily driven by higher revenues in Australia, the U.K. and Asia. Segment adjusted operating results improved to a loss of $4.1 million compared to a loss of $8.3 million in the prior year period, reflecting higher revenues and continued optimization of this business. Unallocated overhead costs decreased by $6.6 million to $18.3 million in the first quarter primarily, driven by lower employee expenses from cost reduction initiatives. Now turning to cash flow and the balance sheet. In the quarter, seasonal net cash used by operating activities was $81.8 million compared to net cash used of $41.9 million in the prior year period. This increase in cash use was primarily driven by fluctuations in net working capital with higher inventory purchases, including tariff charges, the timing of general operating expense payments, higher interest, partially offset by higher customer remittance. Severance payments were also higher as part of the cost-saving initiatives. Free cash used in the first quarter was $100.2 million compared to $68.7 million in the prior year period, reflecting lower cash flow from operations partially offset by lower capital expenditures. At quarter end, the company had borrowings of $325 million under its unsecured revolving credit facility. Net debt was $242.8 million compared to net debt of $136.6 million at the end of fiscal 2025, which was due to the working capital requirements. In the first quarter, we continued to return excess cash to shareholders through our regular dividends of $5.2 million. We currently have $70 million remaining on our share buyback authorization. The company expects to continue purchasing shares time to time as conditions allow, on the open market or a negotiated private transactions for the foreseeable future. As we previously announced, the company retained Newmark Group, to identify investment partners for potential sale-leaseback transactions of all or part of its own office and retail real estate in New York City and its Jefferson City distribution centers. These processes have generated significant interest and are progressing. We expect both to conclude this fall. While there can be no guarantees of transactions of either or both properties, we remain optimistic about both in the context of our capital allocation priorities, which include debt reduction and share repurchases. Now for our outlook for the remainder of the year. Our strategic efforts to align spending with long-term goals are driving favorable operating margins, supported by our ongoing SG&A optimization. Our goal for these actions is to sustainably lower our cost structure, especially with respect to non-revenue generating and consulting expenses. As for the impact of tariffs, we are closely following changes in policy and continue to expect approximately $10 million of incremental tariff expenses this fiscal year in our cost of product. We expect a strong second quarter benefiting from major trade releases. As Peter previously indicated, we are affirming our fiscal year 2026 guidance for revenue growth of 2% to 4%. Adjusted EBITDA of $160 million to $170 million and full year free cash flow between $30 million and $40 million. Thank you for your time today. I'll hand the call back to Peter for his final remarks. Peter Warwick: Thank you, Haji. In conclusion, after a solid start to the fiscal year and the return of students to schools, Scholastic is positioned well to continue its momentum and execute its plan for substantial earnings growth in fiscal 2026. As I laid out in July, our plan is focused on building Scholastic's long-term opportunity as a global leader in the children's publishing, media and education spaces meeting kids, families and schools essential needs to educate, inform and engage kids. In support of that, we continue to reduce costs, strengthen our organization, return capital to shareholders and take steps to optimize our capital structure and balance sheet. We look forward to providing our next update in December, after a big second quarter. Thank you all very much. Let me now turn the call over to Jeff. Jeffrey Mathews: Thank you, Peter. With that, we will open the call for questions. Operator? Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from Brendan McCarthy with Sidoti. Brendan Michael McCarthy: I just wanted to start off looking at the Education Solutions business. I know we just wrapped up the summer months. But I'm curious if you've had any early feedback on some of the new products that you brought to the market and maybe how they've have been resonating with schools or students. Jeffrey Mathews: Brendan, this is Jeff here. I'll step in as the head of this -- interim head of this business. Look, we were getting great feedback from customers around some of the new products. Of course, it's a difficult selling situation. As Peter described, there are some delays and cancellations of some federal funds. So I think in that environment, we are very encouraged by the -- what we're hearing particularly with knowledge library and as well as our core products, our classroom libraries and our classroom magazines. Brendan Michael McCarthy: Got it. I appreciate the color, Jeff. And I guess, at this point, what do you think -- so I understand there's been the pause in spending from states and school districts. What do you think are key variables to keep an eye on that would ultimately turn this trend around. Jeffrey Mathews: That's a good question. And it's important to understand it's not -- there hasn't -- the schools are continuing to spend money. It's an environment when the certainty of future funds is low, they are more likely to hold back on anything but the most necessary must-have purchases. What we're doing -- our strategy is very much focused on helping our customers understand why Scholastic's products align with their most critical needs. Of course, as there's greater funding certainty and we've seen that some of the federal programs that had been paused or some federal grants have been paused were released in late August. As there becomes more certainty, we expect that school district and -- school and district leaders will be more forthcoming with and more confident in their ability to purchase because there's no question schools continue to need materials in the classroom. In many cases, they've made significant investments in their core curricula over the last year or 2. This is a time when they start to need to fill out their classrooms with additional materials, to support their teachers and support their students. So with that respect, the cycle is favorable, it's just getting through this moment of uncertainty that has been caused by volatility, largely in Washington. Brendan Michael McCarthy: That makes sense. Jeff, certainly something to keep an eye on there. I wanted to turn to the Entertainment segment. I know your priority has really been focused on getting some content up on to YouTube, where there's the advertising revenue share model. I guess what's the -- when can we expect to really see that kind of flow through into the financial statements into the P&L? And I guess more of a long-term perspective to what does long-term success really look like with the 9-story media business? Peter Warwick: It's Peter here, Brendan. Look, the digital model that we now have and the digital income that we're getting is high margin and it's going to grow. So that's really -- that's a really good thing for us. It's about -- we will see the major benefits, going progressively out into the future. It's not -- there's not going to be some sort of like sudden change this quarter or next quarter, if you know what I mean. But there's a lot of -- what's going on, is the benefits of what we're doing with things like YouTube and so on. Is that it's not just a source of high-value revenue. It's also exposing our brand and it's driving kids to buy books about Clifford or whatever as well. I mean, we now have 1.2 million subscribers, to Scholastic channels on YouTube. We didn't have those before and so this is a major thing. And we are pretty confident that over time, this is going to be a major source of high -- it's high margin revenue because it's the revenue share from the advertising that comes with it. And it's also -- it's part of this 360-degree strategy that we've talked to you and others about that we are able to -- what we're really doing is integrating as closely as possible, both a publishing and media strategy and seeing the interrelationships between the 2 and gaining benefits from both our media and our book properties. Brendan Michael McCarthy: Right. That makes sense. Peter. I guess just in terms of scale, are you able to maybe quantify what the revenue opportunity might look like as it relates to 9 story. And I guess, strictly speaking from the perspective of monetizing the digital content side. Haji Glover: This is Haji. Just taking that question from you. So right now, we're really in early stages of this and we're going to try to really see -- right now, we're only on 2 platforms with the opportunity to increase that to another 6 or 7 platforms. And I think when we look at it, this has been both an opportunity for us to get our content in front of new viewership and really build on the success of what we already have. But being able to actually quantify this impact is probably going to take us a few months as we see the viewership grow. And then once again, we're dealing with a partner in this and sharing the share of that revenue. And most likely, we'll see this opportunity or upside in 2027. Brendan Michael McCarthy: Understood. One question for me on the cost structure side, looking at SG&A. Just curious as to where you're taking cost out of the business and where -- maybe where you see additional room for expense reduction there? Haji Glover: Well, I can say this that we really dove deep into the restructuring of the organization and this fiscal year -- early part of this fiscal year and we continue to define areas or where those opportunities for us to reduce spend, we will do. But we did -- we definitely took a really good look at it prior to actually given our guidance, and our guidance reflects the majority of our spend reductions. I think we announced somewhere between $15 million and $20 million of price cost reductions. And we're right now seeing the fruition of that come through in our financials. Brendan Michael McCarthy: Got it. Got it. One more question for me just on the guidance affirmation. I guess at this point, I know we're only at the start of the school year. But at this point, what variables might cause a material underperformance or outperformance of the full year fiscal guide? Haji Glover: For us, it's all about understanding where the retail market is. As you know, we're experiencing a lot of things in the marketplace. Consumer and school spending is somewhat in question. But we feel very confident in the plan we put out from an organization perspective. I don't foresee any major concerns from my side, what's going on. But there could potentially be some upside and downside, and we're going to manage it as an organization. And that's why we leave the opportunity to be very conservative on how we approach things. But at the end of the day, we want to continue to invest in growth, which is in our revenue side of the business and fall back on things that do not generate revenue and the most important thing for us is the concerns of tariffs, as it reflects our business because we are a retail business. And those expenses, which we've already planned for, which is about $10 million this year, we're continuing to monitor all the things that are going on with the government, down in D.C. Peter Warwick: And I think it's -- Brandon, the other thing is that, as I mentioned, school book fairs are the number of fairs that we have are up. And it's too early to tell. But clearly, a key thing that matters to us is things like revenues per fare, the average revenue for fare. We haven't had enough fairs yet to be able to be able to calculate that yet. But I think we're -- we'll see about that. No reason to think that we're not on track with what our planning is. And it's good having a number of fairs booked being up. So that's also a good thing. Operator: Our next question comes from [indiscernible] with B. Riley Securities. . Unknown Analyst: I want to go back to the Education Solutions business. You flagged the funding uncertainty as an impact on spending for supplemental materials. I think in the recent past, you've also indicated you expect market conditions to get better over the next 12 to 24 months. How do we reconcile those 2? Should we anticipate a similar trajectory for the business as we observed in 1Q as you move through fiscal '26? Or do you think things stabilize as an opportunity to improve profitability as you move through the year? Jeffrey Mathews: Drew, this is Jeff again. We are expecting, based on the current patterns that this year will be more back-end loaded than previously. it's been inside baseball, but we have shifted our selling year to be aligned with our fiscal year. That going to give us -- which will mean we'll go into Q4 with a very full pipeline. We didn't start Q1. This summer, we started with an empty pipeline. We also expect that as we, you've seen this as I'm sure you were doing monitoring the headlines around federal education policy in the states that some of these -- the delays over the summer and in the spring, which, of course, have -- there's a long lead time with part purchases given selling cycles. Those were particularly hard hitting over the summer, we expect we're hopeful that will -- those headwinds will moderate over the fall and into the spring. And we're doing everything we can to be very well positioned, of course, to lean into the market now, sopping up money that's available and then make sure we're ready for a very big spring selling season. Unknown Executive: Also on top of that, Drew, just to be clear that we are very diligent about our frugality and what we spend and how we continue to look at our expenses within that business. So I just want to make sure you're clear on that. Unknown Analyst: Okay. All right. Helpful. Maybe looking at fiscal 2Q, Peter, I think you characterized your expectations for the quarter or that it will be big. I'm curious as if you can expound upon that and kind of what the puts and takes are for the quarter. Peter Warwick: Well, I think -- I mean, first of all, there's the trade -- just looking through the segments, really. If you look at trade publishing, we've got a big quarter 2. And we've got some really good stuff coming, including a new Dog Man. And all the indications that we're seeing with advanced sales in and all the rest of it are in giving us good feelings that that's going to be significantly higher than we had in quarter 2 last year. And we're feeling pretty good about the year as a whole as well. The other areas such as book fairs, I mean, as we mentioned before, the fair count in quarter 2 -- in our quarter 2 will be higher than the fair count in the prior year. And that's -- the bookings are up and everything is looking pretty good at the moment, but it's -- I can't give you any more information than that because we really need to have more fairs actually done sorted out and all the rest of it. But what I can tell you is that I think the folks doing it psychologically are feeling pretty good. So that's -- I'll take that. The other thing that we're seeing in terms of puts and takes is actually our cost base. I mean you'd see even in education that we had -- there was a significant reduction in year-over-year revenues, but the difference in revenues was pulled very significantly down when you actually look at the -- when you look at your sales were down $15 million, but OI was only down by $4 million. And that's because of the cost savings that we've been making. The other benefit that we've had, just on the cost side is our operating expenses generally and the things that we've been doing. And those will -- some -- a lot of that was created in quarter 1, but a lot of it is also a flow-through from the benefits that we had in costs in the second half of the prior financial year. They're flowing through now. So I'm feeling good about all of those things. I think the other thing that we've seen is we've had a good pickup in international markets as well, particularly U.K. and Australia and New Zealand. I mean Australia, the whole education year and school book fair is the other way around as we want to hear. So they're busy and active at the moment, and we had a good quarter 2 from quarter 1, sorry, from them. The other thing we've seen is that our book business, particularly in the U.K. has been doing very well, especially with some of these key titles like Sunrise on the reaping, Suzanne Collins's is Hunger Games series, Dog Man, et cetera, et cetera. So those are -- they're all making me feel pretty good about quarter 2 at the moment. And they give me a strong sense that we're -- the guidance that we've given for the year is we're absolutely on track for that. And in terms of our internal expectations, we were happy with what we were doing in quarter 1. They were -- that from an internal -- the way we've been targeting and we've be expecting that was -- that's good. Unknown Analyst: Great. And then maybe one last one for me for Haji. You outlined the drivers behind the negative variance for cash flow and free cash flow, specifically in your preamble versus the year ago period. It sounds like you believe you can make that up over the balance of the fiscal year. What are the swing factors to achieving that? Haji Glover: So the majority of it is actually around our revenue and how we sort of forecast our revenue for the year. So receipts are going to come in a little bit stronger first half -- excuse me, second half versus first half. That's number one. Number 2 is we're really tightly watching. And actually, our forecast for spending on capital expense is a different profile than last year. We made significant investments last year on our One Scholastic fulfillment center. Those are actually coming down year-on-year. So that's number one. And then number two, just the things that we're looking at to invest in from a growth perspective, a slightly different profile this year than last year. So I'm extremely excited about where we are. And then last thing I want to say is we both had the Dave Pilkey and Suzanne Collins to pay last year, whereas this year, we only have to pay just Dave Pilkey, in terms of the new titles that are being released. So that's another thing. So I'm very excited and confident about where we are, from a capital perspective and where we're spending our money this year. Operator: And this concludes our Q&A. I will pass the call back to management for any closing remarks. Peter Warwick: Well, thank you very much. And also thank you to our authors and illustrators, educators, employees. It's their hard work and creativity that drives our success. And I'd also like to thank our shareholders and all, who joined us this afternoon live or on the recorded call later. We appreciate very much your support. Bye. Operator: Thank you. Ladies and gentlemen, this concludes today's conference call. Thank you for participating. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good afternoon and thank you to those of you who are joining us. There is quite a number of you. So if you just bear with us, we'll allow everyone into the meeting. Great. Okay. Well, thank you for joining us this afternoon. We're here to hear from McBride plc, who announced their results earlier this week. Today, we're going to have a brief introduction followed by a video, and then on to the main bulk of the results presentation, which was shared with analysts, as I say, earlier this week. Then, we will have an opportunity for Q&A at the end. Please feel free to submit them as we go through the presentation, and we will take as many as we can in the time that we have allocated, which is the hour. So without further ado, I will hand over to Chris Smith. Christopher Ian Smith: Thanks, Hannah. Good afternoon to everyone. Thank you for joining this call. So as Hannah said, I'm Chris Smith. I'm the CEO, been with the group coming up for 11 years now. And I'm joined here today by Mark Strickland, who's our CFO, who's been with the group around 5 years. I thought -- so first of all, we're going to kick off with a very rapid introduction to McBride for those of you who don't know anything about us. We have a small corporate video, which explains a bit more. And then we will, as Hannah says, rattle through the results presentation we gave yesterday. So look, this is right on the page. We are the #1, the leading supplier in our space across Europe of household cleaning products. We're all coming up for 100 years old. We are a pan-European business. We are not just a U.K. business. Our heritage is U.K. We're coming up to 1927, it was formed in Manchester. But we now have something between 3,500, 3,600 people across 18 locations and 13 countries selling over 1 billion consumer units to our customers, which are predominantly retail customers. So you'll see here on the bottom left, 84% of our business is what we call private label or white label. So this is -- and I'll come on to a bit more about what that is. And we have a small amount of volume into contract manufacturing where we manufacture for brands. You'll see on the bottom right. We are a pan-European business. Everyone thinks we're just a U.K. company. We're not -- U.K. is our third biggest market. Germany is our #1 market, nearly 1/4 of the group. In France, U.K., Italy, Spain, the main countries. And we are doing, as you'll hear in the results, just under GBP 1 billion of sales in the year to June 2025. Next slide, please, Hannah. So look, it's really important for people to understand, I think, in our business model, private label or some people call it white label is at our core. That is the roots of the business and the absolute core mission of the company. You can see our purpose statement here, everyday value cleaning products. So every home could be clean and hygienic. We are your everyday supplier of everyday products that you see in the supermarket aisle, and I'll come on to the product ranges in a moment. I just would like to point you, if you get the chance and you're on LinkedIn, join us and look us on LinkedIn. We've just been doing a series of interesting articles that paint the backdrop to what is private label, -- why -- what is fast followership mean? What does McBride offer to the market. So there's some really good posts that have been coming out in the last 3 or 4 weeks. I would point you to look at those if you get the chance, gives you a nice background around the company as well. Next slide, please, Hannah. So the products that we manufacture are summarized here. And in reality, the sort of really the main 3 thrusts for the group are laundry products, dishwashing products and surface cleaners or household cleaners, we also have some air care products from our aerosols business. And in laundry, everything you would imagine if you're stood in the aisle in Tesco from laundry powder to laundry liquid to laundry capsules, to fabric conditioner, stain removals, all those sorts of things that you would see dish, the same, tablets for automatic dishwashing machines, dishwash powders and of course, also hand dishwash, very liquid equivalents. And cleaners is everything you imagine with a spray onto a surface, table cleaning, surface cleaning, antibacterial sprays, toilet cleaners, bleach, all those sorts of products. So absolutely pretty much everything you will see in the household aisle of a retail partner. Next slide, please. We run our business across 5 divisions, product-driven. So you can see the 5 divisions here, liquids, which is anything that you pour basically out of a bottle, out of a carton, out of a pouch. We do what we call unit dosing. So those your dishwash tablets, your laundry pods and increasingly, these soft pods that you have in dishwash. Powders is what it says on the tin, it's absolutely the familiar thing that most people remember in laundry powders and dishwash powders. Then we have an aerosols business. And we have a kind of incubator [indiscernible] business in Asia doing predominantly actually personal care and household products. Next slide. The industry, as you all know, and you will see if you stand in the aisle of supermarket -- is all about ultimately innovation in the products that you're being offered as a consumer. And the real focus in innovation nowadays is all around packaging and compaction, better formulation to reduce carbon footprint. McBride is at the forefront of this in the private label space, whether it's recycled plastic, we have been the first to market, for example, with laundry liquid in what looks like an orange juice carton. You can buy that in Sainsbury's, for example. We're the first to market with a paper bag rather than a plastic bag for laundry powders. And we're the first as well to the market with a cardboard box rather than a plastic tub, for example, for laundry capsules. So the world is moving fast. The retailers are very demanding in this space, and it's a key aspect of our business, as you might imagine. And then finally, on the sort of [indiscernible], why is McBride successful and the #1 in this space. And look, we pride ourselves on being the most competitive, the most reliable and the most innovative supplier to the trade across all the markets in which we operate. We are hugely customer and market-oriented and focused. We bring significant scale. That brings fantastic distribution networks. It brings buying scale for things like raw materials and also, of course, things like innovation. We are distributed in our asset base. Transportation is expensive to move bottles of washing up liquid around. So we have a distributed asset base, pretty unique in the industry. We pride ourselves on expertise and being absolute leaders in the specialisms that are needed for these categories. And with our new strategy that's been in place now for 3 to 4 years, absolutely focused and disciplined on what we're trying to achieve in our strategic outlook. So that's a very, very rapid rattle through but McBride at a glance. Hannah, we now got a corporate video, if you would go to play that. This is available on our website, the corporate video, by the way, in the who we are section. So if you want to watch it again, you can at your leisure. But over to that. [Presentation] Christopher Ian Smith: Great. Thank you, Hannah, for sharing that. So look, we'll now move on to the slide deck that we presented yesterday and as part of our results announcement. And look, it's really -- it was an absolute pleasure, and I'm super proud as part of the leadership team to be able to present the numbers that we did yesterday, continued proof really of our rebased much improved business. I'd like to think that another set of strong performance results as we're sharing with you today will begin to turn heads as we cement our performance at these new levels as the leading business in its sector in Europe. And as you'll hear through this presentation, the group is confident of its position and progress towards its strategic goals. This confidence is behind the reinstatement of our annual dividend, all of which will help support more investor interest in the group and the potential value opportunity. As you will hear shortly, McBride is also a much stronger all-round business. Our platform is much improved. Yes, we've turned around the financials. We've doubled our EBITDA returns from historic levels, and we've normalized our balance sheet in the past few years. But equally worthy of note is the extent to which we've improved many of what you might consider to be background features and aspects of the group's performance. And therefore, our credibility with customers, suppliers, colleagues, banking partners and other stakeholders is much improved. These core capabilities have committed McBride to continue to grow in a competitive and price-sensitive market while sustaining these high levels of profit margin. We've seen a lot of doubt in recent years that we can maintain these profit levels. So I'm delighted to say this is our fifth consecutive reporting period at these new profit levels with our outlook consistent to retain at this current level. Our heightened profitability has translated well into strong cash flows, strong cash generation. Our net debt has fallen again. It's now close to GBP 100 million, and our debt cover level is well ahead of our 1.5x target. We mentioned at our Capital Markets Day 18 months ago that we had a series of options and ideas to support further growth and expansion of the group as part of its strategic growth agenda to further its leadership in the industry. Our balance sheet is now able to permit the group to be considering these options behind what we call our Core+ and our buy-and-build ambitions. Finally, this financial position overall and our confidence for the future has permitted the Board to announce the reinstatement of annual dividends with this first dividend for over 5 years now recommended at 3p. Next slide, please. And again, thank you. At our Capital Markets Day in March 2024, we outlined our strategy direction and our midterm financial targets. It is really pleasing to be able to report good progress towards these targets as outlined on this page. In revenue terms, our growth ambition of 2% per year is a volume target. And whilst revenue growth in the last 12 months in GDP terms was up just under 1% in volume terms, our growth was at 4.3%, demonstrating continued progress with our growth task. Our profitability held at 9.3% in terms of EBITDA. Good profit growth in our powders, unit dose and aerosols businesses was offset with slightly weaker margins in our liquids business, which was off just under 1%. As I said, our cash performance was very pleasing despite increased capital expenditure, net debt fell again and debt cover is now at 1.2x, beating our target of 1.5x. Part of the net debt improvement was a result of good working capital management, which offset higher capital additions with the result that ROCE held at levels reported last year at 33% and significantly ahead of our 25% target. I will update you shortly on our transformation program, but this remains central to our strategy delivery and is now delivering net benefits and remains on track to hit the GBP 50 million cumulative net benefit over 5 years. The leadership and the Board of McBride are focused -- are laser-focused, should I say, on delivering the strategic ambitions for McBride and its stakeholders, and we remain confident we have the right team and the right direction to deliver on these targets over the midterm. Next slide. Whilst most of the headlines as the investor audience will want to hear will center around our improving financial metrics, I'm also super proud of the excellent performance across a range of our other crucial areas that point to McBride being a stronger overall business now and for the future. Service levels to customers, we call it CSL is a key hygiene factor for any supplier into retail. Our work in our transformation program on service excellence and strong focus across the business has seen the best service levels in the group for over 6 years. This positions McBride really well for any new business opportunities, margin management conversations, but also keeps our logistics and internal servicing costs to the optimum levels. Ensuring we're as efficient as possible in our manufacturing has stepped forward again this year with focused continuous improvement teams driving machine efficiency in the factories, yielding on average something like a 2% improvement in operating effectiveness. And finally, on this slide, I'm not going to go through all of these. I'm just going to talk about our sustainability ambition. We have continued to make real progress with our carbon footprint reduction ambitions, real reduction in absolute carbon levels in the last 12 months despite volume growth and actually reporting an -- what we call an intensity level reduction of minus 8%. So well on track to deliver our carbon commitments. Next page, please. A key feature of our reset business and our new strategy is to be far more informed and better aware of what is happening in the market as a whole. We have spent a significant amount of time developing our data analytics to support our understanding of how we're performing relative to the market and how the market itself is performing. We buy panel data for the 5 countries that the flags are shown on this slide, and we can track quarter-by-quarter a rolling 12-month total market position of both branded and private label products in the categories that we supply. The graph on the left shows the total market volumes over time, each bar being the next quarter on and the last data to June 2025. The dark green bars represent the branded volume and the light green bars represent the private label volume. The overall market moved up a little bit, 1% in total. But as you can see with the top line on the chart on the right, the private label growth continues to outperform the branded volume growth. Private label share has grown to 35.5%, up from around 30%, 3 to 5 years ago. And that would appear that line on the chart, which is that private label share has steadied and is holding now at these new high levels. And evidentially, if you look at other sectors like pet care, pet food, baby diapers, ice cream, private label share when it makes such a significant step change stays at these new levels. And we expect that to continue in the coming year. In the branded space in the last 12 months, we have seen a longer period of promotional activity from the brand typically in the spring time, and we haven't seen that for a few years now. There was some impact into our volumes and the market more generally during the end of what is our quarter 3, so February, March and into a bit into April. But since then, we have seen generally private label demand return to normal levels, solid and robust. In terms of categories, quite some differences in category penetration for private label. A key focus and strategic direction for us is laundry. Laundry is typically the highest value, highest margin part of the market. It's the least penetrated for private label, typically just under 30% for laundry, where you compare that to dishwash where penetration is 44%. Overall, we grew our volumes in private label just under 2% as was evident in the market as a whole. And we did particularly well in Dishwash, where we outperformed the market heavily. And in laundry liquid, which is a key priority and focus strategic area for us, we grew that business 7% against the market that grew 2.8%. So trends in the market are still favoring private label. We believe that they will hold at this level and our growth in the future will be coming from contract wins and growing our share in the existing customer base. Next slide, please. So just very quickly on our divisions. All these -- for your information, all these divisional divisions have their own management teams. We have a series of shared resources like purchasing and transportation and central finance and IT, for example. All other functions reside and are accountable within profit and loss accounts for each of these 5 divisions. Liquids is our biggest division, over 57% of the group. And we saw a good performance from the business this year, growing top line, moving up in contract manufacturing. We onboarded a significant new contract manufacturing contract in France. We've progressed strongly with our operational excellence agenda, driving lean approaches in manufacturing. And we continue to invest in automation and reduction of headcount through robotics and end-of-line automation. That business is cost oriented, by the way. You'll see each of these divisions has a strategic focus and the liquids is typically the most competitive environment. It's the lowest barriers to entry, cost leadership essential as a strategic focus for that division. Our unit dosing business is much more about product leadership. This is a fashion thing. You'll see frequent changes to formats. These are typically high priced on shelf. And we will work hard to lead in this space by driving new innovation, new formats all the time. Two new dishwash formats introduced in the last year, and we are now bringing to market the first soft dishwash fusion product, we call it into market right now. But actually, the performance improvement for unit dosings last year when you see the profit numbers was all about its operational performance. These are very difficult products to manufacture very fiddly, quite intricate machinery. We've had a fantastic step-up in output, waste reduction levels and labor efficiency through the factories. So great to see the progress that business, our most profitable business has performed last year. Very quickly on [indiscernible]. Laundry powders and dishwash powders is a declining market. So this is a -- this -- whilst it needs to be cost leadership, it's absolutely about specialism and expertise, a lot of work for sustainability on compacted products. So the days of 10-kilo boxes of laundry powder, you're now buying 1.5 kilo bags of laundry powder to do the same number of washes. That's very good for the carbon emissions and good for transport and everything else. And we've done a great job there, even though the market has declined slightly, strong delivery and margin expansion through operational performance improvements. And I'll quickly touch on Aerosols. This business was loss-making when we started the journey of divisionalizing this business last year. It's grown 21%. It's absolutely leading in its space, and we are very positive about the outlook for our aerosols business. Next slide, please. And I'll just touch now on our transformation program. So we launched this transformation program, we ran a series of what I call excellence projects about 2 years ago. And the outcome was to obviously try to drive value and drive benefits, and we targeted GBP 50 million across the 5 years from '23 to '28, but they're all around improving the platform that McBride has got. The backbone to this project is our SAP upgrade. We have -- we are currently an SAP customer. We have SAP across our division, but it's a 26-year-old SAP, and we are now migrating to the latest generation. A sort of multiyear project. It's the backbone really of our excellence agenda, standardizing processes, absolutely harmonizing the way we work across every location. And obviously, they're driving efficiencies, much more analytics, digital interfaces, AI experiences as well. So well on track. We have our first go-live in 1st of November. We're doing it on a very limited site-by-site basis. So we're not exposing the whole business to this at one go, but our first one is coming up in November, and we're very positive and in a good place on the rollout of that project. Our commercial and service excellence programs are actually now in the phase of closing out the project work streams and ready for handing back to the business as business as usual. We have made great progress with both these initiatives and time is right now to bed in the change they brought and continue to deliver on the benefits each are already showing. Our service performance statistics show the progress. We're up to 94%. That's the best in 6 years and our improved pricing and margin management, evidence of the commercial excellence program coming through in our results. As we go forward, we will see these full year benefits roll continuously into our results going forward. The expected benefits from SAP and our productivity program coming a little later in the 5 years, but we're also driving overhead efficiencies out. We removed 60 people at the end of the last year, financial year. People were underperforming. We have a rigorous assessment of individuals now and we've upped our game as part of that platform on our HR disciplines and HR processes, and we've cut costs, and we're driving overheads out by we drive performance across all aspects of the company. So that's my rapid overall business progress update. And hopefully, you've heard about -- not just about the financials, but also the strong all-around business that Bride now is and how we are set up for continued progress towards our midterm goals. I'm going to hand over to Mark now to cover off some of the financials. Mark Strickland: Thank you, Chris, and good afternoon, everyone. I'm pleased to have reported an excellent set of results for the financial year ended 30th of June 2025. As you'll see, the business has further strengthened its balance sheet, increased its liquidity and through the reinstatement of the accordion has further increased its optionality for future investment and capital allocation. As a result, I continue to have huge optimism for what the business can deliver for its shareholders into the future. So looking at the 2025 financial year in a little bit more detail. Whilst group revenues were down GBP 8.3 million or 0.9% on an actual basis, on a constant currency basis, they actually rose by 0.7% or GBP 6.5 million. Contract manufacturing, especially has helped this constant currency growth. As a business, we continue to look closely at forward -- sorry, closely analyze forward-looking raw material and packaging trends, adjusting sales margins accordingly. This, combined with close operational and overhead cost control means that at GBP 66.1 million, our adjusted operating profit has been maintained at similar levels to last year. Over the last 3 years, we have progressively strengthened our balance sheet through cash generation and debt reduction. For the 2025 financial year, our free cash flow was GBP 93.9 million, and our net debt further reduced ending the year at GBP 105.2 million. This gives the business a great platform for further investments in growth. Next slide, please. This slide looks at the group and divisional performance on both an actual and a constant currency basis. If we look at the left-hand side at the actual revenue figure, there were 2 notable impacts at play. Firstly, volume growth of GBP 39.5 million or 4.3%. This arose from new contract manufacturing volumes, continued private label volume growth and a significant growth in our aerosols business. The second impact was the price and mix effect of negative GBP 33 million. This is because there were more sales of lower value products in financial year '25 versus financial year '24. It should be noted, however, that though the selling price may be lower, the profitability is often similar to other products as these are also lower cost format products. I've included the tables on the right-hand side of this slide because of the significant impact of currency during the '25 financial year. I won't go through the detail, but this clearly illustrates the point that whilst at actual currency, both revenue and operating profit reduced slightly when looked at on a constant currency basis, in fact, both revenue and operating profit grew. Next slide, please. And in the interest of time and allowing questions, I'm actually going to skip over the divisional detail and move on through the divisional slides to Slide 18. If you can look at the divisional slides in detail, they just give a little bit more about each element of our business. So what I wanted to do is spend a little time on looking at costs. As you can see, input costs were broadly flat. So looking at the left-hand chart, costs broadly flat. But as you can also see, they remain significantly higher than back in 2021. Inflation is still prevalent and some costs are still rising, albeit at slower rates than over the last few years. This is why McBride's continuing focus on margin management has been key and will remain key to the delivery of another good set of results and similar results into the future. This consistency of performance means that McBride as a group remains very well placed to sustain and grow profits into future years. In terms of overheads, as you would expect, we continue our focus on cost optimization, and I deliberately talk of cost optimization, not cost reduction, as we will continue to spend in areas where we believe the returns and benefits of any expenditure exceed the actual cost increase. As with most businesses, technology remains a key focus and indeed, McBride is embracing new technology, believing that this will be a key positive differentiator going forward. Just some examples. We will shortly be going live with Wave 1 of S/4HANA, as Chris has said. We continue to invest into and benefit from our data analytics function. Again, a real-life example of this capability is some of the market analysis information that you saw in Chris' earlier section. We're also actively developing appropriate uses for AI across the business. Lastly, it would be remiss of me not to talk about distribution costs, which actually rose to 9.2% of revenue from 8.7% of revenue. This was actually as a result of the higher volumes we put through the business at the lower selling prices. So you had higher volume whilst revenue didn't necessarily increase. Next slide, please, Hannah. So looking at pensions. Year-on-year, the IAS 19 pension deficit decreased to GBP 24.9 million from GBP 29.4 million due to the deficit reduction contributions paid by the group, a lower value of liabilities and lower-than-expected inflation. The deficit is comprised of a U.K. defined benefit deficit of GBP 23 million and the post-employment benefit obligation outside of the U.K. of GBP 1.9 million. For information, the U.K. scheme is close to new members and future accrual. Within the U.K. scheme, contributions for the financial year '25 totaled GBP 7 million being made up of GBP 5.3 million of deficit reduction contributions and a one-off payment of GBP 1.7 million to remove the pension trustees' dividend matching mechanism, which was put in place a couple of years ago. That GBP 1.7 million is already paid back as without removing it, the trustees could have claimed that they could get GBP 5.3 million, which is the cost of the dividend. So for the price of GBP 1.7 million, we've avoided a GBP 5.3 million cost. The 31st of March 2024 triennial evaluation was agreed with the trustees during the year. And as part of that agreement, McBride has agreed future pension deficit reduction contributions of GBP 5.7 million to the end of FY '28, where upon they revert back to the previous profit-related mechanism. Turning to capital expenditure. At GBP 30.4 million, capital expenditure levels were above historic norms as the business invested in both its new SAP S/4HANA system and for future operational growth. It is expected that in FY '26, that will be the sort of level of expenditure, but then thereafter, it will drop back down to around the GBP 22 million to GBP 25 million as the SAP project comes to completion. Finally, on to net debt. As indicated at the start of my presentation, the business continues to generate strong cash flows and strong cash conversion, resulting in net debt falling to GBP 105.2 million. Additionally, the business has strong core liquidity with around GBP 141 million of headroom within its core facilities and an additional unutilized GBP 75 million -- EUR 75 million accordion facility. So it is well placed as well placed as it could be for both internal and external future expansion and investment. Next slide, please, Hannah. We flagged up in January that the Board intended to reinstate annual dividends -- and I am pleased to say that the Board is recommending 3p per share dividend for the 2025 financial year just ended. Hopefully, going forward, we may become increasingly accretive as a mix proposition share comprising capital appreciation combined with an income. As I said at the beginning of my presentation, I'm hugely optimistic for the future of the business. In the Capital Markets Day in March 2024, we set the business some challenging midterm targets. And as you have seen today, we are either already delivering on many of them or have made significant progress. My personal belief is that this set of results provides a further proof point that the business is definitely on the right track. Thank you, and I'll pass back to Chris. Christopher Ian Smith: Thank you, Mark. So look, just to wrap up in terms of an outlook. We never close to the end of our first quarter. And at this stage, we have seen a solid start to the year. Our volumes are absolutely in line with where we expected them to be. And we are seeing a good success rate in recent tenders, signaling further growth coming through from -- in our next -- in our second half of our next -- this current new financial year. We're now seeing great progress with our customer partnerships. That's evident in our win rates and that robust pipeline looking promising. The group will continue its mission on optimizing operational delivery and efficiencies, both in our day-to-day work, but also from the work from the transformation team, the transformation program, all supporting that midterm ambition of 10% EBITDA. And finally, with a strong balance sheet and financial flexibility now, the leadership team are looking at options for investment to support the midterm step-up in the group's scale and value creation opportunity for the benefit of all current and future shareholders. So that's it on the presentation, Hannah. So we're delighted to be able to take questions. Operator: Super. And we have a number. Right. Here we go. Cost pressures and margins. Are you able to add any detail as to how much of a threat to our operating margin are the cost-outs demanded by customers? Christopher Ian Smith: Look, it is always a feature of every conversation with any retailer, right, cost and price of product to retailers. It's not universal. We see very different conversations with different retailers. So please don't think every element of the market across all of Europe is identical. But we have -- part of our skill set, part of our capability is that ability to manipulate and manage product engineering to the benefit of both customers and ourselves. And unlike some other industries, like food, for example, if you could pick up a bottle of Tesco washing up liquid and a bottle of Sainsbury's and a bottle of Asda, and they all look the same, all the same site bottle and the same color. They are typically entirely chemically different. Every product is typically unique. We have that ability to flex formulations. It may affect performance. It may affect viscosity. It may have less perfume, more perfume. There are always ways to manage that. And look, it's an active part of the way we operate with our customers, and they will go through phases of want quality and they will go through phases of wanting cost. And that skill set, and Mark talked about it earlier, the focus on margin management to make sure that, yes, we can move prices and costs, but we're managing our margins and maintaining our margin. And look, there's been a lot of talk over the years about the ability of the power of the retailers into the supply side. In the crisis that we saw with the hyperinflation 3 years ago now, we recognize the -- we saw very clearly how important we are to our customers. There isn't anyone. Tesco honestly probably couldn't go anywhere else to do exactly everything we're doing. So you do have leverage. We do have arrangements with customers now for quarterly pricing reviews. It's not programmed. It's the right of both sides of a contract to ask the questions and challenge. But it protects our margins much better than before. Operator: And is the negative GBP 33 million price and mix effect on revenue entirely the result of the cost-outs demanded requested? Christopher Ian Smith: Not all. No. The mix side is not. Mix is that we do -- we -- part of the mix effect is actually the impact of the big contract manufacturing arrangement that we have with one of the world's biggest branders where we now 100% manufacture their bleach in the French market. Bleaches are low-priced commodity end product, but it's a stepping stone for us into a major relationship with a big brand. And the rest, yes, it's a bit of price give here and there, but we -- as you can see in the numbers, we've held our margins despite that. Mark Strickland: Just adding to that. So if a retailer says, look, we need you to get to a certain price point for a product, we may not supply the same product as they were getting before. We say, look, if you want us to meet a price point, then we are going to reengineer that product because we reserve the right to keep our margins. So it isn't just a like-for-like product and a reduction in the price. If there is a reduction in the price point, there is probably a reduction in the cost we put into that product. Therefore, we maintain our margins. Operator: Okay. Let's move on to cash flow and capital allocation. So you did a great job of bringing debt down. Do you foresee a decline of similar magnitude in the next period, given consensus forecasts are broadly flat? Or do you have other spending plans for the free cash flow? Mark Strickland: So a really good question and it is the right question. I think we focused on getting our balance sheet into a really good place. I think we're in a good place. That has now really given us optionality. We've obviously decided as a first step to pay dividends. But our capital allocation process is quite rigorous. And people have talked about share buybacks, about, well, do you want a progressive dividend? Do you want to do M&A? So we have a rigorous process. We have plenty of ideas as to what we might do. But we also have shareholder value accretion in our minds. And at any point in time, we'll take decisions based on what is available to us at the time. So if we carried on and did nothing, we would reduce debt further, but I'm not convinced that reducing debt further is the best use of our cash. There may be better uses. And again, that just depends how the year progresses and how opportunities come our way or don't come our way. But it's a really good question. Operator: Well, then as a natural segue, do you have a maintenance CapEx backlog? Or are you now able to fund growth CapEx? Mark Strickland: So I don't think we've ever really had a maintenance CapEx backlog. I think even when we constrained cash, we kept maintaining our equipment. I think it's always interesting whether CapEx is maintenance or growth because as your machines become older and you replace them, is that, in fact, maintenance CapEx? Or when you replace them, you tend to replace them with a machine that will do things quicker or cheaper, higher volumes, and that actually gives you growth and more ability to grow volume within your businesses. Now is that maintenance CapEx? Or is that growth CapEx? I think it's a little bit of both. But I don't believe our facilities are particularly starved with CapEx. I think they are appropriately invested. We also have quite a challenging approval system to make sure that we do invest in the right things. It's not free money. Christopher Ian Smith: I think just to add to that, we like to have a balance in the capital. It's not all about growth for stuff beyond pure maintenance. So there's some great opportunities for efficiencies. We talked about automation, end of line, removing labor from our cost structure. Cobots and robots don't ask for pay rises, right? And they don't go -- don't do industrial action or accident. So we see plenty of options and ideas coming from within the business. There are some great sources of high-quality, good value capital outside of the usual channels, which we're exploring to drive real value quickly, and we've done a few this last year. We'll do more. There's absolutely opportunity to drive margin improvement from CapEx automation as well as obviously from growth, which we will always continue to support. Operator: Okay. Just another quick one for you, probably, Mark. Can you tell us what estimate of WACC you're using to make decisions about what to do with free cash flow? Mark Strickland: So I actually use a different methodology. I'm from a private equity background, so I tend to work on payback. And my initial starting point is 2-year payback on stuff. Having said that, for the right things, we will do a longer payback. And for health and safety, you've just got to do health and safety. So I don't work on a WACC. I work on return on capital. We've said it's over 25%, but I also work on how quickly can we spin that cash. So can you get a payback quickly? So you're spinning the cash and utilizing it, very sort of private equity sort of approach to it. Operator: Okay. This individual has obviously seen the chaos that's been caused at the likes of M&S with their systems being hacked. Are you confident that won't happen to yourselves? And if so, why is that the case? Mark Strickland: Yes. So we concentrated on the shell. So we've put a lot of money into the shell to prevent people getting into our systems. However, we're now -- we switched from a prevention of attack to eventually somebody will get through. So it's not if, it's when. And if you change your attitude to, okay, somebody eventually will get lucky and get in because we've got to be lucky every minute, every second of every day to prevent and get in. So we spend a lot of money now on the inside of the shell as to how quickly we would detect somebody on the inside and also how we would shut segments of the systems down and how quickly we could get back up. So we're as confident as we can be. Until it's tested in anger, you're never 100% sure, but we have an awful lot of top expert advice. So we do have penetration testing. We have crisis management. We have simulations. Can I guarantee? I don't think anybody can guarantee, but I think we're in a reasonable place. Christopher Ian Smith: Compulsory training is the other thing. And the biggest risk is social engineering, isn't it? And so making sure all our teams, all our interfaces with systems are up to date on their training and is a key part of what we've been doing as well. Operator: Two questions on buybacks. Are you considering them? And if not, why not? Mark Strickland: It's part of the capital allocation consideration. At the moment, if you look at our share price, you would argue it's relatively good value and you could deliver value to shareholders by buyback. If you're not careful, that just concentrates the shareholder base even more. We did one about 4 years ago, and it didn't desperately move the share price. We also have a number of other ideas as to what we could do with it. But yes, it's not out of the question. But at this moment, we are just concentrated on paying the dividend. As I say, the balance sheet strength, you're absolutely right, gives us optionality, which is a nice place to be. Operator: Well, you raised it there, the share price question here around the frustrations that a lot of private investors feel that the current valuation put on the business. Why do you think you are so out of kilter from your peers? Christopher Ian Smith: Look, it is immensely frustrating. I mean we recognize that for all involved. I think the message we get -- the story we get is, look, concerns about 2022 happening again and concerns around -- which -- I know we should say the word unprecedented, no one likes that word. But I mean, we've never ever seen anything like that in my 11 years and in any of the history of the company before. It was all an outcome really of the consequence of supply chain post-COVID being chaotic and the ability to get chemicals and prices going up crazily. But the other fear is that sort of -- it's just going to go back to being a 3.5% to 4% business like it was for the 10 years probably running up to the COVID time. So we're super confident this business is not a 3% to 4% business. This is a 7% to 8% and an 8% to 10% business in EBITDA terms. We fundamentally believe the restructuring we've done, the way we've driven the organization design, our focus in the right markets. We have -- in the 5 years up to COVID, this business declined its volumes every single year. In the 5 years since we've grown them every single year. That's a testament to the way we now approach the customer, the way we operate with the customer. So we're firmly of the view that higher level sustainability levels of profits are there. The message is you've got to keep doing it to prove it. And so look, this is our second full year. It's 2.5 years because the year before that was -- we were coming out of the challenge in the second half was at these sorts of levels. We have got huge amounts of headroom. And in the last crisis, we entered that crisis, which is unprecedented. I mean we had [indiscernible] GBP 260 million, GBP 270 million of inflation on input costs in a 9-month period on a business that was making GBP 30 million of EBITDA. You can imagine how difficult that is to sort out, but we did. We've come through it. We've completely changed the relationships we have with our customers. And look, we can never predict whether there's going to be another macro crisis like that. But this business is an entirely different shaped business and a more resilient business. And we have got -- as Mark showed in the headroom, you can take a shock. We might take a shock for a quarter, but we have arrangements with customers that allow us to go back and challenge on price if that's clearly evident. And we spent a lot of time on raw material prediction indices. We're using data analytics. We're using all sorts of statistical processes to try to predict the forward views on ethylene, on natural products like natural alcohol and these sorts of things because that's super -- that's a major part of our proposition to customers is given that insight early. So I think the business is positioned well. It feels like we need to do more of it to prove to investors that this isn't a 3% to 4% business again. And we're sitting here with our targets. We've shown them today, second year in a run. We're looking -- the year forward is looking very similar, too. We hope to be better. And look, we're a staple product. Everybody needs toilet cleaner. They need to be able to wash the clothes. They need to clean the dishes. In consumer choice where they spend their money, we are a staple. And we're the biggest in Europe at doing it. and that sets us in a good position for the future. So look, we're just going to do more, and that valuation will come in time. Mark Strickland: Can I just add 2 things to that. I think in general, the small cap market is relatively unloved in the U.K. I think there's probably something Chris and myself can do more of. We've tended to be concentrated on to institutional investors, and this is our first attempt to reach out to the retail investors, and we need to engage, I think, more with the likes of yourselves. We've probably not got our message across into the retail community as well as we could do. This is our first step. And hopefully, we can engage more with investors like ourselves. Christopher Ian Smith: And just one last point. Although we call fast-moving consumer goods this space, it is actually slow moving consumer goods. I have to tell you this. Nothing changes dramatically overnight other than that crazy raw material situation, which has never happened before. The business doesn't line up around from this to that over time. It's really steady. We can predict it pretty well going forward. So it isn't -- although it's FMCG and everyone gets a bit panicky and jazz hands about the space, it is pretty steady. We are a great customer for our raw material suppliers. We're boringly tedious of buying the same amount of hypochlorite or PVC or whatever we might be buying from our suppliers. So it is a steady, solid business. It doesn't -- it's not going to change overnight. Operator: Okay. That was a really good explanation. Let's take a positive note. We've got a couple of questions here on growth. Given impressive service levels, where are the new opportunities and sort of aligned to that, are you making any progress on discounters because you were a little bit sort of underweighted, should we say? Christopher Ian Smith: Yes. Well, I love your question. Thank you. Look, we're very positive on the growth agenda. You've seen in the market data that the tailwind the industry has had for the last few years probably has steadied. There are pockets of difference within the overall market. But in general, the tailwind that we've had and the whole industry is probably steadied. It's holding at these new levels. So our growth in private label with the retailers is going to come from market share gains. I said earlier in my speech that we have made great progress in recent tenders. We've done very well with one of the -- our #1 customer is one of the worldwide brand. So discounters that you're probably thinking of begins with an A and letters along. That is our biggest customer. It's still no more than -- it's about 11% of the group. It's multi-country. It's not one single contract. And we just won loads more business at them as well. And they're a big partner customer for us. So we will gain share. That's the plan within our existing customer base. We didn't lose customers. You tend to lose SKUs or categories or ranges. We've never been kicked out really of any customer, but things move around a bit within the industry. So we're doing well, I think, in the retail, but we will just gain share. We have targeted areas like we talked strongly about laundry. We want to be #1 in the top -- we're #1 in the 5 countries of the big 5 countries in Europe, we're #1 in 3 of them, probably 4 actually just start to prove out at the moment, but we have gap in a fifth. So we've got opportunity to grow there. And then the other side is contract manufacturing. So we have a target of 25% of our revenues get to contract manufacturing. Why? 3 reasons really. One, it's load balancing. So it means we have a regular -- they're very reliable volumes in strategic long-term contract deals. It's a platform of volume through your factories, which cover overheads. Secondly, they are priced quarterly rigorously by the -- so it's absolute pass-through, and we will change the prices every month -- every quarter, sorry. But thirdly, relationships with the brands are important. We learn a lot from them. We help co-invest. We -- sorry, co-develop sometimes with branders. And they bring standards and insights that are helpful to our business model as well. So look, we think there's more opportunity. Reckitt recently have sold part of their household business. We think some of that may be available for contract manufacturing in the future. We would like to think we could participate in that. And we're now seeing increasingly a number of brands for peripheral operations where they don't have scale, for example, looking for outsourced partners, and we think we can grow strongly and get that ratio up in our total portfolio. So we're still very positive about growth. And as someone said, I think in the question, the platform that I talked about earlier around high-quality products, really strong service levels, good innovation, responsible development around sustainability, factories that you can walk around and be super proud of, safe environment. The platform is in good shape and customers like that. Operator: Great. The GBP 45 million of transformation benefits, how are they going to be distributed between each accounting period? And which KPI should we be looking at to see this effect? Mark Strickland: Yes. So it's GBP 50 million over -- the GBP 50 million cumulative over the 5 years. I think we'll see another GBP 5 million in the current financial year. So the benefit overall would be GBP 10 million, probably GBP 5 million the following year, which would make it GBP 15 million and then GBP 20 million in the final year. So it gradually ramps up. But if you add those all up, that gets you to your GBP 50 million. And it will come through a number of things. I mean how do you prove that you've got an extra penny on a bottle of bleach. We use a number of KPIs for commercial excellence and the benefit we get from that. So some you can directly measure such as overhead cost or OEE. Others such as commercial excellence, how do you measure the benefit from that it's derived from a number of KPIs. But it will come through things like margin, it will come through operating costs and it will come through overhead. Operator: And what about the cost of the SAP implementation, both capital and operating? And what are the expected benefits? Mark Strickland: So yes, that's a really good question. Again, the benefits are in part of the transformation and part of the transformation benefits. The overall project will be around GBP 27 million to GBP 30 million over -- it's over 4, 5 years. In terms of the benefits, the benefits should max out around GBP 15 million a year. Operator: Great. Will you allow me one more question? I have passed, but we've got a few more. You mentioned record output from factories, but obviously, we're seeing increasing costs in the U.K. from employment and obviously expensive in the EU as well. How do you allocate new business to factory? Is it purely a geographical consideration? Christopher Ian Smith: Yes. So typically, if you look at the product ranges that we -- the divisions are product-based, liquid products typically don't travel very well. I mean they do travel, but they're expensive. They're typically lower value per unit and the freight costs are quite high as a percentage of the total cost structure. So which is why our liquids factor is typically distributed around Europe to be more proximate to the end markets. So in those cases, for liquids choice, it's obvious which factory it's going to go to. It will be the one in the local area. When it comes to unit dose and powders, we make those centrally. They do travel well. The price points are higher. And it will depend -- our Danish plant for dishwash tablets is eco-certified. So if the Eco ranges, they will typically go there. And so often, it's driven by the sort of format of the product and what the capability of each site is. But we do load balance between the unit dose and powder sites, less so within the liquids. There's a bit of it. I won't -- I mean, for example, the German market is served by both our Polish plant in liquids, but also our Belgium plant. So there is a bit of load balancing and optimizing for cost and transport between those. But typically, it's pretty straightforward when we put the product. Operator: Great. And what are the branded companies doing in terms of promotion? Where are we in that cycle? Christopher Ian Smith: Yes. So if you look at the data, the price point, we look at data at a macro level across countries and by categories, pretty much across the board, the gap, I mentioned in my -- in that original speech, it typically branded products are twice the price of a private label. That gap has widened over the last 2 to 3 years. It's not necessarily narrowing at all at the moment. There are some exceptions, but broadly speaking, it's not narrowing. So the price gap is as big as ever. And what we're seeing with the brands, I would say, more than ever is we're seeing probably more on advertising. This is our perception, more promotional activity through advertising, through store placement, gondola ends, you're going to see Club card type promotions. And you'll see as well sort of fixture promotion where they'll decorate shelves and have gripping banners and arrows pointing at it. A little bit less on the pricing than we thought. So I think they're experimenting. It's not -- again, it's a very big generalization, please. So it may be completely wrong on any particular case. But that would be the general feeling. I think the price points are not coming down on average. We see the gap held. So therefore, by definition, it's not price investment that we're seeing in promotion and advertising. Operator: Well, listen, thank you. I know you've got to get off to our next meeting. So thank you very much for your time today to our audience for joining us. Apologies if we didn't get through to your question. I will try and send the extra ones over to management, and we can come back to you. But that leaves me to say we look forward to hearing an update in 6 months' time. Christopher Ian Smith: Great. Thanks, very appreciate it. Thank you. Mark Strickland: Thank you.
Chris Pockett: Okay. Good morning, everyone. So my name is Chris Pockett. I'm Head of Communications for Renishaw. I'd like to welcome you to this live Q&A session for Renishaw's full year financial results for the year ended June 30, 2025. Hopefully, you've all had an opportunity to view the video presentation that's released as part of this morning's RNS statement. Will Lee, CEO; and Allen Roberts, Group FD are here now to answer any queries that you may have in relation to that presentation and the results statement. They'll try to answer as many questions as possible before we close at 11:15 and I'll try to group similar questions together, so we may not answer all individual questions. [Operator Instructions]. Chris Pockett: So let's get going. First question here is around our industrial metrology products. So the markets appear very mixed here with automotive weakness ongoing machine tool data in Germany still soft, offset by the strength in your systems business. So what is your outlook for this Industrial Metrology business in FY 2026? And I think that's over to you, Will. William Lee: Thanks, Chris, and good morning, everyone. So with the industrial metrology market, clearly, yes, for our sensors business selling into machine tools, probably worst case, maybe Germany, also Taiwan, those markets are really quite soft at the moment with our customers facing challenging conditions. Here, we focus, as we always do, on the medium to long term, working on business development with those customers. And I think we're making good progress there, particularly probably of note is on the laser tool setting side where some of the newer innovations that we've launched with the NC4 Blue product line really starting to help us with gaining market share there in an area where typically we actually unusually are #2 rather the #1, so making really good progress. The area where we can have the more media impact over the shorter term is on the systems business. Here, focused very much on shop floor metrology, which we see as a high growth area and an area for us to really grow our business quickly. Making good progress and we are very positive there going forward. In terms of specific outlooks, I think early to say for the year, and we'll be monitoring and pushing that hard there. Chris Pockett: Okay. Thanks, Will. A question now on additive manufacturing. You said that AM revenue was down in FY '25, but finished the year with a good order book. So what was the book-to-bill for AM for FY '25. I think that's another one for you, Will. William Lee: Yes. So AM was a bit softer. It is one of those businesses that is still relatively small, also with high ticket items. So we expect a bit more variability there. Seeing some really positive signs. Some of the end markets are strong. I think defense probably is the one to pick out at the moment as being really after performance, but quicker moving, quicker decision-making than something like an aerospace. So looking forward positively there for this year, again, very early on in the year, really to comment there. Chris Pockett: Okay. Thank you. A question now relating to China. Could you expand on the opportunities that you see in market segments that you do not currently serve in China? And given rising competition and resulting pricing pressures, are Renishaw margins now lower in China than in other regions? And back to you, Will. William Lee: Yes. So if you look at it, really the China relative to the rest of APAC, there is no significant difference in margins there. So clearly, we do and we've talked about saying, are there some entry level good enough markets where we don't really operate at the moment, and that probably are for both IM and PM. Both areas are quite interesting. So commercially, we've talked about exploiting more of what appears to be an entry-level market and some of the machine shop factories over in China with lower price alternative to some of our core products, and we will develop that strategy going forward. We also see probably on the encoder market that some applications start to come in, some new applications in electronics and semiconductor come in for our encoders and some applications start to become more commoditized and maybe drop at the bottom, but the overall market there is growing for us. So it's actually quite a pretty complicated picture. And one, I think, in general, we still see more positives with of opportunities, both as new things start and also with our commercial strategies. Overall, for us, though, China, we're seeing good growth and are optimistic going forward with the opportunities that we have. Chris Pockett: Thanks, Will. A question now regarding consumer electronics markets. Could you clarify what you're seeing in this end market? It was noted as an area of strength for industrial metrology, but in his prepared remarks, Allen said that this end market was down in 2025 at group level. So what is going on here? Back to you, Will? William Lee: Yes. Our biggest challenge last year was the -- first half of H1 last year was tougher for consumer electronics, seeing a gradual recovery throughout the year with H2 ending up better. Looking forward, and this is always a really tricky one to predict, but it feels like customers are now facing the necessity to make decisions that they have been off putting. So looking forward, I think we feel more positive here in terms of investment for this over the rest of this financial year than probably we did 3, 6 months ago, just because our customers have no choice, they have to make some decisions, we believe. So we are monitoring this quite closely. And the one thing we always try and do is make sure we are prepared for whatever happens here. Chris Pockett: Okay. Now a question on pricing and tariffs. Assuming no miracles emerge from today's talks at checkers and U.S. tariffs remain in place. Can you make surcharges permanent? Or do you have other options to address this headwind such as localizing more production? And will with you again? William Lee: Okay. So we have made the assumption that these will be permanent. So surcharges have been migrated and are migrating through into price increases here for our customers in the U.S. We've taken that route rather to look at localizing of production. We will consider our group manufacturing strategy and what we do with changes in geopolitics, but that's certainly a far more long-term decision. So at the moment, this is all being covered by now a price increase, so increased revenue to offset those additional costs that we are facing. Chris Pockett: Another question on end markets. Can you talk about the extent of the contraction in automotive and your expectation for FY '26? Also in relation to defense, how big is it? What is it growing at and a rough split? And back to you again, Will. William Lee: Yes. Okay. So we -- to be clear, we don't know for sure the size of our exposure to these markets because a lot of our stuff will go through integrators. So when we're selling to a machine tool builder that they will sell on our extrapolation. And what we think is happening is roughly about 5% for defense, roughly about 13% for automotive. Defense, I think, is a really interesting area at the moment. Sadly, clearly, a lot more investment going in there. And we talked about a little bit with additive earlier. Certainly, I know there's a question on this coming up, I think, next on inductive encoders, it feels like there are opportunities also here with us supporting that industry directly with some of our newer encoders as well. Chris Pockett: Okay. Thank you. You've already alluded to the part of the next question. So this relates to new products, new product launches. And the question is, how are these new products performing that have been recently launched and specifically mentioned Equator-X, the dual-laser RenAM machine and the ASTRiA inductive encoders? So back to you again, Will. William Lee: Yes. So we've been very clear. Our strategy is very much one about using innovation, specifically new product innovation, really here to drive our long-term growth. A lot of focus has been on looking at productivity within the group, really to get some key new products through. And this is a really exciting time for us with the launches that we have made recently and are making in the next few months. A particular note, very topical Equator-X and importantly, the new software to go through with it, MODUS IM. Next week, we'll be over at the EMO trade show, a really large machine tool trade show in Germany, first significant public launch of those 2 products. I was actually getting a demo of MODUS IM yesterday on new software for this and going through with the team, simplicity and ease of use is really, really transformative here. This is really, really important for us in terms of looking at developing new routes to market and getting us more productive and reducing our distribution costs, our applications costs. So exciting times there with those 2. Also ASTRiA, I think, has been a good example of our minimum viable product, or MVP, strategy with new development of getting out, testing out with customers, we've really seen a sweet spot, we believe, with defense customers here and we've been able to take now from the initial work that we've done. So a robust good working product to make sure we can now do some of the final tailoring and specific for their needs to exploit that opportunity. Also with this, and the question we do get asked is then, what about next, what's coming through? And it's good here that we get to see -- so only last week, we had our encoder group review of the early-stage technology. So the exciting bit here is we have an awful lot of new stuff coming through. This is right across the board for the group. Now our focus is on the productivity. How do we help really talented engineering teams get these products through to market sooner, making both priority goal decisions and also how do we support them to make sure they can operate as productively as possible. Chris Pockett: Okay. Thanks, Will. We've got some similar questions here on relating to costs and specifically the GBP 20 million labor savings. So if I just try and whiz through these and try and join some of these together. So what is your expectation for underlying cost inflation in FY '26? Can you talk us through the main moving parts of the FY '26 operating profit bridge, including how much of the GBP 20 million savings will be seen in FY '26? What is engineering cost inflation, labor admin inflation, savings from facility closure and any ERP costs? And also are there other savings within the GBP 20 million that might take time to filter through? So that's trying to amalgamate a few questions there. So start with Will and I think -- I was going to start with Allen on that one. Allen Roberts: Thank you, Chris, and good morning, everybody. Yes, there's good progress on the cost reduction program which, alongside the closure of our drug delivery business and the closure of our facilities -- R&D facilities in Edinburgh, which are going well. And we expect these to have a cost saving of around about GBP 24 million. However, we do have the pay rise that was put into effect at the beginning of this year and possibly a likely similar percentage coming up in January '26 and also based upon a turnover -- a payroll cost of around GBP 300 million. In addition, we do have the GBP 3 million of incremental national insurance over and above the previous year that we have to accommodate. On the other side, in addition to these cost reduction measures, we are further looking at productivity initiatives across the business in all areas, including the rollout of our global 1ERP program, further looking at our logistics automation, investments in manufacturing equipment that we've been putting in over the last couple of years and the processes that we're focusing on, which will probably have seen, if you were on CMD a few months ago, when you went through our manufacturing plant, a lot of initiatives are taking place in cost reductions. And we're starting to see some of those coming through now, which will, in fact, impact our gross margin and with the rollout of our e-commerce platform as well. So there are a lot of initiatives going on across the board with regard to cost management. Chris Pockett: Okay. Thanks, Allen. Tariffs again. Trump implemented increased Section 232 tariffs on certain steel and aluminum, I guess, which is say products in August and post your year-end. Does that affect any of Renishaw's products? And if so, what is the impact offset mechanisms, including timing? Will, I think that's for you. William Lee: Yes. I think we've probably answered most of this already. So yes, we do get caught up in the tariffs here. Tariff, we have now switched over to price increases rather than a surcharge. It's about a 1% impact on revenue, about GBP 9 million. So we feel in a comfortable place there. Clearly, it's lots of discussions with customers in getting to that position. So I don't think too much more to add on that one. Chris Pockett: Okay. Thank you. A question about cash. There's nearly GBP 300 million of cash on the balance sheet. Any plans to deploy this via M&A? Or in the absence of that, would the management consider special divi or buyback? And what would be the preference between these two options? And there's a similar question noting that -- or asking, could we give more color on the "more active capital allocation" that you referred to in today's statement. So Will, start with you on that one. William Lee: Yes. So that's just, I guess, underpin this with the things that we are trying to achieve at the moment. So in terms of the priorities and initiatives for us here, Allen has talked about a minute ago on the productivity side of saying, yes, our #1 strategy is still very much the revenue growth, profitable revenue growth through innovation, but we will underpin that with being more focused and more productive. Now with that, on top of that, we want to make sure we're pushing up our cash generation from that profit and also being prudent with our capital investment over the next few years. This is generating cash for us and correct, we are up to now almost GBP 300 million. As I mentioned at Capital Markets Day, we are discussing this. It is a hot topic of discussion for the Board as to the use of that cash and what we do. I don't have any new information for everyone at the moment on that. But what I can say is it is something that's being actively discussed with the Board at the moment. Chris Pockett: Okay. Thanks, Will. The question now on our search for the new CFO. And the question is, how is it going? William Lee: Yes. So very early stages, and nothing really to add on that at the moment. Chris Pockett: A question on expense. I think this is going Allen's way. Can you remind us of the phasing of IT infrastructure spend and whether this is going above or below the line? Allen? Allen Roberts: Thank you, Chris. Yes, the phasing of the ERP rollout is actually very active right now because we went live in the U.K. [indiscernible], our U.K. sales activity, which is probably one of the most complex implementations that we will have during the whole rollout program and that went live 10 days ago. So -- and that's -- we're working through it, and we are shipping product. So that's good news. Then we're going to be rolling it out through Germany and then to America and then progressively through APAC and the rest of EMEA. So that's going well. And the -- we're looking to do a lot more of the in-house rollout ourselves. So whilst there will be further costs incurred with consultants in this current year. And it is all above the line actually. So we have been burdened with that over the last couple of years. And so it will reduce over time, over the next 2 or 3 years as the rollout progresses. Chris Pockett: Okay. Thanks, Allen. Just looking through, I think we've already answered, there's a question. Yes, tariffs, I think we've pretty much answered that. We've talked through capital allocation. Question, Allen, I think for you. What do you expect the effect of currency to be during FY '26? Allen Roberts: Thank you, Chris. Yes, our forward currency hedging program seeks to mitigate the short-term volatility in our results due to currency. And at this stage, we don't see a significant debt impact in '26 versus '25. We do have an average forward U.S. dollar contract rates -- forward rates for '26 and '27 at [ $1.27 ] to the pound and [ $1.28 ] for the following year. This is against the current rate of [ 136 ]. So we're in quite a good position in that respect. Chris Pockett: Okay. Thanks, Allen. I think we've answered everything that's come in, unless there's a late flurry, I'm not seeing anything. So I think that's it. I think we've now ended -- I think there's -- it looks like there might be a question coming in. Just we'll take this one. It's just coming through the system. Just wait for that one. Okay. Just snuck this in before the end. So how does working capital move as a percentage of sales given potential growth and how does CapEx look beyond the GBP 40 million this year? And Allen, I put that one over to you. Allen Roberts: Yes, we're looking at around about GBP 40 million for the current year in terms of CapEx. And for the following couple of years also, that sort of order. So the major spend, which was at Miskin, as you would have seen at CMD was the build and construction of Holes 3 and 4. So the major element of that expansion program took place in the last couple of years. So we're well prepared going forward in terms of capacity -- production capacity and the availability of Hole 4, which could come through depending on our growth over the next few years. So GBP 40 million a year. In terms of working capital, I wouldn't expect to see any significant movement in working capital statistics over the next 2 or 3 years. Very tight control on our debtors and working capital and inventory. There's quite good control on our inventory management process, which will be further enhanced and improved as the rollout of our ERP program proceeds. Chris Pockett: Okay. Thanks, Allen. Another question has come in on currency. So can you remind us of the FX impact that came through in Q1 of '25? And then if there could be a similar impact this year? Allen Roberts: No, we don't expect there was a sort of -- there was a one-off benefit that we got from autumn in autumn '22 when Liz [indiscernible] mini budget, we took the opportunity to take some good for contracts, which came through in the first quarter of last year. I think it was circa around about GBP 5 million, and we don't expect that to recur this year. Chris Pockett: Okay. Thank you, Allen. Just a question here about order trends. Could you touch upon order trends? The development was noted to be encouraging in Q3? What has the development been like in Q4 and the last few months? I think that's one for Will. William Lee: Yes, overall positive, slightly up. I think those broad themes we talk about of actually APAC overall being positive at the moment. Europe is already struggling and the Americas being a bit more complicated, but with some encouraging signs, but also some risks there remain true. I think we would also say that we view the sort of semiconductor electronics as being an [ unusual show ] with steady growth rather than its normal cyclical ramp up and down. And I think as we talked on earlier, we sort of see consumer electronics as being probably going into a more positive phase, but really not sure. So I think those are the bits I would probably pull out. Clearly, we've touched on some of these other bits earlier as well. Chris Pockett: Okay. Thanks, Will. I think that really is it this time. So that now ends today's session. As ever, we'll aim to publish a combined recording of this webcast and results presentation on the IR section of our website by tomorrow morning. And just to point out that whilst we've had no questions today on the new reporting segmentation, we will be publishing results for the new reporting segments at 07:00 BST on Tuesday, 23rd of September. So if you can look out for that. So on behalf of Renishaw, I'd just like to thank you all for attending this event, and have a great day.
Randall Neely: Good morning, and thank you for attending our midyear 2025 results call. I am joined today by Eddie Ok, our CFO, who will walk through the financial and operations highlights as well as Geoff Probert, our COO, who will provide a review of ongoing operations and provide more detail on the progress made to improve our production sharing contracts in Egypt. In addition, Nathan Piper, Director of Commercial, is also available for the Q&A session. Since myself, the new management team, Geoff, Eddie, Nathan and our entire Board joined the company beginning in 2023, we've made it very clear what our goals were. We intended to improve upon the base business in Egypt, reduce overhead and scale down or eliminate all nonviable activities of the company. To do that, we set out with our JV partner in Egypt, Cheiron to negotiate a new consolidated production sharing contract for the 50-50 jointly held contracts. That has been a major undertaking, and we announced earlier this year that we had achieved a major milestone with the government approval of those terms. Geoff will provide more detail on this process and outcome shortly. For those of you that perhaps have not been paying attention to our journey over the past 2 years, I'll remind you that we have exited all noncore activities, and we reduced our G&A burden by approximately 80%, including our staffing contingent, effectively rightsized the organization. As well, the company returned over $600 million to investors through dividends and share buybacks. Operationally, we have worked very hard to achieve technical alignment with our partner in Egypt, and we are very pleased with how that has progressed. Today, I can confidently state that Capricorn and Cheiron are working synergistically to improve the technical and financial results of the joint venture. When this team, Capricorn 2.0 joined, we all recognized that the company needed to instill financial discipline, which included a measured approach to funding investments in Egypt, effectively a self-funding model. Although with the improved fiscal terms and payment schedules, this approach may not appear as relevant today as it was 2 years ago. We do not intend to deviate from this mindset. With our initial goals principally achieved, we are turning our attention to increasing value for our shareholders. Our intent is to do that through 3 principal activities: First, realizing on the improvement of the base business in Egypt. The improvements to fiscal terms and lengthening of contract life will open up significantly new resource for the joint venture to pursue and exploit. Effectively, the amended contractual terms will allow the joint venture to pursue a very large existing resource base to have both reserves and production. Second, we, led by Nathan, our Director of Commercial, will continue to search for opportunities in the U.K. North Sea to realize on our historic position there. We have a strict set of criteria we measure every North Sea opportunity against. And although we have been deep into several processes, we have been unable to successfully conclude any of them. That's been either due to being outbid or the seller just effectively electing to retain the asset. And the third activity that we'll look to add value is looking for synergistic asset deals or business to add to the portfolio. Ultimately, all of these will lead the company to return value to the shareholders. Building business of scale and longevity. Over the past 2 years, the new Board, myself and the rest of the team have made a major effort to transform the culture, priorities and focus of Capricorn. This wheel is meant to capture very simply how we are approaching this. We focus on the small details. We finance the business and any new ventures conservatively. We approach every project with technical rigor and apply strict capital discipline and demand the same of our partners. We approach the business strictly through a self-funding business model and new ventures initiated will require the application of a prudent approach to risk management. I'll let Geoff take the next slide. Geoffrey Probert: Thanks, Randy, and good morning. You can see here on the graphic that we're on the last step of our journey to completing the consolidation of our 8, 50-50 concession agreements into a single extended and improved agreement. Improvements in concession longevity and fiscal terms are a catalyst to increase Capricorn's reserves and production with value and cash flow enhanced by increased investment self-funded from Egypt. For EGPC, this increased and more importantly, sustained investment delivers great production over the long-term for Egypt, and has potential to be a true win-win for all stakeholders. We continue to expect custom ratification in the near future, commencing investment consistent with the new terms in the second half of 2025 and expect new terms and commitments to apply to that investment. Back to you, Randy. Randall Neely: Thanks, Geoff. Now with many of our primary objectives having been achieved, our primary focus for myself and as well as Nathan is to get investors to recognize this value improvement. On the back of an envelope, you can see that we have a base business in Egypt that fully supports our market value. Note that our debt in Egypt has been paid down materially over this year and will continue to be paid down over the coming year. On top of that, we have the cash that resides in the parent company, a value improvement that will be realized upon ratification of our Egyptian-based business and the value that can be realized by future investment in the U.K. North Sea. All of these combined leave us with a near-term potential of doubling our share value, and that's before we expand our operations either in Egypt or elsewhere. I'll now turn the presentation over to Eddie Ok, our CFO, to provide a review of the financial and operating highlights. Eddie Ok: Thanks, Randy, and good morning, all. Production through the first half was in line with projections, and we continue to guide towards the midpoint of our published range of 17,000 to 21,000 BOE per day. Our focus on higher-margin drilling continues to perform as liquids remain slightly above forecast at 43% of production. OpEx is continuing to trend upwards as the currency devaluation impact from last year works its way through our cost structure. This is being exacerbated by declining production against a large fixed cost base, but we continue to work with the operator to ensure that costs are being controlled to the greatest extent possible. We slightly reduced our capital guidance as scheduling is going to push back some current year activity into the following year, but we remain on track to deliver the bulk of our development drilling in the second half. Next slide, please. As can be seen from our cash waterfall, the contingent consideration collected in the half has offset the slow pace of collections from EGPC. In the second half to date, collections have improved, and we're anticipating the collection of at least $90 million in the second half, which will help offset scheduled repayments of our outstanding debt. Up next, Goeff is going to take you through an operational overview of the remainder of the year. Geoffrey Probert: Thanks, Eddie. I'm going to very briefly highlight our first half 2025 Egypt operational focus, give a snapshot of where we expect to invest in '26 and look at our reserves and resources are trending, particularly in the context of the new agreement. This map shows our focus on liquids development and production, particularly in the BED, Abu Roash G reservoir area, and that was all in the first half of 2025. While new agreement has been finalized, we also drilled 3 wells to fulfill our legacy commitments on the 3 pure exploration concessions acquired as part of the Egypt acquisition in 2021. Those exploration commitments are now satisfied with a minor on spend of $750,000 on NUMB. Our joint venture with Cheiron, the operator has elected to further evaluate commerciality of 2 of these wells, and we expect those results later this month. You can also see here that the hatched areas indicated concessions that we expect to form the new consolidation agreements closely the prime contiguous land added for further development and exploration on trend. Next slide. This slide illustrates our expected 4 rig development drilling schedule, 4 rigs to reflect improved agreement terms encouraging us to invest in a longer list of economic wells. Alongside optimization of development well sequence, we continue to work with our JV partner Cheiron to also prioritize non-rig production generation, reinstating shutting wells, identifying additional perforation opportunities on bypass pay. Next slide. This last slide on reserves encapsulates the rationale behind Capricorn negotiating an extended and improved integrated concession agreement on our 50-50 concessions. We expect our ability to replace reserves and extend their life to be materially improved by the extended concession period and improved concession economic terms. We also expect the concession improvement will also impact our risk appetite to chase near-field exploration potential on our newly extended land and our existing land and to develop and mature our portfolio of resources. Capricorn has been working with opportunity hopper on the 50-50 new concession agreement acreage, not just near-term development options, but also contingent and prospective resources. We expect this work will help to underpin future reserve and resource bookings and may also direct and prioritize productive drilling activity. You can see here that internally, we've identified a working interest around 350 million barrels of oil equivalent unrisked best estimate contingent resources to mature. Near-term license extensions resulting from an approved integrated concession potentially support the early conversion of up to a working interest nearly 20 million barrels oil equivalent to reserves, with further reclassifications anticipated, all underpinned by 5-year investment plans. Once approved, we expect to rapidly move to drill wells to exploit those reserves additions. Thanks for your time and attention. Now I'm passing over to Randy to wrap up. Randall Neely: Yes. Thanks, Goeff. I trust that those of you that have been following the Capricorn story since this team took over will agree that we have had a strong record of delivering on company objectives. To summarize, we set out to improve the Egyptian business by making it both long-term sustainable and a platform for growth. We are very near the confirmation of that objective with ratification occurring in the near future. The new PSC will provide a catalyst for increases in reserves for investment and value improvements. Additionally, we are seeing and hearing reasons to be optimistic about the future reduction of our outstanding receivables and a more stable, consistent payment plan from EGPC. And while we have been slower than we hoped to be to deliver or realize an embedded value for us to reinvest in the U.K. North Sea, we remain steadfast in our goal to achieve this objective. Beyond our current operations in Egypt and our near-term goal of expansion in the U.K. North Sea, we are actively looking for synergistic opportunities in the areas of our capabilities and credibility that we have in Capricorn and our team. Well, that's it for our formal presentation. Thank you very much for dialing in, and we'll now take questions from analysts online. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We now take our first question from James Hosie of Shore Capital. James Hosie: A couple of questions for you. Just firstly, on the improved trade receivable position and the payment plan. You've already received $37 million since the midyear and the release mentioned today a $50 million payment being due in October. Just wondering if it's reasonable to think that Capricorn is on track to collect more in H2 than the minimum $90 million you referred to. And then second question is just wondering about the updated competent persons report you plan to publish once the new concession term is ratified. Should we expect that to include revised 2P production and CapEx profile? Are you simply just going to apply the assumptions you used in July CPR to the new concession terms? Eddie Ok: I'll take the AR question. Yes, you're right. We've received $37 million to date, and we're expecting a $50 million bullet here in the near term. We're remaining conservative about our collections assumptions. But yes, if all goes according to plan, we should be collecting in excess of that with a material reduction in our receivables possible by the end of the year. Geoffrey Probert: And Goeff here, I'll pick up the other question, James, on CPR revision. When we issue that CPR, yes, it will be the midyear actually to understand. It will include revised CapEx profile deductions for production. It will be a full update. Operator: And we'll now move on to our next question from Chris Wheaton of Stifel. Christopher Wheaton: A question for me also on working capital, but trying to look forward a bit further. What provisions in the license renegotiation has there been for working capital recovery? Because my concern when you start drilling and exploiting some of that upside resource potential is, you've got to start really putting CapEx in the ground first, then your production goes up, then you get the cash flow. Well, then you actually sell the oil, then at some point in the future, you get the cash flow. So there could be quite a significant working capital burn at least to start with unless Egypt are prompted in paying those receivables back because with the higher CapEx as well as the higher OpEx, then your receivables amount is going to start building quite quickly unless you get those regular repayments. Could you talk about how you've tried to mitigate those risks in the license renegotiation? And secondly, what that means for potential timing of dividend payouts because I still see your priorities as being first pay down -- first, you've got to keep investing in the drilling. Secondly, you've got to pay down the debt remaining in Egypt and then possibly shareholders could start to get some more cash back. So I'm interested in that implication for your future dividend payments. Eddie Ok: Chris, I'll take that. Yes. So we've got obviously a material investment sort of obligation opportunity in Egypt as a result of the modernized concession agreement and one that we're happy to deliver on given the economic return that's represented by that investment. Just keep in mind, we're still producing 20,000 barrels of oil equivalent per day in Egypt with the corresponding build in cost pools, profit oil, profit gas as well as our existing receivables position. And as you folks have seen historically, we're managing the business quite carefully with respect to invested dollars against realized dollars out. And so that philosophy is not going to change going forward. Part of the overriding imperative on this deal has to be that our shareholders realize a return. Now based off of historical decisions, historical investments, we've got a fairly really weighted debt burden hanging over this asset base. But we plan on honoring those debt commitments with repayments of that debt coming up over the next couple of years as well as delivering on these capital investments. And to your point, yes, after that, and as always, our overriding concern is going to be on shareholder value and how do we deliver that value in the asset base to the shareholders over time. Geoffrey Probert: Jack, I may just add one thing. That is the -- background to negotiations create, let's say, a more investable concession agreement and bond agreements and that creates relevance. I mean the whole purpose is not just to create value for the shareholders also to get paid. By improving the terms, we have an investable set of concessions where before, frankly, that it was a pretty weak place to be. Each we pays those who have the capacity to invest. And by that, I mean the places they can invest economically. So it's a bit of a symbiotic outcome for both we invest, we get great production, we get paid so that we can invest and we generate returns. They do accept that part of it. In terms of the overall commitments we have to make in terms of investment, the terms are -- if you look at our historical investment profile in Egypt on a working interest basis, they're quite modest. It's spread over a number of years -- if there happens to be a short-term problem around payments for a while, we can just dial back investments, while that happens and dial those investments back up again in the future. So we're pretty confident that this structure and the new concession agreement will generate the right opportunities for us to invest and be paid at the same time. Christopher Wheaton: Okay. Just to be clear, the concession doesn't include -- the revised concession agreement doesn't include a sort of contractual basis for this is how receivables will be paid and this is sort of [indiscernible]... Randall Neely: Yes. I'll take it. Yes. So Chris, that's in there already. Like, those terms are in the existing contracts. So... Christopher Wheaton: Right. They are totally fine. Randall Neely: Yes. What the situation is Egypt sometimes struggles to keep up payments just because of their own fiscal issues and where they're prioritized. But we're seeing -- we're seeing that mindset change. And that's because Egypt is short energy and they've struggled to sort of keep the production moving in the right direction given the local demand. And so that's what we're seeing change over the past 18, 24 months as they're moving into more reprioritizing IOC payments in order to at least maintain production rather than things slip off or go to other jurisdictions. Operator: Thank you. We have no further questions in the queue. I'll now hand over for webcast questions. So we've got a few questions from Charlie Sharp at Canaccord. First question, what liquid proportion of total production would you expect to be able to achieve over the next 6 to 18 months? Randall Neely: So actually, I didn't quite hear that. Operator: What liquid portion of total production would you expect to be able to achieve over the next 6 to 18 months? Geoffrey Probert: I don't anticipate a significant change in the overall proportion. We recorded rather a 42%, 43% liquids in the last half, and we anticipate that continuing going forward. It might now just a little bit, but it's not going to increase significantly in the next 6 months. Operator: Next question from Charlie. What sort of test results on the 2 exploration wells would support commerciality and what would the next operational steps to be? Randall Neely: So obviously, the rate and sustainability, so the pressure drop if there is the reservoir during the testing phase there are -- as is often the case in these Western Desert reservoirs or wells, there are multiple potential pay zones. We have to look at productivity, we have to look at sustainability. And we have to look at the distance to the nearest infrastructure. These wells are reasonably close to nearby infrastructure, but that doesn't make them seldom. So yes, that's pretty much how we look at the wells. In terms of the next steps, we take the data, we will evaluate it and with our partner, the operator Cheiron, we'll make a proposal if we see economic value to do so to complete and hook up those wells into nearby production facilities. Operator: Great. And final question, can you provide some guidance on expected year-end 2025 receivables? Eddie Ok: Sure. It's in the release. If you take a look at what our historic production is and the forecast going forward against what our projected collections are that you should be able to back into that number pretty quickly. And like I said, it's going to be a conservative estimate for the year-end, but that's what we're guiding towards. Operator: No further questions from the webcast. So I'll hand over to you for any closing remarks. Randall Neely: Thanks, Kelly. I just want to say thanks, everyone, for dialing in or listening in, afterwards, and we look forward to speaking to many of you live over the coming weeks. Have a great day.
Randall Neely: Good morning, and thank you for attending our midyear 2025 results call. I am joined today by Eddie Ok, our CFO, who will walk through the financial and operations highlights as well as Geoff Probert, our COO, who will provide a review of ongoing operations and provide more detail on the progress made to improve our production sharing contracts in Egypt. In addition, Nathan Piper, Director of Commercial, is also available for the Q&A session. Since myself, the new management team, Geoff, Eddie, Nathan and our entire Board joined the company beginning in 2023, we've made it very clear what our goals were. We intended to improve upon the base business in Egypt, reduce overhead and scale down or eliminate all nonviable activities of the company. To do that, we set out with our JV partner in Egypt, Cheiron to negotiate a new consolidated production sharing contract for the 50-50 jointly held contracts. That has been a major undertaking, and we announced earlier this year that we had achieved a major milestone with the government approval of those terms. Geoff will provide more detail on this process and outcome shortly. For those of you that perhaps have not been paying attention to our journey over the past 2 years, I'll remind you that we have exited all noncore activities, and we reduced our G&A burden by approximately 80%, including our staffing contingent, effectively rightsized the organization. As well, the company returned over $600 million to investors through dividends and share buybacks. Operationally, we have worked very hard to achieve technical alignment with our partner in Egypt, and we are very pleased with how that has progressed. Today, I can confidently state that Capricorn and Cheiron are working synergistically to improve the technical and financial results of the joint venture. When this team, Capricorn 2.0 joined, we all recognized that the company needed to instill financial discipline, which included a measured approach to funding investments in Egypt, effectively a self-funding model. Although with the improved fiscal terms and payment schedules, this approach may not appear as relevant today as it was 2 years ago. We do not intend to deviate from this mindset. With our initial goals principally achieved, we are turning our attention to increasing value for our shareholders. Our intent is to do that through 3 principal activities: First, realizing on the improvement of the base business in Egypt. The improvements to fiscal terms and lengthening of contract life will open up significantly new resource for the joint venture to pursue and exploit. Effectively, the amended contractual terms will allow the joint venture to pursue a very large existing resource base to have both reserves and production. Second, we, led by Nathan, our Director of Commercial, will continue to search for opportunities in the U.K. North Sea to realize on our historic position there. We have a strict set of criteria we measure every North Sea opportunity against. And although we have been deep into several processes, we have been unable to successfully conclude any of them. That's been either due to being outbid or the seller just effectively electing to retain the asset. And the third activity that we'll look to add value is looking for synergistic asset deals or business to add to the portfolio. Ultimately, all of these will lead the company to return value to the shareholders. Building business of scale and longevity. Over the past 2 years, the new Board, myself and the rest of the team have made a major effort to transform the culture, priorities and focus of Capricorn. This wheel is meant to capture very simply how we are approaching this. We focus on the small details. We finance the business and any new ventures conservatively. We approach every project with technical rigor and apply strict capital discipline and demand the same of our partners. We approach the business strictly through a self-funding business model and new ventures initiated will require the application of a prudent approach to risk management. I'll let Geoff take the next slide. Geoffrey Probert: Thanks, Randy, and good morning. You can see here on the graphic that we're on the last step of our journey to completing the consolidation of our 8, 50-50 concession agreements into a single extended and improved agreement. Improvements in concession longevity and fiscal terms are a catalyst to increase Capricorn's reserves and production with value and cash flow enhanced by increased investment self-funded from Egypt. For EGPC, this increased and more importantly, sustained investment delivers great production over the long-term for Egypt, and has potential to be a true win-win for all stakeholders. We continue to expect custom ratification in the near future, commencing investment consistent with the new terms in the second half of 2025 and expect new terms and commitments to apply to that investment. Back to you, Randy. Randall Neely: Thanks, Geoff. Now with many of our primary objectives having been achieved, our primary focus for myself and as well as Nathan is to get investors to recognize this value improvement. On the back of an envelope, you can see that we have a base business in Egypt that fully supports our market value. Note that our debt in Egypt has been paid down materially over this year and will continue to be paid down over the coming year. On top of that, we have the cash that resides in the parent company, a value improvement that will be realized upon ratification of our Egyptian-based business and the value that can be realized by future investment in the U.K. North Sea. All of these combined leave us with a near-term potential of doubling our share value, and that's before we expand our operations either in Egypt or elsewhere. I'll now turn the presentation over to Eddie Ok, our CFO, to provide a review of the financial and operating highlights. Eddie Ok: Thanks, Randy, and good morning, all. Production through the first half was in line with projections, and we continue to guide towards the midpoint of our published range of 17,000 to 21,000 BOE per day. Our focus on higher-margin drilling continues to perform as liquids remain slightly above forecast at 43% of production. OpEx is continuing to trend upwards as the currency devaluation impact from last year works its way through our cost structure. This is being exacerbated by declining production against a large fixed cost base, but we continue to work with the operator to ensure that costs are being controlled to the greatest extent possible. We slightly reduced our capital guidance as scheduling is going to push back some current year activity into the following year, but we remain on track to deliver the bulk of our development drilling in the second half. Next slide, please. As can be seen from our cash waterfall, the contingent consideration collected in the half has offset the slow pace of collections from EGPC. In the second half to date, collections have improved, and we're anticipating the collection of at least $90 million in the second half, which will help offset scheduled repayments of our outstanding debt. Up next, Goeff is going to take you through an operational overview of the remainder of the year. Geoffrey Probert: Thanks, Eddie. I'm going to very briefly highlight our first half 2025 Egypt operational focus, give a snapshot of where we expect to invest in '26 and look at our reserves and resources are trending, particularly in the context of the new agreement. This map shows our focus on liquids development and production, particularly in the BED, Abu Roash G reservoir area, and that was all in the first half of 2025. While new agreement has been finalized, we also drilled 3 wells to fulfill our legacy commitments on the 3 pure exploration concessions acquired as part of the Egypt acquisition in 2021. Those exploration commitments are now satisfied with a minor on spend of $750,000 on NUMB. Our joint venture with Cheiron, the operator has elected to further evaluate commerciality of 2 of these wells, and we expect those results later this month. You can also see here that the hatched areas indicated concessions that we expect to form the new consolidation agreements closely the prime contiguous land added for further development and exploration on trend. Next slide. This slide illustrates our expected 4 rig development drilling schedule, 4 rigs to reflect improved agreement terms encouraging us to invest in a longer list of economic wells. Alongside optimization of development well sequence, we continue to work with our JV partner Cheiron to also prioritize non-rig production generation, reinstating shutting wells, identifying additional perforation opportunities on bypass pay. Next slide. This last slide on reserves encapsulates the rationale behind Capricorn negotiating an extended and improved integrated concession agreement on our 50-50 concessions. We expect our ability to replace reserves and extend their life to be materially improved by the extended concession period and improved concession economic terms. We also expect the concession improvement will also impact our risk appetite to chase near-field exploration potential on our newly extended land and our existing land and to develop and mature our portfolio of resources. Capricorn has been working with opportunity hopper on the 50-50 new concession agreement acreage, not just near-term development options, but also contingent and prospective resources. We expect this work will help to underpin future reserve and resource bookings and may also direct and prioritize productive drilling activity. You can see here that internally, we've identified a working interest around 350 million barrels of oil equivalent unrisked best estimate contingent resources to mature. Near-term license extensions resulting from an approved integrated concession potentially support the early conversion of up to a working interest nearly 20 million barrels oil equivalent to reserves, with further reclassifications anticipated, all underpinned by 5-year investment plans. Once approved, we expect to rapidly move to drill wells to exploit those reserves additions. Thanks for your time and attention. Now I'm passing over to Randy to wrap up. Randall Neely: Yes. Thanks, Goeff. I trust that those of you that have been following the Capricorn story since this team took over will agree that we have had a strong record of delivering on company objectives. To summarize, we set out to improve the Egyptian business by making it both long-term sustainable and a platform for growth. We are very near the confirmation of that objective with ratification occurring in the near future. The new PSC will provide a catalyst for increases in reserves for investment and value improvements. Additionally, we are seeing and hearing reasons to be optimistic about the future reduction of our outstanding receivables and a more stable, consistent payment plan from EGPC. And while we have been slower than we hoped to be to deliver or realize an embedded value for us to reinvest in the U.K. North Sea, we remain steadfast in our goal to achieve this objective. Beyond our current operations in Egypt and our near-term goal of expansion in the U.K. North Sea, we are actively looking for synergistic opportunities in the areas of our capabilities and credibility that we have in Capricorn and our team. Well, that's it for our formal presentation. Thank you very much for dialing in, and we'll now take questions from analysts online. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We now take our first question from James Hosie of Shore Capital. James Hosie: A couple of questions for you. Just firstly, on the improved trade receivable position and the payment plan. You've already received $37 million since the midyear and the release mentioned today a $50 million payment being due in October. Just wondering if it's reasonable to think that Capricorn is on track to collect more in H2 than the minimum $90 million you referred to. And then second question is just wondering about the updated competent persons report you plan to publish once the new concession term is ratified. Should we expect that to include revised 2P production and CapEx profile? Are you simply just going to apply the assumptions you used in July CPR to the new concession terms? Eddie Ok: I'll take the AR question. Yes, you're right. We've received $37 million to date, and we're expecting a $50 million bullet here in the near term. We're remaining conservative about our collections assumptions. But yes, if all goes according to plan, we should be collecting in excess of that with a material reduction in our receivables possible by the end of the year. Geoffrey Probert: And Goeff here, I'll pick up the other question, James, on CPR revision. When we issue that CPR, yes, it will be the midyear actually to understand. It will include revised CapEx profile deductions for production. It will be a full update. Operator: And we'll now move on to our next question from Chris Wheaton of Stifel. Christopher Wheaton: A question for me also on working capital, but trying to look forward a bit further. What provisions in the license renegotiation has there been for working capital recovery? Because my concern when you start drilling and exploiting some of that upside resource potential is, you've got to start really putting CapEx in the ground first, then your production goes up, then you get the cash flow. Well, then you actually sell the oil, then at some point in the future, you get the cash flow. So there could be quite a significant working capital burn at least to start with unless Egypt are prompted in paying those receivables back because with the higher CapEx as well as the higher OpEx, then your receivables amount is going to start building quite quickly unless you get those regular repayments. Could you talk about how you've tried to mitigate those risks in the license renegotiation? And secondly, what that means for potential timing of dividend payouts because I still see your priorities as being first pay down -- first, you've got to keep investing in the drilling. Secondly, you've got to pay down the debt remaining in Egypt and then possibly shareholders could start to get some more cash back. So I'm interested in that implication for your future dividend payments. Eddie Ok: Chris, I'll take that. Yes. So we've got obviously a material investment sort of obligation opportunity in Egypt as a result of the modernized concession agreement and one that we're happy to deliver on given the economic return that's represented by that investment. Just keep in mind, we're still producing 20,000 barrels of oil equivalent per day in Egypt with the corresponding build in cost pools, profit oil, profit gas as well as our existing receivables position. And as you folks have seen historically, we're managing the business quite carefully with respect to invested dollars against realized dollars out. And so that philosophy is not going to change going forward. Part of the overriding imperative on this deal has to be that our shareholders realize a return. Now based off of historical decisions, historical investments, we've got a fairly really weighted debt burden hanging over this asset base. But we plan on honoring those debt commitments with repayments of that debt coming up over the next couple of years as well as delivering on these capital investments. And to your point, yes, after that, and as always, our overriding concern is going to be on shareholder value and how do we deliver that value in the asset base to the shareholders over time. Geoffrey Probert: Jack, I may just add one thing. That is the -- background to negotiations create, let's say, a more investable concession agreement and bond agreements and that creates relevance. I mean the whole purpose is not just to create value for the shareholders also to get paid. By improving the terms, we have an investable set of concessions where before, frankly, that it was a pretty weak place to be. Each we pays those who have the capacity to invest. And by that, I mean the places they can invest economically. So it's a bit of a symbiotic outcome for both we invest, we get great production, we get paid so that we can invest and we generate returns. They do accept that part of it. In terms of the overall commitments we have to make in terms of investment, the terms are -- if you look at our historical investment profile in Egypt on a working interest basis, they're quite modest. It's spread over a number of years -- if there happens to be a short-term problem around payments for a while, we can just dial back investments, while that happens and dial those investments back up again in the future. So we're pretty confident that this structure and the new concession agreement will generate the right opportunities for us to invest and be paid at the same time. Christopher Wheaton: Okay. Just to be clear, the concession doesn't include -- the revised concession agreement doesn't include a sort of contractual basis for this is how receivables will be paid and this is sort of [indiscernible]... Randall Neely: Yes. I'll take it. Yes. So Chris, that's in there already. Like, those terms are in the existing contracts. So... Christopher Wheaton: Right. They are totally fine. Randall Neely: Yes. What the situation is Egypt sometimes struggles to keep up payments just because of their own fiscal issues and where they're prioritized. But we're seeing -- we're seeing that mindset change. And that's because Egypt is short energy and they've struggled to sort of keep the production moving in the right direction given the local demand. And so that's what we're seeing change over the past 18, 24 months as they're moving into more reprioritizing IOC payments in order to at least maintain production rather than things slip off or go to other jurisdictions. Operator: Thank you. We have no further questions in the queue. I'll now hand over for webcast questions. So we've got a few questions from Charlie Sharp at Canaccord. First question, what liquid proportion of total production would you expect to be able to achieve over the next 6 to 18 months? Randall Neely: So actually, I didn't quite hear that. Operator: What liquid portion of total production would you expect to be able to achieve over the next 6 to 18 months? Geoffrey Probert: I don't anticipate a significant change in the overall proportion. We recorded rather a 42%, 43% liquids in the last half, and we anticipate that continuing going forward. It might now just a little bit, but it's not going to increase significantly in the next 6 months. Operator: Next question from Charlie. What sort of test results on the 2 exploration wells would support commerciality and what would the next operational steps to be? Randall Neely: So obviously, the rate and sustainability, so the pressure drop if there is the reservoir during the testing phase there are -- as is often the case in these Western Desert reservoirs or wells, there are multiple potential pay zones. We have to look at productivity, we have to look at sustainability. And we have to look at the distance to the nearest infrastructure. These wells are reasonably close to nearby infrastructure, but that doesn't make them seldom. So yes, that's pretty much how we look at the wells. In terms of the next steps, we take the data, we will evaluate it and with our partner, the operator Cheiron, we'll make a proposal if we see economic value to do so to complete and hook up those wells into nearby production facilities. Operator: Great. And final question, can you provide some guidance on expected year-end 2025 receivables? Eddie Ok: Sure. It's in the release. If you take a look at what our historic production is and the forecast going forward against what our projected collections are that you should be able to back into that number pretty quickly. And like I said, it's going to be a conservative estimate for the year-end, but that's what we're guiding towards. Operator: No further questions from the webcast. So I'll hand over to you for any closing remarks. Randall Neely: Thanks, Kelly. I just want to say thanks, everyone, for dialing in or listening in, afterwards, and we look forward to speaking to many of you live over the coming weeks. Have a great day.
Operator: Greetings, and welcome to the Darden Fiscal Year 2026 First Quarter Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] This conference is being recorded. [Operator Instructions] I'll now turn the call over to Ms. Courtney Aquilla. Thank you. You may begin. Courtney Aquilla: Thank you, Kevin. Good morning, everyone, and thank you for participating on today's call. Joining me are Rick Cardenas, Darden's President and CEO; and Raj Vennam, CFO. As a reminder, comments made during this call will include forward-looking statements as defined in the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. These statements are subject to risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially from our expectations and projections. Those risks are described in the company's press release, which was distributed this morning, and in its filings with the Securities and Exchange Commission. We are simultaneously broadcasting a presentation during this call, which is posted in the Investor Relations section of our website at darden.com. Today's discussion and presentation include certain non-GAAP measurements, and reconciliations of these measurements are included in the presentation. Looking ahead, we plan to release fiscal 2026 second quarter earnings on Thursday, December 18, before the market opens, followed by a conference call. During today's call, I'll reference to the industry Chuy's results refer to Black Box Intelligence Casual Dining Benchmark, excluding Darden. During our fiscal first quarter, average same-restaurant sales for the industry grew 5% and average same-restaurant guest counts grew 2.6%. Additionally, due to the continued divergence between average and median results, we are sharing that median same-restaurant sales for the industry grew 3.3% and median same-restaurant guest counts grew 1.3%. This morning, Rick will share some brief remarks on the quarter, and Raj will provide details on our first quarter and share our updated fiscal 2026 financial outlook. Now I will turn the call over to Rick. Ricardo Cardenas: Thank you, Courtney, and good morning, everyone. We had a great quarter with same-restaurant sales and earnings growth that exceeded our expectations. For the first quarter, 3 of our 4 segments generated positive same-restaurant sales and traffic growth. The strength of our results is a testament to the power of our strategy. Across our portfolio, our restaurant teams remain focused on being brilliant with the basics through culinary innovation and execution, attentive service and an engaging atmosphere, all enabled by our people. And at the Darden level, we continue to strengthen and leverage our 4 competitive advantages of significant scale, extensive data and insights, rigorous strategic planning and the quality of our employees to further position our brands for long-term success. Olive Garden same-restaurant sales grew 5.9%, driven by compelling food news and the continued growth of first-party delivery. Early in the quarter, Olive Garden's marketing highlighted their Create Your Own Pasta platform from the core menu. Their television creative featured a new Spicy 3-Meat Sauce and Bucatini pasta starting at $12.99. This new sauce taps into guest evolving tastes for bolder, more flavorful offerings. It was well received and helped drive a significant increase in preference for the Create Your Own Pasta platform. Olive Garden built on the momentum of bold and spicy flavors by debuting Calabrian Steak and Shrimp Bucatini for a limited time during the quarter. The dish exceeded expectations and quickly became a new guest favorite, ranking among the top 10 entrees for preference. First-party delivery through our partnership with Uber Direct is helping capture younger, and more affluent guests who value convenience and crave Olive Garden. This represents a significant incremental opportunity for the brand as these guests have a higher check average and typically do not use Olive Garden for an in-restaurant dining occasion. Olive Garden's advertising featuring 1 million free deliveries concluded in the first quarter with all the free deliveries being redeemed. Average weekly deliveries doubled throughout the campaign. Following the campaign, delivery order volume has remained approximately 40% above the pre-campaign average. The team will continue to promote delivery across a number of channels. On our last call, we talked about putting a greater emphasis on sales growth and reinvesting to drive long-term growth. One of the ways we're doing this at Olive Garden is by strengthening affordability on the menu to give guests more variety at approachable price points. During the quarter, Olive Garden began testing a lighter portion section of the menu, featuring 7 of their existing entrees with reduced portions and a reduced price. These items available at dinner and all day during the weekend still offer abundant portions and come with Olive Gardens never-ending first course of unlimited Breadsticks and unlimited soup or salad. 40% of Olive Garden restaurants currently offer this menu and the initial response from guests has been encouraging, with affordability scores increasing 15 percentage points and high satisfaction with portion size. I have confidence in Olive Garden's initiatives for the year as well as their 5-year road map to sustain long-term growth and success. LongHorn Steakhouse grew same-restaurant sales by 5.5%, driven by continued adherence to their strategy rooted in quality, simplicity and culture. The team continues to raise the bar in food quality by consistently executing every dish on their menu to their high standards. This is reflected by LongHorn's #1 ranking among casual dining brands -- major casual dining brands within Technomic industry tracking tool for food quality, service, atmosphere and value. I'm really proud of the operational consistency at LongHorn and the work the team is doing to maintain their momentum. Same-restaurant sales for our Other Business segment grew 3.3% during the quarter, driven by strong performance at Yard House, Cheddar's Scratch Kitchen and Seasons 52. During the quarter, Yard House strengthened their competitive advantage of distinctive culinary offerings with broad appeal by enhancing their taco platform with higher-quality ingredients and more options for guests. As they have seen with similar investments in their burger and pizza platforms, this resulted in higher preference and guest satisfaction. To help strengthen their competitive advantage of a socially energized bar, Yard House held its third annual Best On Tap Competition during the quarter. What began as a test of knowledge and hospitality skills has grown into a cornerstone of the Yard House culture where every bar tender competes. Congratulations to this year's winner, Michelle Younes from the Yard House at City Center in Houston, Texas. The Cheddar's team leverages efficiency and Darden's purchasing power to provide great food served at a wow price. During the quarter, they introduced a Hawaiian sirloin, a center cut top sirloin finished with pineapple and a sweet Hawaiian glaze, starting at $16.49. This limited time offer also included a Honey Butter Croissant and 2 sides for that price. In Technomic most recent survey, Cheddar's ranked first among casual dining brands for both price and affordability. During the quarter, Cheddar's also saw strong off-premise sales growth driven by first-party delivery. Off-premise sales grew 15% during the quarter, and the Cheddar's team will continue to promote delivery through owned and digital channels as well as in restaurants. Same-restaurant sales for the Fine Dining segment was slightly negative for the quarter, but I'm encouraged by the actions each of our Fine Dining brands are taking to address the softness. For example, in the current environment, more guests are seeking price certainty, and Ruth's Chris Steakhouse introduced a 5-week limited time offer featuring a 3-course menu that drove positive comps for the quarter. For $55, guests could select 1 of 3 entrees as well as a super salad, an individual side and dessert. The offer was well received with strong guest preference and sales lift. Now I want to share a quick update on the sale of 8 Olive Garden locations in Canada that I referenced during our last call. On July 14, we closed on the sale of those locations to Recipe Unlimited, the largest full-service operator in Canada. At closing, we also entered into an area development agreement with Recipe Unlimited to open 30 more Olive Garden's over the next 10 years, 5 of which have already been approved. Our franchising team is focused on growing our global presence. Today we have 163 franchise locations, which includes 63 in the Continental United States and 100 outside the Continental U.S. Last month, we held our annual leadership conference, which provides a powerful way for us to engage with every general manager and managing partner across our brands, celebrate past performance and align on key operational priorities. This was also an opportunity for these restaurant leaders to learn about their brand's 5-year business plan and understand what they need to do to win today and into 2030. The opportunity to interact with this talented group of operators is one of the highlights of the year. I came away energized by the level of engagement and passion on display, which further reinforced the results of our most recent engagement survey, a new all-time high for Darden. Overall, I am pleased with the strong start to our new fiscal year. Our strategy is working, enabling us to grow sales and take market share while meaningful -- making meaningful investments in our business and returning capital to our shareholders. Beyond that, we have a larger purpose at Darden: to nourish and delight everyone we serve. One of the ways we do this is by fighting hunger. Once again this year, Darden is helping Feeding America add refrigerated trucks for 9 member food banks. With the addition of these new trucks, the Darden Foundation, with support from our partner, Penske Truck Leasing, has funded more than 50 vehicles to meet the increasing demand for food assistance in communities where we operate. Our philanthropic giving would not be possible without the efforts of our 200,000 team members and their passion to nourish and delight our guests and communities. Thank you for all you do. Now I'll turn it over to Raj. Rajesh Vennam: Thank you, Rick, and good morning, everyone. The first quarter was another strong quarter for Darden. Sales and earnings growth exceeded our expectations as our sales momentum from the fourth quarter continued into the first quarter. This strong top line sales growth and our significant scale provide us with the opportunity to keep a long-term perspective and continue investing in our business. In addition to the menu investments Rick mentioned, the largest investment we made over the past several years is pricing below total inflation. During the first quarter, our pricing was 30 basis points below inflation. We generated $3 billion of total sales, 10% higher than last year, driven by same-restaurant sales growth of 4.7%, the acquisition of 103 Chuy's restaurants and the addition of 22 net new restaurants. Both our same-restaurant sales and same-restaurant guest counts for the quarter were in the top quartile of the industry. Adjusted diluted net earnings per share from continuing operations of $1.97 were 12.6% higher than last year. We generated $439 million of adjusted EBITDA and returned $358 million to our shareholders this quarter by paying $175 million in dividends and repurchasing $183 million in shares. Now looking at our adjusted margin analysis compared to last year. Food and beverage expenses were 20 basis points lower, driven by pricing leverage as commodities inflation was approximately 1.5% for the quarter. Restaurant labor was 20 basis points unfavorable as a result of high performance-based compensation expense, including a higher 401(k) match for our restaurant teams. Total labor inflation of 3.1% was fully offset by pricing of 2.2% and productivity improvements. Restaurant expenses were 10 basis points higher as sales leverage was more than offset by Uber Direct fees and the brand mix with the addition of Chuy's. Marketing expenses were flat as cost savings in marketing helped fund additional marketing activity in the quarter. This resulted in restaurant-level EBITDA of 18.9%, 10 basis points lower than last year. Adjusted G&A expenses were 30 basis points favorable. Synergies from the acquisition and leverage from sales growth were partially offset by unfavorable mark-to-market expense on our deferred compensation. Due to the way we hedge mark-to-market expense, this unfavorability is fully offset in the tax line. Interest expense increased 10 basis points due to the financing expenses related to the Chuy's acquisition. Our adjusted effective tax rate for the quarter was 10.5%, helped by the mark-to-market hedge I mentioned earlier. Our effective tax rate would have been approximately 12.5% without this impact. In total, we generated $231 million in adjusted earnings from continuing operations, which was 7.6% of sales. Looking at our segments for the quarter. Total sales for Olive Garden increased by 7.6%, driven by strong same-restaurant sales and traffic growth. The sales from the addition of 18 new restaurants more than offset the sales loss from the refranchising of 8 Canadian restaurants. Their sales momentum continued from the prior quarter with same-restaurant sales in the top decile of the industry and outperforming the industry benchmark by 90 basis points. Olive Garden delivered a strong segment profit margin of 20.6% for the quarter, which was only 10 basis points below last year, even with the investments in affordability and the impact of delivery fees. At LongHorn, total sales increased 8.8%, driven by same-restaurant sales growth of 5.5% and the addition of 18 new restaurants. The sustained sales and traffic outperformance resulted in same-restaurant sales in the top quartile of the industry for the 13th consecutive quarter, with this quarter ranking in the top decile. The LongHorn team is doing a great job of staying focused on their strategy and maintaining momentum within the business despite continued cost pressures. Higher-than-expected beef cost towards the end of the quarter and pricing below total inflation of approximately 100 basis points resulted in segment profit margin of 17.4%, 60 basis points below last year. Total sales at the Fine Dining segment increased 2.7%, driven by the addition of 5 net new restaurants. While same-restaurant sales for the segment were slightly negative, the strong performance of the limited time offer at Ruth's Chris helped to offset the continued challenges within the Fine Dining category. Overall, segment profit margin was lower than last year. The Other Business segment sales increased 22.5% with the acquisition of Chuy's and positive same-restaurant sales of 3.3%. The positive sales momentum and continued productivity improvements in multiple brands within the segment resulted in segment profit margin of 16.1%, 90 basis points higher than last year. Now turning to our financial outlook for fiscal 2026. This morning, we updated a few items in our guidance, taking into consideration actual performance year-to-date and the evolving commodities outlook for the remainder of the fiscal year. We are raising our expected total sales growth and tightening the range of same-restaurant sales to reflect the outperformance in the first quarter, acceleration in our new unit pipeline and any incremental pricing we may take to partially offset the additional commodities costs. We now expect total sales growth of -- for the year of 7.5% to 8.5%, same-restaurant sales growth of 2.5% to 3.5%, approximately 65 new restaurant openings and total inflation of 3% to 3.5% with commodities inflation of 3% to 4%. All other aspects of our guidance remain unchanged, including adjusted diluted net earnings per share between $10.50 and $10.70. While we are reiterating our full year earnings per share guidance, we expect the lowest year-over-year EPS growth to be in the second quarter, driven by the significant step-up in beef costs and our measured approach to pricing for these costs. We expect our pricing for the second quarter to be approximately 100 basis points below total inflation. We have a proven track record of successfully navigating through higher costs, and we'll continue to take a disciplined approach to ensure the long-term health of our business. We believe our strategy remains the right one for our company. Now we'll take your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question today is coming from Brian Harbour from Morgan Stanley. Brian Harbour: Maybe just on that last point first, Raj, could you talk about sort of contracting through the balance of the year and sort of what gives you visibility that you've kind of encompassed the range of food cost outcomes? Rajesh Vennam: Yes, Brian, I think if you look at what we published this morning, we -- our coverage is less than typical, especially in beef. Right now, we only have about 25% coverage in beef for the next 6 months. And that's one of the biggest opportunities in terms of where we're seeing the biggest headwinds. And I think as you all know, there's been a significant spike in beef costs recently, especially tenders and rebuys, so -- and we don't believe these price levels are sustainable, and that's why we don't have as much coverage, and that's part of the reason. And given the significant price increase, there are -- we are starting to see some demand disruption in retail. So I guess, really the big picture, beef is the biggest variable here. And then the other component here where you're seeing a higher inflation is on seafood, primarily due to the tariffs on shrimp. And our team is working through to figure out how to mitigate some of that. And that's really the reason why we're taking the inflation up from 2.5% at the beginning of the year to now 3% to 4%. But this situation is still very fluid here. Brian Harbour: Rick, maybe just on the comments about sort of the new portion sizes at Olive Garden. What -- are you seeing sort of a different guest that is asking for that? Do you think this is actually sort of a traffic driver for Olive Garden? Or I guess, on the other hand, do you think this is check dilutive in some sense? Like how are people actually sort of approaching that? What are you seeing from those items? Ricardo Cardenas: Yes, Brian, it's still pretty early. We do believe in the long run, this is a traffic driver. It will dilute our check a little bit if people trade from a higher portion size item to a lower portion size item. But we believe that's the portion that those guests want. And it's very early indications are that we're seeing a little bit more frequency. But it's not necessarily new guests because we haven't marketed it, and we put it in restaurant without even any fanfare and it's just people are gravitating towards that. It's not significant preference gravitating towards it, but there is some preference moving there. Operator: Next question is coming from Jon Tower from Citi. Jon Tower: Great. Maybe kind of in the same vein, that -- the affordability pivot and -- this quarter as well as the Uber Eats amplification or build in the quarter. Can you maybe speak to how that hit on the cost line during the period? And I noticed that, obviously, the restaurant margin, you didn't lever that as much on a pretty solid comp in the period. So maybe, Raj, if you could speak to those costs during the period and what you're expecting going forward as well. Rajesh Vennam: Yes, Jon, let me first start by saying these are things we planned on and we had in our plan. And I think we said -- that's why we said we're actually exceeding our plan. And it's actually -- the fact that the segment profit margin is only down 10%, they're still north of 20%, is a testament to the strength of the business model at Olive Garden. Now with that said, let me explain a little bit more detail. First of all, we still priced below total inflation. Olive Garden's pricing was only 1.9%. So that's a pretty low price in this environment given that, again, the total inflation. Second, specific to those 2 items, they were roughly on the margin, if you just purely look at the margin percentage impact, they are probably about 20 basis points each. So if you put that back, I mean, we would have been positive 30, right? But that's, again, even with pricing below inflation. So I think that's sort of a key metric that we need to take into consideration because we believe, long term, these are the right decisions we're making. And I think any business would envy a 20-plus segment profit margin. Jon Tower: And then maybe just drilling a little bit more into the delivery business at Olive Garden. Can you talk about -- Rick, you had mentioned that you're pleased with how, obviously, you're seeing younger guests make their way in, more affluent. Can you give us any more information on the frequency of those guests? Are they coming more so than what you're seeing within the store in terms of frequency and how they're using it even, obviously, it hasn't been a year yet, but seasonally, how they're maybe using that channel relative to in store? Ricardo Cardenas: Yes, Jon. We've said -- as we said in the past, we are getting higher frequency for delivery guests than we are in dining guests. It's still early. We haven't had the delivery for a year yet, as you mentioned. As to seasonality, the one thing that Uber told us is normally, over the summer, delivery orders start to kind of fall off. And we really hadn't seen that. So we'll know a little bit more about the seasonality of delivery after we've passed a year or maybe even 2 years, because it continues to grow for us. That said, we're very excited about how delivery is going. And as Raj mentioned earlier, we are using some of that extra guest count and extra margin to invest for all guests, and we feel really good about that for the long term. Operator: Next question is coming from David Palmer from Evercore ISI. David Palmer: Aside from the beef cost question, I think there's probably 2 areas that are major areas of curiosity, and I certainly share them. And one is the strong performance of the casual dining segment, which is becoming increasingly unusual after fast casual has slowed through the year, through the middle of this year. And another, I think, is Olive Garden against more difficult comparisons later in your fiscal year. How will it do and what are you lining up against that? So those are really my 2 questions. What are your thoughts about why casual dining is doing as well? And do you think that will continue? And then separately, Olive Garden, you're rolling out a pretty large test on small portions, but what are your thoughts? And what are you kind of lining up to keep the momentum going as you get into lapping some of the good stuff you've been doing in the last 3 or 4 months? Ricardo Cardenas: Yes, David. I believe the strong casual dining segment is driven by, generally, less pricing than other segments of dining, for the segment itself, for casual dining itself. And for the larger players in casual dining, even lower pricing than casual dining total. So there's -- the guests are starting to see the value that casual dining brings. Now we've been seeing that for a few years now, as you know, it's just others are kind of following in line with that, and we're seeing that the guests see the value. Also, when they're trying to figure out where they spend their money, they're going to places where they can connect and engage with their friends and family. There may be less snacking going on and less kind of munching, but when people are going out to eat, they're going out to where they can feel they can get a great meal at a great value and have time with their friends. In regards to Olive Garden for the back half of the year, we have plans to continue the momentum. We do know that the comparisons get a little bit more challenging. But the Olive Garden team is working on things that we could do in the back half of the year. We've got a great plan. We do believe that, over time, the affordability items on the menu, the lighter portion -- I don't want to call them affordability. They're the right portion size for the right price for a group of consumers, that will eventually drive more traffic. It might not drive it in the back half of the year because we're not talking about it yet. That said, we may start talking about it in the back half of the year. So there's a lot of things that we're going to do. We've got a great team. And we'll react to whatever the sales trends look like at Olive Garden, and we'll go from there. Operator: Next question is coming from Jim Salera from Stephens. James Salera: I was hoping you could give us a breakdown on LongHorn, just the comp split between traffic and ticket. And then as a follow-up on that, have you seen any increased engagement with consumer -- you mentioned, obviously, pricing 100 basis points below inflation. Should we kind of expect that similar gap to progress through the year? Or any thoughts around how we should expect pricing to trend? Rajesh Vennam: Yes. So let's start with the LongHorn traffic versus -- LongHorn traffic was up about 3.2% for the quarter. The same-restaurant sales were 5.5%. So the check was 2.3%. Their pricing was 2.5%. They had a little bit of a negative mix, primarily [indiscernible], of 20 basis points. In terms of pricing versus inflation, at LongHorn, as we said, we -- there was a bigger spike in beef prices. That was a little bit of a surprise at the end of the quarter. But we also had planned on having some gap to pricing. So it further widened, I guess, by the time we ended the quarter, a little bit. As we look through the year, we expect second quarter, at the Darden level, without getting specific segment level here. At the Darden level, we expect pricing to be about 100 basis points below inflation, and we expect that gap to narrow as we go through the year. And so you would expect the pressures on the margin to be -- kind of follow that, right? So we probably have the biggest gap in Q2, maybe cut that in half by the time you get to Q3 and then try to narrow that further as we get to Q4. But consistent with our philosophy, our pricing for the full year will probably be -- we'll end up being below inflation. Is it going to be 30% or 50%? I don't know. We're working through that. I think our -- we've been always very thoughtful about what cost do we actually price for. And we don't want to price for temporary costs. We want to price for, over time, find other ways to solve for these incremental costs. And that's what our team is focused on. James Salera: Great. And then you guys mentioned the value-focused menu expansion at Olive Garden. Is that something that we could see maybe in a more limited fashion at LongHorn as well, maybe focus on like appetizers or smaller plate items? Or is that something that right now it's just Olive Garden focused? Ricardo Cardenas: Yes. We're doing this at Olive Garden to see how that works out. And if other brands think that it makes sense for them and they get the learnings from Olive Garden, maybe they will implement. But right now, the focus is the Olive Garden and it's the Olive Garden team that's driving it. And as I said, we'll see how that goes. Now there might be some things that LongHorn does in the future or other brands do in the future, but they'll make those decisions as those times come. Operator: Next question is coming from Eric Gonzalez from KeyBanc Capital Markets. Eric Gonzalez: Just a few quarters ago, you talked about some strength among the lower income consumers. Obviously, most of your peers, particularly on the fast food side, are talking about weakness among that cohort of income. So if you maybe you could talk about what you're seeing from an income perspective, and are you gaining share among lower-income consumers? Do you think that part of the equation is actually holding yourselves up relative to your peers? And are you seeing some maybe trade into the category from some of the higher-income folks, particularly on the casual dining side? Ricardo Cardenas: Yes, Eric, specific to casual dining, all our casual dining brands saw an increase in visits year-over-year from guests across all income groups, but specifically those in higher income groups. So you would expect that would have been -- that could have been some trade down, but it could be trade up from a lower income group to a great value in casual dining. We are seeing a few shifts in behavior and that guests are going towards what price certainty, so they know what they're going to pay before they come in, or greater perceived value even if the item is a high price. So if you think about the Calabrian Steak and Shrimp that we had at Olive Garden, great preference, great perceived value. It was the highest priced menu item on the menu. But we are seeing, as I said, for casual dining brands, growth among all income groups. Eric Gonzalez: Great. And then on the -- just to close the loop on the commodity discussion. Based on where the commodities are now and what you've locked in, I know you're a little bit lighter on the beef side, what do you think that implies for store-level margins? And what's embedded in the guidance? In the past, you talked about modest margin expansion you still think you can get there based on what you did in the first quarter and where you are locked in. Rajesh Vennam: Eric, I would refer you back to our long-term framework, which basically talks about our earnings after tax from 0 to 20 basis points growth. So if you look at our guidance, even at the low end, we're basically either flat or growing margin at the Eat level. We don't want to focus too much on any one line item, and for us, ultimately, if we're able to achieve our long-term framework and get the targets we want to get to by investing more in the guest, we want to do that. If that means that the segment profit margins are down year-over-year, that's not something we're concerned about. I think our focus ultimately is on -- at the Eat level, at the earnings after tax level, are we staying flat or growing margins? And that's -- we feel like we're still on a path to get there. Operator: Next question today is coming from David Tarantino from Baird. David Tarantino: Rick, I had a question about your views on the overall health of the consumer spending environment. Certainly, you had a great quarter. But I guess over the last few months, we've seen a lot of crosscurrents related to the job updates and whatnot. So I'm just maybe wanting to get your thoughts on where we are from the state of consumer spending and whether you think anything's changed recently relative to maybe where you thought it was at the start of the year. Ricardo Cardenas: Yes, David, I can't say that anything has changed dramatically from where we saw it at the start of the year. We are ahead of where we thought we'd be right now. There's a lot of talk about the job revisions, but those jobs didn't exist. So that's what people were working. And so we're dealing with what was actually happening, not what was thought to be happening. And so I believe that the August retail sales were up pretty significantly, and we had a pretty darn good August too. So I don't see any dramatic change to what we thought the consumer was. David Tarantino: Great. And Raj, one quick clarification. You mentioned the inflation versus pricing gap is expected to narrow as you get into maybe the second half of the year. Is that because of the price components going higher or the inflation components coming down? I guess, could you explain kind of how that might work? Rajesh Vennam: Yes. Sure, David. It's primarily the -- we are taking a little bit more price as we go through the year. We mentioned that at the beginning of the year, right? We started pretty low in the first quarter. We expect to get for the full year to be in the mid- to high 2s. And we started with 2.2, as you can see, as the year progresses, that moves up a little bit. And then there's also some near-term pressures that we expect, because like I said in the commentary around beef, we don't think all these high prices are sustainable. I mean these are pretty punitive to the consumer, and we're trying to protect them by not pricing for it. Operator: Next question is coming from Sara Senatore from Bank of America. Sara Senatore: I wanted to ask about the idea of sort of investing and growing top line, more of a top line-driven growth algorithm. You mentioned pricing below inflation and, obviously, affordability is something that your brands are known for in terms of value for the money. But I guess I could also characterize marketing as a way to do that or even perhaps subsidizing delivery fees. So I was just curious, as you think about the kind of different investments, is marketing something -- I know you said you got some leverage, so marketing dollars were higher though, perhaps a little bit light of what we might have expected. And you talked about delivery fees as perhaps margin pressure. So I wasn't sure if that's because you're not fully covering them with what you charge your customers. But perhaps you could -- and I know it's free delivery this quarter, so perhaps that's an exception. But maybe you could talk a little bit about as you think about investing behind top line, these other possible ways to do that. And then I do have another quick follow-up. Ricardo Cardenas: Yes, Sara, we do believe that marketing can help drive traffic. And while our marketing as a percent of sales didn't seem to grow, I think Raj mentioned in the prepared remarks, we had some cost saves in marketing that offset our actual marketing growth. So we actually had more TRPs out there, our other brands that are not on linear TV or testing connected television and other digital aspects, Cheddar's has their first ever 30-second commercial on a connected television. So we are increasing our marketing activity because we believe that will drive some traffic. But we're not doing it at deep discounting in the ways that we had done it in the past. And you did -- I think you answered your question on the delivery fees. There are other ways that we can do things to drive delivery. But this quarter, the 1 million free deliveries did impact a little bit of the margin. Sara Senatore: Great. And then just the follow-up was, I think, Rick, you alluded to less snacking or munching. I was curious, is that like a GLP-1 reference in terms of like how people are changing their eating patterns? Or was it more people are prepared to give up some of these sort of convenience or impulse occasions and spend behind really good experiences like they get at Olive Garden or LongHorn or your other brands? Ricardo Cardenas: Yes, I think it's a little bit of both. There are some people on GLP-1s that when you do the research on them, they eat smaller portions or they eat out a little less, but when they eat out, they actually eat out more in casual dining. And so there is a little bit of that. But I think it's maybe even a consumer that says, "I'm just trying to be healthier or eat a little less." And so maybe there is a little less snacking. And at the lower end consumer, they probably don't have as much resource to go out as much as they did, and it's probably impacting another category more than it is impacting us. Operator: Next question today is coming from Jeffrey Bernstein from Barclays. Jeffrey Bernstein: Great. Rick, for fiscal '26, you raised your comp guide modestly. But clearly, that's in spite of maybe what many people expected, a slightly tougher macro and concerns of a consumer slowdown, and we know about the tougher compares. I think you mentioned the first quarter was modestly above your plan. But any color you could share on your confidence in raising that guide? And as we think about the current fiscal 2Q, the compares are definitely much tougher. I know, last quarter, you were willing to frame kind of what you expected for the current quarter versus your full year guide, wondering whether you think the fiscal second quarter will come in above or below kind of that new range. And then I had one follow-up. Ricardo Cardenas: Yes, Jeff, I'll start by saying we wouldn't have increased our guidance if we didn't feel confident about it. So as we look at our same-restaurant sales and our total sales -- part of the reason we raised our total sales is we're really confident in our unit count in development. We increased the number of -- well, we got rid of the low end of our range for development and we say now we're approximately 65, partly because we are -- most of the restaurants are either built or being built or open already, and some of them are coming in earlier than we thought. So we feel really good about our development pipeline. And I'll let Raj talk about the cadence of our comp, but -- for the second quarter and beyond. Rajesh Vennam: Yes, Jeff, I'd say, look, we expected as we went into the year for the back half to be not as strong in comps as the first half. But I think as the year is progressing, we're learning more and we feel really good about how even the second quarter started off, and that's all taken into consideration as we provided this guidance. But I think ultimately, the cadence will still be the fact that we still expect the back half to be lower than the first half. Jeffrey Bernstein: Understood. And then just a follow-up on your Uber partnership. I know it's still early, but it seems like you're having success with Olive Garden and Cheddar's with the 1P. I'm just wondering, first, whether you'd consider a next brand to embrace that 1P Uber delivery and whether there's any updated thoughts on potential for using Uber for the order aggregation part of things, not just delivery. Ricardo Cardenas: Yes, Jeff. We are pleased with our first-party delivery, both at Olive Garden and at Cheddar's. It continues to grow for us. We do have another brand that's wanting to embrace it, and we would expect that brand to be on the platform sometime in Q3. I won't tell you what brand that is, but they're very excited to jump into the first-party delivery. In regards to marketplace or third party, whether it's Uber or anyone else, we still have some challenges with the model. We're focused on first party right now. And we've talked about the things that we don't like about third party. If a provider can come with every solution that we have for third party or the reasons that we don't like it, then we would definitely consider it. But right now, we're very comfortable and very pleased with how first-party delivery is going. Operator: Next question is coming from Jacob Aiken-Phillips from Melius Research. Jacob Aiken-Phillips: Yes, I first wanted to double back on unit growth acceleration over like the medium to long term. I know you took away the lower end. Just how should we think about that ramping up, especially with -- I know there's some new prototypes, there's some acceleration in Canada and a couple of moving parts? Ricardo Cardenas: Yes. The development is our owned restaurants, so 65 of our restaurants. Canada is all franchised, so that doesn't count in our unit growth. We get a lot of good royalties from that, but that doesn't -- isn't a unit for us. In regards to how we're going to ramp up our, 5-year plan, has us solidly in our long-term framework of 3% to 4% of our sales growth coming from new units. And so you would expect our unit growth percentage to ramp up a little bit year-over-year. Jacob Aiken-Phillips: Great. And then just on -- I know that there were like some prototypes of like smaller, but then also some competitors are saying they're seeing some higher construction costs from like imported stuff. Any comments there? Ricardo Cardenas: Yes. We've got a couple of brands -- actually, all of our brands, especially Olive Garden and LongHorn, over years, worked on the right prototype size. Yard House and Cheddar's have just come out with new prototypes that are smaller, much more efficient and the costs are lower than it would be for building our existing prototype-size restaurants. And we've opened a few of them and they're doing really well and they're able to generate the sales that our existing prototypes are generating in general. In regards to costs, our costs are much closer and actually sometimes under our budgeted amounts, which is very different than it was before. Tariff impacts, we don't believe, are too dramatic to construction costs. And so we feel really confident about our pipeline and being able to build them at a very good return for us. Operator: Next question is coming from Jake Bartlett from Truist Securities. Jake Bartlett: My first one is on delivery. I'm hoping you can frame the mix that delivery was in the first quarter, but also what the exit rate was after the promotion. Also, whether you expect to promote similar promotions in the -- as we go forward in '26. And then I have a follow-up. Ricardo Cardenas: Yes, Jake, I'll speak specifically to Olive Garden. I think that's what you're asking for. So for Olive Garden delivery in the first quarter was about 5%. We exited at about 4%. As we mentioned, when we stopped 1 million free deliveries, we exited a little bit lower, but still 40% above where we were before the promotion. I think that was... Jake Bartlett: That was the question. And whether you expect to doing a similar promotion to 1 million... Ricardo Cardenas: Sorry. I don't know if we may do another 1 million free deliveries. I don't know, but we do have marketing funds that Uber gives us based on our volume. And so we're going to utilize those somehow. Whether it's 1 million free deliveries or doing something different, we will utilize those funds. Jake Bartlett: Got it. In terms of the Never Ending Pasta Bowl promotion, I think time is similar to last year. I'm wondering, you made a comment about consumers really grabbing -- taking towards on price certainty, some momentum in August. I'm wondering whether you can comment on how you expect Never Ending Pasta Bowl to perform this year versus last and maybe how it is performing, whether it's particularly resonating with consumers right now. Ricardo Cardenas: Yes. I will say that Never Ending Pasta Bowl is off to a good start for us. It's really at the center of Olive Garden's core equity of Never Ending Craveable abundant Italian food. And preference is up versus last year, and the team is doing an amazing job ensuring that guests get refilled. So the refill rate is way up. So I think guests are understanding that promotion more and more as we brought it back and they really understand the value that it brings. And I will say that the performance to date is in our guidance. Operator: Next question is coming from Peter Saleh from BTIG. Peter Saleh: Great. Maybe just one question, on the beef situation. Can you elaborate a little bit more on maybe what's driving it higher in the near term or more recently? And why do you think this is not sustainable? And then just more specifically, if these prices are sustained or maybe even go higher, would you take a little bit more price at LongHorn in the back end of the year? Just trying to understand the strategy there if beef prices actually go a little higher from here. Rajesh Vennam: Yes, Peter, let's just start with the dynamics, right? Right now, supply is constrained from a few things. One, there have been some pack or cutbacks and also Mexican cattle imports have been halted because of the screwworm outbreak. So those are kind of the drivers of the supply constraint. In addition to that, tariffs on Brazil are causing a significant reduction in beef imports into the U.S. So that's also creating a constraint. So those are on the supply side. The part of the reason we don't believe that kind of price increase, especially double-digit price increase you saw, we're seeing are not sustainable, is because the consumer can't afford these. And over time, there will be some -- there should be some demand destruction. And also, the amount of cattle on feed has actually been fairly consistent month to month. And at some point, this cattle has to be -- has to go to -- put to work, I guess. So those are the reasons how we think about where the prices might go. Who knows exactly? We don't know. We're just -- but we're a lot more open for those reasons. Now as we think about what would we do, yes, if these price -- if prices stay very high, that means that the demand is also very high, which means we should be able to take some price. We're not -- that's not our preferred path, but if the dynamics lead to a place where we feel good about demand, then yes, we'll take some price. Operator: Next question is coming from John Ivankoe from JPMorgan. John Ivankoe: I want to go a couple of different directions. First, Raj, in your prepared remarks, you did talk about seeing some demand destruction at retail. I wondered if you're actually seeing that, if it's recent. Some of the data that I've seen, I thought it was recent, was actually showing quite high demand at the retail level. So I just -- hopefully, got your facts being better than mine, just to kind of correct me what we're seeing in retail and if we are seeing any material signs in any slowdown in retail because that could certainly help us on the restaurant side from a supply perspective. Rajesh Vennam: Yes, John. So you're right in the fact that if you go back a few months, it's been pretty robust. But if you look at the last month of data, you're starting to see that decline. Actually, the data we have shows that the volume actually declined in the low single digits year-over-year at retail. That wasn't the case for prior, call it, 4, 5 months or so. So there was -- yes, there was some resiliency in that, but it's starting to -- at least we saw 1 month of data where it slipped into low single-digit decline year-over-year. John Ivankoe: And that's maybe just classic growing season being over and people are just shifting to other things. That's helpful. So... Rajesh Vennam: No, John, it's year-over-year. Sorry, I just want to clarify, we look at year-over-year. So seasonality is captured in the year-over-year. John Ivankoe: Yes. But it's -- we're speaking the same language, I just said that awkwardly. So it was interesting, hearing things like reduced portion prices of some -- reduced prices and some portions of some core menu items, things like Hawaiian Steak. I'm not going to name the brand that it reminds me of 20 years ago, but -- and this wasn't a Darden concept, but I've seen this done actually quite unsuccessfully over time. In other words, when consumers kind of expect to see a certain amount of food on the plate, especially at dinner, that's not something that you're necessarily happy with even if they are paying lower prices. So Rick, I'm sure you know exactly what I'm talking about. But was there anything to learn about previous history lessons in casual dining specifically? I think this was probably tried around 2007, 2008 where smaller portions at smaller prices were tried, but weren't successful. And things like Hawaiian Steak way back when, which are tried that a few people like, but it's really a lot of people different. Where are we on that stage gate process today in 2025, maybe versus some of the lack of success, the overall industry had 20 years ago? Ricardo Cardenas: John, I'll start with the Hawaiian Steak. It's not a smaller portion size. It's a Cheddar's. It's a great portion for Hawaiian Steak. And by the way, LongHorn ran Hawaiian Steak and did really well with it a few years back. So maybe there's different tastes now than they were back then. And in regards to portion size, I think if you go back 20, 30 years ago, overall portions were maybe a little bit smaller in the dinner menu already. And so if somebody brought even smaller portion, it went a little bit too far. And then -- but the way we're thinking about it is there is a consumer group out there that believes in abundance, but abundance is different for everybody. And by bringing some smaller portion sizes to the dinner menu at Olive Garden, there are still abundant portion sizes, but it also adds price breadth to the menu. So consumers can choose. We're not changing our entire menu to make it a smaller portion. We are putting items on there that are smaller with a compelling price point. And at Olive Garden, you still get the unlimited soup or salad and you get all the Breadsticks you want. So it's still a great -- it's still abundant. John Ivankoe: And maybe our consumers finally evolved that you don't need to have uneaten food on the plate to feel that you've gotten good value. You can just see just the right amount of portion and be happy with it. So that would certainly be a change versus the old America, but that would obviously be a good direction to go. Operator: Next question is coming from Lauren Silberman from Deutsche Bank. Lauren Silberman: So, I just want to go back to top line. A lot of questions, obviously, what's going on in the restaurant industry broadly. You talked about strong August. Can you just help unpack sort of what you saw in terms of cadence of comps during the quarter? Any more color on September from that? And then any differences in performance that you're seeing across the regions? Rajesh Vennam: Yes, Lauren, I think from a cadence of comps, actually, the gap to the industry was the biggest for us in August. In fact, when we look at our own internal comps, we were actually -- July was our weakest. And so for us, June was pretty strong. July was still strong, all positive, but just if you look at the weak month-to-month, July was weaker than June and August. And actually, like I said, August had the biggest gap to the industry. As far as regionality, there isn't a huge amount of regionality. It's actually what we're seeing is fairly similar to what we see -- what you kind of see in Black Box with certain markets still not performing as well, such as Texas, and Florida is starting to pick back up so it feels like Florida is getting better. And then depending on the brand, California had some decent strength. So that's all I can share regionally. There's not a lot of other stuff to get into there. Lauren Silberman: And then just a follow-up on the commodity side. What are you expecting in terms of cadence to get to the 3% to 4% for the year? I understand like there's a commodity price dynamic, but do you expect like 2Q to peak in terms of actual commodity inflation? Rajesh Vennam: At this point, yes, we think Q2 will probably the peak. But Q3, Q4, probably not that much lower. I mean by the time we get to Q4, we expect it to be a little bit better than where we would be. But Q1 would be the lowest that we just had, right? It was 1.5%. I think pretty much every quarter going forward is, we're expecting to be north of 3%, and that's how you get to the 3% to 4% guide. But Q2 is probably the peak. Operator: Next question is coming from Danilo Gargiulo from Bernstein. Danilo Gargiulo: Maybe a year ago or so, you started talking about the relevance and importance of improving the speed of service and maybe, arguably, with the increased focus on affordability or right portion for the right price, there could be even more of an overlap between consumers who might be choosing casual dining over fast food. And so I'm wondering if you have any early signs or any KPIs that are showing some momentum that you're picking up in the improvement in speed of service so far. Ricardo Cardenas: Yes, Danilo, across our brands, we're seeing some brands with some improvement and other brands that haven't really made a whole lot. And so we had a refocus on that this year at our general manager conference, and we would expect to see greater improvement in speed of service in the upcoming years. Recall, when I mentioned that, I said this is going to take a while. And it is taking a while. But the managers are really getting on board with it over the last year, and the reinforcement of our conference gives me great confidence that we're going to get better. In regards to, do we have any data to say that we're taking share from other categories, the only thing I can say is all of our consumer groups and all of our income groups were positive year-over-year in casual dining, which is probably the best chance to take share from other categories. And those other categories have had a little bit more traffic decline. So maybe we're taking share or maybe they're just losing some share. Danilo Gargiulo: And then it sounds from Raj's response that there's not a lot of regional differences maybe with the exception of Texas and maybe pockets in California. So if you're stepping back and analyzing the delta between the top-performing stores within the same brand and the bottom-performing stores within the same brand, what is the one characteristic that is driving the increased performance? And how can you make that more standardized across the rest of the group? Ricardo Cardenas: I will say this is a tried and true thing in restaurants, the thing that drives the most performance within a brand is the quality and consistency of the managers in that restaurant, and the team. And so as turnover gets better, if you've got a great general manager and a great team of managers that are running things to our standards, you have better performance. And so that's going to be restaurants for the rest of our lives. You can have restaurants that are in a market that's doing great, but the restaurant is not doing great. It all comes down to leadership. Operator: Our next question today is coming from Dennis Geiger from UBS. Dennis Geiger: Just wanted to ask if anything to note -- else to note on sort of behaviors that Olive Garden, LongHorn or broadly across the portfolio as it relates to performance across daypart or even kind of within the menu side, desserts, alcohol, anything to call out there? Rajesh Vennam: Yes. Look, I think we are seeing -- I mentioned a little bit about alcohol. There is less -- we're seeing some lower preference on alcohol across most of our brands. There is -- some brands at LongHorn, for example, has grown lunch more than their dinner, but all dayparts are growing there. And then in Fine Dining, I think we're seeing a little bit more drop-off in the business travel that's leading to some weekday weakness. But those are some of the dynamics from a consumer perspective that I can share. Operator: Next question is coming from Chris O'Cull from Stifel. Christopher O'Cull: Rick, the conversation around eliminating the tip wage seems to be ramping up. Do you believe there's a risk that it could be eliminated? And how are you thinking about any potential impact it could have on the business? Ricardo Cardenas: I would start by saying this industry has really diverse business models. And we believe that the policy environment should reflect the level of diversity in the model. As a full-service operator, our business model continues to be the best choice for our guests and our team members. And I will tell you that whatever happens, we're going to be okay with it, okay in the way we react. So I don't foresee a big change in that. But if it does, we will work through those things and come out okay. Operator: Next question is coming from Brian Vaccaro from Raymond James. Brian Vaccaro: Just two quick ones, if I could. First on the housekeeping side. Raj, could you break out the Olive Garden comps between traffic and check? And as we think about check at Olive Garden, I think it's been exceeding pricing for the last several quarters. Is it still reasonable to expect check to exceed price as you think about the next few quarters? Rajesh Vennam: Yes, Brian. Let me start with the breakdown. Olive Garden same-restaurant sales was 5.9%. Their traffic, as we measure was 2.8%, but then they also had catering of 80 basis points. So I would categorize that as 3.6% traffic growth. And then when you think about the check, the pricing was 1.9%, and Uber fees, basically the delivery service fee net of the discount, was about 40 basis points. So yes, as we go into the future, do we expect check to be a little bit higher than pricing? Yes, but it will be because of the delivery fee and service fee. That's really the driver. Yes. Brian Vaccaro: And then just as a follow-up, obviously, talking about investing in the guest experience, as you've been doing for a while, but thinking about fiscal '26 specifically as well. When you look at labor in the first quarter, it looks like labor per operating week as we look at it, was up 4.5%, maybe closer to 5%. You talked about the higher incentive comp, and obviously you have higher traffic, which takes more labor to service. But I'm curious to what degree that also reflects some reinvestments that you're making in the guest experience. And maybe you could provide a few examples of the specifics on those reinvestments. Rajesh Vennam: So Brian, let me just start by saying, from a labor perspective, our total inflation was 3.1%, right? So if you look at -- you mentioned 4.5% increase on dollars, but if you take the 3.1%, that is part of it. Then it was up about 1 point or so, but our traffic was up closer to 3% once you take into consideration the catering for -- at the Darden level. So that means we're actually getting some leverage on that traffic. And so that's really what's happening. And that's why I mentioned in the script that we were -- we had productivity improve actually year-over-year. We continue to look at ways to invest in labor. I don't think we need to get into specifics, but some of the things that Rick mentioned about speed, those are places where we're looking at. How do we help ensure that? But that doesn't translate necessarily into a labor deleverage because you actually get more throughput when we make those investments. Operator: Next question today is coming from Andrew Charles from TD Cowen. Our next question is coming from Jim Sanderson from Northcoast Research. James Sanderson: Just had a few follow-up questions. Going back to the delivery segment, have you discussed what percentage of sales mix was incremental? I think that's been a little bit of a moving target, especially given the promotions. Maybe you could update us on what you expect incrementally out of delivery for both Olive Garden and Cheddar's. Ricardo Cardenas: Yes, Jim, I'll speak specifically outside of the promotion. It's about 50% incremental. During the promotion, when you get free delivery, some of the people that would have gotten normal to go probably shifted into delivery. But outside of that, it's about 50%, both at Cheddar's and Olive Garden. James Sanderson: So relatively stable with what it has been, let's say? Ricardo Cardenas: Yes. James Sanderson: And just a follow-up question on Olive Garden, when you were talking about the breakdown of same-store sales. I didn't really detect any negative mix. And I was wondering, does that mean that the smaller portions and the promotions aren't having any meaningful impact on check? Is that the right way to look at that? Rajesh Vennam: Well, they have -- that specifically has a negative impact, but it was offset by other mix. So we are seeing -- we had -- I think we mentioned on the call, we had the Calabrian Steak and Shrimp that had a higher price, but we actually had -- saw a pretty strong preference there, that helped. So it was mostly entree mix itself tended towards higher value, sometimes maybe higher price items. Operator: Next question is coming from Andrew Charles from TD Cowen. Zachary Ogden: Yes. This is Zach Ogden on for Andrew. Could you just elaborate on where the strength is coming from for Other Businesses? Are there certain brands that are outperforming others and what would be leading to that? Ricardo Cardenas: Do you mean in the Other Business or other business? I just want to make sure I understand the question. Zachary Ogden: Yes. So the Other Businesses segment, so the 3.3% in 1Q. What was the strength coming from there? Ricardo Cardenas: Well, we mentioned that 3 of those brands were all positive, some more positive than others. I think Cheddar's was the most positive and then Yard House after that and potentially Seasons are right around there. But I think Cheddar's had the highest comp in that segment. Zachary Ogden: And then could you just comment on what you're seeing from the younger cohort more broadly, maybe just beyond delivery? Are you seeing certain -- or, I guess, relative strength or weakness among Gen Z? Ricardo Cardenas: They're fairly similar to the rest of our consumer group. Operator: Thank you. We reached end of our question-and-answer session. I'd like to turn the floor back over for any further or closing comments. Courtney Aquilla: This concludes our call. I want to remind you that we plan to release second quarter results on Thursday, December 18, before the market opens, with a conference call to follow. Thank you for participating. Operator: Thank you. That does conclude today's teleconference and webcast. You may disconnect your line at this time, and have a wonderful day. We thank you for your participation today.
Operator: Good afternoon, everyone, and thank you for participating in today's conference call to discuss Research Solutions' financial and operating results for its fiscal Fourth Quarter and Full Year ended June 30, 2025. As a reminder, this conference is being recorded. I would now like to turn the conference over to your host, Steven Hooser, Investor Relations. Steven Hooser: Thank you, David, and good afternoon, everyone. Thank you for joining us today for the Research Solutions' Fourth Quarter and Full Fiscal Year 2025 Earnings Call. On the call with me today are Roy W. Olivier, President and Chief Executive Officer; Bill Nurthen, Chief Financial Officer; and Josh Nicholson, Chief Strategy Officer. . After the market closed this afternoon, the company issued a press release announcing its results for the fourth quarter and full year [indiscernible] the release is available on the company's website at researchsolutions.com. Before Roy and Bill begin their prepared remarks, I would just like to remind you that some of the statements made during today's call will be forward looking and are made under the Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. Actual results may differ materially from those expressed or implied due to a variety of factors. We refer you to Research Solutions' recent filings with the SEC for a more detailed discussion of the risks that could impact the company's future operating results and financial condition. Also, on today's call, management will reference certain non-GAAP financial measures, which we believe provide useful information for investors. A reconciliation of those measures to GAAP measures is included in the earnings press release issued this afternoon. Finally, I would like to remind everyone that this call will be recorded and made available for replay via the company's investor relations website. I would now like to turn the call over to Roy W. Olivier, Roy? Roy Olivier: Thank you, Steven. Good afternoon, and warm thanks for joining us. Overall, we're pleased with the progress of business in FY '25. We set many new records for the company's performance, including $21 million in ARR we grew ARR 20% in FY '25 and remain focused on hitting our $30 million platform ARR target by the end of FY '27 this is not guidance, but a BHAG or a Big Hairy Audacious Goal. Our acquisition pipeline is strong, and we have several opportunities that we believe would allow us to hit that goal faster. To do that, we need to execute well on several fronts. First, we need to execute from a product perspective in terms of providing unique value delivered at the right time in the customer journey. Much of this involves development of our existing products and expanding how AI can help researchers accelerate research in a copyright compliant way. While we can always improve, we continue to make good progress in this area. Second, we need to continue to execute in our marketing and sales teams. Market has done a great job in building top of funnel leads through marketing activities, including digital spend, webinars, white pay more, we see strong results in this area. As you know, we brought a new Chief Revenue Officer in November of 2024 and have seen strong B2B sales in the second half of the year. We expect that to continue in FY '26. Third, we seek organically and through acquisitions, unique value that can be software tools, content or a combination of content that we believe are not only unique today but will remain unique in the AI world. We'll discuss this a bit later in the call in terms of how we think about our strategy going forward. Finally and most importantly, we need to have the right strategy. We have been a company in transition from a transaction-based company into a vertical SaaS company for many years. We are now in what may turn out to be a period that will drive massive change in the segments we serve due to the MPI will have on research workflows. Over the past several years, we have built a great set of software and other research tools to support research. As we look forward, large LOMs have the potential to drive massive change to research workflows so we must pivot our strategy to be where the customer is and deliver unique value at the right time, at the right place in the research workflow. In short, we will continue to improve software tools for our customers to simplify and accelerate the research process, but we will also need to improve our software APIs and create new AI-based solutions to support larger customers who will standardize on one LLM but need some unique value data that we can provide. Our AI-based products are organically growing at almost 4x the pace of our legacy products today. We expect to see strong tailwinds from AI in the next few quarters, and we think we are uniquely positioned to take advantage of that as we update and expand our products. Josh Nicholson will provide some context about that. updated strategy later in the call. For now, I'd like to pass the call over to Bill to walk through our fiscal fourth quarter and full year 2025 financial results in detail, and then I'll come back with some additional comments. Bill? . William Nurthen: Thank you, Roy, and good afternoon, everyone. I will start by first summarizing the fourth quarter results, and then we'll discuss the full fiscal year results. Please note for comparisons between the fourth quarter 2025 in the fourth quarter of 2024, those comparisons are fully organic. For fiscal year 2025, the results include 12 months of contribution from the site acquisition compared to approximately 7 months in fiscal year 2024. The fourth quarter was another really strong quarter for our business and served as further validation of how our ongoing shift to SaaS revenue is translating into expanding margins, profitability and cash flow. Total revenue for the fourth quarter of fiscal 2025 was $12.4 million compared to $12.1 million in the fourth quarter of fiscal 2024. Our platform subscription revenue increased 21% from the prior year quarter to approximately $5.2 million. The growth was primarily driven by growth in both B2C and B2B platform revenue including for the latter, a net increase of platform deployments and upsells and cross-sells into existing customers. As a mix of total revenue, platform revenue accounted for over 40% of the revenue in the quarter for the first time at 42% compared to 35% in the prior year quarter. We ended the quarter with $20.9 million in annual recurring revenue, or ARR, up 20% year-over-year. The result included another impressive quarter of B2B ARR growth. You may recall that in our last quarter's call. I commented that net ARR growth in Q3 was a company organic record of $736,000, this quarter was very close to that result as net B2B ARR growth was $724,000, which compares to $407,000 in the prior year quarter. We also added 38 net new platform deployments. The last quarter, the growth was well balanced between new sales and upsells and occurred across both Site and Article Galaxy products. The total company ARR at quarter end breaks down as $14.2 million in B2B ARR and approximately $6.7 million in normalized ARR associated with sites B2C subscribers. We did experience a modest sequential decline in B2C ARR as the late spring into summer is seasonally a difficult time for that product. As a result, the net total incremental ARR growth for the quarter was approximately $567,000. We see today's press release for how we define and use annual recurring revenue and other non-GAAP items. Transaction revenue for the fourth quarter was approximately $7.3 million compared to $7.9 million in the prior year quarter. We started seeing some year-over-year declines in paid transaction order volumes in February of 2025 and that trend continued through our fourth quarter. Our total active customer count for the quarter was 1,338 compared to 1,398 in the same period a year ago. Gross margin for the fourth quarter was 51% a 450 basis point improvement over the fourth quarter of 2024. This was the first time in the company's history that blended gross margin has been in excess of 50% for a quarter and platform gross profit contributed over 70% of the total gross profit in the quarter. The platform business recorded a gross margin of 88.5% compared to 85.3% in the prior year quarter. This was an unusually high result and I suspect it could come down some in future quarters, but not materially. Gross margin in our Transaction business was 24.1% compared to 25.4% in the prior year quarter. The decrease was primarily attributable to lower fixed cost coverage due to the lower revenue base. I expect transaction gross margins to look more like this quarter's result in future quarters, should we continue to experience similar year-over-year declines in transaction revenue. Total operating expenses in the quarter were $5.1 million compared to $5 million in the prior year quarter as increased sales and marketing expenses and general and administrative expenses were partially offset by lower stock compensation costs. I will comment that while sales and marketing expenses were up year-over-year, they were down sequentially. This is due to some seasonality we have in our accruals that typically produce a sequential reduction in sales and marketing expense between Q3 and Q4. As a result, I expect sales and marketing expense to look more like what we saw in the third quarter of 2025 as we look ahead to future quarters. Lastly, the Q4 result for general and administrative expenses did include over $100,000 in severance-related charges that were accrued at year-end. Other income for the quarter was $1.2 million and was primarily attributable to a favorable adjustment to the final earnout determination per site. Other expenses for the prior year quarter totaled $3.5 million, which included a $4.3 million charge related to an earn-out adjustment in that period per site. Net income for the quarter was $2.4 million or $0.07 per diluted share compared to a net loss of $2.8 million or $0.09 per diluted share in the prior year quarter. Adjusted EBITDA for the quarter was $1.6 million, which was a 13% margin and a new company quarterly record compared to $1.4 million in the fourth quarter of last year. Now let me turn to our results for the full fiscal year 2025, which was also another record year for the company in many respects. Total revenue for fiscal 2025 was approximately $49.1 million, a 10% increase from fiscal 2024. Platform subscription revenue increased 36% to roughly $19 million. From an ARR perspective, we added over $2.1 million in net B2B ARR for the fiscal year. And total deployments ended the year at 1,171, up 150 for the year. Net B2C ARR increased just under $1.4 million for the year. Transaction revenue for fiscal 2025 was $30.1 million, a 2% decrease from the prior year. The decrease, as previously mentioned, is attributable to the declines in order volumes we experienced in the second half of the fiscal year. Gross margin for fiscal 2025 was 49.3%, a 530 basis point improvement over fiscal 2024. The result represents a 23% year-over-year increase in the company's gross profit. Total operating expenses in fiscal 2025 were $21.7 million compared to $20.4 million in the prior year. The increase is attributable to higher sales and marketing expenses, offset by lower general and administrative expense and lower stock compensation expense. We intentionally invested in sales and marketing expenses in fiscal 2025 and believe we are seeing some of that pay off with the recent quarterly performance in net B2B ARR growth. Other expense for the year was $1.2 million compared to other expense of $2.9 million in fiscal 2024. And -- both years reflect net adjustments -- net expense adjustments of $1.7 million and $5.1 million, respectively, made related to the site earn-out. Net income for fiscal 2025 was $1.3 million or $0.04 per diluted share compared to a net loss of $3.8 million or $0.13 per diluted share in the prior year. Adjusted EBITDA for the year was $5.3 million, a company record compared to $2.2 million in fiscal 2024. It also represents the first time in the company's history that full fiscal year's adjusted EBITDA margin crossed the 10% threshold. Before I discuss cash flow on our balance sheet, I would like to take a minute to discuss the final determination of the site earn-out. The final earn-out was determined to be $15.4 million. This was to be paid 50% in cash and 50% in stock over 8 quarters. However, through an offer to site shareholders, we increased the cash mix portion of the earn-out payment to approximately 62%. We made this offer given the confidence we have in our cash flow and the desire to issue less shares as part of the overall transaction purchase price. We made the first payment on the earnout in August, which consisted of approximately $1.3 million in cash and approximately 265,000 shares. Future cash payments will be approximately $1.2 million each quarter and the shares to be issued will change quarterly based on a market calculation of their value prior to the distribution of the shares. The payments will be every 3 months and will be completed in May 2027. Turning to cash flow. It has been very satisfying to see the transformation in cash flow in the business over the past few years. Our cash flow has continued to outperform our adjusted EBITDA which I think is a testament to the quality of our earnings and the validity of our SaaS revenue mix shift model. In fiscal 2025, we generated over $7 million in cash flow from operations which has almost double the result from the last year of approximately $3.6 million. This cash flow has translated into a nice cash build on our balance sheet. I'll remind everyone that when we completed the site acquisition in December 2023, our cash balance dropped to $2.7 million. Now only 18 months later, we were able to end fiscal year 2025 with a cash balance of $12.2 million, and there are no outstanding borrowings under our $500,000 revolving line of credit. As a result, barring any strategic M&A-type activities, we expect that we can make the site earn-out payments in fiscal year 2026 and still end the year with a higher cash balance than we have today. As we look ahead, we are enthusiastic about the momentum in our B2B ARR growth and believe that can continue. There are some competitive pressures we are experiencing in the B2C space that may affect near-term growth, but we remain positive regarding the long-term prospects for that business as well as our ability to convert certain groups of B2C users to larger B2B platform sales. Lastly, transaction revenue growth was challenging in the back half of fiscal 2025. We expect it to continue to be challenging in the first half of fiscal year 2026, but are optimistic about a flattening of the decline or even a possibility of a return to low levels of growth as we get into the back half of fiscal 2026. From an expense standpoint, we will continue to invest in sales and marketing as well as in technology and product development, while aiming to reduce our overall general and administrative. From an adjusted EBITDA perspective, I expect to follow the same seasonality as last year with the first quarter being potentially a slight dip sequentially from this quarter, but a beat to last year's Q1 result. Q2 will likely be our weakest quarter and then our strongest quarters will be in the back half of the year. All things considered, we remain on track to have another record year of performance. Further, our present cash balance, paired with our expanding adjusted EBITDA and cash flow, leave us better positioned than ever to execute on M&A opportunities. I'll now turn the call back over to Roy. Roy Olivier: Thanks, Bill. A few additional comments about our FY '25 results. As a reminder, we made several investments during the year, some of which are, we invested in a new Chief Revenue Officer, who joined in November of '24 and has overhauled the way we go to market. These changes have driven nice results in the second half of the year, and we expect to continue to see that in FY '26. As a result of his efforts, we have signed more large contracts in recent months, including several over $100,000 in ARR than we've closed in the company's history. We've also seen strong results from the new academic focused sales team we formed in early FY '25. It's our fastest-growing segment and generated new bookings equal to the long-standing corporate focused team. That said, our business remains 80-plus percent corporate customers. We made a change in leadership over our transactions business. As previously noted, that business has seen headwinds, but we have some levers we can pull to improve results. The new team is aggressively evaluating ways to do that and working with our product management and software engineering teams to implement those improvements. We have seen some short-term successes and we'll report more in our Q1 call. We've also made several changes to the software engineering and software development teams over the year. We believe those changes will accelerate development velocity, and provide more high-value features to our customers as we go through FY '26. We revamped how we identify and pursue acquisition targets, as a result of the changes we made, we have a large pipeline in place today. The targets we have are actionable, meaning valuation expectations seem realistic and add new workflows or content that we believe will fit well into our customer base. In addition, we believe our products are fit into their customer base. I'm confident we'll be able to move forward with one or more deals in FY '26. In addition, given our strong cash generation, I believe we can finance those deals primarily through senior debt and cash. I have a strong bias towards sellers who want to stay with the company and grow the combined business and want stock to do so. However, I expect deal structures will be more weighted toward cash at close. We also invested resources in time to create a new source of revenue with the recently announced AI rights product. Every customer of ours is concerned about copyright compliance and wants to make sure they have the rights they need when they need them. The best example of that recently is AI rights. Our solution allows the customer to know what rights they have in a single click and acquire rights as needed. It allows the customer to use AI, provides new revenue source to the publishers and add real value to our product. It's been very well received by customers and our publishing partners, including some of our largest customers. I've got a few more comments about the future, but right now, I'd like to pass it over to Josh, our Chief Strategy Officer, to walk you through some of the things we're doing to drive growth in this new AI-driven world. Josh? Josh Nicholson: Thanks, Roy, and hello, everyone. Today, I'd like to highlight some of the broader shifts we're seeing across the web with the rise of LLM and chat bots and how these changes are creating new challenges as well as opportunities for us. Increasingly, more people are performing what the Wall Street Journal called zero-click search, that is people are turning to AI as answer engines and getting good enough answers without having to click through to the underlying data, whether that is a news article or Reddit thread or in our case, a scientific article. As Roy and Bill have highlighted, this is manifesting on our side with [indiscernible] transaction revenue slipping and publishing partners reporting declines in traditional usage-based statistics such as full text reads and downloads. . Our internal surveys from users point specifically to AI being the reason people are acquiring less articles. In short, AI is shifting demand from article retrieval to structured reasoning, which means the future of research and our products must be task and databased. Over the last few calls, I've highlighted how our AI strategy is to focus on specific researcher based workflows with AI, differentiating ourselves from more general tools by focusing on the first and last mile of the researcher journey, something that might be too small or too complex for a generic tool to accomplish. We will continue to focus on specific researcher needs as we develop our products and go-to-market approach, but we will also increasingly look to be where the customer is or what we call a headless strategy. We see site and article galaxy increasingly being used as an API-first platform. Our customers are no longer just logging into a single interface. They are embedding site directly into their own systems, dashboards and even generative AI assistance. This headless strategy is intentional by decoupling our services from a fixed UI, we enable developers and institutions to full citation graph, evidence summaries and right cleared full text content directly into their workflow. Already, we have deployed various API first deals across both products, some of which have been our largest contracts ever for our respective product site in Article Galaxy. This approach allows us to go where the user is through integrations into internal built tools, third-party products and to shift our focus from an arm's race to an ARM supplier. We have launched an AI TDM rights offering that allows our customers to easily and securely get AI rights for articles they have acquired. And while many publishers might negotiate these rights directly, it's important for us to display that information for our users and to make it possible to acquire the rights where necessary. Closely tied to this, we are exploring working directly with publishers to enable AI models and agents to discover content and source AI rights from a single pan publisher resource called an MCP or Model Context Protocol. We believe such infrastructure is the future of how large language models interact with research articles, presenting the path for AI models to securely clear scientific articles, retreat citations, verify claims and integrate trustworthy literature directly into its reasoning process. In practice, this means that whether you're a pharmaceutical company building an in-house assistant and academic using a generic AI your company has licensed or a publisher enabling AI-driven services Research Solutions becomes the compliant safe bridge between proprietary content, licensing and reliable AI output. Taken together, these initiatives mean Research Solutions is no longer just a distributor of articles or a platform for positioning ourselves as the building blocks of scientific AI, the infrastructure that ensures research content is accessible, reliable and legally cleared for the age of generative AI. I'm excited by our progress as a team and I think we're uniquely positioned to serve the needs of publishers and researchers in an AI-native world. Thank you again, and I'll now turn it back to Roy to wrap up. Roy Olivier: Thanks Josh, I mentioned in my introductory comments, the things we need to execute on in FY '26 and beyond. The most important one of those things is strategy. We have spent a lot of time in FY '25 looking over -- looking -- thinking about all the different things we do and what we might do that is unique. A few of those things are managing the customer's library of scientific research, including what rights came with those articles, the ability to easily access rights the customer needs when they need it. The site badge, which is like a FICO score or Rotten Tomato score for an article being evaluated and that is unique in the market today. The site search, which includes searching beyond the paywall for most of the world's content. This generates better results, is copyright compliant and actually improved sales of articles for the publisher. Generally, the large LLM search abstracts and have near 0 behind the paywall access. Because of all of this, site generates far fewer hallucinations in its results. We also deliver articles from 2,000-plus publishers, a vast majority of those are delivered in a few seconds. And we integrate curated data from several sources to improve AI-generated output. We have the ability to do that today given the databases we acquired as part of the Resolute acquisition. That is a big part of our headless strategy because it will offer our customers curated databases to include insights assistant or other AI-generated output. . In short, I think we're on the right track in terms of an updated strategy that will position us well in the new AI world. We also think the operational improvements and investments mentioned above will enable us to execute that strategy, both organically and through acquisitions. One final comment. I did mention in the pre-release of our earnings back in August, that we were focused -- or that we continue to be focused on the weighted rule of 40. We -- in FY '25, the calculation was a 34 in the rule of 40, and as we think about our FY '26, we expect to make continued progress toward the 40 number. Just to -- as a reminder, the weighted rule of 40 is your ARR growth rate as a percentage times 1.33 plus our adjusted EBITDA margin as a percentage times 0.67. So with a little more weighting on growth, we continue to lean toward investing in growth to make it to the weighted rule of 40. After all that, we remain excited about where we are, how we're positioned and where we're going. And I'd like to turn the call back over to the operator for questions. Operator? Operator: [Operator Instructions] We'll take our first question from Jacob Stephan with Lake Street. Jacob Stephan: Maybe just first, wondering if you could touch on the nice sequential uptick in ASP. Maybe help us kind of think through some of the drivers of this? Was it more cross-sell, upsells or kind of larger new deal activity? Roy Olivier: Bill, do you want to take that one? William Nurthen: Yes, sure. No, we are -- I mean, part of what we've seen with the onboarding of the new CRO and some of the sales training that we've been doing is that we are actually getting larger deals. And so I think Roy mentioned we had -- we've got announced just recently a couple of hundred thousand dollar deals in. And these are in the past few months, we've seen some of the larger deals in our company's history. I'll also say there was sort of a period where we had some churn from Resolute in the past, which was traditionally more of a larger deal where that basically caused a decline in our ASP. And so that has kind of leaned off and now we're at a place where we can sort of build back ASP. And I think it will be a focus as we do additional sales training, bring on some better salespeople over time and again, continue to see some larger deals. Also just as it relates to some of the API type deals that Josh was talking about. Jacob Stephan: Okay. Got it. And you kind of ask one question further on Resolute. Obviously, you noted some churn issues kind of starting off there. But how are you using the product? How do you see the Resolute software adapting to your new strategy of being the API provider for LLMs? Roy Olivier: Well, Resolute has always had a strong API and has not necessarily had a strong UI in their software. So Resolute works much better in this headless strategy than it works as a product unless we go in and rewrite big parts of the product. which we have not wanted to do. So we haven't talked about Resolute in a number of quarters because it's a product we don't focus on. We focus on a heavy investment in site and heavy investment in Article Galaxy, which, of course, are driving all of our growth. However, as we develop this headless strategy we talked about, being able to plug in the 13 additional databases via API into the workflow kind of resurrected that product in terms of selling that data to customers. And Josh, you may have a few other comments on that. Go ahead, if you do Josh Nicholson: Yes. I'd really just emphasize that there are these 13 highly curated databases kind of coming to us for an API to get and access to the article, to get clinical trials, to get research articles, to get news articles, all these different things is a big value add for customers. And so I'm personally excited because it's kind of been right there in front of us for a while, and it's very easy to execute on. The one thing I would also say about the API-first deals is that by embedding ourselves into the infrastructure of some of these large companies, I think those contracts become very sticky. And so I'm personally quite excited by the Resolute databases really coming back to life as a focus for us. Jacob Stephan: Okay. Maybe just one last one, more on the kind of competitive environment in this headless strategy. Are you aware of anybody else that's kind of doing -- running the same API strategy to kind of plug in with the larger LLMs? Roy Olivier: Do you want to take that, Josh? Josh Nicholson: Yes. I think I think what we're starting to see in the ecosystem is some publishers doing this. And so if you look at why we, I think the third largest publisher, they are directly opening up their articles or segments of their articles to LLM providers such as Anthropic. On their recent earnings call, they talked about leaning more into AI and specifically AI licensing deals. And so I think we're going to start to see this across the ecosystem from publishers themselves. I think publishers will have somewhat of a challenge becoming a pan-publisher source for this, largely because competitors don't want to give their content to other competitors. And so this is what we're talking about when we say we're pretty uniquely positioned is that we work with virtually all publishers. We're already driving them revenue. And this is really, as Roy and I have said in the past, kind of a shift from [indiscernible] . And so I increasingly see these bits of articles or chunks of articles and specifically the data from articles being something that's valuable that integrates directly into tools, whether that's a hyperscaler or whether that's an internally licensed LLM at a large corporate or even an academic institution. So I think it's an exciting time, and I think there's a lot of people kind of looking at this and trying to say, how do we bridge this gap between research articles and AI. Operator: We'll take our next question from Richard Baldry with ROTH Capital. Richard Baldry: Same question I asked last quarter, the COGS line was actually slightly down on the platform side, while revenues were up pretty good. Can you talk again about sort of the trends there, whether this is sort of getting the peak optimization, I think about it that way? Or is there further cost improvements that can come on the platform side even as the top line is scaling? Roy Olivier: Bill, do you want to take that? William Nurthen: Yes, sure. Yes, some of this is effectively using our cash. I mean really where this is coming from is we sort of stabilized the labor base there that grows kind of just was like not a lot of additional headcount, but just cost of living increases, things like that. But we've really tried where we could to lower or limit the increase in the hosting cost. And some of what we've been able to do is take the cash flow that we've had and apply that to some prepayments where we prepay some of our space with Amazon Web Services and other providers. And as a result, we're actually getting it cheaper over time by prepaying. So I'm not sure how much we can do that going forward to sort of see it decrease, but I think we can do that to the extent that it will increase less than at the pace that we're growing the revenue, which again is why I think you're seeing some very high numbers on the gross margin side for platforms. We're also seeing in certain areas, AI becoming cheaper, so as we grow, some of the AI providers we use get cheaper over time. And so that's impacting the number as well. Richard Baldry: Okay. Then on the AI-related deals being 4x the growth rate of non-AI, do you think that can continue at this pace? Is there sort of eventually the scale of that base gets big enough that it can't keep up at that sort of delta? How do we think about that headed into the next sort of year or 2 as a driver? Roy Olivier: Yes. I think we expect to see similar results in the B2B space. In the B2C space, we don't expect it to grow as much as it did in FY '25 simply because the base is getting bigger and it is getting more competitive. But Josh or Bill, I'd invite you to add any comments you might have. Josh Nicholson: Yes. I mean I would just again emphasize I think with this headless strategy, this is internal tools or internal companies using internal AI and this allows us to price based on like the usage of this, right, the calls that they're making to our API. And so what we're seeing is as these tools ramp up, it's less looking at here's a 100-person seat license versus here's a company-wide integration into a tool that they're heavily training on. And so I think that will command larger check sizes at B2B. And I think as we started to prove that out, those will continue to grow because we're going into places that companies are already investing a lot of money into. Richard Baldry: Great. And last for me would be, can we dig a little deeper into the strength in the deals above $100,000? So are you going after a different type of customer? Or are you going after a different value prop? Are they larger deals per customer? And how are you achieving that on sort of a similar customer base? Or is it different verticals? How are you getting sort of larger deals out of what presumably is a similar customer set? Roy Olivier: Yes, there's a few moving parts. One is the new sales process and the new CRO has brought in a number of new people who are not kind of preprogrammed with an expectation of what we should sell a product at. And a big part of the new sales process is spending time qualifying the customer and understanding what their pain points are, what value we can use to address those pain points and what the economic impact to them will be if we do. And then the products are being priced accordingly. So I think part of it is -- and I think it's probably a big part of it is sales execution and the way we're selling now. Secondarily, we did wholesale change the pricing on the academic segment of the business, not much of that is reflected in FY '25. But what we did do in '25 is we experimented with different pricing points. In other words, when we acquired site, they had a fairly set pricing model for libraries. We sold at that price point. We sold at price points way above that price point, and we kind of played around with pricing in FY '25 until we figured out a new model that we recently implemented. So some of it is just our standard pricing has changed. And I guess that would be the 2 main drivers that I can think of. Bill, is there any more that you can comment on? William Nurthen: Not too much. I do think it's a sales execution thing. And really, before we frame a proposal to a customer, really trying to understand their pain points and how much value the product is going to deliver for them and then pricing that value accordingly. Operator: [Operator Instructions] We'll take our next question from Derek Greenberg with Maxim Group. Derek Greenberg: The first question I have is just on a recent partnership you guys announced with LibKey and the integration there. I was wondering if you could just talk a little bit more about this partnership and the opportunity there. Roy Olivier: Yes. As that address -- I'll jump in and Josh, you can add some comments. But basically, in the academic segment, LibKey is a big player in the library, providing a product that's called a Link Resolver. And Link Resolver, what it basically does is when you do a search and you get an answer to your search in terms of a scientific article, it kind of resolves where you go to get to the link to obtain that article. And they've been doing that for a number of years, private company successful. And we also work with, frankly, 3 other link resolver companies that we worked with for a number of years. And so putting together the Third Iron deal, Third Iron is the company that owns and -- I'm sorry, the LibKey product. We've run a number of webinars in conjunction with them, which introduce us into their libraries. And keep in mind, academics is new to us. I don't think we have more than 200 academic customers. There are 10,000-plus libraries out there that we can sell into. So we view partnering with Third Iron around LibKey as an opportunity to expand our academic business as well as kind of revisiting the partnerships we have with some other providers that provide a product like LibKey to expand into their academic library business. Josh, anything you want to add? Josh Nicholson: I don't have too much to add except to say that we look at a variety of different services that Roy mentioned to get our users access, whether that's subscription-based access that they have from their university or whether they're an individual at a university, access to the content as quickly as possible. And so there's really kind of like a hierarchy of needs and looking at how can we make sure we're facilitating access for the end user in the most robust and kind of efficient way possible. And I think leveraging our partnership with LibKey is one piece of that. Derek Greenberg: Okay. Got it. Turning to the cross-sell between Site and Article Galaxy. I was wondering if you have any statistics you're willing to provide in terms of what percent of Article Galaxy customers are also customers of Site. I recall previously, you said this was single digits and you were looking to get to double digits. I was just wondering how things are progressing on that side. Roy Olivier: Yes. We have not disclosed that number. I can tell you that -- and Bill, correct me if I'm wrong, a vast majority of the site sales in FY '25 are to what we call a new, new customer. In other words, we're not doing business with them on the Article Galaxy side. We do some cross-sells and a lot of times, those cross-sells are pretty big from an ARR perspective. But I think if you look at it from a logo perspective, vast majority of the logos are new, new customers. Bill, anything to correct that? William Nurthen: Yes. I would still describe it, excuse me, as low to mid-single-digit penetration on the Article Galaxy customer base. Derek Greenberg: Okay. That's helpful. My last question is just on margins. We saw some really good improvement this year. EBITDA margins growing 5%, doubling year-over-year. I was wondering, looking towards '26, how we see expansion relative to this year in margins and how you expect, I guess, operating expenses to grow compared to revenue? Roy Olivier: Bill? William Nurthen: Yes. I think part of the question for us is how much do we invest back into sales and marketing and tech and product development. As I said, we're trying to basically try to keep investing in the sort of those 2 top lines on our expense base, sales and marketing, tech product development while cutting sales -- excuse me, cutting G&A, things like stock comp where we can. But I will say -- so in other words, I think we'll definitely cross the 10% margin threshold for the year. We want to stay above that. I think next year, we can be above where we are today, but we may temper that a bit. In other words, I think we could run 15 plus, but I don't think we're going to do that. I think we'll invest back into it. And so we'll kind of be somewhere in between that kind of 10% to 15% range, and that's where I expect we'll kind of end up from an EBITDA margin. I think gross margin will continue to expand. That will be 50%-plus for the year next year. And expense base, tough to say. I mean, again, I think it could -- we'll kind of pull levers where we need to pull levers. But again, could be 10% growth on the sort of SG&A type bucket. But again, I think I'll have more update on the Q1 call as we see our Q1 results come in and as we sort of further define and chart out how we're going to manage expenses and invest in growth for the rest of the year. I do think transactions are a key element of this. And on our own internal models, as I said, we're modeling those down at least for the first half of the year. And so if you are sort of building models and such, I would do similar from that standpoint until we start to see that turn the other way. But given that, I still think we'll be kind of at the levels I talked about as we look ahead to '26. Roy Olivier: I did get one question via e-mail. Can we explain the strategy to stem the decline and resume growth in the transactions business? To address that, what I would say is the current thinking is product improvement to improve conversion percentages. And I think part B of that is understanding what's driving the change. In other words, we're seeing a significant year-over-year increase in monthly average users and weekly average users which is great. But what we're seeing is a big increase in them acquiring free documents and not paying for documents. As Josh mentioned, we recently did a survey that suggested some of our customers, around 10%-ish of our customers are buying less documents because they can get a good enough answer from AI. So our current thinking is to improve -- we have a massive amount of traffic in site, and we have a massive amount of traffic in Article Galaxy. And so our current thinking is to work to make -- to improve the conversion rate to also take advantage of the opportunity, you just bought this article, here's 3 other articles like it. You just bought this article, here's 5 articles that have a supporting statement in them related to the one you acquired or have a contrasting statement in them related to the one that you acquired. Do you want to buy these? So it's really -- I use the comment internally, we want to be the Amazon of Docdel. We want to make it super easy. It's not as easy as it could be today. We want to suggest it sell. We don't really do that today at all and do some other things. As I mentioned, we already took action on one barrier and saw a pretty nice improvement, which if it were to continue for all 52 weeks because we look at weekly data, would be a high 6-figure improvement in revenue to that business. And as you know, that's a pretty EBITDA profitable business for us. So we've got a number of things in the works, but strategically, we focus on SaaS revenue and AI, but we do have a fairly large around 60 people that work on the Docdel business. The leader in that business now is a guy who's very technologically savvy, and he's gone through every internal process, every customer process that we have with the intent of how do we make this more seamless and more suggestive to drive more sales in that business. Back to you, operator. Operator: And there are no further questions on the phone line at this time. So I'll turn the program back to you, Roy, for any additional or closing remarks. Roy Olivier: Okay. Well, thanks, everybody, for your time, and I look forward to connecting in November to discuss our first quarter fiscal 2026 results. Have a great day. Operator: This does conclude the Research Solutions fiscal and operating results for its fiscal fourth quarter and full year ended June 30, 2025. Thank you for your participation, and you may disconnect at this time.
John Messenger: Great. Good morning, everybody. Thank you for being with us this morning for the Barratt FY '25 full year results meeting. Just a couple of points of housekeeping. There is no fire alarm expected. So if there is an alarm, follow Mike through that door, because he will be the first off or through this door with myself. We're going to start with David in a moment. So David is going to do a first intro, then pass it over to Mike, and then return to David, and then we'll open it up for Q&A. But with that, I'll hand over to David. Thanks, David. David Thomas: Thanks, John, in your comparing role. So good morning, everyone, and welcome to the first full year Barratt Redrow presentation. So as John said, Mike and I are going to take you through our FY '25 performance and current trading as well as updates on sales outlets and also building safety. We'll conclude by looking at the market and the underlying fundamentals and why Barratt Redrow is best place to perform across the cycle. First of all, I'd like to just take you through some of our key messages for today. In FY '25, the market clearly remained challenging. Affordability was a constraint for many and consumer confidence remained low with political and economic uncertainty persisting. Despite this, the business has produced a very resilient performance, both operationally and financially, alongside completing the majority of the Redrow integration whilst delivering cost synergies well ahead of target. The business remains financially robust, underpinned by our strong balance sheet. And now through our acquisition of Redrow, we have 3 distinct brands that position us well for future growth. So looking in a little more detail at the operational highlights from last year. Bringing the Redrow brand into the business was, of course, a particular highlight, allowing us to reach most of the market as well as capitalize on synergy opportunities. We received CME clearance in October 2024 and as mentioned, have already completed the bulk of the integration. This allows us to concentrate on maximizing the benefits of the combination and driving the total business forward. In the year, we remained active in the land market, enhancing our land position through strong approval levels utilizing our numerous land channels. We delivered 16,500 homes, which is a significant achievement in what is a challenging market. I would also like to take a moment to highlight some of our externally accredited achievements over the past year. Our repeated success in the HBF ratings and the NHBC Pride in the Job Awards are testament to the dedication of our teams across the business as well as the quality of the training and the customer first culture we maintain across the group. This quality is also reflected in our Trustpilot scores given by our customers, which award all 3 brands with the highest rating of Excellent. Mike will cover the financials in much more detail, but just to pull out a few highlights. Whilst our completions came in modestly below guidance, our adjusted profit before tax and PPA was in line with market expectations. This reflected our rapid progress on cost synergy delivery with GBP 69 million confirmed in the year and GBP 20 million crystallized in FY '25, double our previous forecast. Our return on capital employed, excluding PPA, improved to 10.7% from 9.5%. We finished the year with a strong net cash position, supporting our growth and capital allocation plans. Now looking at reservations. Our growing portfolio of PRS partners helped to increase our overall reservation rate to 0.64. Additionally, some improvement in mortgage competition and availability provided a boost to our net private reservation rate, excluding PRS and other multiunit sales. However, the improvement in the rate was offset by the reduced number of sales outlets and our opening order book. Turning now to completions. Our total completions were down 8% compared to the aggregated figure for FY '24. This was due to a reduction in affordable completions, reflecting the nature and timing of these types of deals. However, we were pleased that our underlying private completions in the year were up around 3.5%. Our average selling prices saw price inflation of around 1% with customers remaining very sensitive to both increases in headline prices and reductions in incentive levels. Other increases in underlying private ASP were largely due to increased delivery of larger homes outside of London. For more detail on reservation rates, completions and ASPs, please see the information in the appendices. Our land bank supports our medium-term growth ambitions. Our multiple land pipelines allow us to source high-quality land throughout the cycle. While planning remains a slow process, we are very optimistic about the reforms and the positive changes we will see once the legislation is passed. Gladman remains an important part of our business and will also benefit from the planning reforms, being the partner of choice continues to benefit us in the land market as well. In the year, we announced the MADE partnership alongside Homes England and Lloyds Banking Group, and also the West London partnership with places for London, giving us access to further high-quality land opportunities. Moving on to outlets. The proposed planning reforms, as I've said, are extremely positive. However, they have taken longer to come into law than we expected. Therefore, as announced in our July trading update, we expect outlet numbers in FY '26 to be largely flat. From FY '27, we will start to see organic outlet growth plus the benefit of our revenue synergy outlets. As seen on this graph, the vast majority of our FY '27 outlets are already open or have detailed planning concern. In FY '28, there is still a relatively low proportion of forecast outlets that rely on future planning approvals. This provides us with excellent visibility over the next few years and gives us confidence in our growth forecasts. On current trading, in July and August, we saw our net private reservation rate, excluding PRS, increased slightly compared to the same period in FY '25. However, we recognize that the market remains subdued. And after speculation about stamp duty, some customers are going to wait to see the impact of the budget in late November. Meanwhile, the lack of PRS reservations in the period simply reflects the timing of deals. Our year-to-date completions are marginally ahead of last year's and our forward sold position is in line. So we are very pleased with the solid start to the financial year. So I'm now going to hand over to Mike who will take you through our FY '25 performance and financials. Michael Scott: Thanks, David. Good morning, everyone. So as David said, I'll take you through our FY '25 performance and also spend a few minutes this morning on building safety. This slide shows FY '25 performance against the reported position for FY '24, which obviously excludes any impact of the Redrow acquisition. I'll touch on the P&L metrics shortly. But you can see here our total home completions of 16,565 homes and strong closing net cash position of GBP 773 million after the payment of GBP 249 million of dividends, GBP 50 million spent on the share buyback and just over GBP 100 million spent on building safety remediation. So if I move on now to a more meaningful comparison of performance as Barratt Redrow. As we did at the half year, we're focusing on the FY '25 performance stripping out the impact of deal purchase price allocation adjustments, which I'll touch on later. And these are noncash accounting adjustments, which largely fall away from FY '26 onwards. We think this is the best view of underlying trading in the business during the year. In the comparative for FY '24, we're including Redrow here from the 24th of August 2023, but without any adjustment for accounting policies. And we've put a more detailed slide in the appendices if anyone has the appetite which shows the reconciliation of all of these amounts to ensure you've got full transparency. So several points to highlight. First of all, total home completions, as David said, were down 7.8% as a result of lower outlet numbers during the year. Despite the lower volume, adjusted gross profit was broadly flat at GBP 970.3 million, and gross margin improved by 30 basis points to 17.4%, which mainly reflected modest sales price inflation and the positive mix effect of more recently acquired land coming into production. Adjusted operating profit was up 2.9% at GBP 595.4 million, with margin up 50 basis points at 10.7% reflecting the benefit of cost synergy delivery during the year. Adjusted profit before tax was GBP 591.6 million, slightly ahead of guidance in July, and adjusted EPS was 30.8p, which delivers a full year dividend up 8.6% to 17.6p. So overall, we're pleased with the performance of the combined group delivered in the year despite the reduced total home completions and particularly positive to see both gross and operating margins moving in the right direction. This slide updates on the accounting fair value adjustments that have been finalized since our provisional position at the half year, and 4 changes to draw out here. First of all, the uplift on land and work in progress is now GBP 120.4 million, that's up from GBP 93 million at the half year, and that reflects the final valuation of sites in the opening balance sheet. Secondly, as I mentioned back in February, the recognition threshold for building safety liabilities is lower than normal for Redrow because we were required to bring contingent liabilities onto the balance sheet by the accounting rules. As we detailed in the July trading statement, we've increased Redrow's building safety provisions to take into account concrete frame issues in London, and this has increased this adjustment to the GBP 144.5 million shown here. The final changes relate to the tax effect of the fair value adjustments, resulting in a GBP 94 million adjustment to deferred tax. So goodwill recognized on the Redrow transaction is, therefore, GBP 321.9 million and that's up from the provisional estimate of GBP 259 million. So again, just to note that most of these fair value impacts have actually already unwound in FY '25 with a reduction of GBP 103.3 million in adjusted profit before tax. We're expecting a further GBP 20 million charge in FY '26 before this becomes immaterial to future years. So moving on to land, and this is the updated position on embedded gross margin in the land bank. And pleasingly, the land bank margin continues to improve, up 90 basis points since half year to 19.2% at the end of June. So with little net inflation impact, roughly 1/3 of the improvement came from the utilization of land in the half and the remaining 2/3 from the new sites that we've added to the land bank. And as you know, we remain focused on improving this position over the medium term to our current gross margin hurdle rate of 23% by optimizing price, managing build cost inflation effectively and bringing new land into production. So moving on to look at adjusted operating margin in FY '25. And from last year's Barratt only operating margin, we saw a reduction of 120 basis points from reduced volume. That was almost all offset by improved pricing across the year. And as we've said previously, build cost inflation was broadly flat in FY '25. Looking at our same site, same house type measure of inflation, which covers around 1/3 of our volume, like-for-like sales price inflation was around 1.4% in the year. Last year, we saw a step-up in completed development costs, but these have normalized this year, resulting in a positive margin benefit of 80 basis points. The impact of other mix effects, including Redrow coming into the group, contributed 70 basis points together with a further 30 basis points from the cost synergies we realized during the year. Our adjusted operating margin before the impact of fair value PPA adjustments was therefore 10.7%. And you can see the impact of those PPA adjustments, which take margin to 9%, flat on the Barratt only margin from last year. So now just to update on cost synergies. We're making really good progress on realizing the cost synergies target of at least GBP 100 million with GBP 20 million included in the income statement in FY '25. With 9 office closures confirmed, 6 were completed by year-end and 3 are in the final stages of closing at the end of June with GBP 23 million of savings confirmed. The head office rationalization is also underway, and will complete shortly with GBP 21 million confirmed at the 29th of June. And on procurement, we're making good progress in aligning pricing and terms across key materials categories with GBP 25 million confirmed at the 29th of June. As we said, our operational leadership was aligned and effective from the 1st of July 2025, and the IT integration is in progress with the migration of 6 remaining divisions expected to complete in FY '26. Having crystalized GBP 20 million of cost synergies in FY '25, we're well on track to deliver an incremental GBP 45 million in FY '26. So on revenue synergies, just to give you the latest numbers to date, we've now submitted 25 planning applications at the end of August, and we've already received planning permission on 9 of those sites. We expect to submit the remaining applications during the course of FY '26, and we're very much on track to see the first incremental outlets ready to open at the start of FY '27. So now I'd like to spend a few minutes just updating on building safety. So as you know, our approach from the start of this issue has been to focus on the safety of the buildings we've built and the people who live in them. We've been very engaged with government, and we were the first housebuilder to create a unit dedicated to remediation, and we commit significant time and resources to support it in delivering our program. We apply a rigorous process in assessing buildings within the scope of our obligations. That includes using reputable fire engineers and seeking peer reviews of all fire risk assessments undertaken on our buildings. We're also making some progress with recoveries from the supply chain, where we have a robust case to pursue them for substandard workmanship or design. So looking at our building safety provisions, we currently have GBP 886 million on the balance sheet relating to fire and external wall system issues. During the year, we brought the Redrow provision of GBP 184 million onto our balance sheet. And as we announced in July, within the Barratt legacy portfolio, we've provided GBP 109 million across 3 areas. Firstly, GBP 76 million in relation to developments in our Southern region, which related to a specific build typology we don't think is repeated anywhere else in the group. We've also seen GBP 17 million of incremental costs at an existing remediation project in London. But other than that, the underlying position was relatively stable with a net GBP 16 million movement of costs, which was offset elsewhere in the income statement by supply chain recovery. Moving on to look at the provision for concrete frame issues. We carry a provision of GBP 187 million at the end of June. During the year, no new buildings came into scope in the Barratt portfolio. As we updated in July, we identified concrete frame issues similar to those identified on legacy Barratt development at up to 4 Redrow developments. And we booked GBP 105 million to the opening balance sheet provision for these issues. But based on the reviews we've carried out today, we don't expect any further buildings to come into scope for these frame related issues going forward. So on to the balance sheet, and here's our usual balance sheet breakouts. And in the appendices, we've included a slide which reflects the impact of the consolidation of Redrow at fair value and also the movements from underlying trading. So 2 points to highlight here. First of all, the ongoing organic investment in land. And as well as bringing Redrow's land into the balance sheet, we invested an incremental GBP 181 million across FY '25. The significant increase in land creditors saw an additional GBP 167 million added over and above Redrow's consolidation. So land creditors remained below the target range of 20% to 25%, but moved up to 15.9% this year, and we're looking to ensure that we add land on deferred terms to take us into that 20% to 25% range. Part exchange has increased by GBP 39 million, which is a reflection of its importance of a selling tool in a tough market, but more than 2/3 of the 549 homes in our portfolio had already been sold by the 29th of June. And as you know, we keep tight control of part exchange stock. So here's the cash flow bridge for Barratt Redrow from reported operating profit on the left to the net cash outflow on the right and really just a couple of things to point out from this slide. Firstly, a step-up in tax payments was the prime driver of the GBP 101 million outflow in interest and tax. And as I've already noted, building safety spend totaled GBP 101 million. Our operating cash inflow was GBP 50 million, and we brought Redrow's cash onto the balance sheet and also made some further investment into additional timber frame facilities at our Oregon factory in Scotland. With dividends paid and the share buyback of GBP 50 million, the net cash outflow for the year was GBP 96 million. So just to update on capital allocation and just reiterating our unchanged capital allocation priorities here. Clearly, our enhanced scale and balance sheet strength with net cash of GBP 772 million and committed lending facilities of GBP 700 million put us in a very strong financial position looking forward. We're focused on investing in our business to drive our future growth. David detailed our sales outlook profile, and we're focused on delivering land to accelerate development using our 3 brands. We remain committed to innovation and development and we'll continue to invest in opportunities like the timber frame facilities and also our sustainability initiatives. And finally, we have a clear approach on shareholder returns, including our ordinary dividend at 2x cover and the ongoing share buyback program of at least GBP 100 million per annum. So turning now to guidance. Most of these points have been covered, but just to highlight, we expect our adjusted administrative costs to be around GBP 400 million. This reflects the additional period of Redrow's overhead base, which will impact FY '26, underlying cost inflation and the benefit of incremental synergies of approximately GBP 30 million. We're anticipating total synergies of GBP 45 million with the balance of GBP 15 million crystalized in cost of sales. A finance charge of approximately GBP 50 million, which is dominated by noncash charges in relation to land creditors and legacy property provisions as well as modest cash interest income on a reducing cash balance. In relation to land, we expect to operate at broadly replacement levels and spend between GBP 800 million and GBP 900 million on land and land creditors in FY '26. On building safety spend, we estimate spend will be around GBP 250 million for FY '26. And within this, I'm assuming that around half of our building safety fund costs will be paid during the year, so that's around GBP 70 million. Looking at net cash at the end of June 2026, we expect to be between GBP 400 million and GBP 500 million. So finally, to summarize, we believe we've delivered a solid financial performance in FY '25 in what was a tough market. Adjusted profit before tax was delivered slightly ahead of expectations for the year. And notwithstanding the tough market backdrop, our balance sheet remains strong. We've delivered cost synergies ahead of schedule whilst also making good progress on revenue synergies and the wider integration program. Our land bank and strong balance sheet give us a great platform to grow the business. And finally, we've put in place both clear capital allocation plans with an updated dividend policy alongside the annual GBP 100 million buyback program. And with that, I'll hand back to David. David Thomas: Thanks very much, Mike. And now just turning to look at the market. So I think whilst I've covered earlier that the current market clearly has its challenges, I think we need to bear in mind that the fundamentals of our industry remain very strong. Housing is clearly a top priority for government and the demand for homeownership remains steadfast. When consumer confidence returns, the policy environment becomes clearer and the planning reforms kick in, we can expect to see a strong uptick in planning approvals, outlet growth and opportunities to increase sales and volumes through our 3 leading brands. We remain confident that Barratt Redrow is best placed to navigate the market at all points of the cycle. Fundamental to Barratt Redrow are our 3 high-quality differentiated brands, and we have the skills and experience to deploy them effectively. These brands allow us to operate in a variety of locations and local markets with the optimal divisional infrastructure to match. Our customer focus is clearly demonstrated and recognized by our numerous third-party credentials. We have demonstrated that we are a reliable partner, allowing us to be flexible and innovative. Our reorganized divisional structure and brand portfolio positions us well for growth over the medium term. And finally, we remain financially strong with a solid balance sheet, a robust net cash position and cost synergies, which will increasingly drive higher profit margins. So in summary, we remain confident in the medium-term guidance that we gave in February. Outlet growth on which we have good visibility will allow us to reach our outlets goal, which will flow through to 22,000 total home completions. Our progress on cost synergies has enabled us to deliver on profit expectations, and we will continue to benefit the business financially as we move forward. Savings through synergies as well as greater efficiency of our fixed -- on our fixed cost base will help us to drive our operating margin back to 15%. We will be increasing our use of line creditors, which will aid our return on capital employed, recovering back to 20%. Also helping us to improve return on capital employed will be the effect of multi-branding of developments using our 3 high-quality and differentiated brands. And finally, as we've touched on, we remain financially robust and that gives us confidence in our growth aspirations and also providing stable shareholder returns. Thank you very much. And Mike and I will be happy to take questions, which John is going to host. Thank you. John Messenger: Thank you, David. We're going to open up for Q&A. [Operator Instructions] We'll start in the front row with Will, if you could, please. William Jones: Will Jones at Rothschild & Co Redburn. Try 3, please, if I can. First, just referencing, I think, in the statement, you talked about additional risk given the obvious and understandable around the budget in November. And I think the need for a normal autumn. Could you just expand on what the normal autumn might look like? And perhaps just remind us of the -- roughly the full year sales rate you're assuming? Second one was actually back to building safety, 2 parts to it. To what extent is there still risk around the building count with respect to inactive buildings maybe coming into scope? And perhaps you can expand on the other side, the recovery process. I think you talked about some steady progress there, but what's the potential for that over time? And then the last one is maybe just around build cost. I think you've reiterated your guidance for the current year and you've got good visibility, but just wondering what -- how you think things might shape up for the conversations that start to take place at the end of the year, start of calendar of '26 with suppliers, subdued market for you guys? Will it be, I guess, subdued for them in terms of what they end up achieving? David Thomas: Well, first of all, good morning, Will. Good to see you in the front row. So Mike will pick up in terms of building safety and also on build costs. I mean if I just touch in terms of the budget, I mean, I think really kind of 2 points to make. I mean one is, look, we're pleased with what we've seen through July and August. So that's the first thing. And we've also provided that information in terms of reservations through July and August. I think it's understandable that we would flag that speculation relating to the budget can affect customer sentiment. And we recognize that, that can be both positive and negative. So what we've got to do is we've just got to concentrate on trading our business, making sure that we're putting attractive offers in front of our customers, and we feel that we're doing that effectively, given the market conditions. In terms of rates of sale, we would normally see some tick up as we move into the autumn. So we've clearly provided rates of sales through July and August. I think the tick up in the autumn or the tick up in the spring has probably been less substantial than it used to be. Primarily, I think because we've just seen strong trading through, say, January, February or strong trading through July and August, which we haven't necessarily seen previously. And I mean overall time, I think we said earlier in the year that somewhere around about 0.6 is the kind of rate of sale that we're looking at as a group. Mike? Michael Scott: So if I pick up building safety first. So first of all, on the portfolio that's provided, I think we've got increasingly good visibility on costs and progress there. So about 90% of that portfolio has now been through some kind of tender process on costing or we're actually actively remediating it. So I think the visibility we've got on that is really good. On inactive buildings, I mean they have been through a process, albeit largely desktop in terms of documentation around the status of risk assessments, the build typology, the external wall systems and so on. So there's been an element of process there already. And that's why we don't believe that there's work to do, and they're not in the active bucket. And then if you look at the flow-through of buildings from that sort of inactive group into the provision over time, actually, it's very, very low in the second half of the year, literally just a couple of buildings that moved across. So I think as we move through time, we are increasingly confident of the position. The problem with it is you can't say that nothing will come out as we get into buildings and time passes. But I think our visibility and confidence is increasing. On the recovery process, I mean, we're engaged in a number of conversations. Obviously, we can't talk too much about them for commercial reasons, obviously. But I think we are engaged in that process. We recovered GBP 60 million from the supply chain during the year, and we're actively engaged on a program to do that as we go forward. Moving on to build cost. So I mean, I think we're still comfortable with the 1% to 2% guidance range for the year from everything that we've seen. As we said previously, a little bit more pressure on labor and the subcontractor side than on materials. And I think some of that's now the flow-through of the national insurance increases and the other labor cost increase is coming through. And again, it's the early-stage trades. It's the ground workers and so on that we're seeing a little bit more pressure on. But we obviously also have the benefit of the cost synergies through our procurement program. And again, we've had really good engagement with the supply chain on that. We're able to get very good forward visibility of the growth of the business, which is helpful. So overall, we're comfortable with 1% to 2% for this year. John Messenger: Aynsley from room. Aynsley Lammin: Aynsley Lammin from Investec. Just 2 from me, please. One, if you could just provide a bit more color on incentives and pricing and what you're doing going into the autumn selling season in relation to that? And then secondly, just on the planning, obviously slow to come through at the local level. Could you just remind us of the time line of what happens from here when you expect that to actually start to impact positively at a local level when the legislation comes in, et cetera? David Thomas: Yes. Aynsley, so I mean, first of all, in terms of incentives, I mean, the short answer is no real change in relation to incentives or incentive levels. I think when you look at our incentives, I mean, I won't run through them all, but if I just highlight 2 or 3 of those incentives. So for example, for first-time buyers, we will offer a deposit match. So if the first-time buyer has a 5% deposit, we will effectively match that deposit. It allows the first-time buyer to get on to a 90% loan to value, and that is an attractive proposition. Secondly, we have, for a period of time, accelerated post COVID, run a key worker discount. So primarily aimed at blue light workers, but a broader range has been brought in of key workers. I don't think analysts are in that range. But we can expand it, and that is a really attractive proposition. So we're typically offering a 5% discount subject to ceiling. So it probably blends at about 3.5%, 4%. And then the third offer is part exchange. So part exchange is probably our most expensive offer. We don't look to make profit on the part exchange offer, but it is a very attractive offer for consumers. So if you were a second or a third time buyer, then clearly taking all of the pain out of the move process is attractive. And I think we tend to see that when the second hand market, the existing home market is a bit slower than part exchange becomes much more attractive. But we're still seeing overall incentive levels as we've set out sort of 6% plus in terms of overall incentive levels and quite a bit of that is driven by part exchange. In terms of planning and infrastructure, we've said very consistently that the government coming in, in July '24, have really tried to take a transformational approach to planning. We have to remember that if you go back to March, April '24, we were going backwards very, very rapidly from a planning point of view. And I think the government has set out what I see as being a very bold and ambitious agenda in terms of planning, not just for residential development, but for commercial development, for infrastructure and so on. Most of that is contained within the planning and infrastructure bill. I think it has taken a bit longer than we would have thought back in July, August '24. And our understanding of the time lines presently is it's going through the review within the House of Lords. And we'd expect that perhaps November, December, it will come into legislation. And then all local authorities will need to comply with the requirements of the planning and infrastructure bill. So we should start to see that taking effect during 2026. John Messenger: Chris? Christopher Millington: Chris Millington, Deutsche. First one, I just wanted just to kind of gauge your steel behind the outlet opening profile. Obviously, we had a delay last time. They're still obviously subject to third parties kind of moving in line just how front or back-end loaded in those periods, do those outlets come through. So that's just the first one. Second one is looking more at the longer-term shape of the balance sheet. There's obviously quite a lot of demands on cash over the next few years. Where would you start getting uncomfortable with regard to adjusted leverage? It does look like the net cash balance is probably going to be eliminated in the next couple of years? And the next -- the last one, I thought a really helpful slide on the land bank margin really good to help us build it up. Perhaps you can give us some sort of guide as to the evolution of that maybe something like when do the sub-15% gross margin categories get eliminated or something to that effect? David Thomas: Thanks very much, Chris. If I pick up on outlets and then Mike will pick up in terms of the sort of shape of the balance sheet and cash and land bank margin. So think in terms of outlook, so we recognize that we had a revision of guidance for outlets for FY '26, which we updated the market with that in July. I mean I think our confidence regarding outlet delivery is twofold. One, we're putting it up on a slide, we've broken it down in detail, and I'm presenting the slide. So I think that demonstrates a strong level of confidence. We wouldn't normally give that level of detail. I think the second point I would say is that this is unusual. I mean I've been here 16 years, and I think at any point over the last 16 years, if we had put up an outlet profile, we would have had much less with detailed consent or much less with planning submitted. And that's just a byproduct of 2 things. One is that since we've gone back into the land market post 2022, we have acquired sites that can be single, dual or triple branded. So that gives us good outlet delivery. And secondly, through the combination with Redrow, we've identified that 45 sites can be delivered. And obviously, we see that there are more than 45 potential. So we take a reasonably conservative view and say we can deliver 45. And that's also entirely in our control, and Redrow are already on those sites or Barratt are already on those sites, and we're effectively either doing a plot substitutional or we're doing a replan. So yes, we have a high level of confidence regarding delivery. As I touched on a moment ago, I think everyone in the industry is very positive about the government's approach in relation to planning. I mean why would you not be? But I think it has been more protracted than anyone would have expected because we're now 14 months later, and we still don't have the legislation. So -- but we are where we are. The legislation will come, and it should be effective from the beginning of '26. Michael Scott: If I just pick up on the balance sheet first. So I guess the first point to make is we're starting from a really strong place. GBP 770 million of cash at the end of last year. We flagged in February that there would be a couple of years of investment in web and infrastructure to get the new outlets open and get us up to the 500 outlet target in a few years' time. So we do expect to be in that phase. We expect to use that net cash over the next couple of years, but then we start to generate cash at the end of the plan as those outlooks come into production and we sort of stabilize outlet numbers. I think when you step back from it, the shape of the balance sheet over the last 3 or 4 years has probably been the outlier in a sense with the level of net cash that we've been holding. If you look over a longer period of time, we'd normally have targeted very small level of net cash at year-end. And that's probably where we'll end up getting back to trust. But I think we're starting from a very strong place. We've got good line of sight to those investments and work in progress and infrastructure to get the new outlooks open. And we've said many times that the strength of the balance sheet is a real priority for us and the board as we go forward. On the land bank margin, I mean it's difficult to predict exactly when those sites will roll off, but average site length is sort of 3.5 years. So you think over the next 2 or 3 years, you'll see those lower site margins roll off. We've given the medium-term target of getting to the hurdle rate of gross margin of 23 and then 24 when the procurement synergies have kicked in. So you'd expect to see that evolution continue over the next few years, 90 basis points up in the year this year with the land we've added. We're carrying on adding land hurdle rates that will blend up over time. So again, it will take a few years to get there, but we're confident that that's directional travel. John Messenger: Great. Ami? Ami Galla: Ami Galla from Citi. A couple of questions for me. One was on the gross margin in the land bank. Can I clarify, is the synergies on top of that, the procurement synergies associated with the gross margin, will that be on top of that? Or is that included in the land bank gross margin that we see? The second question was really on the WIP investments linked to outlets. You've talked about this previously, but can you remind us how should we think about that investment profile over the medium term? And the last one was on the ASP in the land bank. That's also marginally higher, and I presume that's mix as well. Can you give us some color as to how is that -- how is the shape of that mix adjustment over the next 3 years? Michael Scott: Sounds like 3 for me. So gross margin in the land bank does include procurement synergies. So that's fairly straightforward. On work in progress, so I think we're guiding this year that we'll have GBP 200 to GBP 250 million of incremental with investment as we go through this year. And again, that's investing in outlet openings that we'll see coming through both at the end of this year and into FY '27. And then we're not guiding for '27, but we've been at that level of GBP 200 million to GBP 250 million for the last couple of years. And on ASPs in the land bank, it is largely reflective of mix. And clearly, in the land bank now we're reporting Redrow as well, which operates at a slightly higher ASP than Barratt and David Wilson did previously. We're not seeing any particular sales price inflation at the moment. Our sort of like-for-like measure is broadly flat on selling prices. So the increase in ASPs that you're seeing is coming through the mix of sites rather than inflation. John Messenger: Clyde? Clyde Lewis: Clyde Lewis at Peel Hunt. 3, if I may as well. Firstly, on the desire to grow the deferred terms around the land buying, how easy do you think that's going to be? And do you think that's going to limit your choice in any way in terms of what you can buy? Second was around the sort of bulk sales mix in terms of the volume guidance this year, what sort of contribution are you expecting to see from bulk sales? And the third one probably was going back to your comment, David, about being up at the company with 16 years, pretty much in every one of those years, you will have seen some sort of demand incentive from the government, whether it's stamp-duty holidays or specific first-time buyer help. Do you think this government actually understands that it's probably going to need some of that to try and get the overall housing market back to where it wants to be, despite all the extra money they put into the affordable housing sector? David Thomas: Yes. Okay, Clyde. Thank you. I think if I just pick up on the deferred terms and Mike will pick up in terms of multi-unit bulk sales, and then we'll just talk -- I'll about the demand side. So I think on deferred terms, I mean -- I think it obviously depends on the position of the land owner, but I would say as a generalization, we are buying sites that are larger than average and the ability to secure deferred terms is greater. So I don't see anything that will change that because we see that when we're bidding maybe on a site that might be 150 to 200 plots, there can be a huge amount of interest in those sites, whereas if we're looking at sites that are maybe 750 plots and above, there's just a limited number of buyers, probably ourselves, Vistry, maybe a couple of the other majors might be in that market. And so I think there is an ability to structure deals, which is -- it's got to work for both sides, but securing deferred terms for us has always been important, and we're just going to place a little bit more emphasis on it going forward. So that's the kind of deferred terms. I think on the demand side, and you've seen everything unfold in terms of the way that the markets evolve. So all the 16 years I've been here apart from the last 2 years, there has been a government-backed program in the market. So since 2009 without interruption. The programs have changed in their nature. And as you know, in the early days, the house builders either participated by providing 50% of the shared equity loan or the house builders paid to access the scheme. And with Help to Buy, the house builders were not asked to pay to access the scheme. And we've said Barratt Redrow, and I know many other house builders said that we would happily pay to access the scheme. We see that when you look at affordability in areas such as London or London in the Southeast, affordability for first-time buyers is at record levels of challenge. We've not seen the kind of metrics on affordability previously. And therefore, you can see that particularly in London, as you know, London for us is a relatively small part, 5% to 7% of our completions in London. But the reality is that affordability challenges in London are acute. And you can see that coming through in terms of the numbers. So our message to government has been the house builders are happy to contribute towards a scheme. It should be targeted at first-time buyers and there should be a particular focus on areas of acute affordability. Michael Scott: And then just on multiunit sales and so on. I think on the affordable side, we are seeing slightly more appetite from the registered providers to do additionality. Again, that was probably backed off a little bit over the last 12 or 18 months, and we're seeing good levels of grant funding come through into some of those deals that we're doing. So I think they'll definitely be a feature for us this year. And then on PRS, as you know, we sort of focused on 2 or 3 key relationships on PRS, the most significant of which is Lloyds Living. And we've talked about the framework we've got in place with them, want to do about 1,000 units a year over time. And in general, as we grow the business to 22,000 homes per year, we think PRS will be about 2,000 of that 22,000. So I think for this year, we'd probably expect multiunit sales in PRS to be just over 1,000 units in the completion mix again. But we're seeing -- we're still engaged in good conversations with the PRS providers. I think that there are still deals there, pricing that we're comfortable to do the deal. And it will just be part of our mix going forward, I think. John Messenger: Charlie? Charlie Campbell: Charlie Campbell at Stifel. Just a couple of questions, please. Just firstly, on mortgages, some changes in stress tests and loan to income. Just wonder if that's had any impact yet and whether we should expect that to have some impact going forward? And then secondly, on Section 106 and HAs, affordable housing, has that appetite return back to normal after the hiatus or do we need to wait for things like the prospectus to come out for the affordable homes program? David Thomas: Charlie, okay. If I pick up both of them. And first of all, I think that everyone is conscious of the fact that there was very substantial tightening of the mortgage lending rules post the financial crisis. And I think we recognize that there is some concerns about a rapid relaxation of those rules. But we would welcome the relaxation that has taken place, and we think that the scope for further relaxation, particularly around multiples of joint income multiples. So I think it's very difficult to disaggregate that from exactly what is the impact. But clearly, it is a positive impact in terms of allowing more lending to take place in the market. And there has been quite a lot of documentation published around the way in which it improves affordability. So that has to be a positive. In terms of the Section 106, I mean, look, at a headline level post the announcement by government, I would say, at June '25, we found the closure of Section 106 agreements in aggregate to be much easier than at June '24. I'm not saying it was easy, but it was much easier. And I think beyond that, it is an assessment on an HA by HA basis. And I think where housing associations have got challenges regarding cladding and cladding remediation, and the government have done something to alleviate that by allowing the housing associations to access the building safety fund. And also where housing associations have got particular challenges around the remediation of existing housing stock, i.e., it needs to be brought up the standard under Awaab's Law. I think the reality is that housing associations have got some cash and funding challenges. So I think it is the housing association specific. And the industry is very definitely flagging that it is not a resolved issue for government. And there's a consultation in terms of the effectively, the equalization of rentals. But that consultation is not closed. And so the equalization of rentals is another very important thing for the HAs in terms of the financial impact it has on the HAs. John Messenger: Allison? Allison Sun: Allison from Bank of America. 3 questions from my side. The first one on the ASP for next year, I don't know what's your expectation is overall. Do you think it's going to still be positive, stable? Or you just still a lot of uncertainties there given the budget impact? Number one. And number two is on the PRS because we also saw the news like the government might impose some landlord tax or the national insurance on the investors. Do you see it's going to be a negative impact for the future investment demand for the PRS? And thirdly is on this future home standard, which I understand we still haven't got full details yet. And I heard there are some builders saying, if there is a mandatory requirement on the solar panel installation, there could potentially be a negative or the downside risk to the earnings for that particular builder. But I wonder if you heard anything on the regulation and what's the progress for the Barratt portfolio? David Thomas: Yes. Certainly. Mike, can you take the ASP one? So if I just pick up on PRS initially. I mean I think this just falls into a category of the sort of budget speculation. And clearly, we don't know whether there is any intention to put national insurance on rental income. So we just have to wait and see. I would think that if you're an institutional investor, then you're going to want to look at that fairly carefully, I would assume. But we'll find out in November about directionally where that is going to go. In terms of the Future Homes standard, so I chair the Future Homes hub. So I'm sort of very close to the Future Homes standard of what's happening with the Future Homes standard. So I think the first thing is that the Future Homes standard has been delayed. It depends on at what point you're measuring, but the Future Homes standard is probably 12 months to 18 months behind when it was originally anticipated to be. And that is giving all participants in the industry more time to adjust. And when the standard comes into effect, we expect the standard to be published prior to Christmas. There will be a transition plan, and that transition plan will run through certainly '26, '27, '28, but the transition plan will be published. And then thirdly, there is a subconsultation about the number of -- the amount of solar panels that will be required on properties. And certainly, from the Future Homes point of view, we've just effectively said that there has to be a balance to that. We shouldn't be in a situation that we're mandating very large quantities of solar panels because the standards can be achieved in different ways, not simply through the provision of solar panels. But when the standard is published in December, we will see the outcome from that. But again, I would emphasize it will be over quite a long transition period. Michael Scott: And then on ASP. So on pricing, generally, we said that using our like-for-like measure last year, pricing was up 1.4%. So that's the sort of underlying pricing position. Year-to-date, that's been flat. So clearly, the pricing position has been more challenging in recent months. And so looking forward into FY '26, we're not expecting any benefit from sales price inflation in the numbers. There will be a small increase in ASPs just coming through the mix effect. We'll be blending in Redrow. And that will be slightly offset by a higher proportion of affordable housing in the year, but I'd expect it to be very slightly ahead year-on-year. I don't think there will be significant movements in the ASPs. John Messenger: Alastair? Alastair Stewart: Yes. Alastair Stewart from Progressive Equity Research. A bit of a niche series of questions all based in Scotland, no vested interest there, of course. Yes. Just a bit of color on Scotland. First of all, you did a couple of deals with Springfield. Any further organic opportunities north of the Borden? Also, the Scottish government seemed to have changed tack quite a lot on -- especially build to rent, but just generally seem to be a bit more pragmatic, let's say. Any color on that? I suppose it's a question for you, David. David Thomas: Yes. I feel well qualified to answer. Yes. Look, we have a big business in Scotland. So we're based in Glasgow, Edinburgh and Aberdeen. And we've had a big business in Scotland over a long period of time. I think that the Springfield deal that you touched on is reflecting two things. One is we have a very positive view of the market in Scotland. It is a market that operates under different regulations and different policy from England. So for example, Scotland never had a government support program, not in the same way. And policies in Scotland have probably been a little more slanted towards affordable housing generally. But we see it as being a positive environment. And therefore, we acquired the sites from Springfield, and they've obviously gone through a restructure of their activities to be more focused in terms of the north of Scotland. So we're positive about that opportunity. Again, I would say that the rent controls in Scotland adversely impacted the buy-to-rent market. And the institutional investor, I think, was less enthusiastic. But that position seems to be altering and therefore, we should see the opportunity for more private rental, particularly for Edinburgh. I think Edinburgh is a very, very strong market or a very strong potential in terms of private rental. And then the other area, which Mike, maybe just touch on, is just on building safety because, again, I think that -- do you want to just touch on building safety? Michael Scott: Yes. I mean, I guess, it's been an open conversation for a while in terms of where the standard for remediation would end up compared to the standard in England and Wales. I think that has moved during -- this year has moved towards the England and Wales position, which clearly for us is positive because that's the basis that we've approached building safety in Scotland, but still not concluded, but I think closer to conclusion and in a more positive sort of state. John Messenger: Marcus? Marcus Cole: Marcus Cole from UBS. Just one question on timber frame. Obviously, you all went up to the factory earlier this year. I'm just thinking about how that's progressing. Any learnings you have there? And how do you think about more about vertical integration on the back of those learnings? David Thomas: Yes, we're very positive about timber frame. I mean, if you -- just to go back to Scotland very briefly, when I came into the business, we were almost entirely brick and block in Scotland. And we're now almost entirely timber frame. So 95% plus in terms of what we're doing in Scotland is timber frame. It would only really be on higher apartments where we would move away from that. So I think that the use of timber frame is going to become more and more prevalent in England. And you can see that through the majors that most people have either got agreed sourcing arrangements or they have their own factories. I mean -- and that's the reality. It's very much the direction of travel. So we are very positive about it. The factory -- the new factory in Derby is progressing well and we see volumes rising. Ultimately, we see capacity between the 2 factories up to 9,000 frames. But I think the opportunity goes beyond that in terms of being able to do more and more within the factories. So having closed panels, being able to put services into the panels, whether it's windows, doors, plumbing, et cetera. There's a lot of stuff that can be done within the factory. So we see that -- what we have in Scotland and what we have in Derby is very much a platform for us to grow from over the next few years. In terms of vertical integration, I mean, I would say our starting position is that we would prefer not to vertically integrate. You'll find that many of the products that we buy we are a relatively small part of the manufacturers business. And what we don't really want to be doing is running a business where because of the economics of the business, we're having to provide a lot of product to other companies. We want to be able to like with timber frame, bring something into our portfolio where it can provide exclusively to Barratt Redrow. And therefore, when you look at the sort of volumes that are involved in certain production areas, that just wouldn't be possible. You wouldn't be able to run the sort of economies on our volumes alone. So I think we're very, very selective about what we would vertically integrate on, but where we see an opportunity like our acquisition of Oregon or for example, we run our own in-house wardrobe factory, then we're certainly happy to further integrate those types of businesses. John Messenger: Any more questions? Hope we exhausted everyone. Thank you, everyone. One more? Yes, of course. Chris? Christopher Millington: Sorry, Chris Millington, Deutsche. It's just about what your thinking is about the proportion of affordable going forward. Do you think it can keep pace with the private growth within the business on volumes? Or is there an assumption that will lag slightly because of the funding issues we've seen historically? David Thomas: I think if you look at a policy level, then I think you would expect the proportion of affordable to increase slightly going forward on the basis that for greenfield sites under the planning and infrastructure build, there will be a higher assumption in terms of affordable for example. So I think you would say that the general trend would be an upward trend on affordable. I think the funding question is we've touched on that, that's a kind of separate question. And the funding challenge is real. I mean the government obviously announced a huge funding program over a 10-year period, but short term, the funding challenge is real. And I think the final point, and we -- this has been well documented in London is that 35% or 40% or 50% of nothing isn't benefiting anyone. And I think we've consistently seen this over 20 or 30 years is that as there is an attempt to take more value from the land, the landowners have an opportunity to say, actually, we won't participate or sites get bogged down in viability arguments. And that clearly is what's playing out in London presently. John Messenger: Great. Thank you, everyone, for coming along. If there are any follow-up questions, don't hesitate to get in touch with myself. But thank you, and we'll close proceedings. Michael Scott: Thank you. David Thomas: Thanks very much. Thanks, everyone.
Operator: Good morning, ladies and gentlemen, and welcome to the IP Group Plc Half Year Results Investor Presentation. [Operator Instructions] The company may not be in a position to answer every question it receives during the meeting itself. However, the company can review all questions submitted today and we'll publish their responses where it's appropriate to do so on the Investor Meet Company platform. Before we begin, as usual, we would just like to submit the following poll. And if you'd give that your kind attention, I'm sure the company would be most grateful. And I would now like to hand you over to the executive management team from IP Group Plc. Greg, good morning, sir. Gregory Smith: Good morning, and thank you to Jake. And as always, thanks to everyone at Investor Meet Company for again hosting our half year results webinar. I was reflecting -- I was reading my FT on Saturday, and I almost choked my yogurt, I guess, these days, I've sort of had to move on from corn flakes for longevity reasons. But I saw the headline, the U.S. market for IPOs has exploded back to life with the busiest week for 4 years, and that's not something I've seen for a few years, I guess, maybe obviously based on the cycle. But it was an interesting reflection that the public markets have had quite a positive impact on the portfolio in more ways than one so far in 2025. And hopefully, there is more opportunity that arises for us in future as a result. I'm Greg Smith. And as CEO, I have the honor of leading IP Group and our excellent team on our mission to accelerate the power of science for a better future. And with me on today's call, we have our managing partner, Mark Reilly; and our CFO, Dave Baynes, both in the room really and virtually. As usual, this presentation will be uploaded on to the IR section of our website with a few appendices. Before we start, please note all the usual disclaimers and you can read that in the time I'm going to spend on the slide and good luck, but this covers all the information, particularly any forward-looking statements that we may make during the course of the next hour or so. So in terms of what we're going to cover, I'll provide an overview of the Group's performance in the first half, then I'll pass on to Mark, and he'll give an update on a number of our key balance sheet holdings and then some other notable development actually. And then Dave is going to run us through a summary of the numbers, and then we'll head into Q&A. As Jake said, as always, please post your questions up in the Q&A section. And as always, we'll endeavor to cover them all either live in the session or afterwards by platform as we run out of time. So for the half year, I think the main message is, overall, we made strong progress in the first half. We saw a number of encouraging developments in the portfolio. And indeed, the pipeline of significant milestones remains good through to the end of 2027. The public markets were more of a contributor in terms of fair value. And then there were a number of other positive developments in the private portfolio. That public side included the successful IPO of Hinge Health in May and strong half year results from Oxford Nanopore who beat city expectations. We recorded total cash proceeds of GBP 30 million. That's 9x what we saw in the first half of '24. And as a reminder, I said at the full year that we were targeting GBP 250 million of exits by the end of 2027. So what we've seen year-to-date means that we remain confident in achieving that target. And we had a small overall loss for the first 6 months. However, NAV per share essentially stabilized in the reporting period and has subsequently increased since the period end to about GBP 1 a share. We continue to be in a strong balance sheet position and have good liquidity, and we still got gross cash of GBP 237 million. And obviously, that's significantly up from this time last year when we had the Featurespace exit and others during the period. And then a final note is we are seeing increasing momentum in our efforts to add to our private scale-up capital under management. And the market hasn't necessarily moved as quickly as we hoped or expected on this front. However, we have good confidence of securing at least one new mandate by the time that I talked to you at the time of our full year results. So on the portfolio, coming into the year, 4 out of our top 5 holdings have seen encouraging developments in the year-to-date. As Mark and DB will cover briefly later, the fifth Oxa, while it's making encouraging underlying progress, is yet to close its latest funding round. And so our revised valuation has been pegged back to reflect that position. On Hinge, we were delighted for Dan and Gabe and the team to have the opportunities to ring the New York Stock Exchange opening bell on May 22. PitchBook described their successful IPO as a pivotal moment for digital health, signaling the reopening of the health tech public markets after a 3-year drought, and Mark will cover more on this shortly. But in summary, the company has traded very well since IPO is up about 80% off the back of strong Q2 numbers. Oxford Nanopore, they delivered a strong first half of trading. They beat analyst expectations on both revenue and on a lower EBIT loss. I think our observation was that growth was strong across all sectors and geographies. So by customer category, they grew in academic and in all of the 3 sort of applied sectors. And then by regions, even despite the sort of some of the headwinds in America, Americas was up, APAC was up, EMEA was up. So we're confident in the outlook for that company. By way of context, we are now the second largest holder behind EIT, The Ellison Institute of Technology, which is backed by Larry Ellison, as many of you will know. Of course, Larry recently became briefly the world's richest man, and he obviously has quite an incredible track record of delivering value through Oracle. I thought it was quite interesting that the U.K. press has started to pick up more recently on EIT and its Oxford Ambitions. And Nanopore is very relevant. If you go to the website, you can see how relevant it is to their focus on 2 of their big themes. One around health, medical science and generative biology and the other around food security and sustainable agriculture. In terms of our position, as a reminder, we invested about GBP 80 million into the company over time. We've realized about GBP 110 million to date. So we've already covered our costs in full. And as you'll have seen in our portfolio data for this year and last year, we've taken a small amount of liquidity on a couple of occasions. And as you'd expect, we continue to very actively monitor the company against where we consider fair value to be at any given time. But as I said, we remain really confident in the medium-term outlook for the business. And we -- our feeling was that the full year '25 guidance was maybe a bit conservative given the strong first half update. So we're confident in our holding. We look forward to further commercial updates from the company. There's clearly a number of interesting commercial relationships brewing there in biopharma and in clinical and also the deeper dive on their refined commercial strategy, which will be coming out in Q4, particularly around how they intend to exploit the sort of $13 billion to $14 billion of TAM that they've identified in what they call the higher priority segments. And then on Istesso, following the news that the -- their most recent trial didn't meet its primary endpoint back in February, the management team has worked hard to progress that program through to value. And the company published a peer-reviewed paper in The Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics, JPET, to its friends, and that was outlining the impact of its compounds on various chronic diseases where tissue damage occurs. So rheumatoid arthritis, as you know, but also things like osteoporosis, fibrosis and interestingly, sarcopenia or muscle loss. And that last bit, I think, led to the paper being picked up by some of the longevity publications because muscle loss is particularly relevant at the moment around the weight loss drugs very common side effects of some of the GLP-1s. And during the period, the company also added a very experienced nonexec, Dr. Mike Owen, delighted to have Dr. Owen joined the Board. And he -- you might recognize the name. He was a co-founder of Kymab, which sold to Sanofi back in 2021 for -- I think it was a GBP 1.1 billion upfront. And when he joined, he said Istesso's old approach to reversing tissue damage could fundamentally change the treatment paradigm for chronic diseases and therefore, holds enormous clinical and commercial potential. As I mentioned a few months ago at the full year results, the company has got funding to carry out a further trial and the location and design of which is well underway, and we anticipate that will commence before the end of the year. On exits, we had a good period for cash realizations. We set an internal target of GBP 50 million for full year '25 coming into the year and the momentum into half 2 and I guess, a more elevated level of inbound interest in the portfolio gives us a high degree of confidence that we'll achieve that and likely exceed it. Of the examples shown here, 2 companies were outright company acquisitions and one Centessa was a partial realization. For our remaining holding in Centessa, the company recently gave a positive update at the Morgan Stanley Global Healthcare Conference. And we anticipate the readout of the Phase II in narcolepsy is pretty imminent, and that will be the next catalyst for our remaining holding. In addition to these examples, also worth mentioning, we realized a small amount of our Hinge holding at the time of the IPO. And as I mentioned, the balance has gone up by around 80%. So our lockup expires on that in November. On what we've done with that cash, as a reminder, our policy is a commitment to deliver cash returns to supplement capital growth using a proportion of the exits that we make in any given year. At the moment, we are using buybacks, and we said that we'll do that until the discount gets to a lower level than 20% and given that persistent discount at the time of our full year results back in March, we announced the intention to use a greater proportion of our realizations in 2025, and we will again review that towards the end of this year based on our capital forecast for going into 2026. The current program is GBP 75 million, and that includes GBP 20 million that we announced in June. At today's date, as of yesterday, we've got about GBP 9 million left to run on that program. And so as we make further realizations, we'll look to add to that total. I think it's worth noting the acceleration this year has been quite significant. In fact, yesterday, I was looking at the numbers, our share count fell below 900 million shares for the first time, which means that we've now retired 15% of our capital in issue. We focused lots of our capital in the last couple of years on the buyback and on existing portfolio and getting those with the highest value potential through to their milestones and value realization. And I've -- we're starting to see as sort of performance and market appetite continues to return, we'll start to selectively add a few more new holdings to the balance sheet portfolio, including from Parkwalk and the wider ecosystem. But before I hand on to Mark, I just want to sort of briefly look forward quickly a reminder of the IP Group investment case, 3 things to believe. The first is that there is significant value potential in U.K. science and technology. I've talked about this and exemplified this at our Capital Markets Day back in June. The second is that IP Group is well positioned to exploit this given the team, the track record, the sourcing and the portfolio and that this represents an attractive shareholder opportunity, particularly given the discount to NAV against which we currently trade. To reiterate again, this is something that I've covered in the past few updates. This in a single slide, I guess, depicts the capital strategy that we are following to be able to exploit that opportunity. From the perspective of a developing science and technology business, we're one of the few investors that can support development from the very earliest stages to relative maturity at the sort of venture growth end of the journey. And complementary private funds are strategically important in terms of pipeline, particularly in the case of Parkwalk, but also development capital for our businesses, and they also contribute fees to mitigate our net overheads. In terms of scale and ambition, Parkwalk, we're aiming to maintain around GBP 0.5 billion of assets there, successful exits of balancing off against new subscriptions. On the balance sheet, we're focused on NAV per share delivery, and that obviously includes that GBP 140 million of cash that we've returned to shareholders over the last couple of years and is appropriate for where we are in the cycle. And then on the scale-up fund side, under which you'll remember Hostplus increased their commitment by a further GBP 125 million last year. And that's where there is a real growth opportunity to scale available capital to ensure strong returns from our balance sheet and our sources of -- for our various investors. On the first bit of that, just a quick update on our differentiated U.K. sourcing platform, Parkwalk. The business here, as you'll see from the numbers, as I mentioned, has about GBP 0.5 billion of assets under management there, which are all EIS tax advantage capital, and we partner with many of the U.K.'s leading universities to source new spin-out opportunities. I'll just pull a couple of highlights out from the first half. And so one, in addition to the alumni funds that we have with Oxford and Cambridge and Imperial and Bristol, we were very pleased to add a new fund in collaboration with Northern Gritstone, which covers Leeds, Liverpool, Manchester and Sheffield. And then similar to the theme that we're seeing on the balance sheet side, last week, we were delighted to announce the acquisition of one of our portfolio companies in the funds, [ Cytora ], which gave a good return to our EIS investors. And for our Plc shareholders, that generates additional fund management fees that contribute to lowering our net overheads. And then at the other end of the -- of that sort of capital strategy is our objective to add further scale up capital. I mean the context here continues to move in our favor. Our overall observation is that the public and private sectors are starting to align in terms of their policy and their approach. And during the first half, there have been quite a lot of important points of progress and those things like updated mandates and increased funding for the British Business Bank and the National Wealth Fund, which you can see there on the left-hand side. And a lot of that is highly aligned with the industrial strategy in the U.K. and the sectors that we focus on in turn, aligned with those. The pensions bill is currently passing through and the commons, how long that's quite going to take, but that removes some of the widely cited barriers to pension funds and similar long-term capital investing more in private productive assets in the U.K. And the Mansion House Accord, which is about 17 of the largest workplace pension providers in the U.K. committed to a voluntary commitment to have 10% of their default schemes in private markets by 2030, including half of that capital going into the U.K. So there's been quite a lot of sort of sector activity. Our experience and probably that of the wider market when you look at mandates is that there hasn't been very many VC commitments, perhaps with the notable exception of the Phoenix, Schroders joint venture future growth capital. But there's not been much that's really at scale. And our view is ultimately, that's what's needed and where the big opportunity lies. I would say encouragingly, the number and the stage of conversations with potential funders has seen quite an increase since the time of the Match House Accord, and we've added some additional experienced resource to our team to help exploit that. As I said at the start, we've got a good degree of confidence in securing at least one new mandate by the time I next talk to you for the full year results. And then quickly before I hand on to Mark, I thought I'd just cover a few of the companies or trail a few of the companies that we are excited about and particularly those that have either presented or are going to present at our events this year. So OXCCU, our sustainable airline fuel business. Mark is going to talk about that one shortly. Andrew, the Co-Founder and CEO, will be at our flagship scale-up event in October. Intrinsic, you might remember that the Co-Founder and CTO of Adnan presented at our Capital Markets event. There's a video on our YouTube channel. If you like a lot of technical detail, that's quite a technical one. They are producing the world's smallest nonvolatile memory, and they have a sort of tape-out coming towards the back end of this year. That does have very significant commercial potential given the company is initially targeting a segment of the memory market that's worth more than GBP 50 billion. And then genomics at the Capital Markets Day back in June again, David Thornton, who is the President there, gave a very compelling overview of the technology and its commercial applications. You also say right till the end to update everyone that revenues will grow by more than 100% this year and will do so again in 2026, taking them to $70 million, $80 million. He said they'll be EBITDA positive by the end of this year. So that's another of our top 20 companies to watch. And then on the therapeutics, our current clinical stage portfolio is worth about 23p per share, and there's a good number of clinical milestones coming up between now and the end of '27. Again, Mark is going to cover a couple of those shortly. And then just one other quick thing to mention just briefly on our licensing portfolio. We don't speak much about this. We have a licensing portfolio of IP predominantly from Imperial, and that contributes a few hundred thousand to our net overheads. There are 3 main projects in that portfolio. But I mentioned at the start that the public markets have contributed in more ways than one this period. And back in January, Metsera, Therapeutics business IPO-ed in the U.S. and actually, we licensed the core IP to Metsera. Now of course, it's early days, but if successful, there could be quite a meaningful source of royalty income over time. So we'll keep you updated on that one. So with that, I will hand on to Mark to talk a bit more about the portfolio. Mark Reilly: Thank you, Greg. Good morning, everybody. So there have been a few notable events over the course of the first half, perhaps arguably the standout one certainly for me personally having sort of witnessed the whole journey of Hinge Health. I recall, I think it was 2012, 2013 when its founder, Dan Perez who remains the Chief Executive of Hinge Health, walked into our office and very confidently said I'm going to make you guys a lot of money. And I think you can say that some confidence that, that was accurate now with a 50x overall return on our investment so far on to -- that asset. So the company, of course, we were the first investor when Dan was still a PhD student in the University of Oxford. It went on to raise substantial sums in -- from some of the top Silicon Valley investors, underwent very impressive growth and had that successful IPO in May of this year. We were able to sell a small amount at the IPO, and we did sell a larger chunk of our holding prior to that at a very good valuation in the private markets 2 or 3 years ago. But we still have a remaining holding that was worth just under $40 million at the half year and some share price continues to trend upward since then, which is good news. So that holding is locked in now until end of November, but we still have that holding [indiscernible] in the company has since put out some announcements of its latest results, its Q2 announcement and again, exceeded expectations, did very well. Revenue reported is increasing at 55% year-over-year, and they're now at $140 million of revenue in that period, and they're projecting 40% of the year-on-year growth going forward. So still very strong commercial progress there. I saw there was a question in the Q&A. The first question that came in, in the Q&A was why sell Hinge Health when there are lots of other smaller holdings in the portfolio that are -- that were described as nonlisted and nonrelevant in the question. So I would, first of all, highlight that Hinge was one of those nonrelevant nonlisted holdings until relatively recently. And so we think there is value in holding stuff that has potential that could hit that inflection curve. I think also the reason why you as investors have us holding shares on your behalf that there are some rationale for doing that, which is that we have this technical expertise internally that we can kind of arbitrage technical risk. We can judge that better than others. We have influence on these companies. We have extra visibility of a lot of these companies that others don't. And when those things become less true as the companies mature, that's less of a kind of rationale for us to hold them and so where that liquidity exists. That's where we start to consider divesting those positions. So just running through some of the other -- the top firm assets by value in the portfolio, just to update you on what's been happening at some of those assets. Greg spoke quite a bit about Nanopore, so I won't spend too long on that one other than to reiterate the fact that it continues to outperform its peers. They had a positive set of results that beat the market expectations, 28% rise in revenue, up to GBP 105 million now. And the key thing that we were looking for in those results was a diversification of revenue, a demonstration that they're moving into applied markets into clinical markets as well as this strong base of research revenue that they've already demonstrated over the past several years. And we really saw that this time. The revenue grew by over 50% in the clinical domain and 27% in the applied domain. So that's really showing that they're moving into those big market opportunities, and that's very encouraging. On [indiscernible] as Greg said, this was frustrating that they missed this endpoint in the first Phase II trial, but frustrating because it also demonstrated there's so much potential in this drug. And as Greg said, there was some data from that trial published in the Journal of Pharmacology and Experimental Therapeutics that demonstrated that this ability to elicit tissue repair, not just sort of preventing degrading the tissue, but actually showing that it's repairing the tissue, which has a lot of implications, but it showed these improvements in bone erosion and disability and fatigue. And so that has a lot of implications for sort of slowing aging and to slow the progress and even reverse the progress of some of these really detrimental conditions that people suffer from like this, their focus is currently on rheumatoid arthritis. So that publication certainly increased market confidence that there's a mechanism of action here that's really interesting. The efficacy of this drug is real that there's a range of clinical indications and diseases where it could be used. So we're sort of frustrating because of this potential. And unfortunately, that benefit didn't manifest in particular primary endpoint chosen over the time scale and over the cohort of this first trial. But we've learned a lot from that. They're going to do another trial now that implements those learnings and focuses on the things that they think they can really create a difference with, and they're well-funded to do that trial. So that's positive in that respect. So I remain optimistic about the sort of long-term prospects of that company. And finally, on this side, amongst our most valuable assets, Pulmocide. So they -- not a huge amount to report there because things are going well. The trial is on track. That's progressing according to plan. This is developing these respiratory treatments [indiscernible] inhaled treatments for respiratory infections like invasive pulmonary aspergillosis is a very nasty thing that you get wrong with your lungs and sort of mold infection in the lungs. And the trial is recruited well. And so we're still expecting that to read out in sort of H2 of '26 and have some results from that next year. Finally, not on this slide, but Greg also mentioned Oxa. So Oxa, we have taken this impairment on the holding there. It continues to make good technical progress. We've got very encouraging commercial progress. The company is doing well. It has been harder than we hope to raise money for the company, a bit frustrating because we have sort of the building blocks around, but it's -- we're just not quite over the line with that yet, but we are quite advanced now in discussions with some major potential cornerstone and I hope to have some good news on that asset soon. So that's sort of the higher-value stuff in the portfolio. That's the kind of top end. But another -- just picked out another handful of assets to mention because of some exciting developments in those assets. So Artios you may recall, is a company that's developing DNA damage response-based cancer therapies, and they are focused on hard-to-treat solid tumors. It's now public that they're targeting pancreatic and colorectal cancers, both of which have a huge, unfortunately, unmet clinical need. So a big market opportunity for the company, a big commercial opportunity. They did publish some of the sort of early data from the current trial, the Phase II trial at the American Association for Cancer Research Conference, and that data was very well received. They're funded to continue that trial and to explore the indications that they're seeing. And so we expect to see results from that end of next year, sort of early 2027 is the most likely time [indiscernible] I have to sort of qualify all of these clinical trial expectations that there are always things that can go off track and it can be delayed. But at the moment, as far as we know [indiscernible] both on track and expecting the same time scales that we've already guided. Then finally, there's 2 assets to mention in our Cleantech portfolio. So OXCCU, I don't know we maybe haven't spoken a huge amount about this company in the last few presentations, but this is a company in Oxford that spin out of Oxford University that's developing the world's lowest cost, lowest emission methods of making sustainable aviation fuel. So you use sort of waste carbon, and you turn it into fuel for airplanes and it's a good news for those of us who would like to continue traveling without, I think, quite the impact on the environment that it currently has. So that company raised GBP 28 million in a Series B round during the period. And the exciting thing about that is the sort of incredibly impressive list of strategic investors who came in to really validate the proposition that OXCCU is working on. So it was -- round was led by Safran, which is the world's second largest aircraft equipment manufacturer. The energy company Olin came into the round. IAG, which is the parent company of British Airways, came into that round. So a real kind of validation of their proposition based on the strategic interest that they've had in strategic financial support that they've got. They've built a demonstration plant. It sat on the top of my head there in Oxford Airport that's kicking out jet fuel. It's working. It's producing jet fuel now, and they started the process to develop a full-scale commercial project in the U.K. So that will be the sort of next scale up of their project. And finally, Hysata, we've talked about Hysata in these presentations before, a very compelling proposition. They have a hydrogen electrolyzer, a machine that produces hydrogen at 95% efficiency, which is well above anything that you will achieve if you buy a hydrogen electrolyzer off the shelf today. So their 100-kilowatt system, it is slightly delayed, but we anticipated there was a possibility that there will be a delay on this 100-kilowatt system. So that's built into their funding road map with the money that we raised with them last time. So they're still fund to produce that system, and we're still expecting it to be commissioned during Q3 as in this quarter of this year. They've also got a field trial going on a [indiscernible] machine running on a customer premises in Saudi Arabia. So this is not set in Hysata facility it's halfway around the world, and that is working, and it's -- they've reproduced that world-leading efficiency at that customer site. So they've demonstrated the ability to put machine in different places probably that [ where we need ] efficiency. And with that, I will hand back to David now. David Baynes: Thank you very much. Thanks, Mark. Yes, financial results, nice to review again as always. I'm going to go through this fairly quickly. It pretty much just pulls together all the things we've been talking about. Overall, cash, very strong again, GBP 237 million cash, that's actually up 47% from this time last year, and that's because of a very successful exit Featurespace at the end of last year, which of course, has generated significant amount of cash. We are, of course, slightly down from the year-end if we make investments, and I'll give you the cash flow in a minute to talk you through that. There was a small loss in the period, that 1.5% to about GBP 43 million loss. It is worth making the point as you've already heard that since the year-end, all of that has reversed actually for improvements in Nanopore and Hinge, about GBP 35 million of that's come back. And it means combined with share buyback, actually our NAV per share is now actually up. So it was briefly down at the half year from 97 to 96. We're now about GBP 1 a share. So that's, as I say, a combination of the improvement since year-end and also the share buyback which improves the NAV per share as we go along. And net overhead is down about 14% period-on-period. I'll do a slide on those in a minute and talk you through it. This next slide could be long, could be short. I'm certainly going for the short option increase and as disclosed in the interim results. There's a number of kind of uplifts over 5 or 6 companies and a number of write-downs over a similar number of companies and a foreign exchange loss of GBP 14 million, which relates to the pound being strong when we convert some of our American-denominated assets in particular, that may or may not reverse at some stage, depending on currency. But those elements just eliminate, quite frankly. And then you've got really just to do with 2 funding rounds really, Artios and Oxa, where actually, as you've already heard, the company is performing well, but actually, we've not either completed or have started a full funding. And as such, we have no choice but to actually make some kind of provision against both. And those -- that accounts for sort of GBP 9 million of that. So pretty much that is the story of the half. But just adjusting for those 2 assets in that small loss, but that loss has now been eliminated between the year-end and today. That's why when we now look at the assets here, assets are down a small amount from about GBP 1 billion to GBP 900 million, those are rounded, it's actually down about GBP 60 million. So it's a combination of that small loss and also shares we bought back because, of course, the buyback does actually balance sheet slightly smaller as we buy back shares. The concentration hasn't changed. So that next bit of the slide telling you there's no news. It was about exactly 56% of the top 10 at the year-end, and it is now. It's pretty much the same sort of ratio of how the portfolio looks. And actually, the next slide is also no change. This is a slide I always do but talks about how well the portfolio itself is funded because of course, that's very important. And actually, we've increasingly seeing this pattern whereby it's about 1/3 that is funded to profitability. You don't need to worry about that. And then there's about 1/3, which over the next year, 1.5 years need funding and then another 1/3 that doesn't need funding until '27 and beyond. So much of the portfolio is pretty well funded, but there will always be funding challenges and companies requiring funding at any point in time. So that kind of 1/3, 1/3, 1/3 rule is beginning to come pretty well solid as a rule. And now this just pulls it all together. So here's the cash of what's happened, and you've heard, I think, all of these numbers now. We've invested GBP 35 million in the period. It occurred over a number of assets. Most in current assets, only about 12% of that total investment into new assets as a single new company in the period. Realizations, we've talked about at length, GBP 30 million. Share repurchases, GBP 25 million. It almost exactly what we realized we've used on buybacks. That's actually a coincidence. But we are this year committed to 50% of our realizations to be done in the form of buybacks. It just so happens that some of the buybacks we've done relate to last year. It doesn't quite work out the math. But in short, we will be during the course of the year, I think 50% of our realizations and buybacks. Overhead is down, as we've heard, the net debt, actually, we generated about GBP 2.6 million net income on interest, but we've made some repayments on the debt in the period, which means the actual total move just a small reduction overall. And then there's a relatively large working capital movement. That relates to the licensing, which we just started talking about a bit. What happens on the licensing, we own certain licensing assets on Imperial College. We're responsible for them. We often collect in the proceeds and then actually we keep some, some need to distribute to other parties, it's Imperial College itself. And that means you sometimes have these working capital movements where we're paying out money in receipt on behalf of others. And that's why you get a relatively large movement. But that's the story of the cash, cash still very, very strong. And overheads, I'm very glad to say pretty much exactly what we said they'd be. So that 15% this time compared with this time last year, but we're going to do what we said we'd do. When we did the cost reduction in the second half last year, we said we'd reduced the '23 number, which was about GBP 22.5 million net to about GBP 16.5 million net. That's what we're going to do, 23% reduction. That still looks like what we'll achieve at the year-end. So I think without further ado, I'll pass back to Greg. Gregory Smith: Thank you, Dave. So leaving some good time for questions. So a summary of the half year results. So we made good progress in the first half. We saw a number of encouraging developments in the portfolio, many of which Mark has touched on, the public markets were a particular fair value contributor, including that Hinge Health IPO and Oxford Nanopore's strong trading. We made good progress on exits of GBP 30 million, and that momentum into half 2 means we remain confident of our target of achieving GBP 250 million of exits by the end of 2027. As Dave just mentioned, our NAV per share essentially stabilized over the period and has subsequently increased since the period end to GBP 1 a share -- about GBP 1 a share. And on the scale of capital and expanding our resources as a group, our capital resources as a group, we continue to see a big opportunity. And while the market hasn't necessarily moved as quickly as we hoped or expected, good confidence of securing at least one new mandate by the time we next see you all on the IMC platform for our full year results. I'll just quickly remind you, looking forward, our investment case is based on these 3 sort of hypotheses. The first is that there's significant value in U.K. science and technology, given our world-leading position there. And the IP Group is one of the pioneers in this space and with a long track record is well positioned to exploit that and that we hope we've set out an attractive shareholder opportunity in the next 6 months and indeed out to 2027. And then just because I think this is a good form, these were the priorities and future areas of focus that I set out at the full year, which we are aiming to achieve over the course of the time between now and the end of the year in 2027 on the exits. And I think on all of those, we're making good progress. So I won't go through them each in turn, and I'll cover them all off when we report to you our full year results. So thank you, everyone, for listening, and we will now turn to questions. David Baynes: Great. Thank you very much. Well, that's gone well so far. We said we'd be 40 minutes, and we're 38. So we've got quite a lot of questions, maybe not quite as many as normal. So we may get through this now. Laurent Tess, if you don't mind, I think we've answered yours, you had a question about why you're selling Hinge and keeping some of the smaller positions. I think Mark answered that while he was presenting. So I'll move on to next. Kane, nice to have you, analyst from Deutsche. Nice to have you here, Kane. You've got 3 questions. I'm going to do them one at a time. Mark, I'll do the first one with you. Might the adverse uncertain conditions research in the U.S. for example, funding like the NIH create opportunities in the U.K. Mark Reilly: Maybe. And there are headwinds as well and some pharma investments being withdrawn from the U.K. newspaper a couple of week or so ago. So I think we frequently see -- remember a few years ago, this question was about Brexit and the time before that, it was about the recession. And so there are lots of these kind of ebbs and flows of funding. I think it takes time to have an impact on us because it takes time to then filter through to the funding of the science, and that takes time to filter through to the commercialization that's coming out of those research lab, I would say not in the short term, but maybe in the long term. David Baynes: Kane, your second question, I'm going to point out to you, Greg. Why do you think Larry Ellison is so keen on LNG? Gregory Smith: I think looking at the time the question came in, it might have been before I said why I think he's keen. I mean I think the commercial answer is that the technology is incredibly well suited to 2 of those big themes that they're trying to solve the big global challenges they're trying to solve through the Ellison Institute of Technology, particularly around sort of human health and genetics, but also on the sort of sources of food and agriculture. Clearly, they're building a significant position there, which is interesting. So I haven't spoken to them directly. So I couldn't say definitively, but it's a good sign if you -- he's had such an incredible track record, like 40 years of delivering value through being able to not necessarily be ahead of the curve on technology adoption but certainly delivering real cash value. So I think it's a good sign, but also, it's one to watch. David Baynes: Yes. I'm going to point the next one to you, Mark, we know it's coming. Hinge Health up strongly post period end. Will you be inclined to take some profits? Mark Reilly: Well, we're locked in at the moment, and we did take some of the IPO. Then as I said earlier, it's an evaluation of the liquidity and the value available to us at any given time also. David Baynes: Thank you very much. Gregory Smith: And as you'd expect, obviously, we don't want to tell you about our intentions on our quoted companies because there's smart people out there that can do things with that information. But yes, we're pleased with that holding, and it's a good source of liquidity over time. David Baynes: The next one, Sam. Nice to have you here. Another analyst at Berenberg, good to have you here, Sam. I'm mentioning this because people in the past have said, can you make it clear when someone is an analyst and when they're not, so I'm doing that. I'm going to split this question. I'll do the first bit, Mark, and then maybe give you the second, if that's all right. First, one sentence, but would you be able to provide more detail on your IP licensing portfolio? And then separately, and therapeutic programs, when do you expect licensing income to ramp up? I'll perhaps do a little bit on the licensing. Licensing traditionally has been a relatively small part of our business. We inherited the licensing as part of the acquisition when we bought Touchstone. They, as part of their remit used to do the licensing for Imperial College. A very large number of patents, some of what we call active, ones that actually we had an agreement around them and some of the ones that was just exploratory and still waiting for maybe some of the license. And we retained all of those active licenses. So there's a relatively big portfolio about 80 different licenses. The actual strengthen that's what question is. The actual strengthen is relatively small traditionally, we'd be recognizing something like GBP 500,000, GBP 700,000 income a year. That tends to be the patent licenses you have to have a large number, most of them generate relatively small amounts. And then from time to time, you can sometimes get some really big licenses, a single license can do 95%, 99% sometimes of your license income. We have kind of 3 licenses out there. Greg has already referred to the Net Zero one. It's early. It's early. We're not going to start making claims about their value. And we're not recognizing in the books. Actually, in accordance to accounting standards, it's unlikely we will recognize in the books until such time as actual license income is recognized. So you can't kind of recognize it like a potential intangible or something. But any of the top 3 have the potential to, in time, generate significant revenues. Net Zero are now about a GBP 3.8 billion company, a GLP-1 agonist and it looks promising at the end of a Phase II trial. There are some notes out there. If that got to a Phase III trial, if that then became a successful drug, there may in time be some decent license income that come to us and something we would be also shared with Imperial College. So that's probably what I can say at the moment. At the moment, no impact on the financials, no significant impact on the financials. But maybe in time, maybe -- and I'm thinking maybe 2 to 3 years' time, you may start seeing if some of the things go well, some decent licensing income, and we'll talk about that at the time. It's a bit of a wide one to talk about all therapeutic programs. Is anything you want to touch on, Mark, where we might treat that question as dealt. I don't know there's anything over and above what we've already talked about there. Mark Reilly: I wonder whether that was at 10:18 as well as we have couple... David Baynes: Yes, I think that is. Gregory Smith: It's worth saying in the appendices in our results presentation, we do a sort of a summary of the main holdings and where they are in their clinical development and our valuation. And so what we're sort of -- what we're seeing as milestones coming up. So that's sort of a ready reckoner and I'm very happy to talk about in more detail than any of the others we haven't covered when we next see you, Sam. David Baynes: I've got another one for you, Sam, you split yours. I'll give it to you, Greg. I mean, given the current cash position and potential exits over the next couple of years, is there any change in your thinking around buybacks? Gregory Smith: Well, we hope we've got a pretty clear policy out there. While the discount is greater than 20%, the proportion of cash that we allocate to returning to shareholders is being done by way of a buyback. We think that's most accretive way to do that at the moment. And at the moment, for this year, we're doing -- we're using 50% of our realizations to that end. We will, as always, look at that number for next year. Historically, it's been around 20% of realizations that we've returned, which we see as sort of a more sustainable steady state. But obviously, we'll look at the relative opportunities for buybacks of our own shares versus portfolio opportunities and some small number of new opportunities. So no real change in the policy. The application changes each year based on circumstances. David Baynes: Next, Josh L, not an analyst, of which I'm aware. I'll probably take this. How has there been no First Light Fusion fair value movement despite a complete change of strategy during the period? There has been a significant change in strategy and actually some very promising technical developments, which I won't try to talk to. You can ask Mark about those if you're interested. But actually, reviewing the valuation, one of the main considerations which is like the probability of funding, the likely valuation of funding. And when we reviewed it, we came to conclusion that actually the kind of value we carry it at looks pretty robust around what we'd expect to value that. Mark Reilly: Myr recollection is that the new strategy was fairly well advanced at the time of the full year valuation. So that was... David Baynes: Pretty much factored in, yes, exactly. And at the moment, I think from where I'm sitting in terms of technical side of valuing it, I think that actually we carry it where we sort of think it may be valued. We may be wrong, but we will see. But we -- after quite a lot of discussion, we felt it was fairly valued and the movement in its actual carrying value is that just related to money we've invested in the business. So it's gone from. So that [indiscernible] So next, who would this be? From MV, hi IP Group team, nice momentum in portfolio. Thank you. Any plans on a partial full sell down on Nanopore, particularly given the IT initiatives? Well, Greg has already mentioned unlikely to comment on that. I don't know if you want to say anything further, but we're unlikely to comment on ourselves to public companies. Maybe you want to add to that Greg [indiscernible] Gregory Smith: I don't think anything to add to what we've said on that front. We do look at it all the time. It's not -- I've said in the past; it's not our strategy to have big holdings in large, quoted liquid companies that our shareholders can access directly. So it's a matter of time, but we're very -- we're a happy holder given the progress in the portfolio, and we always look at liquidity. David Baynes: Next question from Bill H. Probably, Mark, is about you, what is the role of IP Group's managing partner? If you'd like to... Mark Reilly: Well, to deliver shareholder value to increase the value of our existing portfolio and to make exciting new investments into companies that will be future well-changing company. So I have responsibility across the portfolio. I'm the person that chairs our investment committee. So I sure that the decision-making is sound and as good as it can be. And I see all the decisions around transactions of investments and exits. David Baynes: Thank you. Again, I think one for you, Mark, how much you want to talk about this. Can you -- this is Milosz, another analyst, Edison this time. Milosz, nice to have you. Can you give us an update on the monetization of Ultraleap patents and what you're able to talk about on that, Mark, I think. Mark Reilly: I can. I wasn't sure if I could, but I [indiscernible] text the CEO and he told that they did a LinkedIn post on Monday actually on this that the transaction, you might recall, we had an agreement to sell the patent portfolio to a company called [indiscernible] specialist in monetizing patent portfolios. And we were way to close that transaction when we last spoke publicly about this. That transaction has now closed. And so that's very positive. And the company has received the proceeds for that initial part of the transaction. There is an earn-out agreement. So as [indiscernible] monetize that portfolio, funds flow to [indiscernible] very positive. We really believe in the value of that portfolio. There's a lot of places where we think those patents are valuable. So we're optimistic about future fund flows from... David Baynes: Thank you. Next one, there's more questions coming in actually. Questions are picking up page. Robin M, I'll give this to you, Greg. I think maybe you can talk a little bit about cash raise from private markets secondary sales, both in the past and going forward. Is this becoming an easier way to raise capital? I think possibly referring to the small deal we did last year. I'll let you... Gregory Smith: Yes, so yes, we did do a small secondary last year. I think there's another question further down that asked about how are the assets marked and all that sort of stuff. And I think at the time, we said that on average across the various holdings on the balance sheet, it was a slight premium. It was about NAV, maybe a tiny premium to NAV on the balance sheet, and it was across -- it was a secondary that was across a few companies on the [indiscernible] funds and a few companies on the balance sheet side. There was -- the exact total was around GBP 23 million, I think, across the 2 pools. And we also said that there were things like preemption rights and all that sort of stuff, which we -- which meant we couldn't complete the full transfers that we planned to. I think we did just over 2/3 of the GBP 23 million, I think that transaction is all played through. And we do look at other options like that. We've explored all the time that I've been at IP Group, which is sort of 15-plus years, we've always looked at are their ways that we can accelerate value through these sort of structured transactions. I think the secondary markets are interesting at the moment. And they're interesting potentially -- for us potentially as we think about how we access scale up capital and build some strategic relationships. But also the secondary market is quite interesting because we have a permanent balance sheet and our liquidity position is reasonably strong, relatively speaking. There is clearly an opportunity where in companies that we're existing shareholders of that we particularly like or even potentially companies that we've tracked over the last few years that have made significant developments, but perhaps the cap table isn't as strong as it could be, then clearly, there's secondary opportunities for us. So yes, we look at it on both sides, and we'll always consider those opportunities. David Baynes: Next one, I'll point towards you, Mark, from Milosz again. And it's one that probably just give a general feedback on. But what appetite for M&A and licensing deals do you see across the life science sector at present? It's quite a wide-reaching question. Mark Reilly: I mean it seems good. My context is perhaps lacking a bit because I wasn't responsible for life sciences until a year or so ago, but I don't have a full history of staying close to this market in a way that others might, but it's -- that we've had quite a lot of interest in particularly one of our portfolio companies, there's been some inbound interest from potential sort of license acquirers. So in the small sample set that we have, it's maybe not representative, but it seems positive. David Baynes: I'll have a next one. Congratulations. This is David R. Congratulations on a good set of results. Thank you for that. On what basis is the optimistic view of exits of GBP 250 million for the period through to '27? Well, it's basically on our internal projections. So you can imagine we're running the sort of capital allocation process all the time. So I'm always updating estimates of how much we need to invest, how much we think we're going to realize, therefore, what's the closing cash balance is going to be. And in that process, we're always running out 3-year projections what our realization is going to be. And we do feel relatively optimistic in the period at the end of '27, we will generate that level of realizations. And to be clear, that doesn't include Oxford Nanopore. There's no plan for selling that. Nanopore is not in that. So one would hope Nanopore itself, that's the number they're talking about, could easily grow to a GBP 200 million asset on its own share at least by that time. So that's separate. We do think looking -- particularly there's a number of the therapeutic programs, which we think will come through in that timeline reporting both in '26 and '27, which we feel if they are successful, could generate really quite sizable realizations for us. So when you look at our numbers, I mean too much detail. When you look at our estimates for what we think we're going to realize, we have weighted probabilities, all types of complexity to try and estimate it. But we're increasingly finding we're relatively accurate at it. Although it's sort of a balancing day with 10% probability of that and 40% probability of that actually, it seems to work out relatively well, which is why we've been able to manage our cash relatively well. So in short, it's based upon our current expectations of the portfolio as it stands, and there are quite a number of, as you can see, look at therapeutic readout, therapeutic quite big programs reading out, which if any one of those work could make a serious dent in that number. And we are certainly, as we've already said, on target to do the number we plan to this year already. Next one, Haran, I hope you don't think I'm ignoring you. I think this is a question around the secondary we did last year, which Greg referred to, and I think we've answered. So I'll have a next question, which could answer the last one I haven't read, but I will read it out. We'll see what we've got. This is from David R. Your ambition is simply to increase NAV rather than achieve a more typical target of, say, 15%, which might be expected for VC investing. Should shareholders assume either that you're very cautious or simply don't believe you can create typical value on this risk or asset class in the U.K. Greg, how about you have that one? Gregory Smith: We all have a view on that. David Baynes: Yes. We go for that. Gregory Smith: We've got to be realistic with the current environment that we're operating in. However, it's fair to say that our ambition or our objective is to deliver compelling financial returns that are consistent with that risk profile. And certainly, when the IC needs to consider any investment in a portfolio company, we're not looking at will we keep this holding flat. We're looking at VC type multiples and VC type IRRs. And so the objective is to have more of those successful returns, and we focused the investment strategy more into those areas where we've seen that those success returns in the past, but also importantly, where we think there is returns to be had in the future in delivering against the sort of science-back investing environment. I don't know, Mark, if you'd add anything particular to that. Mark Reilly: No, that's all. Gregory Smith: Hopefully, we're moving into a period where that the environment is a bit more accommodative, and we're seeing good pickup in M&A interest. I wouldn't say it's sort of like a wall of M&A interest, but certainly compared to the last couple of years, there's quite a marked increase in inquiries. So that's obviously what -- it's the sort of cash-on-cash returns ultimately, which are important. And I think if you look at the track record of things we've had, including feature space recently and others, the cash-on-cash record there is very good. It's sort of 5x, 6x and in the sort of 20%, 30% IRR. So that's what we're targeting. The NAV gives you an idea of how it's going over time. But sometimes we have NAV setbacks and that doesn't necessarily mean that the company is not going to deliver strong cash-on-cash returns in the future. David Baynes: I agree. I also -- but I think 15% is something we can certainly can achieve. And certainly when you look at some of the areas we now focus on, as Greg said, actually mathematically, you can see the past, no proof of the future, but you can see investing in those areas in the past, we have achieved those sort of returns. So it's certainly a number we have part to and believe we will achieve. Andrew M, next, talking about the fall in value of Oxa, which has been partially explained by Greg. Could we -- he has mentioned there's some good technical progress. Could we perhaps, Mark, a little bit more about how we feel the technical progress despite the fall in value. Mark Reilly: Yes. Yes, I get an e-mail from the CTO once every couple of weeks talking about some of the exciting technical progress in the -- most of it's in the context of deployment on actual vehicles in real-world applications. They're doing a lot of work. Some areas I don't want to go into too much detail of because this is sort of commercially sensitive information, but they're doing a lot of work deploying their software on to real-world vehicles. One is in Jacksonville in the U.S., where I got an e-mail from the CTO the other day saying they're now 1,000 journeys and over 4,000 kilometers traveled autonomously. And I believe all those passengers survived the experience. So that seems to be going very well. And the sort of equivalent proof point in the off-road domain currently fitting out the trucks that transport big containers around ports. And the CTO has been sending me videos of these trucks. Look, we've now got 2 of these things and they can drive around without driving into each other. And so its very rapid progress being made of deploying this software on unusual vehicles accommodating all the parameters of those vehicles and the different requirements of their environment and operating effectively in those environments. So yes, I think from a technical perspective, they move at a great pace at Oxford and it's very impressive. David Baynes: Thank you very much. I appreciate that. Going to the next one, Haran again. You do get your question at this time. There were reports in the press reg Hinge Health that some shareholders sold shares at the time of their most recent results. Could IP Group have sold at the time? Mark Reilly: Yes. I think that may refer to the staff sale I guess there was a provision which allowed them to sell in that period, which other shareholders couldn't. I'm in contact with the bankers and with the company pretty regularly. I spoke to them a couple of times around that time that the staff sales occurred. So... David Baynes: Yes. No, we can confidently say we couldn't have done no. We're aware that we've tested the market. We know what we can and can't do and we couldn't know. Next one, Andrew M, where GBP 5 million investment in First Light go, I think [indiscernible] effectively bridge funding, a standard way we often fund our companies. I don't know if... Mark Reilly: Yes, on this operating capital, it's paying the salaries of the people that are continuing the research, developing this product that they're selling to the people who are pursuing the nuclear fusion and the people who are selling that product. David Baynes: I should warn everybody, by the way, but we are exactly at 11:00. So those of you only have on that, we won't be offended if you leave, but we're going to carry on. I think I've got about 5 more questions, so we will carry on. So for those that are engaged, stay with us. I've been guessing about another 10 minutes. But thank you for those who have to leave. I'm going to hand this to you, Greg, slightly unusual, but interesting question. Which competitors do you use as internal benchmarks. Well, are there any public or private funding vehicles you view as best-in-class that you draw inspiration from? It's a good question. Gregory Smith: It's a good question. Competitors or comparators in the U.K. I mean there's a reasonably well-developed market in the U.K. for certainly the early-stage bit of commercializing U.K. science. And a lot of the comparators, and we don't really compete with them significantly more often because there's more opportunities in capital generally at the moment. And you're often looking to collaborate rather than compete. We do compete if it's competitive deal. So on the U.K. side, there's Oxford Sciences Enterprise, we've got a small holding in that. We were a founder, shareholder in setting that business up, same with Cambridge Innovation Capital, Northern Gritstone, we work reasonably closely with, and we just launched that fund I was talking about for early-stage EIS investing alongside them in the portfolio. We also work some of the other well-known VCs in the U.K., Amadeus. And then I suppose some of the people that I have looked up to in terms of scale of business, I guess it's businesses like ICG, who very successfully used their flagship credit product to build out a very scaled asset management business bringing in private capital to support their existing portfolio and indeed to then build that out. So I often look at those comparators as sort of ambitious directions of travel for the group because certainly, it does feel that there is a large amount of capital that wants to allocate to this space. And so clearly, being in a position where we're a public listed entity, we've got the professional valuations and the systems and the reporting and the track record puts us in hopefully in an attractive position for those partners who are looking sort of reputationally at working with people that have been around for a period of time. So yes, there's probably those sorts of businesses. And of course, there are some world-leading VCs who are focused in particular areas, and we look at those for best practice and various of the team have the sort of their favorite bloggers in VC space that we track their thought leadership. They're very well resourced on VCs on the West Coast, some of whom they're increasingly moving into the deep tech space where we are. And so looking at their pronouncements and how they're seeing the world is all useful information for us. David Baynes: Thank you. I'm going to move on to Ian. I'm going to point this from your direction, Mark, if that's all right. It's a question we sort of get from time to time. How are you finding the U.K. universities at present? Are their funding issues making much difference to the way they're approaching tech transfer? And sort of separately, but connected, are any of the government-funded schemes being impacted by budget constraints and has this affected you at all? Mark Reilly: I would say yes, but I would say that's been the case for the past 15 years. I mean, they've always had these constraints on budgets and that has always manifested in their approach to tech transfer, and it sort of varies by university based on recent success or lack of in the domain of commercializing innovation. I think some of the universities that have had one standout success are much more kind of ready to invest in the area of tech transfer than others who have their fingers burned by it. So I wouldn't say that I've observed a huge sort of sea change or big fluctuation in the last period, but there is definitely always a budgeting pressure on tech transfer activities. And any of the government-funded schemes being impacted by budget constraints. Again, we're a little bit to us and there is definitely -- you will hear that if you walk the corridors of universities that budget constraints are impacting the research. But I think in some of the exciting areas that we're focused on in areas like quantum computing and emerging AI research work, there is still good money flowing into those areas, and we've done some really exciting research. And U.K. has always done a lot with a little. We've always done good research with limited results. David Baynes: I'll go on next. I think I'll probably take this one. It looks like my direction of it. Andrew M, thank you for this. Is it really accurate share buyback program has accelerated? It's up compared to '24, pretty stable in '25. I mean, I guess the answer is yes and yes to that. It certainly accelerated compared with what it did historically. I mean certainly, the amount we bought about 75 million shares just in the last year compared with sort of GBP 88 million, I think, ever. So it has, yes, accelerated. But it's a fair point within the year, it has been buying back at a relatively constant rate. During the year, why can our program be increased further? Well, it could, obviously. But that's the correct balance. I think we feel if we think we're buying at about the right rate and using about the right proportion of our proceeds on that buyback program. We feel it's been relatively successful. Ironically helped by a very low share price and then we bought quite a large amount of shares in the first half year at an average of about 47p. So we think we've got the balance right. We've already made this commitment we're doing half of the proceeds this year. So I think we feel that we've got the balance about right. Of course, one could always do more. There are some people that are saying, why don't you do less. So it is about trying to get a balance really. Next one, I'll probably do that as well, [indiscernible] doesn't it from Haran. The cash generated in half 1 from sales, what was the cash value relative to the holding value. Well, ironically, they were all actually. There's about 5 sales over the period, and they're pretty much all public company -- public company. So in terms of we haven't talked about what was an up or down because it was just the market price at the time. And a number of them went, I think, in for example, went for about double. That was the main one. I think we got about GBP 8.8 million. I think at the year-end, that was got in books at about GBP 4.4 million. So we haven't -- it doesn't really make sense to talk about whether we sold them up or down at the time because they were public market shares in any case. Let's have a quick look at the next one, sorry, coming down, Phil N. I think we've had this before, Phil N, if you don't mind, you're asking a question about whether we could sell Hinge or not. I think we've answered that fairly comprehensively. Okay, this one is always a tricky one. I'll ask Phil. I mean probably I'll point this to you, Greg. Always difficult, but for the shares to ride, you need happy existing shareholders and new buyer's summary. So who are the people who are selling? Is there a pattern, a trend or what? And is there an excess being dribbled out by a certain style of owners? Yes, quite a lot in that question. Do you have another go at there? Gregory Smith: Yes. Well, the overall backdrop probably you'll have seen the same sort of data that we see around net flows in and out of U.K.-focused equities, which continues to be negative and quite significantly negative global equities, actually, the flows have started to become negative overall, but particularly the U.K. has been negative. So there has been certainly in my experience over the last 10, 15 years, the number of humans that we go and talk to in the U.K. who are managing small mid-cap capital has definitely decreased and the number of funds has definitely decreased. When you look at the -- we get a monthly register analysis each month, and we go through that and try and get some clues as to who's buying and selling. Often there's changes period-to-period on the tracker funds. And sometimes from month-to-month, you get some of the larger or middle-sized holdings either reducing the position a bit or increasing the position a bit. There's not really a huge pattern that I could talk to, if I'm honest. Our job is to deliver on the strategy to be able to communicate that strategy, and we seek to do that as actively as we can. We've got a number of capital markets events we've done over the course of the year to attract new investors. And Dave, maybe you just want to talk a little bit about the efforts we've done with brokers this year and the other sort of -- given the U.K. has been more net reduction in capital available with the other relationships we've been. David Baynes: Yes. Yes, we're very proactive actually. I mean we have quite a wide range of brokers. I say our primary brokers is extreme supportive and very good. Numis and Berenberg, but we do also get some help. There's an asset called [ TKDY ] in New York, a small team of 5, who have been -- they've kind of identified about 200 American investors who are interested in U.K. stocks. And they've been getting us meetings. I probably have a meeting on average about once a week on them. And if they're interested enough, then Greg joins me, and we do a joint meeting. We think we -- it's often actually hard to tell. I know it sounds funny. We get a full shareholder register every month and you're paying down and trying to analyze. Sometimes you can't immediately identify who is what because they get through nominees, for example. But we think some of those American presentations are beginning to bear fruit. Cantors have also been helping us as well. We're finding some meetings both in America, and we've got some roadshows in Europe coming up. [indiscernible] have helped us. They took on a roadshow in Switzerland recently. So we're actually extremely active. And you will find by the end of the year our Head of Global Capital [indiscernible] some presentations in the Middle East and also in the Far East. So it's definitely not due to a lack of energy, and we are trying to get out and see people. And we think that is begun to pay dividends. We think and that partly reflects in the share price that we are getting people to find out how interesting the story is and find out how extraordinary discount is and what the opportunity is, is pretty much what we're telling people. Next one is from Lucas, a shareholder from Switzerland. Lucas, good to have you there with us. A new written -- just thinking out loud, you're giving an additional GBP 200 million in exits in private holdings until 2027. So you add that on to sort of Nanopore, which sort of hopefully by then, something like GBP 170 million. Are you saying that there's nearly 70% to 80% of current market cap might be achieved? I think the answer is yes. That was pretty much what I said earlier. Yes, that is about right. Obviously, there's a lot ifs in that. But if we achieve that, which we believe we will on the sort of non-nanopore holding. If Nanopore still performs as it should, we believe it will, yes, there's something between GBP 150 million to GBP 200 million Nanopore on top of that number, we will hope we will see. Last one, David B. Always nice talking [indiscernible] Why are you so good on someone. David B, this is for you, Mark. Do you think the start of U.S. drug pricing and tariffs by the U.S. administration is affecting pricing in the biotech market but ultimately successful innovation? If so, does that mean the model needs to be revisited so it is sufficiently profitable given the huge development costs? It's repeat your question. Mark Reilly: Question -- danger of being a political question, yes. So from our perspective, yes, I think we've got to assume that there has an impact something that is an impact. It's something that the team is factoring into the valuation work that we do every time we make a transaction in the portfolio. And so with the sense of the model needing to be revised. I think it's about making sure that we're putting money in at the right price to reflect the ultimate terminal value of the company. And so that's -- you described it as a revision of the model on a macro basis, we're doing it from the ground up of the looking at these transactions and the value is there to be delivered in the context of the current market. The other thing I said, I don't think we're really seeing this in the conversations we're having with pharma in the portfolio yet. I don't think I haven't heard that we've had pharma coming to us and saying we can possibly engage with you on this or pay this much for this company on the basis that the ground has shifted beneath us, but that might be going. David Baynes: And the last question is not a question, thank you, Filip N. Thank you, everybody, who stayed with us this long, and thank you all the questions. That's a 29th and last question, Jake. Operator: Perfect, guys. That's great. And thank you, as usual, for being so generous of your time then addressing all of those questions that came in from investors this morning. And of course, if there are any further questions that do come through, we'll make these available to you after the presentation. But Greg, perhaps before really now just looking to redirect those on the call to provide you their feedback, which I know is particularly important to yourself and the company. If I could please just ask you for a few closing comments just to wrap up with, that would be great. Gregory Smith: Thanks, Jake. Yes, so to summarize, again, we've made strong progress in 2025 year-to-date, good progress on cash proceeds, and that gives us good confidence around that GBP 250 million of exit target to the end of 2027. I think the standout in performance for the first half or standout transaction was that successful Hinge Health IPO, which we're very pleased to see and delighted for the team and of course, for our financial returns, and that's helped NAV per share now get up to about GBP 1 a share, and hopefully, we go up from here. And then on the share price, we've done -- continue to do 2 things that we think we can to close the discount, convert more portfolio into cash and return that excess capital with discipline at today's price. We still think that buybacks are an accretive tool. And so we've been using that tool more aggressively that year, and as David said, to good effect, and we'll continue to weigh buybacks against new investments strictly on a returns basis. And so we are one of the world's most experienced university science investors. And so we remain uniquely positioned to capitalize on the sort of the fiscal reform that we're seeing and hopefully, this rising demand for high-growth innovation. So thank you all for listening and look forward to updating you on progress for the rest of the year and into 2026. Operator: Perfect, Greg. That's great. And thank you once again for updating investors this morning. Could I please ask investors not to close this session as you'll now be automatically redirected for the opportunity to provide your feedback in order the management team can better understand your views and expectations. This will only take a few moments to complete, but I'm sure it will be greatly valued by the company. On behalf of the management team of IP Group Plc, we would like to thank you for attending today's presentation. That now concludes today's session. So good morning to you all.
Operator: Good morning and good evening, ladies and gentlemen. Thank you for standing by, and welcome to the QuantaSing's Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please note that today's event is being recorded. I will now turn the conference over to Ms. Leah Guo, Investor Relations Associate Director of the company. Leah Guo: Thank you. Hello, everyone, and welcome to QuantaSing's Earnings Call for the Fourth Quarter and Fiscal Year 2025. With us today are Mr. Peng Li, our Founder, Chairman and CEO; and Mr. Dong Xie, our CFO. Mr. Li will provide a business overview for the quarter, then Xie will discuss the financials in more detail. Following their prepared remarks, Mr. Li and Xie will be available for the today's session. I will translate for Mr. Li. You can refer to our quarterly financial results on our IR website at ir.quantasing.com. You can also access a replay of this call on our IR website when it becomes available a few hours after its conclusion. Before we continue, I would like to refer you to our safe harbor statement in our earnings press release, which also applies to this call. As we will be making forward-looking statements, please note that all numbers stated in the following management's prepared remarks are in RMB terms, and we will discuss non-GAAP measures today, which are more thoroughly explained and reconciled to the most comparable measures reported in our earnings release and filings with the SEC. I will now turn the call over to CEO and Founder of QuantaSing, Mr. Li. Peng Li: Okay. Good morning, everyone. Thank you for joining us today for our Q4 and full fiscal year 2025 earnings call. I'm excited to share some really encouraging results with you today, along with significant strategic announcement that marks a new chapter for our company. As many of you know, we've been transforming from a traffic-driven to a product-driven business. And furthermore, we have consolidated a controlling stake in Letsvan since March 31 and have reached an agreement to acquire the remaining equity for a full 100% merger. Before diving into our quarterly results, I want to share important news about our strategic direction. We are announcing our potential business restructuring to divest all our non-Pop Toy business to focus exclusively on our high-growth Pop Toy business. This represents a decisive step forward in our transformation. We have been in negotiations with buyers, who are interested in acquiring this established business. The restructuring will allow us to concentrate all our resources, talent and capital on the tremendous opportunities we see in the Pop Toy market, while ensuring that our all established non-Pop Toy business found the right home with a buyer who can continue maintaining the operation of this business and achieve potential further development. We will share further details on timing and transaction terms once they are finalized, subject to final negotiations and customary closing conditions. This quarter marks our first full period with Letsvan's consolidation. From April through June, the quarter was defined by both challenge and accomplishment, yet I'm incredibly proud of what we have achieved with our strategic transition. Let's look at the numbers. Our revenue reached RMB 617.8 million. Most importantly, our Pop Toy business contributed RMB 65.8 million, representing our core growth engine moving forward. Beyond that, as of June 30, 2025, we held over RMB 1 billion in cash and cash equivalents, restricted cash and short-term investments for the company. This cash reserve established a strong foundation for our transition into Pop Toy business. Let me highlight what is driving this growth opportunity with our Pop Toy business. We are seeing rapid cultural transformation, driven by young digitally savvy consumers, who want emotional connection and unique collectible experiences. This is one of the most dynamic segments globally. The brands that win are those that brand creative IP, emotional storytelling and real-time engagement. These trends have transformed pop toys from niche items into lifestyle essentials for adults and millennials. As a pop toy company, we will be uniquely positioned to capitalize on this massive market opportunity. Each of our Pop Toy series features unique designs and distinctive personalities that resonate on the psychological level. For example, WAKUKU, our flagship IP, is now one of the most recognized trend toys in China, a skilled hunter, full of courage and wisdom. ZIYULI, the Chinese princess that grows by yourself. And SIINONO, a new IP launched in July 2025, an alien creature from the warm and carefree planet, Hassey. Following the strategy we outlined in Q3, we have been operating the Pop Toy business systematically and have achieved significant results to date. We are seeing strong market validation across our IP portfolio. Next, I will provide further details on our core strategy using the Q3 framework. First, IP brand development and product. We have built a diverse portfolio of unique IP designs that resonate deeply with consumers. Let me give you some new recent examples. Our WAKUKU, Fox and Bunny series achieved over 1 million unit sales since its launch on May 17th. During the initial launch of our new IP SIINONO wants to tell you a secret blind box sold out 10,000 units in 10 minutes at our Douyin flagship store and achieved approximately 300,000 units sales to date. Today, we are operating over 40 blind box product lines. And over 30-plus pendent card products across our IP portfolio. This includes 11 self-owned IPs, including WAKUKU and ZIYULI, 2 exclusive licensed IPs and 2 nonexclusive licensed IPs. We are strengthening our IP metrics through 3 key approaches. First, we are investing in our own, original IP development. We will continue to gather artistic and designer resources in various locations, establishing design centers in different cities, such as Beijing, Hangzhou and Shenzhen. We have a diverse and collaborative team that enables us to continuously innovate blending artistic vision with cultural insights to create IPs that truly resonate with our fans. Second, we are strategically pursuing IP licensing partnerships with proactively exploring and securing exclusive collaborations across design styles, product categories, audiences and international markets. We began to collaborating with artists and illustrators through in-depth product co-creation and development to help launch their first-generation blind box collectibles and limited-edition products, fostering mutually rewarding opportunities. Third, we are building strategic partnerships beyond traditional toy collaborations, linking our product with healthy, optimistic lifestyle brands. For example, we are partnered with China Open Tennis Tournament, Beijing Fashion Week, Universal Studios, Genki Forest, a leading health beverage brand and for Shanghai, hot TV series. These partnerships expand our reach across entertainment wellness and lifestyle markets. What truly sets us apart is how we leverage everything from our strategic partnerships to our product design around emotional connection, we are not just making toys. We are creating meaningful products that foster companionship and speak to a real emotional needs. By weaving rich, growth stories into our classic IPs, we transform them into emotional companies that resonate on the personal level. The second pillar of our strategic focus is on marketing and channel expansion, which is driving growth, both thematically and internationally. In our home market, our momentum is impressive. On the online front, we've built a community of over 250,000 followers on the two largest local social platforms. While our content has achieved remarkable viral reach with over 550 million views on Douyin and 140 million views on Xiaohongshu. Regarding GMV, since officially launching online operations in April, our GMV had already exceeded RMB 18 million in August, which is over 9x that of April. Offline. Our multichannel presence is equally robust. We've established a widespread wholesale network of over 10,000 retail stores through our distributor partners and actively participate in Pop Toy exhibitions in top-tier cities such as Beijing, Shanghai and Shenzhen, significantly enhancing brand visibility. At our partnership retail stores, the launch of SIINONO achieved more than 10,000 units sold in just 10 seconds. This underscores our strong capability to generate marketing impact and rapid sale through physical locations. Our self-operated retail strategy is a key driver of our offline expansion, with a focus on innovative pop-up stores and high-impact launch events. As we mentioned before, we are actively developing our flagship retail stores. In the meanwhile, we have already demonstrated strong offline capabilities through large scale pop-up installations and exclusive product launches. For example, on August 30th, we launched a pop-up store at Beijing Chaoyang Hopson One. In addition to a selection of our best-selling products, this limited time activations allow us to create immersive IP-driven environment that generate significant social buzz and translate excitement into direct sales. We are currently in negotiations with top-tier shopping malls in several first-tier cities to open flagship stores, with at least 3 to 5 locations expected to open by the end of December. These events boost brand visibility. They act as community touch points, featuring an interactive content and limited edition releases. This deepens emotional connections with fans and builds lasting brand loyalty. While still in the early stages of our international expansion, we are encouraged by the strong growth momentum we are seeing overseas. On the online front, we have established a North American independent e-commerce sites, launched flagship stores on TikTok for both North America and Southeast Asia as well as an official online store on Shopee in Southeast Asia. We have achieved significant breakthroughs in these markets. For offline channels, we have established wholesale networking over 20 countries through our distribution partners, such as Japan, major Southeast Asian countries, the United States, Canada, Australia, the United Kingdom, France, Germany, Italy and Saudi Arabia. Self-operated stores are a key part of our long-term global strategy. So we are still in the planning phase for our physical store rollout. We intend to take a data-informed test-and-learn approach once we enter new markets using real-world insights, including sales performance, customer engagement and market feedback to strategically guide our expansion and deepen brand engagement. In July, we opened approximately a 30 square meter pop-up store at Central Park Mall in Jakarta, Indonesia, to test the local market, which successfully validated both market demand and our team's operational capabilities. Regarding our non-Pop Toy business restructuring, we are making strong progress. This move will ensure the established business continues to operate smoothly and provides better development opportunities for the team. While the process from the sale will strengthen the company's own equity, more importantly, the transaction allows us to concentrate all resources on operating our Pop Toy business with maximum focus, transforming the company into a global trendsetter and creating substantial long-term value for the shareholders. We are confident this move delivers clear value to our shareholders and sharpen our strategic focus. As we transition into Pop Toy business, our strategy will be built around 3 core priorities. First, we are strengthening IP creation and incubation, by refreshing content, expanding product lines and collaborating across sectors. We are building emotion-driven ecosystem that boosts users' loyalty and brand value. Second, we are driving agile execution by refining supply chain operations, optimizing inventory and logistics and building the flexible production partnership. Speed and efficiency are key to our market responsiveness and cost control. We have made significant progress in the product capability. In August, the output of our mainstream plush products had already increased more than 20-fold since the beginning of the year in January, exceeding 1 million units. Third, we are dedicated to delivering sustainable returns to our shareholders. Our focus remaining on calculating high-valued IP, expanding global channels and maintaining disciplined profitability and cash flow management. In summary, Q4 fiscal year 2025 represents a defining moment in our transformation journey. Our potential business restructuring reflects our confidence in the exceptional growth potential of this market. This sharper focus means we can really build on our early wins in Pop Toy, speed up our growth in sustainable way and deliver even more value to our shareholders. We have shown, we know how to execute in this business. And now with total focus dedicated to resources and a stronger financial position, we are ready to become a true leader in this dynamic, high-growth industry. Thank you for your continued trust and support. Our performance to date gives us strong confidence in our future position. I will now turn it over to Tim for a detailed review of our financial results. Thank you, everyone. Dong Xie: Thank you. Before I go into the details of our financial results, please note that all amounts are in RMB terms, that the reporting period is the fourth quarter of fiscal year 2025 ended on June 30, 2025, and that in addition to GAAP measures, we will also be discussing non-GAAP measures to provide greater clarity on the trends in our actual operations. We are pleased to report solid financial performance this quarter, making our first full reporting period since completing the Letsvan acquisition in March 2025. Total revenue reached RMB 617.8 million with net income of RMB 108 million, achieving a strong net profit margin of 17.5%. These results reflect our intentional strategic transformation from traffic-driven growth to a more sustainable product focused business model. This transition is already showing clear results with sales and marketing expenses, improving significantly to 47.6% of revenue from 69.2% in the previous quarter. Our Pop Toy business now accounts for 10.6% of total revenue as it's becoming a significant part of our revenue base. Breaking down our revenue composition. Revenues from the Pop Toy business totaled RMB 65.8 million. With a continued momentum in this business, we expect it to drive meaningful growth in future quarters. Individual online learning services generated revenues of RMB 456.9 million compared to RMB 906.7 million in the fourth quarter of 2024. This change was primarily due to decreases in skills upgrading courses, financial literacy courses and recreation and leisure courses. Revenues from enterprise services was RMB 35.7 million compared to RMB 56.6 million a year ago. The change was primarily due to a deliberate reduction in the marketing services provided to a customer. Revenues from our consumer business was RMB 50.5 million compared to RMB 33.3 million a year ago. The change was primarily driven by the increase in revenue from wellness product sales. And finally, revenues from others were RMB 8.9 million compared to RMB 3.5 million a year ago. Gross profit for the quarter was RMB 467.6 million, with a gross margin of 75.7%, compared to 85.9% in the same period last year. This margin change reflects our strategic shift towards more product focused offerings, which naturally carry a different cost structure. On the operational front, we continued to prioritize effective cost management while focusing on our resources on the Pop Toy business. Total operating expenses were RMB 344.2 million, a decrease of 44.7% from RMB 622.9 million in the same period last year. To break this down, sales and marketing expenses decreased by 49.3% to RMB 294.1 million, mainly due to lower marketing and promotion costs, reduced labor outsourcing and lower staff expenses. This decrease was partially offset by new sales and marketing costs for the Pop Toy business following the Letsvan acquisition. As a percentage of total revenue, non-GAAP sales and marketing expenses, which excludes share-based compensation, decreased to 47.6% from 57.4% a year ago. Research and development expenses slightly declined by 0.1% to RMB 21.2 million, mainly due to lower staff costs, excluding share-based compensation, expenses of the established business. This decline was partially offset by the new research and development expenses for the Pop Toy business following Letsvan acquisition and by an increase in share-based compensation expenses of the established business. As a percentage of total revenue, non-GAAP R&D expenses, which excludes share-based compensation, was 3.4% compared to 3% a year ago. General and administrative expenses were RMB 29 million compared to RMB 11.6 million a year ago. The change was mainly due to the newly added general and administrative expenses for the Pop Toy business resulting from the acquisition of Letsvan and an increase in share-based compensation expenses for the established business. As a percentage of total revenue, non-GAAP G&A expenses, which exclude share-based compensation, is 4.3% compared to 2.5% a year ago. We achieved a net income of RMB 108 million, representing a net margin of 17.5%. Our adjusted net income, which excludes share-based compensation, was RMB 111.2 million, representing an adjusted net margin of 18%. Basic and diluted net income per share was RMB 0.67 and RMB 0.65 during the quarter. Adjusted basic and diluted net income per share were RMB 0.69 and RMB 0.67 during the quarter. Regarding our balance sheet position, as of June 30, 2025, we held RMB 1040.9 million in cash and cash equivalents, restricted cash and short-term investments, representing an increase of RMB 14.6 million from RMB 1026.3 million as of June 30, 2024. Both our established business and the Pop Toy business are cash self-sustaining and don't require significant additional capital. This allows us to focus our available cash reserves on strategically expanding the Pop Toy business, to accelerate its growth and market presence. Looking ahead, we're excited about the growth prospects for our Pop Toy business. Based on currently available information, we expect revenues from our Pop Toy business to be in the range of RMB 100 million to RMB 110 million for the first quarter of fiscal year 2026 and in the range of RMB 750 million to RMB 800 million for the full fiscal year 2026. This forecast reflects our confidence in the pop toy market opportunity and our ability to scale our IP portfolio and expand internationally. That concludes my prepared remarks. Operator, let's open up the call for questions. Thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] First question today comes from Alice Cai of Citi. Yijing Cai: I have several topics to cover. And let me begin with what I think most investors care most about, which is the toy revenue trajectory recently. Given that WAKUKU contribute RMB 43 million in Q4 and SIINONO, that's launched in July. And you now have 15 IPs in total. Could you please share the recent revenue run rate for July to September? And management mentioned that the demand so far is outpacing supply with order book through Q1 next year. So could you please quantify the confirmed order backlog in dollar terms? Dong Xie: Thank you, Alice. I'll answer this question. Regarding the growth curve, WAKUKU began operations last December, and we saw sustained volume expansion starting in March, right after the spring festival of China. Its growth rate can be described as explosive, out of the gate, gaining momentum very rapidly. By August, its monthly production capacity had reached approximately 20x the level at the beginning of the year. Strong demand from channels, our distributor partners and also the online and high user repurchase behavior provide strong visibility for our performance over the next several quarters. Also regarding the new IP, SIINONO, launched in July, SIINONO demonstrated our accelerating growth momentum as a completely new IP that has been on the market for only a few months. Its initial sales were exclusive. And recently, the sales of SIINONO have exceeded 300,000 boxes. This reflects our continuous evolution in product design, marketing and channel execution. When viewed together, the combined effect of these two engines, explosive new releases and sustained classic performance, is accelerating our overall revenue growth rapidly. This powerful momentum is the core reason for our confidence in future performance, and we look forward to sharing more detailed figures in the next earnings report. Regarding confirmed order value, our front-end sales team schedules production based on market feedback. For products already ordered by sales, the current delivery rate is less than 50%. That means a huge pipeline in process. Production and planning for future quarters is proceeding in an orderly manner. Yes, I think that will help to answer your question. Yijing Cai: It's helpful. And my last question is on the valuation of Letsvan because some investors are calculating its valuation at RMB 1.7 billion based on the 8x 18 million common shares divided by 20%. But these 18 million shares are granted in 3 tranches with a vesting period over several years, right? So could you please walk us through the specific arrangements for these three tranches? And are they tied to performance markdown? And if performance targets cannot be met, will later tranches be adjusted or canceled? Dong Xie: Okay. The acquisition of the remaining equity is currently still in the settlement process and further details will be disclosed in due course. I think I can give you some key points to help everyone to understand the transaction. First, Mr. Huiyu Zhan, the Founder and CEO of Letsvan, he represents the product strength of our Pop Toy business. And he himself is a seasoned entrepreneur with years of experience in this sector. He is highly optimistic about the future of the pop toy market and believe in the long-term value of fully committing to this field together with us. For this transaction, Mr. Zhan opted to receive shares as consideration for his remaining equity with no cash involved. The second point is that approximately 60% of the consideration was paid in newly issued shares in exchange for Mr. Zhan's remaining equity, while the remaining 40% was granted as long-term incentives, which will vest gradually over a period of about 8 years. So it's a very long time, and it means the commitment with us, and we can do that in a long time. I think the third one is this structure reflects our shared commitment to long-term collaboration and value creation. And also for the remaining one, except Mr. Zhan's shares, the remaining equity held by other shareholders was acquired for cash, for pure cash, at a valuation not exceeding RMB 1 billion. This portion of the transaction has been completed as of today. I think that's the information I can give to the market. Maybe we can give details when we fully complete the transaction. Yijing Cai: I have another question. Looking at the time line going forward, because you are guiding for RMB 100 million to RMB 110 million in Q1 and around RMB 750 million for the full year guidance, right? So given that Q4 already hit some RMB 66 million with just 3 months of contribution, are these targets conservative? When does the management expect the top revenue to -- toy revenue to surpass the education business? Dong Xie: Okay. I think first, our guidance for FY '25 and FY '26 were made based on the prudent assessment of the market environment and the piece of product and channel development when we formulated our strategy earlier this year. As you can see from the performance figures just released, growth across several key metrics has already outpaced our earlier expectations. Based on the recent business process and our updated market outlook, we are issuing our first formal earnings guidance for the Pop Toy business. And this guidance is supported by the following factors: The first is better-than-expected performance of hit products and mature IP matrix. Our established IPs, such as WAKUKU and ZIYULI have demonstrated strong longevity, and new generations of these IPs are already in the pipeline. In addition, the successful launch of our new IP SIINONO in July has been very well received with robust ongoing sales momentum. The next generation of products is already scheduled. This success validates our exclusive artist IP partnership model and sets a solid foundation for continuously introducing new artist IPs. In addition to the 15 IPs we had as of June 30, we recently signed two additional new exclusive licensed IPs. We have initially established a healthy product vision and pace, combining new explosive releases and sustained classic performance, driven jointly and by product strength and brand power. This indicates our IP operation capabilities and user loyalty are reaching a new level. The second is continuous expansion of online and offline sales channels. Our online GMV reached over RMB 18 million in August. We continue to deepen partnerships with offline distributors and self-operated pop-up stores as well as permanent flagship stores either under negotiation, all in the process of opening. We expect to open 3 to 5 flagship stores by end of year, laying a solid foundation for the expansion of self-operated stores next year. And also accelerated global expansion, we have established initial channel and marketing presence in Southeast Asia and North America. Although still in the early stages of expansion, the growth rate in these regions has exceeded our initial expectations and the market potential appears more promising than originally anticipated. This confirms our strategic direction is correct, and has positioned the company to capture future growth opportunities. I think based on these 3 areas of our outperformance and current business momentum, strongly supports a more optimistic outlook for future growth. As disclosed in our earnings release, given the rapid growth and market potential of the Pop Toy business, that concentrating all of our resources on this segment, we are currently in discussions with potential buyers regarding a group restructuring plan, which may include divesting non-Pop Toy businesses. The details will be announced promptly upon the completion of any relevant transaction. So all of the actions and plans will be conducted in accordance with the principles of business focus, enhancement of shareholder value and sustainable development of each business unit. We believe that upon completion of the restructuring we will achieve greater strategic focus, utilize resources more efficiently, see exceptional growth opportunities in the IP and Pop Toy sectors and create greater long-term value for shareholders. So in summary, I think the forecast all reflect our focus on this business sector and also our methodology to do the business and also our principle to do everything very seriously. So that figure reflects our very -- our confidence to deliver that, so that I think we will adjust the annual forecast based on new information, maybe in the next quarter, we will adjust and based on the ongoing development of the business so that we can give the market very serious and confident figures. Yijing Cai: And I have a follow-up question on the restructuring. It seems that you are considering a sale on the education segment, right? And if so, what's the pipeline looking like? Dong Xie: Yes, the pipeline is very strong. So as I just mentioned in several situations to the market, we will consider the different development direction of our existing business based on the performance of the Pop Toy business and other performances of the existing business. As we announced, since we have started the process of this restructuring, that means we are very confident that of the existing Pop Toy business' performance and also the development of this performance so that we can deliver a long-term value based on the solid foundation we have set up during the past months and since the acquisition and controlling of the Pop Toy business. Operator: Next question comes from Brenda Zhao with CICC. Liping Zhao: I got 2 questions here. So first, relates to the Pop Toy business because we've recently seen that Pop Mart launched its Mini Labubu. So could management introduce your product strategy and whether we will introduce more product categories in the future and what's our pipeline for new categories? And my second question is related to the collaboration with Yuehua. I'm wondering whether there will be new business model and innovations. If so, could you elaborate more on that side? Peng Li: Okay. Thank you for your question. I will answer in Chinese. [Foreign Language] [Interpreted] We have a clear and structured road map for IP launches. Our IP pipeline is already scheduled through the end of next year. Both our fundamental art library and product design reserves ensure a consistent and well placed rollout of our new products. In terms of the category innovation, we're also actively exploring and developing new directions. In addition to our core blind box series, some other categories will increase smaller sized line of figures and plush products, which will also include mini versions featuring more durable designs and accessible price. This will cater to wider user reverences for collecting and consumption, further expanding our market presence. Products in these new categories are set to debut in next fourth quarter. We can't wait to share them with you soon. Okay. That's the answer for the question one. And about the question two, first, in terms of the cooperation with Yuehua Entertainment, as you can see that our partnership with them is strategic initiatives build on the complementary strengths. We have established a joint venture with Yuehua Entertainment. In terms of the business model, we primarily provide joint venture with IP design, supply chain support and sales operation capabilities, while Yuehua Entertainment will leverage its extensive cross-industry resources in the film, television and celebrities field to drive promotion and strengthen IP breakout and enlarge the user engagement. In the future, we are planning to develop more IPs exclusively for the joint venture. These IPs will also incorporate Yuehua Entertainment's strength and also their capabilities. We will also continue to utilize these IPs and to promote them and operate using both companies' resources, we'll focus on IP design and product development while jointly building a close-loop ecosystem, causing the IP incubation, promotion and formalization. Operator: That is all the time we have for Q&A. I'd like to hand the conference back over to management for any closing remarks. Leah Guo: Thank you, everyone, for joining our call today. If you have any further questions, please feel free to contact us. Also make a request through our IR website. We look forward to speaking with everyone in our next call. Have a good day. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome to the Evolution Petroleum Fourth Quarter and Fiscal Year 2025 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please also note, today's event is being recorded. At this time, I would now like to turn the conference over to Brandi Hudson, Investor Relations Manager. Please go ahead. Brandi Hudson: Thank you. Welcome to Evolution Petroleum's Fiscal Q4 2025 Earnings Call. I'm joined by Kelly Loyd, President and Chief Executive Officer; Mark Bunch, Chief Operating Officer; and Ryan Stash, Senior Vice President, Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer. We released our fiscal fourth quarter and full year 2025 financial results after the market closed yesterday. Please refer to our earnings press release for additional information containing these results. You can access our earnings release in the Investors section of our website. Please note that any statements and information provided in today's call speak only as of today's date, September 17, 2025, and any time-sensitive information may not be accurate at a later date. Our discussion today will contain forward-looking statements of management's beliefs and assumptions based on currently available information. These forward-looking statements are subject to risks, assumptions and uncertainties as described in our SEC filings. Actual results may differ materially from those expected. We undertake no obligation to update any forward-looking statements. During today's call, we may discuss certain non-GAAP financial measures, including adjusted EBITDA and adjusted net income. Reconciliations of these measures to the closest comparable GAAP measures can be found in our earnings release. Kelly will begin today's call with opening comments. Mark will provide an update on our properties and plans as they relate to our ongoing strategy of maximizing shareholder returns, and Ryan will provide a brief overview of our financial highlights. After our prepared remarks, the management team will be available to answer any questions. As a reminder, this conference call is being recorded. If you wish to listen to a webcast replay of today's call, it will be available on the Investors section of our website. With that, I will turn the call over to Kelly. Kelly Loyd: Thank you, Brandi, and good morning, everyone. We demonstrated another solid quarter of execution in fiscal Q4. Evolution reported a material improvement in net income of $3.4 million and adjusted EBITDA of $8.6 million, underpinned by a balanced commodity mix and prudent cost controls. Average production was 7,198 BOE per day, and our revenue mix was 61% oil with natural gas and NGLs providing a meaningful offset in a volatile oil backdrop. We also declared a $0.12 per share dividend for fiscal Q1 '26, extending our record of dependable cash returns for shareholders. We have now consistently issued a dividend every quarter since 2013. We continued to upgrade the portfolio in ways that improve durability and capital efficiency. During the fiscal fourth quarter, we closed our highly accretive $9 million TexMex acquisition, which included nonoperated oil and natural gas assets across New Mexico, Texas and Louisiana. This acquisition adds roughly 440 net BOE per day of stable, low decline production with a roughly 60-40 mix of oil and natural gas with relatively low cost behind pipe upside potential. Subsequent to quarter end, we closed the largest minerals only acquisition in company history in the SCOOP/STACK. Approximately 5,500 net royalty acres with roughly 420 net BOE per day at the effective date with years of upside drilling that comes with no net cost to evolution. Minerals cash flows are very high margin as they come without lifting cost, which pairs beautifully with our existing position in the basin. These acquisitions are a great example of the kind of low decline, high return exposure that we seek, scalable capital-light and immediately cash generative. They also represent a clear demonstration of our ability to effectively adapt to market environments and deploy capital in the most effective manner. When oil prices are low, it presents compelling M&A opportunities rather than drilling opportunities and vice versa. In the market environment and what's going on there, commodity prices remained choppy through the quarter. Our model, which is grounded in diversified commodity exposure and tight cost discipline did what it is designed to do. It smoothed out cash flows and supported returns which is further reflected by our improved profitability despite essentially flat revenue and production. For oil, we see the demand picture of kind of steady as she goes. Over the last 10 years, on average, demand has grown at a little over 1% per year, and we expect this trend to continue. OPEC+ is continuing to add back supply. This has recently put the global speculative trading community on defense to the point where net positioning has reached some of the shortest net positioning observed in the past decade. On the other end of the spectrum, there's very little geopolitical risk priced into the forward curves, although potential disruptive hotspots are popping up all over from Russia to the Middle East, down to Southeast Asia and to South America. Additionally, we all know that the best cure for low oil prices is low oil prices, but it doesn't happen overnight. If prices stay in the 60s, we fully expect there to be a negative production response, and we're already seeing many examples of CapEx budgets here in the U.S. being reduced. If the demand picture holds, it's reasonable to assume that if more U.S. barrels are needed, we will see higher near-term prices as flowing barrels are more sought after as well as higher long-dated prices to incentivize increased CapEx from the North American E&P community. We're certainly not calling for it, but we could see a sharp snapback just like we did the last time WTI averaged in the 60s at $68 a barrel in 2021 and 2022's average WTI price increased to roughly $95 a barrel. For natural gas, we see the setup for a very strong forward demand curve. Current and planned incremental LNG exports as well as increased industrial demand tied to natural gas' portion of incremental power generation are the main drivers behind this. What is driving the expected increase in power usage, well, that's in large part related to new data centers, AI implementation and cryptocoin mining. In most years, since the beginning of the shale era, producers have needed forward Henry Hub prices of greater than $3.50 to grow production sufficiently enough to meet these levels of forward demand expectations. However, we must always remember that weather is a huge player for natural gas prices, and can cause sharp near-term swings. The weak weather scenario that requires a curtailment of supply has a far lesser financial impact on evolution than the positive financial benefit that we would receive from the opposite weather scenario, one where it's so cold that there's much more demand than supply. Overall, our portfolio of low decline producing assets with additional upside potential from new drilling locations to behind pipe prospects is primed to both ride out any weakness and flourish when there's strength. Regardless of the market environment, our capital allocation framework is unchanged, prioritize durable free cash flow, return cash through a reliable dividend and pursue accretive low-decline opportunities, both organic and inorganic. These will improve our per share value over time. The $0.12 per share dividend we recently declared for fiscal first quarter '26 reflects that discipline and our confidence in the portfolio and future cash flows. We also took a significant step to enhance flexibility with an amended and restatement of our senior secured reserve-based credit facility. The intent is straightforward: maintain conservative leverage and position our balance sheet with ample dry powder to capitalize on accretive opportunities for shareholders, be it organic or inorganic. With that, I'll hand it over to Mark for more details on the assets. J. Bunch: Thanks, Kelly, and good morning, everyone. I will focus my remarks on key operational highlights from the quarter and encourage listeners to review our earnings press release and filings for additional details across our asset base. Beginning with SCOOP/STACK on our working interest position, activity moderated late in the quarter with several wells in progress and late quarter contributions beginning to come through now in the fiscal first quarter of 2026. On the minerals package that closed after quarter end, we anticipate a gradual ramp-up aligned to operator schedules, with the majority of initial royalty cash flow beginning in fiscal 1Q '26 and building from there. As Kelly mentioned earlier, mineral interest provide royalty cash flows without typical working interest expenses and complement our existing footprint. In Chaveroo, we turned in line 4 gross wells on time and under budget, and early results are ahead of plan. We are advancing permits for the next phase and will pace activity to commodity prices to support returns and cash flow consistency. In Delhi, operations experienced downtime from shut-ins related to facility safety upgrades. We also experienced some seasonal effects related to the high ambient temperatures limiting the amount of CO2 injection. The operator continues to inject only recycled CO2, which remains economically favorable for this field. And in Jonah, operations were stable with reported sales volumes lower due to pipeline balancing. We expect makeup volumes to contribute in the first quarter of fiscal 2026. Across the portfolio, our properties -- our priorities are unchanged: safety, cost control and capital efficiency. We will continue to deploy capital where it competes best on a risk-adjusted per share basis. Over to you, Ryan. Ryan Stash: Thanks, Mark, and good morning, everyone. As Brandi mentioned earlier, we released our earnings yesterday, which contains more information on our results. For today, I'd like to walk through our financial highlights. In fiscal Q4 2025, we had total revenues of $21.1 million, essentially flat year-over-year. This reflected flat production at 7,198 BOE per day and overall pricing that was roughly unchanged on an aggregate basis given our diversified commodity mix. Realized natural gas prices increased 66% year-over-year However, oil prices declined 20% year-over-year and NGL prices declined 12% year-over-year. Operationally, temporary downtime at Delhi and pipeline balancing at Jonah weighed on reported sales volumes while our 4 new Chaveroo wells turned in line and production from our TexMex acquisition helped to offset the downtime. Quarterly net income improved materially, both sequentially and year-over-year to $3.4 million or $0.10 per diluted share. Adjusted EBITDA for the quarter was $8.6 million, up 7% year-over-year and 16% sequentially, driven by portfolio mix and cost discipline as well as positive impacts from our hedge portfolio. On a per unit basis, LOE was $17.35 per barrel and G&A, excluding stock-based compensation, was $2.99 per barrel. Cash provided by operating activities was $10.5 million for the quarter, and capital expenditures were $4.7 million. Our hedging program remains a core pillar of risk management. We maintain a balanced portfolio with our ultimate goal to protect downside while retaining prudent upside. We evaluate markets regularly and will layer in hedges when required by our credit facility covenants or when economics support our objectives, which are supporting our dividend program, locking in returns for capital plans and preserving balance sheet flexibility. We align hedge levels with expected volumes and the pace of development, consistent with our focus on maintaining free cash flow through commodity cycles. At June 30, 2025, we had cash and cash equivalents totaling $2.5 million, borrowings of $37.5 million and total liquidity of approximately $30 million. As Kelly mentioned earlier, on June 30, we amended and restated our senior secured reserve-based credit facility, adding a second lender and establishing a $65 million borrowing base under a $200 million revolving credit facility that matures on June 30, 2028. Subsequent to year-end, we funded our acquisition of mineral and royalty interest in the SCOOP/STACK with $15 million in borrowings under our revolver and cash on hand. We returned $4.1 million through common dividends in the quarter and $16.3 million in fiscal 2025. On September 11, 2025, the Board declared a $0.12 per share dividend for fiscal 1Q '26 payable September 30, 2025, to holders of record September 22, 2025, marketing the company's 48th consecutive quarterly dividend and 13th consecutive at the current level. Cumulatively, Evolution has returned approximately $134.8 million or $4.05 per share in common stock dividends, reinforcing our priority of steady capital returns and a dividend program built to remain dependable through cycles. Now I'll hand it back over to Kelly for closing comments. Kelly Loyd: Thanks, Ryan. To close, our team executed very well in both Q4 and fiscal 2025, especially when considering the volatile oil market, we've been navigating this calendar year. We are very excited as we enter fiscal '26. We are well positioned to accelerate growth and advance the company's strategy with multiple tailwinds in place, including our recent acquisitions of TexMex and SCOOP/STACK minerals along with multiple organic opportunities across our asset base. At Chaveroo and across the portfolio, we will pace development to market conditions and stay focused on our core objectives, creating durable free cash flow, a reliable dividend and disciplined accretive opportunities that compound per share value over time. With that, I'll turn it over to the operator to begin the Q&A session. Thank you very much. Operator: [Operator Instructions] And your first question comes from Poe Fratt with Alliance Global Partners. Charles Fratt: I have a couple of questions, if I may. The first of which is, can you just give me an idea of sort of where your run rates are right now for like the SCOOP/STACK and also Barnett and even Chaveroo, if you wouldn't mind? Kelly Loyd: Sure. You're talking about on a production basis? Charles Fratt: Yes. BOE, whatever the measure you want to use. Kelly Loyd: Okay. Yes. So the SCOOP/STACK is -- I mean it's in line with where we were in the quarter, honestly. And Chaveroo, where we're doing with that. So you see that the wells came on and they're going to decline pretty -- what mark on the first year average sort of 50% over the course of the year. So I apologize, but we don't like to give out intra-quarter sort of exact run rate. So I'm being a little evasive on purpose here for you. But it's in line with what we were in the quarter on the sort of natural declines we're talking about. So... Charles Fratt: Okay. Maybe on Chaveroo, when did you hit full production there? When did all 4 wells hit full production. J. Bunch: Like between -- in the first 2 weeks of May. Charles Fratt: Okay. Great. And then can you talk about CapEx looking into fiscal '26? Ryan Stash: Yes. So right now, we're -- and I'll let Mark and Kelly comment on Chaveroo specifically. But our budget currently is around $4 million to $6 million is what we're thinking for fiscal year '26, and that's primarily SCOOP/STACK CapEx, along with other maintenance CapEx that we typically see in our other areas. So right now, we're not currently budgeting any CapEx in that range for Chaveroo, and that's obviously dependent on our partner and just the outlook for oil prices in general. J. Bunch: Yes. And I'd like -- excuse me, I got choked for a second. Yes, I'd like to say like we have -- we're continuing to process to permit the wells and get them ready to drill. But we haven't yet decided whether we're going to pull the trigger on drilling them right now. It's going to depend upon commodity prices at the time. And we have a very similar viewpoint with our partner out there. So we'll be making that decision sometime much closer when -- sometime in probably calendar year '26. Kelly Loyd: Yes, I'll just follow up. Look, we consider these to be really valuable locations. And obviously, when you're drilling new wells, they come on flush production. And again, we'll make that decision later on, but we're doing everything we need to, so we can dynamically change in response to prices. But we'd rather not go full board drilling when prices are in the low 60s. So we'd rather save that for when prices are better and take advantage of that. Charles Fratt: Understood. And just one last one, if you wouldn't mind, on the cost side. Can you just talk about where you might see LOE on SCOOP/STACK go? And also with the Barnett, you had the audit benefit for the fiscal fourth quarter on that asset? And can you just talk about a run rate for LOE for the Barnett looking at fiscal '26? Kelly Loyd: Okay. So on the first question with regards to SCOOP/STACK LOE, the way we intend to do it, right, it's one asset for us, and we're going to look at it together. So we're still assessing the impact as cash flows come in, but we definitely -- obviously, there will be a material improvement with the Minerals acquisition. Mark, did you want to add to that? J. Bunch: Yes. I'd say on SCOOP/STACK, like it's where it runs right. We don't expect on a BOE per basis for it to increase substantially. So I mean, we should stay right where it is. It's a good asset. It's very, very profitable for us. Kelly Loyd: But again, when you combine it with the minerals, it will be... J. Bunch: Even better. But I mean I'm talking about just the -- I'm just talking about the operating side. I mean, it's been a star from a standpoint of cost per BOE. Charles Fratt: Yes, I'm guessing you see at least a 10% decline in your per BOE/LOE on SCOOP/STACK in the fiscal first quarter or maybe for the full year? Kelly Loyd: We will -- obviously, that will get refined as we sort of integrate more of these cash flows as they come in. But I mean for a starting point, I think that's a pretty good idea. Ryan Stash: Yes. On the Barnett, to answer your question, obviously, we're looking at -- if you look at our last quarter in our press release, it was about $18.50 a barrel all-in for the Barnett. We do see some of those costs hopefully going down a little bit going forward. I mean we do think there are going to be some benefits from the audit in terms of processes that were changed, but also there were gathering contracts where we negotiated by the operator diversified that it's going to have some benefit. So I would say run rate, we're seeing current levels be just slightly lower than that. So we should hopefully do a little better than that March 31 number that we have there in the press release. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Your next question comes from Chris Degner with Water Tower Research. Christopher Degner: I just wanted to ask a bit more about the recent SCOOP/STACK acquisition that was mostly mineral acreage. And curious if that's a shift in strategy or was more focused on that specific opportunity and how you think about acquisitions with working interest versus minerals? Kelly Loyd: Yes, Chris, thank you. This is Kelly. I appreciate the question. This was done on a truly an opportunistic basis. As you know, we screen many, many, many deals every year. And what we look at chiefly is how accretive will it be to our cash flow per share, i.e., our ability to fund our dividend, both near term and long term. And this one, it fits perfectly. We bought it for what I think is a very reasonable price on PDP alone. I'd say more than 80% of the value we placed on just the PDP side of it. But of those 5,500 sort of -- it's actually 5,603 net royalty acres, there are a ton of upside drilling locations. And as you know, with minerals, you don't pay for those. So it worked out to be something that -- again, we're really happy with the deal and where it's looking plus we understand the basin really well. So we understood how those locations are probably going to perform. And anyway, I think it's a really good deal. So going forward, it will be sort of the same strategy, Chris. If it's working interest, if it's minerals, we're going to go for whatever adds the most accretion to our cash flow per share going forward. Operator: This concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the conference back over to Kelly Loyd for any closing remarks. Kelly Loyd: Thank you very much. And we want to thank everyone for taking the time to be here and to listen to us. As you know, you can follow up with our IR department with Brandi Hudson, if you want to arrange for any more questions. Like I said, just really proud of the team and all the great work they've done putting this portfolio together that is truly primed to do really, really well when we get some favorable tailwinds on pricing and ride out all the storms. So thank you very much for your time. Operator: The conference has now concluded. Thank you for attending today's presentation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Thank you for standing by. My name is Erik, and I will be your conference operator today. At this time, I would like to welcome everyone to the Bullish Global Sector Quarter 2025 Earnings Call and Q&A. All lines have been placed on mute to prevent any background noise. After the speakers emerge, there will be a question-and-answer session. If you would like to ask a question during this time, simply press star, followed by the number one on your telephone keypad. If you would like to withdraw your question, press star one again. I would now like to turn the call over to Michael Fedele. Please go ahead. Michael Fedele: Good evening and welcome to our first ever quarterly earnings call as a public company. I'm Michael Fedele, Vice President of Finance, and I'm joined on today's call by our Chief Executive Officer, Tom Farley, Chief Financial Officer, David Bonanno, and Director of Corporate Development, Liam Foley. This call will contain forward-looking statements, including those relating to our expected performance and business opportunities. These statements are not assurances of future performance. They are subject to risks and uncertainties, and our actual results could differ materially. For more details on these risks, please refer to today's earnings press release and our SEC filings, including our prospectus dated August 12th, 2025. We undertake no obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statements. This call will also include a discussion of non-IFRS financial measures. A reconciliation of these metrics to the most directly comparable IFRS metrics can be found in our earnings press release and presentation, which also contain additional information regarding non-IFRS financial measures and key performance indicators. I'll now turn the call over to Tom. Tom Farley: Hello, I'm Tom Farley, the CEO and Chairman of Bullish. I'm joined by David Bonanno, our CFO. Thank you for joining us today on our first earnings call since going public. I expect to be a little longer-winded today in introducing myself and our company than in future sessions. I'm excited to discuss our results, but before I do, I want to spend some time highlighting my background, Bullish, our mission at Bullish, and why I'm so excited to lead this business going forward. By way of background, I've spent my career working in market infrastructure with exchanges and other regulated entities across multiple asset classes and several geographies. In all, I've been Chairman, CEO, and/or President now of 10 regulated exchange or related businesses. I've held various leadership positions at Intercontinental Exchange, the world's largest traditional financial exchange group by market cap, where I served as President of the New York Stock Exchange, introduced electronic trading to the New York Board of Trade, also as President, and completed multiple large-scale transformational M&A transactions. I know this market infrastructure business model well. My experience gives me a deep understanding of the amazing value that exchange businesses can offer our investors, and perhaps even more importantly, our customers, but also of all the opportunities to further push the envelope, go the extra mile, if you will, and drive innovation. For the past several years, I've been applying my learnings to make Bullish the premier institutional digital asset market infrastructure business in the world. Bullish is an institutionally focused business that operates globally and provides market infrastructure and information services that are designed to help institutions grow their businesses, empower individual investors, and drive the adoption of stablecoins, digital assets, and blockchain technology. We hold what I believe to be the foremost respected and difficult-to-attain crypto licenses in the world, from the European Union by way of Germany, from Hong Kong, the United Kingdom, and as of yesterday, New York State, the BitLicense. Although the growth in the digital asset space over the past decade has been staggering, institutional adoption has lagged behind. Looking ahead, we're excited by the continued opportunity in the digital asset space, and we're not alone. Industry analysts estimate that the crypto space will more than double in the coming years, and we expect this may prove to be conservative, and we expect that this growth will largely be on the back of institutional adoption. What's changed? Up until now, we believe the lack of institutional adoption owed largely to regulatory uncertainty. Things are indeed changing, however. We are seeing increasing regulatory clarity all over the world. Europe's MiCA regulations and Hong Kong's Aspire roadmap both add clarity. We are also quite optimistic with recent progress in the United States, including the adoption of the GENIUS Act, which defines stablecoin regulation, and the progress towards a broader adoption of a crypto market structure bill, which intends to formulate the first national regulatory framework for digital assets market infrastructure. We believe that this regulatory framework is not only exciting in the context of existing blockchain and crypto adoption, but could also plant the seeds for the large-scale transition of many traditional finance workstreams and markets to blockchain technology in the years to come. Turning to our business, Bullish operates two primary brands: the Bullish Exchange, which includes our exchange and related market infrastructure offerings, and CoinDesk, our information services offering. Our exchange and related market infrastructure solutions differentiate Bullish from other competitors through our suite of Tier 1 regulatory licenses, one global order book, unconflicted business model, predictable and consistent liquidity with tight spreads, and other areas of differentiation. We offer spot, perpetual futures, and dated futures trading, and we'll soon launch options at scale. We offer clearing and custody and more. Our calling card is deep liquidity in crypto's largest assets and at competitive low fees. Year to date, through August 2025, our exchange has facilitated more than $530 billion of total volume, including more than $485 billion in spot volume alone. We support trading from many different trading pairs, and we have established significant volume market share in Bitcoin, Ethereum, and stablecoins as compared to our identified peer set of regulated exchanges. Notably, none of our volume to date has come from the United States. While we have already had the ability to operate in many states because of our regulatory approval, we refrained from launching our exchange in the United States until we received the New York State Department of Financial Services BitLicense, both because of the prominence of the BitLicense as well as the relative importance of New York State to our business model. We received that license yesterday, and we look forward to bringing our exchange and our leading liquidity to the United States imminently, and we believe this to be the largest geographic market by far. We're also excited by our liquidity services offering, which provides digital asset issuers with subscriptionized liquidity, listing, visibility, and distribution. This revenue line has grown significantly in recent months, as you can see, including through various recently signed agreements that are not yet reflected in our financial results, such as our collaboration with Solana, which was initiated on July 1st, and agreements with various other stablecoin and digital asset issuers, including effectively now all of the calendar stablecoins. Our information services brand CoinDesk offers three primary services: CoinDesk Indices, which designs tradable benchmarks that track the performance of digital assets. Our flagship products CoinDesk 5 Index, which, in conjunction with Grayscale, has filed to become the largest multi-token ETF in terms of assets in the world, and CoinDesk 20, which tracks the performance of the 20 largest digital assets by market cap. Our indices anchor about $41 billion in AUM and over $15 billion of trading volume as of June 30, 2025. Our second service, CoinDesk Data, offers a comprehensive suite of subscription-based market data and analytics solutions that serves as a key resource for more than 11,000 institutional investors, professional traders, and industry professionals. Recently, we announced we hired Dave LaValle, a longtime industry executive, well-respected and well-known in the industry, to lead both the Indices and CoinDesk Data initiatives. Our third service, CoinDesk Insights, provides news on the digital asset industry, having reached a global audience of more than 80 million people last year and serving as host for the consensus conferences in Hong Kong back in February and in Toronto earlier in Q2. Our Insights business earns revenue from advertising, sponsorship, and events and serves as a critical cross-sell function for the rest of our business lines. Each of these three services: indices, data, and insights is growing due to our great leadership team, introduction of new products, and utilization of our broad reach to find new customers while cross-selling to our existing base. Dave will hit on a recent cross-selling success in his remarks. I'll now shift gears to highlight a few accomplishments and areas of focus for us. First, on regulatory approval, Bullish has pursued intentionally a suite of difficult-to-attain regulatory licenses from the most reputable Tier 1 regulators in the world to set us apart and prepare us for the institutional adoption wave. We already hold Type 1 and Type 7 licenses from Hong Kong SFC and a benchmark administrator license from the United Kingdom FCA. While we were previously grandfathered into EU's regulatory regime through our license with Germany's BaFin, our license was recently uplifted to full alignment, requiring no further need for grandfathering with the EU's MiCA regulation. Repeating our very recent good news, we were approved for the New York DFS' prestigious BitLicense yesterday. Throughout our positive communications with the team at New York DFS, we remained confident and optimistic in the impending approval of our application and are pleased to now share that we are licensed in New York. The BitLicense is infrequently granted and known for stringent application requirements. We believe this milestone is a testament to our ability to merge our innovative technology, including, among others, our automated market-making instruction, with the capability to operate within the parameters of a highly regulated environment. This caps off the completion of what we call, quote, the quad factor, which is the four toughest Tier 1 digital assets regulatory licenses in the world. We're looking forward to launching in the US imminently. Moving on to our liquidity services, this business continues to grow rapidly, and in recent months, we have entered into a collaboration with the Solana Foundation and many more liquidity services partners that are powering some of the most exciting projects in the space, including Pudgy Penguins, World Liberty, USDG, JITOSOL, Agora, Bomb, AllUnity, Bitpanda, and many more, and have deepened our already strong sales pipeline for the future. Our decision to accept our IPO proceeds in stablecoin was very well received by our partners, both existing and new. While we've managed now to add many of the sizable challenger stablecoin providers to our liquidity services client list, the addressable market of both new stablecoin entrants and non-stablecoin token issuers remains massive. Accordingly, we have a deep and growing pipeline of future opportunities. For our existing exchange operations, we are constantly optimizing our pricing. Starting in March of this year and stretching through Q2, we made several iterations to our exchange pricing. These optimizations included the adjustment of fees based on client type and client activity. This experimentation led to non-standard fluctuations in both our volumes and our typical spread rates. We believe that the fruits of this optimization strategy have really started to manifest in Q3. You can review our monthly KPIs currently accessible on our IR website to see that monthly spreads, and particularly volatility-adjusted spreads, are a good deal higher in the first couple of months of Q3 than they were in Q2. Shifting gears, we continue to make progress towards an anticipated full launch of our options trading platform in Q4 of this year. In fact, our options trading product is already live in production as part of a mobilization or beta phase where clients are trading, but just in a risk-limited manner and ring-fenced to only a select number of clients. I've been a part of many trading product launches in my career, including options trading product launches, and this one has all the hallmarks of a successful initiative so far. We will report back as we move towards full launch. It was a busy quarter for our information services business. In addition to the hiring of Dave LaValle, on the CoinDesk Indices side, we continued to add assets under management, ending the quarter with $41 billion of assets under management tied to our indices, an increase of more than $9 billion from Q1. We also launched exciting new products, including CDOR, CoinDesk's overnight rate, a benchmark interest rate for stablecoins. On the CoinDesk Data side, our integration of CC Data acquired in Q4 of 2024 is now complete, and we continue to regularly cross and upsell our customers. For instance, recently we signed a far more comprehensive CoinDesk Data contract with LSEG Refinitiv. We also continue to execute on the multi-products cross and upsell, including through a recently signed custom deal with Midnight. We also executed a very successful consensus conference in Toronto during Q2, where we welcomed more than 15,000 guests. While we loved our time in Toronto, the United States is once again the capital of crypto, and we look forward to hosting our 2026 North America conference in Miami on May 5th through 7th. Please join us. Finally, I'd like to discuss our U.S. launch. As I mentioned a moment ago, we have received the New York BitLicense. This was the last critical item for us to launch in the United States. What's next? From an activation standpoint, our team has already been pounding the pavement, building a pipeline of interested exchange customers, including asset managers, hedge funds, retail brokers, and more. In many instances, we can leverage our relationships with these very customers on the information services front to establish warm introductions and get them excited about the prospect of onboarding to Bullish. Our onboarding team and relationship managers have hit the ground running. We are also advantaged due to our global order book, a single global order book. Any U.S. client that onboards to our exchange will have access to our already existing global liquidity from day one, meaning there is no zero-to-one or cold start problem, and meaning that U.S. customers will instantly benefit from our best-in-class liquidity in crypto's largest asset. It is worth noting that our targeted customer base is institutional. Institutional clients do take some time to fully onboard to the exchange and begin trading. We are optimistic about the opportunity in the United States, and we believe it could fast become our largest trading market. That said, we wish to guide conservatively to volume expectations, particularly in immediately ongoing quarters, since it will take some time for clients to fully hook to our platform technologically and initiate trading at scale. Our receipt of the NYDFS BitLicense is an important milestone and positions us well. We're glad we have the opportunity to share this news with you folks today and look forward to addressing any questions about the license and our plans during Q&A. While there are several other highlights that I could address, including our recently launched investor trading competition, our IPO, or the impacts of accepting funds in stablecoins, or any of the exciting new CoinDesk 5 and CoinDesk 20 developments, I recognize that our prepared remarks are already pretty lengthy this time around, and I want to ensure we save time for Q&A. I'll stop here. I'll give Dave a chance to introduce himself, discuss our business model, review the quarterly results, and provide an outlook for the business. David Bonanno: Thanks, Tom, and good afternoon, everyone. Today, I'd like to walk you through our business model, the second quarter results, and provide some context on our operating performance. Financially, we are building Bullish around five core financial pillars that serve as our foundation for continued growth and drive our capital allocation framework. These pillars are organic revenue growth, diverse and complementary revenue streams, operating leverage, maintaining a well-capitalized, highly liquid, and uniquely flexible balance sheet, and finally, creating value through M&A for shareholders. The height of these financial pillars translates into our business model. As shown on page 10 of today's investor presentation, Bullish has a broad set of diversified and complementary revenue streams. While these various business lines each have their own revenue models, they all make money in familiar ways as described on the page. In particular, I'd like to call out our SS&O revenue, which includes liquidity services and all the CoinDesk brand of products inside of information services. Our SS&O revenue has grown to 45% of total adjusted revenue in the first half of 2025, up 28% from the full year 2024. This growth has been driven by significant new logo wins and cross-selling into our existing base of partners. On page 11, we feature several of Bullish's recent business highlights across the business. Tom already touched on most of these, but I'd like to drill down a bit more into how our cross-sell efforts are generating multi-product adoption across the Bullish and digital asset ecosystem. To do that, I'd like to highlight one extremely new exciting partner, Igloo Inc. As featured on pages 12 and 13 of our investor presentation, Igloo Inc. is the owner of the well-known Pudgy Penguins intellectual property and issuer of the PENGU Token. Igloo and Pudgy Penguins chose Bullish for multiple mission-critical subscription-based services during the third quarter that highlight the multiple ways that Bullish powers our partners' growth ambitions. Pudgy Penguins is a global Web3 IP-focused company onboarding new users to crypto through their globally recognized Pudgy Penguin character. Originally an NFT collection, Pudgy Penguins' IP and trademarks were acquired by serial entrepreneur Luca Netz in 2022. They have since become one of the world's most recognizable characters, with over 220 billion social media and gift views, more than 2 million toys sold across more than 10,000 global retailers, including Walmart and Target, and one of the most popular racing mobile video games in the Apple App Store, Pudgy Party. Today, the Pudgy Penguins NFT collections and PENGU Token have a combined market capitalization of approximately $3.5 billion. The toys include scannable QR codes to download a digital wallet with an NFT that can be used in their online properties and video games. Additionally, Pudgy Party is powered by an in-game blockchain-based marketplace for redeeming rewards and trading in-game assets. Igloo chose to partner with Bullish across several multi-year subscription-based products, including our liquidity services, CoinDesk Data, and multiple insights products, including our research and CoinDesk Edge. We are particularly excited about this partnership. We are bullish on the future of this promising team, and there's a clear line of sight to expanding the partnership by leveraging more of our CoinDesk Insights platform and Pudgy Penguins' strong ties to the Solana network and community. We look forward to sharing more developments with you here in the future. Turning to our adjusted second quarter results on page 14, you can see we closed the quarter roughly in the middle of all the previously provided ranges. Reconciliations of our non-IFRS metrics can be found in the back of today's presentation, as well as our 6-K filed earlier today with the SEC. Digging in a bit more into our adjusted operating results, as shown on page 16, the second quarter was shaped by historically low BTC price volatility, which led to lower market-wide digital asset trading volumes. Against these headwinds, we delivered record quarterly subscription service and other revenue, which helped to partially offset the lower trading activity, leading to total adjusted revenue for the second quarter of $57 million, down 8.7% sequentially and 6.1% year-over-year. Adjusted operating expenses for the quarter were $48.9 million. As seen on page 17, employee compensation expenses were $25.7 million, down 13% sequentially and 3% year-over-year, and we expect quarterly employee compensation expense to remain broadly at this level going forward. Additionally, I'd also highlight Q2 advertising and promotional costs of $7.4 million. This largely consists of consensus events variable expenses driven by our North American consensus events in Toronto. Adjusted EBITDA was $8.1 million, down 39% sequentially and 45% year-over-year as Q2's lower adjusted transaction revenue flowed through to the bottom line. Now, I'd like to turn to our Q3 guidance for adjusted operating results. We expect total adjusted revenue to be in the range of $69 million-$76 million, with adjusted transaction revenue between $25.5 million and $28 million, and subscription service and other revenue between $43.5 million and $48 million. We anticipate Q2 adjusted EBITDA between $25 million and $28 million, and adjusted net income between $12 million and $17 million. Going forward, we intend to provide guidance on a quarterly basis for adjusted operating expenses and SS&O revenue. Our monthly reporting for spot perpetual volumes and spreads should allow investors to see our performance at the exchange level on a regular basis. Thank you for joining us today. We look forward to the questions, and with that, I'll turn it back to Tom. Tom Farley: Thanks, Dave. We're thrilled to be able to share some of our accomplishments, our latest plans with you all. Q2 was a strong quarter, and the groundwork we've laid in Q2 should position us well for Q3, Q4, and beyond. With that, I'll pass it back to the operator to help facilitate Q&A. Operator: As a reminder, if you'd like to ask a question, please press star, followed by the number one on your telephone keypad. Your first question comes from the line of Ken Worthington with JPMorgan. Please go ahead. Ken Worthington: Hi, good afternoon. Thanks for taking the question. Congrats on the IPO, congrats on the BitLicense, congrats on the strong liquidity and subscription services numbers. My question goes to that liquidity and subscription services line item. You're guiding to sort of mid to high $40 million range for 3Q. If we look at 2Q, how many tokens were part of liquidity services at the beginning of the quarter, and how did it end the quarter? As we think about 3Q, where does that number grow to? Tom Farley: Hey, Ken. Thanks, and good to speak to you again. Yeah, that business kind of jumps out at me as well because it is really growing nicely. If I can just expand a bit and explain for the broader audience kind of what it is. What this business is, if you're a stablecoin issuer or a non-stablecoin token issuer, and Dave gave a couple of examples of non-stablecoin token issuers, you really need to have your product listed. Not just on Bullish, you need to have it listed in a number of different places to ensure that there's appropriate liquidity. You need to make sure that there is appropriate liquidity. If you just list your product somewhere and there's no bids or offers, it's a tree falling in the woods. You need to be able to have some level of visibility for your product. Advertising, or you need to be on stage at an industry conference, or you need to have research written on your token. When you look around and you say, geez, who can give me all of those? We like to think it's really just us. If you look around and you say, who can give me all those and who can do it with an institutional-grade wrapper that's credible and compliant, it's certainly only us. I suspect that's what's really driving it. To give you a little bit of a directional answer without necessarily giving you the specifics about, hey, we had this many in this quarter and that many in the following quarter, because we've not disclosed that level of detail, I will say it has accelerated rapidly throughout this entire year. I think a lot of it is just the groundswell of regulatory clarity all around the world. Everybody knows the rules of the road, so they're willing to kind of push the chips in the middle of the table, and they're willing to make these kind of long-term commitments to someone like us to pay us, in many cases, maybe even most cases, seven figures a year for this sort of subscription. Regulatory clarity is really helping us, and the growth has accelerated Q1 over Q4, Q2 over Q1, Q3 over Q2. I'll hand it over to Dave. David Bonanno: Yeah, Ken, I would just note that in the third quarter guidance we provided, it's important to note that that is the beginning of the Solana contract. That is a large collaboration for us. There's a lot to do for us there. Additionally, the additional proceeds from the IPO do carry some return on them, so that's going to influence the third quarter guide as well as those assets came on the balance sheet around mid-quarter. I just echo what Tom said. It's been a rapidly compounding line item for us. It's the bedrock and the balance head for the cross-sell efforts, and it's the growth of just the individual logos being amplified by the additional products and services that we're able to sell into our new partners and existing partners. Ken, you may remember from our first conversations, we were certainly excited about this business, but not overly so, because we ourselves wanted to make sure there's product-market fit, and we wanted to make sure that the customers were getting even more value out of it than we were receiving in the subscription fees. That's exactly what's happening. We're hearing from customers that it's driving liquidity, it's driving credibility, it's helping them with their projects, and that word of mouth has really accrued to our benefit. Ken Worthington: Thank you. Maybe thinking more about the outlook for that line, I suspect that the passage of the GENIUS Act sort of pulls forward a bunch of the stablecoins to kind of subscribe to your services. What does the pipeline look like going forward for that? Have you basically locked up all of the major new stablecoins, and is the growth that you're seeing maybe beyond 3Q and 4Q of this year comprised of, you think, more stablecoins, or is the growth as we look forward really expanding into non-stablecoin tokens? You know. Tom Farley: I appreciate that question, and perhaps oversharing, we actually had a version of our script, Ken, that we were working on that said we have, as customers, substantially all of the challenger stablecoins. I tweaked it because we're seeing new stablecoin entrants appear literally every single day. At one point, really around the time of the IPO, we looked out and we said, okay, let's look at our stablecoin partners, you know, PayPal, and I assume I can say these names, AgoraX, which is VanEck, and Ripple, and really great USDG, World, and so on and so forth. We kind of had this really great group. It begs the question, is this just a one-time burst of stablecoin issuers on the back of the GENIUS bill? Will it continue to grow? Will it consolidate? Will it not? I think that's an interesting industry question. Dave and I, as you've heard us say, have always believed it will continue to grow, and this is a thousand flowers blooming, and this will be a highly competitive industry. In the last week, I'll just give you two anecdotes. I got a call on Monday from an old friend from my NIBOT days, who you would know, Ken, saying, I'm launching a new stablecoin. I want to talk to you about it. I want to work together. I got an email immediately before this earnings call saying, I'm launching a stablecoin, and I want to work with you, from also an old friend, one of my closest friends in the world. The answer is the current pipeline is heavier on non-stablecoin token issuers. In other words, if we look at the current pipeline, and if I just say, hey, give me the 50, most likely more than 25 are non-stablecoin token issuers, but the stablecoin issuers just keep popping up, and the product-market fit that we offer is highly, highly compelling, which is why we had literally essentially all of the challenger stablecoins at one point in time. Did that answer your question, Ken? I know it was a little bit long-winded. Ken Worthington: Thank you very much. You answered it well. Tom Farley: Yeah, Ken, yes, Ken Worthington: congratulations. Operator: As a reminder, ladies and gentlemen, we ask that participants limit themselves to one question. Your next question comes from the line of Peter Christiansen with Citi. Please go ahead. Peter Christiansen: Thank you. Good evening. Thanks for the question. Certainly, congrats, Tom and team. It's been quite a month or two here, and certainly great to see the BitLicense being awarded. That's fantastic news. I was wondering, Tom, maybe is there like an analog that we should think of in the back of our head? Obviously, who knows what's going to happen over the next year and a half as the U.S. institutional sector hopefully starts opening up. An analog in terms of sales cycle to sign up an institutional sized account, time to implement on the back end, that kind of thing. As you think about time as cross-sales start coming after volume starts building up, I don't know if you've seen a steady schedule among some of your existing client engagements that might be helpful to us. I am going to throw in one last one here. I did notice the $10 million trader challenge promotion, which seems... How should we think about this, I guess, in marketing and selling expense going forward? Just thoughts on that. Thank you. Tom Farley: That's great. Thanks, Pete. Yeah, I'm going to let Dave address the trader challenge. Just in terms of the sales cycle, I think Pete's question is specifically about our U.S. launch. Again, for the avoidance of doubt, we've never brought on a U.S. customer. All of our customers are non-U.S. The BitLicense unlocks the U.S. as a market. Effective today, we now can enter the—actually, I think it's effective Monday. We can enter the United. Pete, unfortunately, if you look at our pipeline right now, it's filled with companies that have, you know, the word bank in their name or financial or investments. It's a more mature kind of white shoe set. The truth of the matter is it takes a while to hook them up. That's why I added that to my prepared remarks. A while can range from, you know, two months, and that's if somebody has a legal team that acts with the alacrity and let's say they're using someone to help connect them to trading in crypto, to quite literally six months if they're going to do all the connectivity to the APIs themselves, they're going to heavily negotiate the legal doc. The good news on our end, Pete, is we have been able to, because we have regulatory approvals throughout the U.S., just not in New York until yesterday, we have advanced discussions and an advanced pipeline. I think it's going to take a little while to see the first couple of customers come on board. If we don't start to see it in the next month or two, I can tell you I'm going to have some hard conversations internally because we have invested in a team that's been out building the funnel. I hope that gives you a little bit of color, but that kind of gives you a sense of what to expect. Peter Christiansen: Thanks, Pete. I think your second question, you broke up a little bit there, was related to the trading competition we announced. The prize is an up to $10 million seed investment in their fund. We're not just giving away the money. It's promotional rewards. We really like this type of activity. It's our first time engaging in it. What we've seen in terms of new customer onboard interest in participating in the program, our ability to push our data and its availability into new user bases who can then come trade on exchange, and maybe they get a fund one day and they can benchmark to our CoinDesk Indices products. The general idea behind it was exposing a different customer segment to our cross-sell potential, and we're really excited about it. Tom Farley: The $10 million is not a payment. I mean, it's an investment. We're excited about it. Next question, please. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Dan Fannon with Jefferies. Please go ahead. Dan Fannon: Thanks. Good evening. Congrats. Wanted to talk about customer concentration. You guys mentioned how you've been adjusting some of the pricing for your various customer bases. Curious how that's evolved. Maybe talk about 3Q and how that's progressed. Ultimately, do you think you're done here, or is there some more tweaking when we think about pricing going forward that you still likely need to make? Tom Farley: Oh, man, the tweaking never ends, Dan. I wish it did. I mean that as a career-long commentary. I remember when we introduced electronic trading to the New York Board of Trade in February 2008, and you know, GetGo and Hudson River Trading were 50% of our volumes. It's a very common thing in markets where you'll see a certain number of customers that amass a significant amount of the volume. It's okay. It's something that we fiddle with currently. Dave and the team have actually done a great job of bringing that down to a reasonable level over the last several quarters. David Bonanno: Yeah, and Dan and I just commented the pricing changes we've made, which you can see the impact of that in the monthly operating results we provide. We're pleased with the outcome. If we continue to have some customers who are heavier in terms of concentration, we are okay with that in the relative new pricing framework. Having had a flat pricing fee, which created significant customer concentration, was not going to be a winning solution for us long term. We're happy with the pricing changes, the way it's diversified the customer base, and the way it's spread out the fees across activity levels, customer type. While we may continue to have a couple customers who are heavy at the top of the book in terms of volume, we're comfortable with that in the current pricing framework than we were previously. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Brett Knoblauch with Cantor Fitzgerald. Please go ahead. Brett Knoblauch: All right. Thanks, guys. Congrats on the IPO. Tom, it seems like you're itching a bit to talk about CoinDesk 5, CoinDesk 20. It's nice to see the quarterly increase in kind of AUM tracking your indices and benchmarks. How should we think about the progression of maybe the asset linked fees going forward? Is there any catalyst on the horizon like a CoinDesk 5 ETF that could really accelerate some of those flows? Just more broadly about the indices business would be great. Tom Farley: Yeah, no, you sensed correctly, Brad, and you may know from our past conversations, but I love this business. That $41 billion of assets under management benchmarked to our indices, to be clear, we're getting paid fees on the whole of that $41 billion. The way it works in the multi-token index world, or even the single token index world, is you're talking about a small number of basis points. When you run the math of the $41 billion times, you know, a small number of basis points, it's a nice business, but it's not huge. You're asking the absolute right question, which is what's going to cause this to really grow? What's going to enable us to be the MSCI of crypto, if you will? Essentially, what's happened in crypto, if I can cover a decade of history in 30 seconds, is the first thing people were willing to invest in from an institutional perspective was Bitcoin, and that really compounded with the introduction of the Bitcoin ETF. With the ETH ETFs, people were willing to say, okay, I'll have a little Bitcoin exposure, and then I'll have an even smaller amount of ETH exposure as part of my overall portfolio. Now what we're seeing with Solana ETFs and other tokens, XRP, for example, Cardano, Avalanche, becoming more mainstream, people are looking for broader sets a la the DAO or the S&P 500 or MSCI's Emerging Markets Index or something to be able to invest in a broader swath of the market while maintaining Bitcoin as their primary way to invest. We have the CoinDesk 5, which is quite literally five tokens, and the 20, which is 20, covers a broader market to really be a catcher's net for both of those, for that trend that people move out the curve, first to the CoinDesk 5, then to the CoinDesk 20. They're going great. This Grayscale private trust vehicle, which, you know, touch wood, can we hope will be approved by the SEC to convert to an ETF, will be the largest multi-token ETF, I think, in the world on day one at a minimum, quite possibly. CoinDesk 20, we have a WisdomTree ETP in Europe that is gathering modest amounts of assets, inflows on a regular basis. That too is exciting. We have signed but not announced the particulars with a major global futures exchange as well as a major global major U.S. equities exchange to launch products on the CoinDesk 5 and CoinDesk 20 on those respective exchanges. We have a signed but not fully announced ETF arrangement in the U.S. for those products as well. It's going to take some time, Brett, because the market needs to get more comfortable investing in more products than just Bitcoin. It's happening in real time, and we're there for it. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Brian Bedell with Deutsche Bank. Please go ahead. Brian Bedell: Great, thanks. Thanks for taking my question and congrats on everything as well. Just a bit back to liquidity services and particularly the stablecoin side. I'm just trying to get a sense of the, given the onboarding of these contracts, sort of that growth trajectory potential beyond 3Q. Maybe just to clarify, it sounds like the guide of the $45+ million for that for SS&O, I guess $40+ million of that is liquidity services, indices, and data. Applying a doubling roughly of, I guess, the second quarter run rate, how much of that additional growth is directly related to liquidity services from stablecoin? I guess, back to the first part of the question, which is, given the really strong market potential here with adding more challenger stablecoins, how should we think about that revenue growth potential? David Bonanno: Yeah, sure. Thanks, Brian. The growth is all the segments within subscription services and other revenue. All the business lines in there are growing, as Tom mentioned before. All of them are growing organically. They feed off of each other. The primary driver of the revenue growth that we discussed for Q3 is largely on the back of liquidity services. In terms of the revenue complexion, we spoke a little bit earlier about the pipeline and the outlook for the mix between stables and non-stables, but currently the revenue complexion is definitely weighted towards the stables. I include our work with the Solana Network in that bucket as well, because, as you know, it's a stablecoin-based collaboration. Although they don't issue a stablecoin, it's with our partners that we work with the Solana Network to move those over and generate other activity and acceptance on the Bullish Exchange. It is predominantly driven by the liquidity services, again, that is the bedrock for selling other recurring revenue streams into the customer base. Brian Bedell: Just that sort of growth trajectory, I guess, as we, not to give guidance in 4Q, but it sounds like it would be, the way you're layering in these deals, we would have even more uplift in 4Q potentially in that area. David Bonanno: We continue to see strength. We do expect to see growth in the fourth quarter of that line, just based on the booking trajectory and where we are in the third quarter. The growth in the line has been pretty substantial this year in terms of sequential growth. The Q3 guide, I wouldn't interpret that as this pace of growth well into the future. We look forward to kind of giving you the guide on Q4 subscription services and other on our next call, but we do continue to see growth in all of the product areas. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Chris Brendler with Rosenblatt Securities. Please go ahead. Chris Brendler: Hi, thanks for the afternoon. It's a conversation for me as well. I'd like to discuss the monthly metrics and kind of the uptick we've seen in the spread over the last couple of months, especially in August. If you just give us a little color, we've talked about some of the pricing changes you're implementing, just the sustainability of that and how it looks into your guidance and into the fourth quarter would be great. Thanks. Tom Farley: Yeah, let me just editorialize for one moment, and then Dave can give you the real answer. The one thing I wanted to highlight is, because in crypto, a lot of people focus on spread in part because amongst the retail group, so electronic brokers serving the retail crowd or exchanges serving the retail crowd, they oftentimes will have 50 basis points, 100 basis points, 150 basis points, 200 basis points, 250 basis points, 300 basis points spread. We've all seen that movie of what ultimately happens to those kind of spreads, whether you look at what happened in FX or equities or what have you. We're in a different world. We don't compete on price. The institutional group, you got to get to a fair value price, and then you're competing on determinism, you're competing on what other services you provide, or what margin capabilities do you have, what licenses do you have, how reassuring is your custody solution, all those sorts of things. As we're moving our spreads around, what we're really doing is optimizing for revenue. We run experiments a lot. That is something that is going to continue. What we have found is a nice sweet spot where we kind of had overcorrected pushing for revenue, and really what we got out of it was volume and less revenue. Dave and the team, led by Chris Tyrer, President of our exchange business, have done a really nice job of finding a sweet spot over the last several months that we feel comfortable with. David Bonanno: Yeah, I think you'll see in the Q3 guide, the September implied spread, if you kind of run out the math and you can see the volume, is about consistent with where we were in August, but a little bit lower just based on lower volatility. I would say that while our spreads have gone up and volatility just didn't matter versus where we were previously, we still have some sensitivity to volatility. We'll just spend a bit lower here in September than it was in August. We do think that from a spread perspective, you'll get a good feel of where we should be, particularly when we get out the September results. Tom Farley: I just want to add one item. I said earlier when Brett asked the question, and thanks for asking it, Brett, about our index business. I told you I was excited, among other things, about a Grayscale product on our CoinDesk 5 Index. That has just been, during this call, approved by the SEC. That product, which, I don't know, it approaches $1 billion of assets under management, which, by the way, is huge for a crypto multi-token product, will become an ETF here in the U.S. and will likely be the largest ETF in the world on day one. Very exciting news and really good for that CoinDesk 5 franchise. Brett, to answer your question, how do we grow the thing? We just chop some wood. We'll take the next question. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Rayna Kumar with Oppenheimer. Please go ahead. Operator: Hi, this is Guru on for Rayna. A lot of her questions have already been answered, but if you could just maybe touch on how we should expect the spread going forward. I know this is directly following the previous question, but if you could maybe just give us a trajectory of what we can expect going forward. Thanks. David Bonanno: Yeah, sure, and thank you for the question. As I was saying on the previous question, we expect spreads going forward to be roughly in line with the August numbers. They remain somewhat sensitive to volatility. September volatility has been lower than August when we put out the results and we finished the month of August. We're only about halfway through here. We think you'll see, depending on the full month volatility, consistency if the volatility is the same with August, slightly lower if volatility is lower, and obviously higher if volatility is higher. The reason we're doing the monthly disclosure on the transaction revenue spreads is to provide this type of clarity for you guys to see it in as real time as possible. We do optimize for total adjusted transaction revenue, as Tom mentioned before. We're also launching new products like options, which hopefully will be coming during the fourth quarter. That may induce us to adjust spreads in other assets in order to maximize total adjusted transaction revenue. Given all the moving parts in there, the dynamics around volatility, we believe the best way we can help you guys begin to tighten up your models is to do the monthly disclosure that we've been providing and then talk you through the trends as we go here. As of right now, we generally tend to view August as a good benchmark type month for the spot spreads going forward. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Bill Papanastasiou with KBW. Please go ahead. Bill Papanastasiou: Good evening, gentlemen. Congrats on the inaugural earnings call and strong sequential SS&O revenue print. With respect to the BitLicense, obviously the grant of it helps to firm up timelines of penetrating the U.S. market. I was curious whether we should be thinking about any other additional read-throughs. In particular, I saw that the license allows for custody services in addition to trading. Is that an area that perhaps Bullish might be thinking of getting into down the road? Tom Farley: Yeah, sure, Bill. Good question. We actually are in custody, the provision of custody. We've taken a thousand flowers bloom approach where we enable our customers to custody with third-party qualified custodians, or in some cases, self-custody using software, or custody with us and our own bespoke custody solution. To answer your question, yes, but only in the sense that we're already in custody. We're not announcing any sort of mega changes to the business model with this BitLicense approval. We do have a few things in the works that we're not really ready to drop breadcrumbs around, but no extensive business model changes with respect to custody. Operator: Our last question comes from the line of Joseph Valve with Canaccord Genuity. Please go ahead. Joseph Vafi: Hey guys, good afternoon, and of course my congrats here as well. Maybe we just kind of double-click a bit on progress on the options platform. I know, Dave, you just mentioned it a little bit. Looks like maybe Q4 full rollout. Any other anecdotes there? Plus, you know, is it too early to really start thinking about what, you know, contribution may be there, might be, you know, from a full rollout in trading volume? Thanks a lot. Tom Farley: Great question. It's a meaty last question. We'd love to talk about it. First of all, let me start on a conservative note. It's a startup. It's a startup, so no promises. It's hard to build derivatives volume, no matter what market you're in. You should hear it from us that you should view this conservatively. Nonetheless, we're really excited about it. We're already live. Like live live, not fake live. People are in there trading real dollars in a regulatorily approved environment. It's working. Some of the biggest options traders on Earth are in there every day. We're limited to a certain number of customers. We want to get it right. We're limiting those customers to a certain size of their position. Looks good, and that's often the tough part, just getting off the ground with a system that works and an initial batch of customers. With respect to options, options have been this kind of tiny market in crypto, like teeny tiny, a couple of percent volumes relative to the overall spot volume. We made this bet, and we made it, I remember talking to Dave and Chris Tyrer about this a year ago, where we said it's got to grow up. It's got to grow. Every market you look at, the options market is minimum 25%. Look at U.S. equities, 25% or greater. Look at interest rate options, really, really easy market to get data on. More than 25% options as compared to the linear products. We just said this thing's going to grow, and there needs to be competition, and there needs to be institutionally focused competition, low cost, that has things like portfolio margining with the underlying futures, the underlying hedge. Let's go ahead and let's do it. We're being rewarded. In August, we saw options volumes in crypto tick up. In fact, they nearly doubled, or maybe even more than doubled, as a percentage of the overall spot volume. We're seeing the underlying options market grow. We're seeing customers come in and work with us on our beta launch here. We're going to share a lot more information with you on the calls ahead. Like I said, I put in my prepared remarks, I've been involved in a lot of launches, some real good ones, some losers, and you get a sense of what makes a successful launch. This one has all the hallmarks of something that could work out nicely for us. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, there are no other questions at this time. I'll turn the call back over to management for closing remarks. Tom Farley: Sure. Thank you. Also, I want to thank our team, Liam and Michael, who got us prepared. We definitely had the jitters a little bit. It's our first earnings call. Randy, if you're out there, you polled us, whatever you do, you better not blow it on your first earnings call. I hope we at least get a passing grade. We appreciate all of you staying for what those of you on the East Coast, it's something like dinner time. You know, our commitment to you is we're going to do our best to be in touch with you, not just during the earnings calls, but in the interim, and be transparent with you about the success or lack thereof of this business. We really appreciate you following along. Just rest assured, we're working our butts off for certainly for our customers, but also for our shareholders. Thank you all very much, and good night. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, this concludes today's call. Thank you all for joining, and you may now disconnect.
Operator: Good morning all, and thank you for joining us on today's PZ Cussons full year results. My name is Drew, and I'll be the operator on the call today. [Operator Instructions] With that, it's my pleasure to hand over to Jonathan Myers to begin. Please go ahead when you're ready. Jonathan Myers: Thank you very much, Drew, and good morning, everyone, and thank you for dialing into our results presentation for the year ended 31st of May 2025. For those of you that can see the slides we're presenting this morning, it's worth calling out a successful example of our brand-building activities in the last year on the slide in front of you. Original Source advertising on a London bus as part of our Nature Hits Different campaign. I'll have some more detail on this later, but suffice to say for now that the activity helped deliver another year of growth for the brand in FY '25. Turning to the agenda then for this morning. I will start with a brief introduction before handing over to Sarah to take us through a review of the financials. I'll then provide a broader update on strategic progress and performance before moving to a summary and a chance for you to ask any questions. Note on this slide too, an example of how we've been building brands over the past year. This one, driving trial of Cussons Baby, specifically the Telon oil launched last year as shoppers browse a specialist baby store in Jakarta. Our Telon oil has now reached 10% household penetration in urban Indonesia and is growing market share. So moving to our main messages for this morning. We are making progress against our strategy. Our 4 priority markets delivered a strong performance. We have good momentum in the core of our business. The U.K. delivered a strong improvement in profitability, fueled by revenue growth and gross margin expansion. Indonesia ended the year with its fifth consecutive quarter of revenue growth with a healthy mix of high single-digit revenue and volume growth for the year. We continue to gain market share in Australia on each of our top 3 brands and grew operating profit overall, but we were still battling against the softer consumer backdrop holding back our revenue. Finally, our Nigerian business demonstrated its resilience, continuing to perform well in a high inflation environment. Meanwhile, we have also made progress pushing change through the business, strengthening our brand building capabilities, driving better integration of our marketing and R&D teams and extending our planning horizons to enable greater focus on sufficiency and quality of our multiyear innovation plans. Since the close of our financial year, we announced the sale of 50% stake in PZ Wilmar to our joint venture partner, Wilmar International, in line with the objectives of the strategic review we announced in April 2024 to streamline and simplify our portfolio. It was also after careful consideration of alternative value creation options that we announced the decision to retain St. Tropez, setting a new strategic direction with a new partner in the U.S. and a dedicated operating model within PZ to delivery. While I appreciate you will naturally have questions on our wider African business, all I'm able to say today is that we are continuing to progress our strategic review and will, of course, provide an update when we do have something to say. Finally, we are working hard on reducing costs and unlocking value in the business, whether that's through reducing discretionary spend, tacking our structural cost base or the sale of surplus nonoperating assets. I'll cover more on this later. So overall, we know there is more work to be done and that we have not yet delivered all that we set out to achieve, but there has been good progress to date, particularly the underlying momentum in the core of the business. And we are focused on delivering our strategic actions and operational improvements to evolve PZ Cussons into a business with a more focused portfolio and stronger brands, delivering sustainable, profitable growth. And with that, I'll hand over to Sarah to take us through the financials. Sarah Pollard: Thanks, Jonathan, and good morning, everyone. I'm going to share a summary of our FY '25 full year results, walk you through the key movements at the group level, then by segment and finish with current trading and guidance for the year ahead. As Jonathan mentioned, we've seen momentum across most of our portfolio, with a particularly strong performance in the U.K. and Indonesia. Group revenue declined by GBP 14 million to GBP 514 million, with a GBP 47 million reduction attributable to the naira, which while more stable in FY '25, was nearly 40% weaker on average versus sterling than in FY '24. Like-for-like revenue growth calculated on a constant currency basis was 8%, driven by pricing in Nigeria. Excluding Africa, like-for-like revenue growth was flat. Adjusted operating profit was GBP 55 million, down 6%, with adjusted operating profit margin lower by 30 basis points at 10.7%. However, as you can see from the bottom of the slide, excluding from each year's figures, the contribution of PZ Wilmar, the sale of which we announced in June, group adjusted operating profit margin would have increased by 30 basis points. On a statutory basis, operating profit was GBP 21 million compared to a loss of GBP 84 million in FY '24, which was primarily attributable to ForEx translation and U.S. dollar-denominated liability losses in our Nigerian subsidiaries following the currency devaluation of June 2023. And we have since significantly reduced our exposure to any future naira shocks as we have made good progress in extinguishing historical liabilities and repatriating surplus cash. We maintained a flat net interest charge in the year. With a higher adjusted effective tax rate more indicative of the higher rate going forward, adjusted FY '25 earnings per share declined ahead of operating profit, down 8.5%. The Board is proposing a final dividend of 2.1p per share, taking the total for the year to 3.6p, the same level as the prior year. Free cash flow was GBP 42 million, up slightly due to an improvement in working capital, partially offset by the reduction in operating profit. Net debt improved slightly to GBP 112 million with a net debt-to-EBITDA ratio of 1.7x. However, taking into account the proceeds from the sale of our Wilmar joint venture, which is expected to complete in the final quarter of calendar 2025, our pro forma ratio would have been 1.1x. Turning now to the financial performance details and firstly, revenue. To aid comparability, the first bar shows the impact of adjusting for FX translation, presenting FY '24 revenues at FY '25 exchange rates. The breakdown of the adverse GBP 55 million impact is, as usual, provided in the appendix. On this like-for-like currency basis, revenue increased 8% in the U.K. and Indonesia. And Jonathan will come on to the brand drivers of that revenue growth later. We again took pricing in Africa with multiple increases throughout the year to offset double-digit inflation in Nigeria. Jonathan will also outline the steps we're taking to turn around St. Tropez brand. Now to operating profit. As I mentioned, our overall adjusted operating profit margin decreased by 30 basis points to 10.7%. We've shown this chart excluding Wilmar, given this represents the more accurate basis for future profitability, lower in absolute sterling terms, but more cash-light and sustainable in nature versus an equity accounted share in a noncore, lower-margin joint venture. On a constant currency basis, group gross profit margin was lower in the year, reflecting the adverse mix impact of strong revenue growth in Nigeria, where gross margins are structurally lower. This was more than offset by a 220 basis point reduction in overheads. Around half of this represents structural cash savings relevant to our go-forward business. Also included within this number is a reduction in amortization to reflect the business decision to extend the useful economic life of our SAP software now that the manufacturer support period will run for longer, allowing us to extract a higher return from that IT asset. Marketing investment was broadly unchanged as a percentage of revenue, while the impact of ForEx translation had an overall adverse 70 basis point impact on margins. So let me now provide some more detail on the performance in each of our regional reporting segments. Looking first in Europe and Americas, where we saw growth in both like-for-like revenue and operating profit. Revenue grew 0.6%, driven by price/mix growth and with a very small overall volume decline. Growth in our main U.K. brands was offset by a challenging St. Tropez performance, without which Europe and Americas revenue growth would have been 2.4%. Adjusted operating profit was up GBP 4 million, with a margin increase of 230 basis points, driven by tight cost control and the full year impact of the integration of the U.K. Personal Care and Beauty businesses as well as ongoing revenue growth management and product margin improvement initiatives. This more than offset the GBP 3 million impact from the introduction in the U.K. of extended producer responsibility plans and new costs, which we will seek to mitigate over time through, among other things, a review of our entire packaging portfolio. Turning now to Asia Pac, where like-for-like revenue was flat. Continued momentum in Indonesia was offset by a decline in ANZ. All our core Cussons Baby segments drove volume-led growth in Indonesia, and ANZ saw market share gains in all 3 major brands despite the softer macro environment there. Both markets improved their profitability with higher gross margins and lower overheads. This, though, was offset by a reduction in profitability in some small Asian markets and lower profits in our business manufacturing non-branded [indiscernible]. Overall, adjusted operating profit reduced by GBP 3 million with a margin decline of 150 basis points. Revenue in Africa declined by 7% due to the depreciation of the naira. The 35% like-for-like revenue growth reflects 20 rounds of price increases as inflation in Nigeria remained elevated at over 30% for much of the year. Whilst volumes declined 12% as a result of those price increases, this was mitigated somewhat by further route-to-market improvements that Jonathan will describe later. We've seen our Nigerian business return to volume as well as price-led revenue growth so far this FY '26 financial year. Electricals revenue was GBP 47 million, up over 30% on a like-for-like basis. Adjusted Africa operating profit margin improved by 250 basis points or excluding PZ Wilmar, it improved by 450 basis points. The operating profit numbers shown here are excluding a GBP 9 million benefit that the Africa region reported in FY '24 related to intragroup debt forgiveness, the cost of which was shown in last year's central cost line and which had a net 0 impact to overall group operating profit. And I noted to explain that the Africa segmental results presented here are both comparable year-on-year and representative of underlying operations. So finally then, our central cost line, which equated to GBP 30.5 million in FY '25 and which was, on a reported basis, down slightly versus FY '24. However, we have also made the corresponding Nigerian debt forgiveness adjustment here to ensure comparability. And as such, central costs increased GBP 6.8 million in FY '25. This was split between underlying cost increases and investments in group-wide capabilities attributable to the performance of business units, but best housed at the corporate center for maximum return and so reported them. For example, the shifting of some marketing and some R&D roles to sit central. As we'll come on to, we see this number falling considerably over the next 12 months given the cost savings we're announcing today. So moving now to cash flow and net debt. Total free cash flow was GBP 42.3 million compared to GBP 41.6 million in the prior year, reflecting an improvement in working capital, offset by lower profits. Net debt was GBP 112 million compared to GBP 115.3 million last year, representing a net debt-to-EBITDA ratio of 1.7x, which, as mentioned earlier, will then see a significant reduction following the completion of the Wilmar sale. The group also continues to have no surplus cash held in Nigeria following our successful repatriation efforts. As we said in the statement this morning, trading year-to-date has been in line with our expectations. Group like-for-like revenue to the end of September is expected to be up around 10%. Strong revenue growth in Asia Pac is made up of Indonesia posting its sixth consecutive quarter of growth, plus ANZ also being up. Africa is showing encouraging volume momentum. Europe and Americas is down 2% or up 2%, excluding St. Tropez. We expect Europe and Americas to continue to strengthen across October and November, which would see us back to overall revenue growth there in half 1. In terms of profit guidance, we expect group adjusted operating profit to be between GBP 48 million and GBP 53 million. And this figure strips out any contribution from Wilmar, which is now treated as an asset held for sale in accounting terms. And so its profit contribution in FY '26 will be reported as part of the disposal calculations. Captured within the guidance are cost savings of between GBP 5 million and GBP 10 million, some of which will be reinvested in the business, subject to clear return criteria. Finally, net debt will fall significantly in FY '26 to less than 1x EBITDA. We expect cash proceeds of between GBP 15 million and GBP 20 million from the ongoing program to sell surplus nonoperating assets, of which we have received GBP 8 million so far this current financial year. We're expecting to receive proceeds of approximately GBP 47 million before the end of the calendar year from the sale of our Wilmar joint venture. Jonathan will talk a little more about the cost savings and noncore asset sale proceeds in a little detail. And so with that, I'll now hand back to him. Jonathan Myers: Thanks, Sarah. So let me give a broader update on progress and performance framed around the highlights and messages I covered at the beginning of the presentation. And let's start with the U.K. and what was behind the strong operating profit that I mentioned earlier. Beyond the cost savings Sarah talked about, a key driver of the revenue performance has been better commercial and brand building activities. Taking Original Source as an example, we delivered a bold marketing campaign from February through to May, firmly targeting younger consumers with an optimized mix of social media, out-of-home and TV, leveraging our partnership with social media influencer and personality, Jamie Laing. This is a good example of how we are enabling more competitive brand activation with the GBP 2 million media campaign reaching more than 15 million people. Pickup in brand awareness meant Original Source not only achieved its highest household penetration in almost 5 years, but thanks to considered price and promotional optimization as well, the brand also grew gross margin. Based on the success of the first wave of Nature Hits Different campaign, look out for the next wave of activity on Original Source over the next couple of months, a good example of us prioritizing brand support against activities with proven return on investment. Another way of driving revenue on our brands is to work in partnership with the owners of other brands to engage common target consumers and drive in-store activation. Six months ago, we highlighted the success of Carex and its Gruffalo partnership, which we have since expanded to Zog and Room on the Broom. Notably, Carex grew revenue and gross margin in FY '25, consolidating its #1 position in the hand wash market. We've also extended this type of brand partnership to Childs Farm to include a tie-up with Bluey and BBC Studios. Now if you don't have young kids or don't know Bluey, it's one of the most popular TV shows in the world for children and is enabling us to secure disproportionate levels of support across retail outlets. Just take a look at this tie-up with Bluey and Kellogg's at Sainsbury's as evidence. So we've seen encouraging FY '25 performance in the U.K., and we look forward to more to come, not least our plans for Christmas gifting, which is starting to hit the shelves this very month. Turning to Indonesia and Cussons Baby. You may remember the Childs Farm SlumberTime product range launch, addressing the importance of reassuring parents that their washing and baby products are giving their babies the best possible chance of a good night sleep for the wellbeing of both the baby and their parents. The CuddleCalm range takes the consumer insights and product formulation learnings from Childs Farm and applies them to Cussons Baby, albeit in a very different context. It's a good example of us leveraging shared baby insights across geographies and brands as we have sought to create a more integrated marketing and R&D organization. Elsewhere in our Indonesian business, we continue to see phenomenal growth in e-commerce, whether that's through established platforms such as Shopee or the ongoing success of our own live streaming capability. Turning to our business in Australia and New Zealand, where we continue to see softness in category values through the year, though reassuringly, we've seen the first signs of amelioration in the latest quarter. Against that backdrop, we continue to make market share gains on our top 3 brands, thanks to renewed efforts to drive better in-store presence, competitive pricing and promotion and broader distribution across retail channels. The Morning Fresh photo on the right-hand side is an example of those efforts. We are already the clear market leader in washing up liquid, and we are leveraging this strong position and our brand equity for winning performance and great value to help grow market share in the auto dish category. We've been using net hangers on bottles of Morning Fresh liquid to drive awareness and then offering hundreds of thousands of samples of auto dish tablets to drive trial. While auto dish is a highly competitive category, our position of strength in the washing up liquid market gives us a clear competitive advantage to leverage as we seek to build trial, distribution and market share. Turning to Nigeria. Perhaps the best example of brand activation was the recent relaunch of Carex. Carex has been available in Nigeria for some time, but has always been subscale as the product positioning has largely been taken from the U.K. Thanks to good work with Nigerian consumers, our campaign Win the War Against Germs means the brand now looks and feels new and relevant with clear antibacterial positioning, distinct brand assets, bold disruptive messaging and benefiting from professional endorsement. Just like the Original Source example I gave earlier, the execution was a multifaceted campaign: Digital, TV, out-of-home advertising and a series of in-person launch events. In fact, we estimate the campaign reached 125 million people. It's early days, but signs so far are promising. Carex will absolutely be one of the drivers of Nigeria's performance in FY '26. Beyond the excellent work on Carex, we have continued to strengthen our go-to-market presence. A key part of this, as we've mentioned before, has been the number of stores served directly by us as opposed to via wholesalers. Simply put, covering the stores directly leads to better retailer relationships and in-store presence as we can directly influence which products turn up in which types of outfit. From covering just under 70,000 stores directly 3 years ago, we exceeded our target of reaching 200,000 in FY '25, and we're now striving for even more stores in direct coverage in FY '26. A driving force in how we are seeking to serve consumers better in our core categories is the strengthened brand building operating model we have adopted over the past year as the next phase in the journey to raise the bar on how effectively and consistently we build stronger brands. Many of you will remember where we started, strong brands with good tactical plans, but more of a trading mindset and limited cohesion across the portfolio. We moved on from that in recent years, creating better alignment across the group and strengthening in-year plans. But we know there's more to do. So we now have put in place a brand-building setup, which balances staying close to consumers in our priority markets, whilst leveraging more effective integration and collaboration across both markets, meaning improved visibility of multiyear innovation and revenue growth plans in our priority market. Ultimately, we are building on our strength of in-year activation to add excellent multiyear innovation. Not only is this good for our consumers, it's also good for our marketing teams. We've seen a 7 percentage point improvement in engagement scores for the marketing function across the group. Ultimately, though, success will be measured in sustained progress on market share, revenue and profitability. Moving to portfolio transformation. In June, we announced the sale of our 50% stake in PZ Wilmar, our Nigerian cooking oils business to Wilmar International, our joint venture partner, for cash consideration of $70 million. This will simplify our portfolio and as Sarah said, significantly strengthen our balance sheet. It sees us exit a noncore category and reduce group reliance on Nigeria as part of our overall efforts to rebalance the portfolio and concentrate on our core categories of hygiene, beauty and baby. The sale also benefits a number of our wider sustainability metrics as PZ Wilmar represents around 10% of our Scope 3 inventory. Turning now to St. Tropez. As we explained back in June, although our intention was to sell the brand, after running a comprehensive process to do so, our firm belief is that the better course of action for our shareholders is to retain it and maximize value in the coming years. There are 3 reasons which give us the confidence. First, it's important to remember that whilst it's had a challenging performance recently, St. Tropez is regarded as an iconic brand. It established the self-tan category and has for many years been the driving force behind the market. It still has great brand equity and awareness with more than 30% share of the [indiscernible] self-tan beauty market in the U.S. and envy positions on the shelves of key U.S. beauty retailers such as Ulta and Sephora. Second, the key tenet of the new direction is the partnership we have formed with the Emerson Group, a leading U.S.-based partner to many brand owners, including some of the world's largest personal care and beauty businesses. They will provide customer management, logistics services and brand activation in the U.S. St. Tropez will be integrated into Emerson's dedicated selling teams to key U.S. retailers with initial meetings having already taken place. Not only does this partnership give us access to a strong go-to-market operator in the U.S. with significant scale and expertise, it also dramatically simplifies our own operating model. We no longer have a need for our own team on the ground nor the expense of a dedicated office in Manhattan. Next, for the U.S., our St. Tropez model is better, simpler and more cost effective. Finally, we have also appointed a new executive with significant experience of the beauty category, not least from many years spent at L'Oréal to lead the St. Tropez business with a single-minded focus on value creation and a dedicated team coming together beneath him. Looking ahead, therefore, we're busy with the innovation plans for the 2026 season and working on celebrating the 30th anniversary of the launch of St. Tropez next year. So lots more to come on St. Tropez. Moving now to the final slide before summing up. As Sarah touched on earlier, we have made progress driving cost efficiencies and identifying opportunities to unlock further pockets of value, all of which will help to fund future growth. To that end, we have announced this morning that we expect to generate GBP 5 million to GBP 10 million of cost savings in FY '26. It's a big number at the top end of the range, but we're hard at work to deliver it. We've already developed a track record and a playbook to do this with a GBP 3 million savings in the U.K. business as Sarah mentioned, removing duplicated structures and operating expense. But more importantly, the organization is increasingly building a mindset of ongoing cost optimization, sometimes through significant structural interventions driven by changes in operating model, but also through the relentless and rigorous pursuit of grinding out the inefficiencies that consumers do not value and should not be expected to pay for. Whether that's saving on the retendering of label production in the U.K., the shifting of surfactant suppliers for our Nigerian business or sourcing a different enzyme for our Radiant laundry brand in Australia. We're also unlocking value from noncore or nonoperating assets, mostly in Asia and Africa. These range from high-end residential property in Ghana and undeveloped land in Indonesia to empty warehouses in Nigeria that are no longer required by the business and pretty much everything in between. The market value of these assets is significant, and we estimate that after fees and taxes, we should generate net cash proceeds of around GBP 30 million from those disposals, the majority of which will complete during this financial year. Common across all the activities shown on this slide is a single-minded pursuit of simplification, whether processes, operations or portfolio and as a result, unlocking value. In summary, while there's a lot going on at PZ and still much more to do to deliver, I want to be really clear that our day-to-day focus is on continuing to drive the underlying business across our priority markets. We're building stronger brands in our core categories, and we're driving more competitive go-to-market execution in our largest markets. The combination of which means we can get more PZ products into the homes and hands of more consumers. So with that, enough of us and a chance for you to let us know what are your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question today comes from Sahill Shan from Singer Capital Markets. Sahill Shan: Forgive me, I'm fairly new to the story, but I've got a couple of questions, if that's okay. Firstly, just on the St. Tropez brand. You've retained it and outlined a new U.S.-focused strategy with Emerson. I suppose my question is what internal KPIs or milestones are you using to evaluate success? And how quickly should investors expect signs of recovery in the brand's P&L contribution? So that's my first question. And the second one is around capital allocation. I think with the Wilmar proceeds and asset disposals, it looks like expected to significantly reduce net debt this year. How are you thinking about capital deployment priorities going forward around reinvestment, M&A or maybe returning capital back to shareholders? Jonathan Myers: So why don't I take the first of those questions relating to St. Tropez and I'll pass over to Sarah on capital allocation. So you're absolutely right. After a very considered process, we took the call to retain the brand because we saw more potential to create future value in doing so than in selling it. We're very clear as we did that, what are the strengths and what are the challenges that we need to address. And the most broken, if I can use that phrase, part of the business was in North America where we had seen double-digit declines. And it's for that reason, we have taken the most dramatic action of any part of the business model in North America effectively to adopt a new route-to-market partner and one who is very, very qualified because they're already operating with the likes of Ulta and Sephora as well as more mainstream retailers in driving both personal care but also high-end beauty care. So that's a sign of confidence for us that we are putting our business in the hands of a proven partner, one who we've known previously, by the way, through work together on Childs Farm. So as we look to the future, ultimately, the most important measure will be value creation. And that is indeed how we have structured our thinking and also our incentivization as we look at the team that will be leading that business. But obviously, what really matters will be driving growth in market share, growth in in-store distribution because ultimately it is a brand that wins in-store and online, but with sufficient social media activation and influencer support. And as that goes through perhaps 1 or 2 seasons, so coming to your question on how long, it's a very seasonal business. The summer is all important or late spring into summer is all important. So we are working hard for summer of '26, but we're also trying to make sure we get ahead of the game for the summer of '27. So I would be expecting to report to you improved momentum as we exit next season, but more importantly, the season after once we have a longer lead time to really address some of the more fundamental opportunities and challenges we see with the brand. But we're very hopeful and confident that we will see that improvement in value creation. Over to you, Sarah? Sarah Pollard: Thanks, Jonathan. Let me touch on the capital allocation point. So you're absolutely right to say we were very clear that the first use of any cash proceeds from the portfolio transformation would be to reduce our level of debt. It takes us for FY '25 to a pro forma leverage ratio of 1.1x and then with further surplus asset disposals and ongoing cash generation in FY '26, south of 1x. And that we see very much within our target range and a level of leverage we feel comfortable with. Then in terms of our broader use of capital, it's first and foremost to drive the organic growth of the business. And of course, as a brand-building organization, that is behind R&D investments, behind marketing campaigns to drive our brands and also CapEx, both to give us more capacity to grow volume, also automation to make sure our product margins remain very competitive. So first and foremost, we see the highest return on our capital being in driving the organic growth of the business. We also are retaining sufficient capital to support a sustainable level of dividend. We don't have a stated policy, but internally, we think a little bit around a targeted cover of 2x and that growing in line with earnings going forward. And then in the surplus capital, I think you can see us putting towards bolt-on M&A if we see opportunities that both sit very neatly within our core markets and our core categories or indeed the opportunity to acquire some additional capabilities, be that digital, and Childs Farm is our last such example in March 2022. And you should think about Childs Farm as being an example of something we might do again when the time is right. And I think we would say all of those things we consider to take precedence over surplus returns because we can do it. We believe we can deliver more return by deploying the capital internally. Sahill Shan: Super. That's really helpful. Just one final one for me. It would be really appreciated. Post these results, it would be good to catch up. Could you get the relevant IR person on your side to reach out to me, and we can take it from there. Operator: Our next question comes from Matthew Webb from Investec. Matthew Webb: I appreciate you've touched on this already, but I wonder if you could just provide a bit more detail on where the GBP 5 million to GBP 10 million of targeted savings are coming from. Jonathan, I think you sort of mentioned that GBP 10 million is quite a big number at the top end, and I would agree with that. So anything that could bring that to life would be very helpful. And then maybe also where your priorities are in terms of reinvesting a portion of those savings? That's the first question. Second question on the EPR. I mean, I infer from the way that you've talked about that, that you've really absorbed that GBP 3 million. I just wondered whether that's correct, whether there were any sort of discussions with your customers about passing that on, at least in part. And then also, I know you mentioned that this had prompted a review of your approach to packaging. And without sort of prejudging that review, I just wonder whether you could give any examples of some of the things you might consider there. And then the third question is just on Indonesia, where obviously, I appreciate your trading has been very strong. So probably the answer is no. But I just wondered whether you'd seen any impact from the recent political unrest in that country. Jonathan Myers: Right. So three good questions, Matthew. Sarah is going to be number one, and I'll come in with the EPR and the Indonesia response for you. Sarah Pollard: So Matthew, let me try and unpack that GBP 5 million to GBP 10 million a little bit. And as Jonathan mentioned, we're establishing a better understanding of where -- if you like, there might be opportunity in our overhead cost base as well as the muscle that we think we very definitely built in terms of optimizing product costs, having in FY '25 integrated our legacy U.K. Personal Care and Beauty businesses. So I think in terms of where we sit today on top of that historical overhead work is recognizing that we inherited a business that needed to unashamedly invest behind capabilities. And they were both commercial to drive the business, but they were also, if I use the word corporate, to meet the PLC bar to make sure we are doing things in the right way. And we have shown both good hard and soft benefits from those investments over the last 3 to 4 years. And we recognize we're in a position now where we can afford to maybe unpick some of those capabilities. So we have quite a strong corporate cost base. And in some of the enabling functions, most notably very close to home and finance, perhaps in HR and IT, we've now reached a level of capability that we think is sufficient. So we have been looking at some of the capabilities we can take away there. That GBP 5 million or GBP 10 million, we've got a good line of sight to the GBP 5 million. We're working on the additional GBP 5 million. It's probably split 2/3 people from increasing spans of control from internal promotions rather than external hires and yes, the net reduction in overall headcount. And then 1/3 is more, if you like, a little bit more tactial, be it the use of consultants, managing travel and expenses and just good continuous improvement and being very cost conscious. So some central capabilities on which we think we now no longer generate a level of return, 2/3 people, 1/3 on [indiscernible]. Jonathan Myers: So if I pick up on the EPR question, then I'll come on to Indonesia, Matthew. So first of all, on EPR, I would say we, along with other manufacturers, have been getting our heads around the implications of this tax. And we're one of the first to report just as the nature of our financial year-end, and we'll be all keenly looking to see what other people are saying as they report in the coming months as well. But I would say exactly as you've identified, really, there are 2 levers that we can pull as we try to deal with what is effectively a new cost in our cost structure. The first is absolutely as part of a broader revenue growth management effort, always looking at our ongoing optimization of pricing and promotion. And sometimes that is tweaking our promotional activity where you nudge up the price per liter or the price per pack. And other times, that can be literally straightforward price increases that we are communicating to retailers and working with them as they choose how much or little of those increases they want to reflect on [indiscernible]. And so that has clearly been one lever that we have been pulling, and we will continue to look at that over time. But also over time, particularly as we learn more about the exact drivers of the EPR tax and how it is applied is how we can optimize our packaging across our portfolio, be that primary packaging or secondary packaging to literally reduce the weight or volume that we are using. And so for example, over time, lightweighting of bottles or lightweighting of caps and also looking at our secondary packaging can be very important and very helpful as we learn how to more effectively optimize the EPR impact, but also continue to provide packaging that consumers find useful and usable. But obviously, then what it's also doing is helping us on our journey of delivering against our sustainability KPIs as well. So we're embracing the challenge, but obviously, we're also learning exactly how the tax works along those manufacturers. As for Indonesia, so just in case anyone else on the line didn't pick it up, there was some social unrest in Indonesia at the very tail end of August and the beginning of September. It was related to housing allowances for MPs and it rather snowballed from there. We obviously triggered our business continuity plan, put it into action. There was minimal disruption to our business. We did actually have our people working from home. So we closed our offices for a period of about 4 working days. Our factories continue to run and our distributors continue to operate. The interesting insight is rather as we have seen with previous events in Indonesia, what it leads to is the shopper actually going to their local open market, I think a wet market rather than a modern supermarket. And so we see a channel switch. And the good news is our distributors are very well placed to be able to support that switch. Our distributors will carry around 7.5 weeks of inventory. So even if we were unable to get some deliveries through, they still have sufficient product in their warehouses to deliver in their localities. So there's minimal disruption. I think in Q1, there's a little bit maybe in our P4 numbers, but all of that will come back in Q2. Operator: Our next question comes from Damian McNeela from Deutsche Numis. Damian McNeela: Two from me, please, this morning. Firstly, U.K. washing and bathing seems to be growing at around about 2%. Can you provide a little bit of insight into both the consumer experience of the category and also the competitive dynamics that you're managing at the minute, please? And then the sort of the last question is around marketing spend. And I think it was held broadly flat this year. What are your sort of expectations for the current year? And also to what extent is AI being used to try and optimize your marketing spend as well, please? Jonathan Myers: Damian, so I'll pick up a little bit on the washing and bathing category dynamics. Sarah can talk a little bit about M&C spend expectations, and I'll then come back with AI and how that can help us optimize and drive higher return on investment. First of all, I think probably in keeping with other consumer categories in the U.K. retail environment, we are seeing an increasingly competitive category of washing and bathing. There's growth to be had. There's still some growth in the market. So it's still an exciting and interesting segment of the market to be playing in, absolutely, particularly if you've got strong brands and strong relationships with the retailers and good go-to-market capabilities. But there is no doubt there is a significant tranche of shoppers, not all, so I don't want to generalize, but a significant tranche that is seeking value. And that's where it collides a little bit with where you're asking about competitive dynamics because we're also seeing some of our competitors, and you will be able to work out from their own comments, which ones I'm talking about, who are trying to rebalance for themselves a focus on value versus volume and perhaps they've been chasing value too much rather than volume. So how is that manifesting itself? There's no doubt there's still an awful lot of people that are interested in shower gels that sell at GBP 1 or less. So we need to make sure that we have pack sizes and promotional price points are absolutely delivered for that. But what we're also seeing is an increasing intensity in the competitive environment on larger pack sizes, and in particular, 500 and 600-milliliter bottles. So whereas in the past, they may have been relatively unpromoted versus the smaller circa GBP 1 price point bottle, you're now beginning increasingly to see quite a lot of price promotion on 500 mL and up [indiscernible]. So we are absolutely sharpening our pencil. We're absolutely trying to respond. It's always a little bit of a lag, as you know, in planning promotions based on the retailers' promotional calendars. But as we move through this year, we will be trying to make sure that we are responding to not just competitive pressures, but also how shoppers are evolving too. So as I say, very interesting subcategory to play in, but very competitive too. Sarah Pollard: Damian, let me address the M&C -- sorry, Damian, you come back. Damian McNeela: No, I'm just saying thank you, Sarah. So yes, brilliant. Sarah Pollard: Thank you, Damian. Let me talk to M&C then. So you're right in terms of the FY '25 margin bridge that we shared this morning. Effectively, what we're saying is that there was no positive contribution to our margin performance in FY '25 from M&C. Or the other way of putting that is we grew our marketing spend in line with our revenue growth, which is actually a good thing. So we probably shouldn't in reality, color code it red. What we've not done and what we won't do is either set internally or guide externally to a set of prescriptive marketing spend targets, either in absolute terms or with reference to our overall revenue because our brand portfolio is so diverse. So Cussons Baby, as Jonathan referenced being sold in wet markets through distributors in Indonesia has a very different support model in terms of the levers of profitable growth than will a St. Tropez being sold in the U.S. So what we do, do on a case-by-case basis is work out a level of sufficiency for each of our brands. And then with increasing scrutiny and data capability, and maybe Jonathan will touch on that as part of the AI topic, really understanding whether that M&C delivered incremental return or not, and if it doesn't move it or optimizing it. But I think what you should be very certain of is the overall direction of travel to underpin our brand building ambition will be a net increase in marketing investments. And if I think about the GBP 5 million to GBP 10 million of overhead cost savings that we're committing to in FY '26, where we talk about reinvesting a portion, marketing investment will absolutely be the #1 candidate on that list for investment, Damian. So hopefully, that answers the question. Jonathan Myers: I'll pick up on the AI part. My flip in response to you, Damian, having known you for a few years, I can say [indiscernible]. So what I mean by lemons is if you look at that Nature Hits Different campaign on the side of the bus I talked about earlier, those very first graphics were actually AI generated. So we are trying to embrace artificial intelligence and how it can help us. I'll come on to some other ways in which [indiscernible] actually AI can help us in the core elements of brand building and as fundamental as generating the graphics, which in that particular campaign, we were able to test and modify and then ultimately bring to market, whether that was on boring old traditional TV or much more interesting and exciting social media. So that's a good example of where we have been developing campaigns using artificial intelligence. But somewhat more fundamentally, as a company, we are also spearheading the use of data analytics and artificial intelligence in how we can improve revenue but also optimize processes and save some of the cost involved with that. So as part of forming a partnership with Microsoft on the Microsoft Fabric platform, we have been exploring, for example, how we can more effectively use our market share data to drive market and consumer insights to help us unlock opportunities for the future, but also how we can optimize our pricing and promotion planning a little bit in that whole area of revenue growth management, but also tackling some of our processes to optimize some of those, not least some of our financial forecasting process internally. So we'll have more to say on that in the future. I don't want to say we're just scratching the surface. It's not that we're doing nothing, but we do see that AI has an opportunity and a part to play for us in the future. Operator: Thank you. With that, that concludes the Q&A portion of today's call, and I'll hand back over to Jonathan Myers for some closing remarks. Jonathan Myers: Thank you, Drew. Thank you to everyone who's called in today and those who asked questions. Hopefully, you've got a sense of we are hard at work. There's plenty done, but we are firmly on the ground. We have plenty more to do, and we have a lot to get on with. So that is what we are going to go and do and ask for all of you in the U.K. as you go shopping in the next few weeks and you see our Christmas gift sets on the shelves, make sure you pick one up and put it in the stocking for someone in your family. And we'll thank you next time we talk. Bye-bye. Operator: Thank you all for joining. That concludes today's call. You may now disconnect your lines.
Operator: Thank you for standing by, and welcome to the Innate Pharma First Half 2025 Business Update and Financial Results Conference Call. [Operator Instructions]. I'd now like to turn the call over to Stéphanie Cornen, Vice President, Investor Relations and Communications. You may begin. Stéphanie Cornen: Good morning and good afternoon, everyone. Thank you for joining us for Innate Pharma H1 2025 Business Update and Financial Results Conference Call. The press release and today's presentation are both available on the IR section of our website. Before we begin, I'd like to remind everyone that today's presentation includes forward-looking statements based on current expectations. These statements involve risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially. I'll briefly cover today's agenda. Our CEO, Jonathan Dickinson, will discuss our strategic overview, path forward and commercial opportunity. Our COO, Yannis Morel, will provide an update on the scientific differentiation of our lead ADC. He will then hand over to our CMO, Sonia Quaratino, who will present clinical pipeline updates on IPH4502, lacutamab and monalizumab. Afterwards, our CFO, Frederic Lombard, will review the financials. Then Jonathan will return with closing remarks and we'll open the call for Q&A. With that, I'll now hand it over to Jonathan. Jonathan Dickinson: Thank you, Stéphanie, and good morning to those joining from the U.S., and good afternoon to our participants in Europe. Moving to Slide 5. Innate Pharma's foundation is in leveraging our deep scientific expertise to advance life-enhancing cancer therapies. Through our years of pioneering work in antibody engineering, we have built a differentiated high-value clinical pipeline supported by compelling data, and this positions us to deliver truly transformative treatments. Turning to Slide 6. During the first half of the year, we've made significant progress across our portfolio, and today marks an important new chapter for Innate. As you may have read in the press release for our half yearly update that we issued earlier today, we have made the strategic decision to focus our investment where we believe we can deliver the greatest impact for both patients and our shareholders. Therefore, going forward, our main investments will be centered on 3 high-value clinical assets, IPH4502, lacutamab and monalizumab. These programs represent the strongest opportunities to transform care and create meaningful value, and they will form the focus of today's discussion. At the same time, we will concentrate on selecting and advancing our next ADCs towards clinical development. As a consequence of this prioritization and sharpened focus, we intend to streamline our organization to deliver on our strategic objectives and key near-term milestones. This is a pivotal moment for Innate. We are aligning our strategy, our science, our organization and our investments to drive forward the programs that can truly make the biggest difference. I could not be more confident in the path we are taking, and I'm excited to share with you how we will execute on this vision in the coming presentation. As you will also have seen in this morning's announcement, our CSO, Eric Vivier, has decided to return to full-time academic research. Eric has been a true driver of the scientific agenda within Innate, so we are extremely pleased that he will continue to support the company's innovation in the important role as an adviser to the R&D Committee of the Board of Directors. Our Chief Operating Officer, Yannis Morel, has always had responsibilities for preclinical research and development, and he will now also assume the Chief Scientific Officer responsibilities. With that, I will now hand it over to Yannis for a closer look at our lead ADCs and the potential. Yannis. Yannis Morel: Thank you, Jonathan. First, on Slide 8, let me share with you why we think Nectin-4 is an attractive target for a next-generation ADC and why our highly differentiated Nectin-4 ADC has more potential across many solid tumors. Even though Nectin-4 is a validated ADC target, PADCEV or enfortumab vedotin carries some challenges and has several limitations. It is approved solely for patients with urothelial cancer where Nectin-4 expression is the highest. In addition, PADCEV-related toxicity often leads to treatment discontinuations and relapse are frequently observed, creating a growing medical need in the post-PADCEV setting. Finally, even though Nectin-4 is expressed at moderate to high level in several other tumor types, there is limited evidence showing that PADCEV is active beyond urothelial cancer. On the next slide, Slide 9. I want to show you why we are so excited by our next-generation Nectin-4 ADC program called IPH4502. As I said previously, this is a differentiated ADC that leverages a novel design to improve both safety and efficacy. IPH4502 is based on a proprietary humanized antibody that binds a unique epitope on the Nectin-4 molecule. The linker used is stable, cleavable and hydrophilic ensuring high ADC exposure and low systemic release of free exatecan, which minimize potential side effects. The payload itself, exatecan, is a potent topoisomerase I inhibitor. It shows what's called bystander activity, which means it impacts number in tumor cells that do not express high level of Nectin-4 and can therefore address tumors with heterogenous expression of Nectin-4. In addition, it remains highly active in enfortumab vedotin or MMAE-resistant models, allowing it to target tumors that have or became resistant to EV. In summary, the design of IPH4502 is purpose-built to overcome the limitations seen with existing therapies of [indiscernible] enfortumab vedotin. On the next slide, Slide 10, turning to preclinical data. During the period, we were also pleased to present at the AACR Annual Meeting, our filings, that highlights the differentiated potential of IPH4502. Starting from a PDX model of urothelial cancer, we generated a model of acquired resistance by exposing tumors to repeated cycle of enfortumab vedotin. As anticipated, tumors that were initially sensitive became resistant to EV, while keeping expression of Nectin-4. But what is remarkable is that in the same model, IPH4502 maintained its activity. While EV lost efficacy, IPH4502 continued to control tumor growth, underscoring its differentiated profile and the opportunity to address patients who no longer responds to EV. On the next slide, Slide 11. Our preclinical data also demonstrated antitumor activity in PDX model with low or heterogenous Nectin-4 expression from various tumor types, including, for example, triple-negative breast, esophageal and head and neck cancers. These results highlight the potential of IPH4502 to extend the reach of Nectin-4 targeting beyond the urothelial cancer into tumor types with significant unmet medical needs. IPH4502 is currently in Phase I development, and we are very excited about the potential of this novel and differentiated Nectin-4 exatecan ADC to address high unmet medical needs both in bladder cancer post EV, but also in solid tumors with low or heterogenous expression of Nectin-4 representing a potentially broad market opportunity. I'll now hand over to Sonia, who will discuss the clinical progress of IPH4502 as well as our other clinical programs. Sonia Quaratino: Thank you, Yannis. Today, I will focus on preclinical assets that represent the potential to create the highest value for Innate, IPH4502, lacutamab and monalizumab. In the next slide, starting with IPH4502, the ADC-directed against Nectin-4, this is a trial that is an asset that is currently investigated in a first-in-human Phase I study. Enrollment in this dose escalation is going very well, and we are now on track to complete enrollment before the end of Q1 2026. The objective of the study is to assess the safety, tolerability and preliminary efficacy of IPH4502 in advanced solid tumors known to express Nectin-4. And we are pleased to present this study in a trial-in-progress poster at ASCO Annual Meeting in Chicago last June. The dose escalation is guided by an adaptive [indiscernible] design to determine the maximum tolerated dose. And once this is established, patients in 1 or 2 selected indications will be randomized across 2 dose levels to define the recommended Phase II dose as per FDA guidelines. The antitumor activity of IPH45 as a single agent will be further explored at RP2D in an expansion phase in selected indications in which signs of activities have been detected in the dose escalation, as well as confirming that the drug has a favorable safety profile and tolerability, the goal of this Phase I trial is to generate efficacy data that will guide the path forward for IPH4502, such as a basket trial in combination with standard of care or expansion phase to help maximize its value for both patients and shareholders. In Slide 14, we have the key milestones ahead for IPH4502. With enrollment progressing well, we expect to report preliminary safety and activity data in the first half of 2026. The preclinical data presented earlier by Yannis, are guiding us towards 2 key hypothesis to be explored in the clinic. The first, it's an urothelial carcinoma in the post EV setting, where IPH4502 may overcome resistance to EV. This represents an area of high unmet need with no approved drives and the potential to move rapidly into late-stage development is large. The second is to look for signals in other tumor types where a Nectin-4 expression may be low or heterogenous, which could open an even broader opportunity. With this hypothesis, the clinical data will guide us towards the indication where IPH4502 can make the greatest impact. Now turning on next slide on lacutamab. We are close to completion of the Phase III protocol following alignment with the FDA and EMA. To recap, lacutamab is a first-in-class anti-KIR3DL2 antibody in development for the treatment of cutaneous T-cell lymphoma and peripheral T-cell lymphoma. In CTCL, lacutamab has already generated strong long-term follow-up data, which we presented at ASCO this year and which we will summarize in the next slide. Importantly, the regulatory pathway is clear, supported by key designations that position lacutamab for potential accelerated approval in Sézary syndrome. Our confidence in the program was further strengthened earlier this year when the FDA granted breakthrough therapy designation for relapsed or refractory Sézary syndrome based on the TELLOMAK Phase II results. This designation is intended to accelerate both development and regulatory review of drugs that address serious conditions. Beyond CTCL, PTCL, peripheral T-cell lymphoma, represents a second indication. It's a group of aggressive lymphomas with poor prognosis and a significant life cycle management opportunity for lacutamab. Importantly, KIR3DL2 correlates with worse clinical outcome. And is expressed in approximately 40% of PTCL patients. In PTCL, lacutamab has previously demonstrated some objective responses as a single agent, reinforcing the relevance of the target and providing the rationale to pursue development in combination with chemotherapy. Building on these findings, lacutamab is now being investigated in the KILT trial, a randomized Phase II in combination with gemcitabine and oxaliplatin versus gemcitabine and oxaliplatin in relapsed refractory KIR3DL2 positive PTCL patients. When we move to next slide and to recap the data in CTCL that we presented at ASCO 2025, the long-term follow-up data from the TELLOMAK Phase II trial. Here, we see the results in Sézary syndrome, which is an aggressive subtype of CTCL and post mogamulizumab, where there are no approved drug, we have shown clinical efficacy. In heavily pretreated patients, all pretreated with Moga, lacutamab demonstrated a global overall response rate of 42.9%, and the medium progression-free survival of 8.3 months. Of note, the median duration of response was 25.6 months, underscoring lacutamab's potential to deliver durable clinical benefit in this very aggressive and difficult to treat population. Turning in the next slide to mycosis fungoides. The long-term follow-up data from the TELLOMAK Phase II trial showed that lacutamab achieved a global overall response rate of 19.6%, with consistent activity observed regardless of KIR3DL2 expression level. The median duration of response was 13.8 months and median progression-free survival was 10.2 months with no difference between the two sub groups. Importantly, in both Sézary syndrome and mycosis fungoides, every patient who achieved a complete response remained in response at the time of the data cutoff, once again highlighting lacutamab's ability to deliver durable benefit even in heavily pretreated patients. In both indications, Sézary and mycosis fungoides, lacutamab was well tolerated with an excellent safety profile that supports its potential use for long systemic therapy. Now in the next slide, let's look at the potential positioning of lacutamab in CTCL. The challenges in CTCL care are well known. The disease has a profound impact on quality of life with patients suffering from itching, fatigue and cutaneous lesions with important psychosocial implications. Preventing progression to advanced stages is critical as outcome in Stage IIb and beyond are poor. Yet very few tolerable systemic options are currently available for early-stage patients. And this is where lacutamab can make a real difference. Our data have shown deep antitumor activity, durable responses and meaningful progression-free survival. Equally important, lacutamab has shown an excellent safety profile overcoming the tolerability concern of other systemic therapies in earlier stages of disease. Furthermore, lacutamab address the symptoms that matter most to patients with a positive impact on the quality of life. In the next slide, we see that the combination of strong efficacy with excellent safety makes lacutamab a unique candidate for earlier use of systemic therapy in CTCL. And this becomes particularly important in mycosis fungoides, where survival estimates deteriorate once patients progress to more advanced stages. As you can see, in Stage IIb and beyond, the 5-year survival is lower than 50%. Poor survival in late-stage MF highlights the need for systemic therapies that can be used earlier to change the course of the disease. And here is where lacutamab could fill a critical gap offering a tolerable systemic option that can be introduced at an earlier time point with the potential to delay progression and improve patient outcomes. So altogether, we are on track to advance lacutamab towards Phase III in CTCL. As discussed, we are close to finalize the Phase III protocol following interaction with the FDA and EMA. And once financing is secured, we will be positioning to initiate the confirmatory Phase III trial next year, with the potential for accelerated approval in the following year, and enrollment advances in Sézary syndrome targeting approximately 2027. The key next step will be to determine the optimal path forward whether through partnering or additional investor support, always with the goal of maximizing value for both patients and shareholders. In parallel, in PTCL, the LYSA-sponsored KILT trial continues to enroll patients. And we look forward to data from this study in 2026, which could further validate lacutamab's potential across additional T-cell lymphoma. Now switching gear in the next slide. We discussed another late-stage program, monalizumab, with a great potential value creation for the company. As a reminder, monalizumab is a first-in-class anti-NKG2A checkpoint inhibitor currently evaluated in Phase III clinical trial in lung cancer by our partner, AstraZeneca, in combination with durvalumab. Three Phase II trial, COAST, NeoCOAST and NeoCOAST-2, demonstrated a strong rationale for this combination in unresectable non-small cell lung cancer and in the neoadjuvant setting. Now the Phase III PACIFIC-9 trial aims to demonstrate efficacy of durvalumab in combination with either monalizumab or the AstraZeneca anti-CD73 antibody, oleclumab in patients with unresectable Stage III non-small cell lung cancer who have not progressed following classic platinum-based concurrent chemoradiation therapy. The study is now fully recruited, and it remains on track for primary completion at the end of the first half of 2026. And this is an important catalyst for the program with data expected in the second half of 2026. Now I'm going to hand over to Jonathan again, who will walk through the commercial opportunity of these 2 late-stage assets, lacutamab and monalizumab. Jonathan Dickinson: Thank you, Sonia, for showing how lacutamab has the potential to fundamentally reshape the care of CTCL patients. As you can see on Slide 23, the opportunity for lacutamab starts with Sézary syndrome, where following a potential accelerated approval in 2027, we see a clear launch pathway. In the past months, by assessing U.S. claims data, we have identified a significantly greater opportunity in Sézary syndrome than previously anticipated. It's been established that there are around 1,000 Sézary syndrome patients in the U.S. with approximately 300 new cases each year and a large pool of post-mogamulizumab treated patients. This represents a meaningful and derisked first market opportunity for lacutamab following an accelerated approval. After accelerated approval in Sézary syndrome, the opportunity expands into second-line plus setting for mycosis fungoides and ultimately, into earlier stages of CTCL patients, where a tolerable systemic option that are currently lacking and where lacutamab has the potential to create a new market opportunity and change the course of the disease for patients through early intervention to stop or delay disease progression beyond Stage IIa. It's been established through the same U.S. claims data that there are approximately 20,000 CTCL patients in the U.S. with an incidence of approximately 5,000 patients suggesting a larger population than previously estimated based on publicly available data. These new dynamics, combined with the additional potential in PTCL have led us to reconsider our strategy and the value we assign to lacutamab. To maximize the opportunity for lacutamab, we are currently planning to bring the product into Phase III and submit a BLA in Sézary syndrome, either with the support of investors or with a partner, but with improved deal terms. Already at launch, lacutamab has the potential to reach a substantial patient population, making it an interesting, profitable and value-creating opportunity for Innate Pharma. We are actively collecting additional CTCL market data and conducting further analysis, leveraging claims data and market research to further define the market opportunity. We plan to share the new data and market insights at the lacutamab-focused investor event by the end of the year. Turning now to Slide 24, and to monalizumab. Our partnership with AstraZeneca for monalizumab continues to represent a significant value driver for Innate. The total agreement is worth up to $1.275 billion, and we have already received $450 million in upfront and milestone payments to date under this partnership. Moving forward, Innate is eligible to up to an additional $825 million in development and commercial milestones. Outside of Europe, AstraZeneca records all sales and Innate will receive double-digit royalties upon commercialization. In Europe, we retained co-promotion rights, along with a 50% profit share while contributing to a portion of the Phase III costs with a predefined cap. This structure ensures that Innate remains well positioned to benefit from monalizumab's future success globally. That concludes the pipeline update for this presentation. I will now turn the floor to Frederic Lombard, our Chief Financial Officer, to discuss the financials for the first half of the year. Frederic? Frederic Lombard: Thank you, Jonathan. So for the first half of 2025, we've reported total revenue of EUR 4.9 million, primarily driven by collaborations with AstraZeneca and Sanofi as well as governmental funding for research expenditures. Operating expenses were reaching EUR 30.3 million with EUR 20.5 million in R&D and EUR 9.8 million in G&A expenses. R&D expenses decreased by 29% compared to the prior year, reflecting the phasing of certain clinical programs, while G&A expenses remained stable at EUR 9.8 million. At June 30, 2025, we had EUR 70.4 million in cash, cash equivalents and financial assets, providing a cash runway until the end of the third quarter of 2026. With that, I'm turning it back to Jonathan for closing remarks. Jonathan Dickinson: Thank you, Frederic. Turning to Slide 28, you can see our news flow for the near and midterm, which is fully aligned with the strategic refocus I outlined at the beginning of today's call. For IPH4502, our novel Nectin-4 ADC, the Phase I trial is progressing well and we expect data in the first half of 2026. While our preclinical R&D continues to build a strong ADC pipeline to fuel our next wave of candidates as shown by Yannis. Lacutamab has secured FDA breakthrough therapy designation, supported by long-term follow-up data presented at ASCO. And we are preparing the Phase III protocol submission following our discussion with regulators as indicated by Sonia. And for monalizumab, AstraZeneca's Phase III PACIFIC-9 trial is fully recruited and remains on track for primary completion in the first half of 2026 with data expected in the second half of 2026. Turning to Slide 29. In summary, we are excited about the opportunities ahead and confident in our ability to deliver value for patients and shareholders. We are concentrating our investment on what we believe are our highest value clinical stage assets, IPH4502, lacutamab and monalizumab, where we have multiple near-term catalysts, and we will rightsize our organization to deliver on these strategic priorities. With EUR 70.4 million in cash at the end of June, we are funded to the end of the third quarter of 2026, providing Innate the ability to execute on our focused strategic priorities. Thank you for your attention. And with that, operator, please open the line for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Your first phone question today comes from the line of Daina Graybosch from Leerink Partners. Bill Ling: You got Bill on for Daina. So I guess, what should we take away on the potential of targeting NK cells now that ANKET's are not included in your prioritization today as well as Eric Vivier sort of leaving the company? Jonathan Dickinson: So takeaways from -- I would like to say from Eric leaving the company, maybe that's the place to start off. Eric is leaving the company, but he will still play an important role with the company moving forward. He will be an adviser to the R&D Committee of our Board of Directors. And we have an extended research collaboration with his lab. So we basically will continue to benefit from any innovation, which Eric can bring to the table. Moving back to NK cells and the reading, we are still working on NK cells. It's not our main priority today. We're focusing on what we believe are our highest value clinical assets, IPH4502, lacutamab and monalizumab. We will be basing all future decisions on our NK cell engagers on clinical data and the relevance of that clinical data to markets, and we'll make the appropriate decisions on those assets when we have that clinical data and establish market relevance based on that data. So it's not the end of NK cells, but it's not our priority today anymore. Operator: We'll move on to our next question, and it comes from the line of Swayampakula Ramakanth from HCW. Swayampakula Ramakanth: So now that the ANKET programs are out at least as far as your development is concerned. Any commentary on where Sanofi is with the assets that they currently are developing? Jonathan Dickinson: Absolutely. So I'd just like to say that it's not the end of the story for NK cells. We're still moving forward and completing the studies with IPH6501. We have a path to explore IPH61 via investigator-initiated research and an interesting way forward. So I wouldn't say it's the end of NK cells. It's just that it's been basically lowered in our current company priorities. From a Sanofi perspective, Sanofi continues to progress the BCMA-targeted ANKET. And as I think we've communicated in the past, that's being explored in autoimmunity, in immunology as part of Sanofi's focus as a company, and we expect to have updates from Sanofi on that BCMA program in the near future. Swayampakula Ramakanth: And then regarding the Phase III start for lacutamab, should we still assume that unless you have a partner signed up ahead of the start of the study, it will still -- it will be a wait and watch until you get a partner or you have enough commitment from investors to go ahead and start that study? Jonathan Dickinson: So we are actively working with investors at the moment to basically keep options open. So we're continuing discussions with partners, but we also have some very advanced discussions with investors who are very interested in lacutamab, now that we effectively have a derisked development program to move forward into Phase III. And we also see interest based now on the increased potential commercial opportunity. This also will reinvigorate discussions with partners. And we are also expecting next steps with respect to the finalization of the protocol for the confirmatory Phase III study, which is also an important step for partners. So we continue the discussions with partners. But at this stage, we see it as very important to keep our future options open to either go down the partner route, but with improved deal terms based on the significantly larger potential market opportunity, particularly with the first accelerated approval launch in Sézary syndrome. And so yes, we're keeping the options open with both -- for both moving forward with investors and with potential partners. Swayampakula Ramakanth: So last question from me, Jonathan. This is on 4502. Based on the preclinical data that you have generated so far, what potential indications do you think 4502 will be effective? And since there are numerous Nectin-4 ADC's in the clinic right now, how differentiated are you is 4502 against those? Jonathan Dickinson: Yes. So maybe, Sonia, you can take the first part of that question, Sonia? Sonia Quaratino: Yes. Can you repeat the question, please? Swayampakula Ramakanth: Yes. Based on the preclinical data that you have generated to date, what indication do you think is where 4502 could be effective? Sonia Quaratino: Right. As I mentioned before, we focus on any indication that express Nectin-4 because we believe that we also can target dose indication with a relatively small Nectin-4 expression, but we also very much focus on the urothelial cancer patients who became refractory or resistance to PADCEV. And for these patients, there are no approved drugs. And if we have clinical -- good clinical data in this refractory relapsed patients, we really may have a very fast opportunity for an accelerated market approval in UC post-PADCEV. So we are exploring, let's say, the classic path as well as some more defined area for an accelerated -- potential accelerated approval. Jonathan Dickinson: And then in terms of differentiation, RK, I mean, I think we believe that we'll be able to show differentiation here, particularly versus PADCEV or MMAE-based ADCs, due to the payload and the different resistance and toxicity profile, which we believe we'll be able to show meaningful differences between IPH4502 and MMAE-based ADCs. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Justin Zelin from BTIG. Justin Zelin: Maybe I'll continue the questioning on 4502. If you can just give us an update on how enrollment has been progressing here. I know you gave an update here on enrollment completion. Just was curious on how you could comment on how enrollment is going today. When we should expect the initial data, if it will be sometime in the first half of next year, how many patients' worth of data we should expect? And any expectations from a safety or efficacy standpoint from that update? Jonathan Dickinson: Sonia, do you want to take that one? Sonia Quaratino: Of course, of course. As mentioned, the enrollment with IPH45 is going extremely well. We always have, let's say, a list of patients to go in -- at a different dose level. And also with the [indiscernible] design that we have, we also have the possibility to have parallel enrollment in backfill cohorts. And so, we do not have the classic 3 plus 3 design with an extremely limited number of patients, but we can expand different to dose levels as we go along. To your question, of course, we plan to finish the enrollment in the first quarter of 2026. And of course, the data in terms of at least from the first CT scan can only occur as you can understand, 8 weeks later from the first dosing, so it takes another quarter to have the clinical efficacy from the last cohort recruited. Having said that, we are going to have probably a pool of data of 50, 60 patients by then. Operator: And there are no further phone questions at this time. I will now turn the call back over to management for any written questions. Stéphanie Cornen: Yes, we have one question on the line here from Rajan Sharma. So the first question is, does the new strategic focus means, ANKET assets will not be progressed irrespective of clinical data, given that 6501 data are expected in the near term? Jonathan Dickinson: So, I think I answered this earlier, but I'll repeat it again. So from an IPH6501 perspective, the study continues, and we expect to have data, I think, as we've communicated previously, towards the end of this year or very early next year. And we will make any decisions on the next steps for IPH6501 based on that clinical data and the clinical relevance of that data to the marketplace. Stéphanie Cornen: Okay. And so the next question, what is the financial impact of the strategic refocus and head count reduction and what proportion of current R&D expense are directed towards IPH4502 and lacutamab? Jonathan Dickinson: So the financial impact, we've not -- and we won't be communicating specific numbers on the impact of the financial reductions. We're in a legal process now, which is a French legal process to reduce the size of the organization, which gives us an obligation not to communicate on certain components, and that would fall under that legal framework that we're operating within. So we can't provide specific guidance there. In terms of R&D expenses, maybe Frederic would like to comment on the proportion. Stéphanie Cornen: So the question was, what proportion of current R&D expenses are directed towards IPH4502 and lacutamab? Frederic Lombard: Yes, we usually never communicate on the investment that we do in those 2 in the portfolio. But following up on the comment from Jonathan, we have a significant portion of our external expenditure, which are on those assets. Stéphanie Cornen: So we have another question from Oussema Denguir. So with regard to financial visibility, does estimate for the end of the third quarter of 2026, taking into account the impact of the restructuring plan? Jonathan Dickinson: The answer to that is yes. So the restructuring plan is fully embedded into the cash runway, which takes us to the end of Q3 2026. Stéphanie Cornen: And last question, concerning Phase III of lacutamab, can you provide an initial estimate of the investment requirements, if you decide to trial without a partner? Jonathan Dickinson: Again, this is something that we would not normally communicate on in terms of the cost. This is a standard Phase III study. So I think you can draw your own conclusions. It's nothing too dissimilar from similar oncology Phase III trials. Stéphanie Cornen: Thank you, Jonathan. There is no further question. Jonathan Dickinson: Okay. So thank you for everybody's time and attention and for your interest in Innate Pharma, and we'll look forward to meeting with you in person in the near future or on one of our next calls. Thank you, and goodbye. Operator: This concludes today's conference call. Thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Thank you for standing by, and welcome to the Innate Pharma First Half 2025 Business Update and Financial Results Conference Call. [Operator Instructions]. I'd now like to turn the call over to Stéphanie Cornen, Vice President, Investor Relations and Communications. You may begin. Stéphanie Cornen: Good morning and good afternoon, everyone. Thank you for joining us for Innate Pharma H1 2025 Business Update and Financial Results Conference Call. The press release and today's presentation are both available on the IR section of our website. Before we begin, I'd like to remind everyone that today's presentation includes forward-looking statements based on current expectations. These statements involve risks and uncertainties that could cause actual results to differ materially. I'll briefly cover today's agenda. Our CEO, Jonathan Dickinson, will discuss our strategic overview, path forward and commercial opportunity. Our COO, Yannis Morel, will provide an update on the scientific differentiation of our lead ADC. He will then hand over to our CMO, Sonia Quaratino, who will present clinical pipeline updates on IPH4502, lacutamab and monalizumab. Afterwards, our CFO, Frederic Lombard, will review the financials. Then Jonathan will return with closing remarks and we'll open the call for Q&A. With that, I'll now hand it over to Jonathan. Jonathan Dickinson: Thank you, Stéphanie, and good morning to those joining from the U.S., and good afternoon to our participants in Europe. Moving to Slide 5. Innate Pharma's foundation is in leveraging our deep scientific expertise to advance life-enhancing cancer therapies. Through our years of pioneering work in antibody engineering, we have built a differentiated high-value clinical pipeline supported by compelling data, and this positions us to deliver truly transformative treatments. Turning to Slide 6. During the first half of the year, we've made significant progress across our portfolio, and today marks an important new chapter for Innate. As you may have read in the press release for our half yearly update that we issued earlier today, we have made the strategic decision to focus our investment where we believe we can deliver the greatest impact for both patients and our shareholders. Therefore, going forward, our main investments will be centered on 3 high-value clinical assets, IPH4502, lacutamab and monalizumab. These programs represent the strongest opportunities to transform care and create meaningful value, and they will form the focus of today's discussion. At the same time, we will concentrate on selecting and advancing our next ADCs towards clinical development. As a consequence of this prioritization and sharpened focus, we intend to streamline our organization to deliver on our strategic objectives and key near-term milestones. This is a pivotal moment for Innate. We are aligning our strategy, our science, our organization and our investments to drive forward the programs that can truly make the biggest difference. I could not be more confident in the path we are taking, and I'm excited to share with you how we will execute on this vision in the coming presentation. As you will also have seen in this morning's announcement, our CSO, Eric Vivier, has decided to return to full-time academic research. Eric has been a true driver of the scientific agenda within Innate, so we are extremely pleased that he will continue to support the company's innovation in the important role as an adviser to the R&D Committee of the Board of Directors. Our Chief Operating Officer, Yannis Morel, has always had responsibilities for preclinical research and development, and he will now also assume the Chief Scientific Officer responsibilities. With that, I will now hand it over to Yannis for a closer look at our lead ADCs and the potential. Yannis. Yannis Morel: Thank you, Jonathan. First, on Slide 8, let me share with you why we think Nectin-4 is an attractive target for a next-generation ADC and why our highly differentiated Nectin-4 ADC has more potential across many solid tumors. Even though Nectin-4 is a validated ADC target, PADCEV or enfortumab vedotin carries some challenges and has several limitations. It is approved solely for patients with urothelial cancer where Nectin-4 expression is the highest. In addition, PADCEV-related toxicity often leads to treatment discontinuations and relapse are frequently observed, creating a growing medical need in the post-PADCEV setting. Finally, even though Nectin-4 is expressed at moderate to high level in several other tumor types, there is limited evidence showing that PADCEV is active beyond urothelial cancer. On the next slide, Slide 9. I want to show you why we are so excited by our next-generation Nectin-4 ADC program called IPH4502. As I said previously, this is a differentiated ADC that leverages a novel design to improve both safety and efficacy. IPH4502 is based on a proprietary humanized antibody that binds a unique epitope on the Nectin-4 molecule. The linker used is stable, cleavable and hydrophilic ensuring high ADC exposure and low systemic release of free exatecan, which minimize potential side effects. The payload itself, exatecan, is a potent topoisomerase I inhibitor. It shows what's called bystander activity, which means it impacts number in tumor cells that do not express high level of Nectin-4 and can therefore address tumors with heterogenous expression of Nectin-4. In addition, it remains highly active in enfortumab vedotin or MMAE-resistant models, allowing it to target tumors that have or became resistant to EV. In summary, the design of IPH4502 is purpose-built to overcome the limitations seen with existing therapies of [indiscernible] enfortumab vedotin. On the next slide, Slide 10, turning to preclinical data. During the period, we were also pleased to present at the AACR Annual Meeting, our filings, that highlights the differentiated potential of IPH4502. Starting from a PDX model of urothelial cancer, we generated a model of acquired resistance by exposing tumors to repeated cycle of enfortumab vedotin. As anticipated, tumors that were initially sensitive became resistant to EV, while keeping expression of Nectin-4. But what is remarkable is that in the same model, IPH4502 maintained its activity. While EV lost efficacy, IPH4502 continued to control tumor growth, underscoring its differentiated profile and the opportunity to address patients who no longer responds to EV. On the next slide, Slide 11. Our preclinical data also demonstrated antitumor activity in PDX model with low or heterogenous Nectin-4 expression from various tumor types, including, for example, triple-negative breast, esophageal and head and neck cancers. These results highlight the potential of IPH4502 to extend the reach of Nectin-4 targeting beyond the urothelial cancer into tumor types with significant unmet medical needs. IPH4502 is currently in Phase I development, and we are very excited about the potential of this novel and differentiated Nectin-4 exatecan ADC to address high unmet medical needs both in bladder cancer post EV, but also in solid tumors with low or heterogenous expression of Nectin-4 representing a potentially broad market opportunity. I'll now hand over to Sonia, who will discuss the clinical progress of IPH4502 as well as our other clinical programs. Sonia Quaratino: Thank you, Yannis. Today, I will focus on preclinical assets that represent the potential to create the highest value for Innate, IPH4502, lacutamab and monalizumab. In the next slide, starting with IPH4502, the ADC-directed against Nectin-4, this is a trial that is an asset that is currently investigated in a first-in-human Phase I study. Enrollment in this dose escalation is going very well, and we are now on track to complete enrollment before the end of Q1 2026. The objective of the study is to assess the safety, tolerability and preliminary efficacy of IPH4502 in advanced solid tumors known to express Nectin-4. And we are pleased to present this study in a trial-in-progress poster at ASCO Annual Meeting in Chicago last June. The dose escalation is guided by an adaptive [indiscernible] design to determine the maximum tolerated dose. And once this is established, patients in 1 or 2 selected indications will be randomized across 2 dose levels to define the recommended Phase II dose as per FDA guidelines. The antitumor activity of IPH45 as a single agent will be further explored at RP2D in an expansion phase in selected indications in which signs of activities have been detected in the dose escalation, as well as confirming that the drug has a favorable safety profile and tolerability, the goal of this Phase I trial is to generate efficacy data that will guide the path forward for IPH4502, such as a basket trial in combination with standard of care or expansion phase to help maximize its value for both patients and shareholders. In Slide 14, we have the key milestones ahead for IPH4502. With enrollment progressing well, we expect to report preliminary safety and activity data in the first half of 2026. The preclinical data presented earlier by Yannis, are guiding us towards 2 key hypothesis to be explored in the clinic. The first, it's an urothelial carcinoma in the post EV setting, where IPH4502 may overcome resistance to EV. This represents an area of high unmet need with no approved drives and the potential to move rapidly into late-stage development is large. The second is to look for signals in other tumor types where a Nectin-4 expression may be low or heterogenous, which could open an even broader opportunity. With this hypothesis, the clinical data will guide us towards the indication where IPH4502 can make the greatest impact. Now turning on next slide on lacutamab. We are close to completion of the Phase III protocol following alignment with the FDA and EMA. To recap, lacutamab is a first-in-class anti-KIR3DL2 antibody in development for the treatment of cutaneous T-cell lymphoma and peripheral T-cell lymphoma. In CTCL, lacutamab has already generated strong long-term follow-up data, which we presented at ASCO this year and which we will summarize in the next slide. Importantly, the regulatory pathway is clear, supported by key designations that position lacutamab for potential accelerated approval in Sézary syndrome. Our confidence in the program was further strengthened earlier this year when the FDA granted breakthrough therapy designation for relapsed or refractory Sézary syndrome based on the TELLOMAK Phase II results. This designation is intended to accelerate both development and regulatory review of drugs that address serious conditions. Beyond CTCL, PTCL, peripheral T-cell lymphoma, represents a second indication. It's a group of aggressive lymphomas with poor prognosis and a significant life cycle management opportunity for lacutamab. Importantly, KIR3DL2 correlates with worse clinical outcome. And is expressed in approximately 40% of PTCL patients. In PTCL, lacutamab has previously demonstrated some objective responses as a single agent, reinforcing the relevance of the target and providing the rationale to pursue development in combination with chemotherapy. Building on these findings, lacutamab is now being investigated in the KILT trial, a randomized Phase II in combination with gemcitabine and oxaliplatin versus gemcitabine and oxaliplatin in relapsed refractory KIR3DL2 positive PTCL patients. When we move to next slide and to recap the data in CTCL that we presented at ASCO 2025, the long-term follow-up data from the TELLOMAK Phase II trial. Here, we see the results in Sézary syndrome, which is an aggressive subtype of CTCL and post mogamulizumab, where there are no approved drug, we have shown clinical efficacy. In heavily pretreated patients, all pretreated with Moga, lacutamab demonstrated a global overall response rate of 42.9%, and the medium progression-free survival of 8.3 months. Of note, the median duration of response was 25.6 months, underscoring lacutamab's potential to deliver durable clinical benefit in this very aggressive and difficult to treat population. Turning in the next slide to mycosis fungoides. The long-term follow-up data from the TELLOMAK Phase II trial showed that lacutamab achieved a global overall response rate of 19.6%, with consistent activity observed regardless of KIR3DL2 expression level. The median duration of response was 13.8 months and median progression-free survival was 10.2 months with no difference between the two sub groups. Importantly, in both Sézary syndrome and mycosis fungoides, every patient who achieved a complete response remained in response at the time of the data cutoff, once again highlighting lacutamab's ability to deliver durable benefit even in heavily pretreated patients. In both indications, Sézary and mycosis fungoides, lacutamab was well tolerated with an excellent safety profile that supports its potential use for long systemic therapy. Now in the next slide, let's look at the potential positioning of lacutamab in CTCL. The challenges in CTCL care are well known. The disease has a profound impact on quality of life with patients suffering from itching, fatigue and cutaneous lesions with important psychosocial implications. Preventing progression to advanced stages is critical as outcome in Stage IIb and beyond are poor. Yet very few tolerable systemic options are currently available for early-stage patients. And this is where lacutamab can make a real difference. Our data have shown deep antitumor activity, durable responses and meaningful progression-free survival. Equally important, lacutamab has shown an excellent safety profile overcoming the tolerability concern of other systemic therapies in earlier stages of disease. Furthermore, lacutamab address the symptoms that matter most to patients with a positive impact on the quality of life. In the next slide, we see that the combination of strong efficacy with excellent safety makes lacutamab a unique candidate for earlier use of systemic therapy in CTCL. And this becomes particularly important in mycosis fungoides, where survival estimates deteriorate once patients progress to more advanced stages. As you can see, in Stage IIb and beyond, the 5-year survival is lower than 50%. Poor survival in late-stage MF highlights the need for systemic therapies that can be used earlier to change the course of the disease. And here is where lacutamab could fill a critical gap offering a tolerable systemic option that can be introduced at an earlier time point with the potential to delay progression and improve patient outcomes. So altogether, we are on track to advance lacutamab towards Phase III in CTCL. As discussed, we are close to finalize the Phase III protocol following interaction with the FDA and EMA. And once financing is secured, we will be positioning to initiate the confirmatory Phase III trial next year, with the potential for accelerated approval in the following year, and enrollment advances in Sézary syndrome targeting approximately 2027. The key next step will be to determine the optimal path forward whether through partnering or additional investor support, always with the goal of maximizing value for both patients and shareholders. In parallel, in PTCL, the LYSA-sponsored KILT trial continues to enroll patients. And we look forward to data from this study in 2026, which could further validate lacutamab's potential across additional T-cell lymphoma. Now switching gear in the next slide. We discussed another late-stage program, monalizumab, with a great potential value creation for the company. As a reminder, monalizumab is a first-in-class anti-NKG2A checkpoint inhibitor currently evaluated in Phase III clinical trial in lung cancer by our partner, AstraZeneca, in combination with durvalumab. Three Phase II trial, COAST, NeoCOAST and NeoCOAST-2, demonstrated a strong rationale for this combination in unresectable non-small cell lung cancer and in the neoadjuvant setting. Now the Phase III PACIFIC-9 trial aims to demonstrate efficacy of durvalumab in combination with either monalizumab or the AstraZeneca anti-CD73 antibody, oleclumab in patients with unresectable Stage III non-small cell lung cancer who have not progressed following classic platinum-based concurrent chemoradiation therapy. The study is now fully recruited, and it remains on track for primary completion at the end of the first half of 2026. And this is an important catalyst for the program with data expected in the second half of 2026. Now I'm going to hand over to Jonathan again, who will walk through the commercial opportunity of these 2 late-stage assets, lacutamab and monalizumab. Jonathan Dickinson: Thank you, Sonia, for showing how lacutamab has the potential to fundamentally reshape the care of CTCL patients. As you can see on Slide 23, the opportunity for lacutamab starts with Sézary syndrome, where following a potential accelerated approval in 2027, we see a clear launch pathway. In the past months, by assessing U.S. claims data, we have identified a significantly greater opportunity in Sézary syndrome than previously anticipated. It's been established that there are around 1,000 Sézary syndrome patients in the U.S. with approximately 300 new cases each year and a large pool of post-mogamulizumab treated patients. This represents a meaningful and derisked first market opportunity for lacutamab following an accelerated approval. After accelerated approval in Sézary syndrome, the opportunity expands into second-line plus setting for mycosis fungoides and ultimately, into earlier stages of CTCL patients, where a tolerable systemic option that are currently lacking and where lacutamab has the potential to create a new market opportunity and change the course of the disease for patients through early intervention to stop or delay disease progression beyond Stage IIa. It's been established through the same U.S. claims data that there are approximately 20,000 CTCL patients in the U.S. with an incidence of approximately 5,000 patients suggesting a larger population than previously estimated based on publicly available data. These new dynamics, combined with the additional potential in PTCL have led us to reconsider our strategy and the value we assign to lacutamab. To maximize the opportunity for lacutamab, we are currently planning to bring the product into Phase III and submit a BLA in Sézary syndrome, either with the support of investors or with a partner, but with improved deal terms. Already at launch, lacutamab has the potential to reach a substantial patient population, making it an interesting, profitable and value-creating opportunity for Innate Pharma. We are actively collecting additional CTCL market data and conducting further analysis, leveraging claims data and market research to further define the market opportunity. We plan to share the new data and market insights at the lacutamab-focused investor event by the end of the year. Turning now to Slide 24, and to monalizumab. Our partnership with AstraZeneca for monalizumab continues to represent a significant value driver for Innate. The total agreement is worth up to $1.275 billion, and we have already received $450 million in upfront and milestone payments to date under this partnership. Moving forward, Innate is eligible to up to an additional $825 million in development and commercial milestones. Outside of Europe, AstraZeneca records all sales and Innate will receive double-digit royalties upon commercialization. In Europe, we retained co-promotion rights, along with a 50% profit share while contributing to a portion of the Phase III costs with a predefined cap. This structure ensures that Innate remains well positioned to benefit from monalizumab's future success globally. That concludes the pipeline update for this presentation. I will now turn the floor to Frederic Lombard, our Chief Financial Officer, to discuss the financials for the first half of the year. Frederic? Frederic Lombard: Thank you, Jonathan. So for the first half of 2025, we've reported total revenue of EUR 4.9 million, primarily driven by collaborations with AstraZeneca and Sanofi as well as governmental funding for research expenditures. Operating expenses were reaching EUR 30.3 million with EUR 20.5 million in R&D and EUR 9.8 million in G&A expenses. R&D expenses decreased by 29% compared to the prior year, reflecting the phasing of certain clinical programs, while G&A expenses remained stable at EUR 9.8 million. At June 30, 2025, we had EUR 70.4 million in cash, cash equivalents and financial assets, providing a cash runway until the end of the third quarter of 2026. With that, I'm turning it back to Jonathan for closing remarks. Jonathan Dickinson: Thank you, Frederic. Turning to Slide 28, you can see our news flow for the near and midterm, which is fully aligned with the strategic refocus I outlined at the beginning of today's call. For IPH4502, our novel Nectin-4 ADC, the Phase I trial is progressing well and we expect data in the first half of 2026. While our preclinical R&D continues to build a strong ADC pipeline to fuel our next wave of candidates as shown by Yannis. Lacutamab has secured FDA breakthrough therapy designation, supported by long-term follow-up data presented at ASCO. And we are preparing the Phase III protocol submission following our discussion with regulators as indicated by Sonia. And for monalizumab, AstraZeneca's Phase III PACIFIC-9 trial is fully recruited and remains on track for primary completion in the first half of 2026 with data expected in the second half of 2026. Turning to Slide 29. In summary, we are excited about the opportunities ahead and confident in our ability to deliver value for patients and shareholders. We are concentrating our investment on what we believe are our highest value clinical stage assets, IPH4502, lacutamab and monalizumab, where we have multiple near-term catalysts, and we will rightsize our organization to deliver on these strategic priorities. With EUR 70.4 million in cash at the end of June, we are funded to the end of the third quarter of 2026, providing Innate the ability to execute on our focused strategic priorities. Thank you for your attention. And with that, operator, please open the line for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Your first phone question today comes from the line of Daina Graybosch from Leerink Partners. Bill Ling: You got Bill on for Daina. So I guess, what should we take away on the potential of targeting NK cells now that ANKET's are not included in your prioritization today as well as Eric Vivier sort of leaving the company? Jonathan Dickinson: So takeaways from -- I would like to say from Eric leaving the company, maybe that's the place to start off. Eric is leaving the company, but he will still play an important role with the company moving forward. He will be an adviser to the R&D Committee of our Board of Directors. And we have an extended research collaboration with his lab. So we basically will continue to benefit from any innovation, which Eric can bring to the table. Moving back to NK cells and the reading, we are still working on NK cells. It's not our main priority today. We're focusing on what we believe are our highest value clinical assets, IPH4502, lacutamab and monalizumab. We will be basing all future decisions on our NK cell engagers on clinical data and the relevance of that clinical data to markets, and we'll make the appropriate decisions on those assets when we have that clinical data and establish market relevance based on that data. So it's not the end of NK cells, but it's not our priority today anymore. Operator: We'll move on to our next question, and it comes from the line of Swayampakula Ramakanth from HCW. Swayampakula Ramakanth: So now that the ANKET programs are out at least as far as your development is concerned. Any commentary on where Sanofi is with the assets that they currently are developing? Jonathan Dickinson: Absolutely. So I'd just like to say that it's not the end of the story for NK cells. We're still moving forward and completing the studies with IPH6501. We have a path to explore IPH61 via investigator-initiated research and an interesting way forward. So I wouldn't say it's the end of NK cells. It's just that it's been basically lowered in our current company priorities. From a Sanofi perspective, Sanofi continues to progress the BCMA-targeted ANKET. And as I think we've communicated in the past, that's being explored in autoimmunity, in immunology as part of Sanofi's focus as a company, and we expect to have updates from Sanofi on that BCMA program in the near future. Swayampakula Ramakanth: And then regarding the Phase III start for lacutamab, should we still assume that unless you have a partner signed up ahead of the start of the study, it will still -- it will be a wait and watch until you get a partner or you have enough commitment from investors to go ahead and start that study? Jonathan Dickinson: So we are actively working with investors at the moment to basically keep options open. So we're continuing discussions with partners, but we also have some very advanced discussions with investors who are very interested in lacutamab, now that we effectively have a derisked development program to move forward into Phase III. And we also see interest based now on the increased potential commercial opportunity. This also will reinvigorate discussions with partners. And we are also expecting next steps with respect to the finalization of the protocol for the confirmatory Phase III study, which is also an important step for partners. So we continue the discussions with partners. But at this stage, we see it as very important to keep our future options open to either go down the partner route, but with improved deal terms based on the significantly larger potential market opportunity, particularly with the first accelerated approval launch in Sézary syndrome. And so yes, we're keeping the options open with both -- for both moving forward with investors and with potential partners. Swayampakula Ramakanth: So last question from me, Jonathan. This is on 4502. Based on the preclinical data that you have generated so far, what potential indications do you think 4502 will be effective? And since there are numerous Nectin-4 ADC's in the clinic right now, how differentiated are you is 4502 against those? Jonathan Dickinson: Yes. So maybe, Sonia, you can take the first part of that question, Sonia? Sonia Quaratino: Yes. Can you repeat the question, please? Swayampakula Ramakanth: Yes. Based on the preclinical data that you have generated to date, what indication do you think is where 4502 could be effective? Sonia Quaratino: Right. As I mentioned before, we focus on any indication that express Nectin-4 because we believe that we also can target dose indication with a relatively small Nectin-4 expression, but we also very much focus on the urothelial cancer patients who became refractory or resistance to PADCEV. And for these patients, there are no approved drugs. And if we have clinical -- good clinical data in this refractory relapsed patients, we really may have a very fast opportunity for an accelerated market approval in UC post-PADCEV. So we are exploring, let's say, the classic path as well as some more defined area for an accelerated -- potential accelerated approval. Jonathan Dickinson: And then in terms of differentiation, RK, I mean, I think we believe that we'll be able to show differentiation here, particularly versus PADCEV or MMAE-based ADCs, due to the payload and the different resistance and toxicity profile, which we believe we'll be able to show meaningful differences between IPH4502 and MMAE-based ADCs. Operator: Your next question comes from the line of Justin Zelin from BTIG. Justin Zelin: Maybe I'll continue the questioning on 4502. If you can just give us an update on how enrollment has been progressing here. I know you gave an update here on enrollment completion. Just was curious on how you could comment on how enrollment is going today. When we should expect the initial data, if it will be sometime in the first half of next year, how many patients' worth of data we should expect? And any expectations from a safety or efficacy standpoint from that update? Jonathan Dickinson: Sonia, do you want to take that one? Sonia Quaratino: Of course, of course. As mentioned, the enrollment with IPH45 is going extremely well. We always have, let's say, a list of patients to go in -- at a different dose level. And also with the [indiscernible] design that we have, we also have the possibility to have parallel enrollment in backfill cohorts. And so, we do not have the classic 3 plus 3 design with an extremely limited number of patients, but we can expand different to dose levels as we go along. To your question, of course, we plan to finish the enrollment in the first quarter of 2026. And of course, the data in terms of at least from the first CT scan can only occur as you can understand, 8 weeks later from the first dosing, so it takes another quarter to have the clinical efficacy from the last cohort recruited. Having said that, we are going to have probably a pool of data of 50, 60 patients by then. Operator: And there are no further phone questions at this time. I will now turn the call back over to management for any written questions. Stéphanie Cornen: Yes, we have one question on the line here from Rajan Sharma. So the first question is, does the new strategic focus means, ANKET assets will not be progressed irrespective of clinical data, given that 6501 data are expected in the near term? Jonathan Dickinson: So, I think I answered this earlier, but I'll repeat it again. So from an IPH6501 perspective, the study continues, and we expect to have data, I think, as we've communicated previously, towards the end of this year or very early next year. And we will make any decisions on the next steps for IPH6501 based on that clinical data and the clinical relevance of that data to the marketplace. Stéphanie Cornen: Okay. And so the next question, what is the financial impact of the strategic refocus and head count reduction and what proportion of current R&D expense are directed towards IPH4502 and lacutamab? Jonathan Dickinson: So the financial impact, we've not -- and we won't be communicating specific numbers on the impact of the financial reductions. We're in a legal process now, which is a French legal process to reduce the size of the organization, which gives us an obligation not to communicate on certain components, and that would fall under that legal framework that we're operating within. So we can't provide specific guidance there. In terms of R&D expenses, maybe Frederic would like to comment on the proportion. Stéphanie Cornen: So the question was, what proportion of current R&D expenses are directed towards IPH4502 and lacutamab? Frederic Lombard: Yes, we usually never communicate on the investment that we do in those 2 in the portfolio. But following up on the comment from Jonathan, we have a significant portion of our external expenditure, which are on those assets. Stéphanie Cornen: So we have another question from Oussema Denguir. So with regard to financial visibility, does estimate for the end of the third quarter of 2026, taking into account the impact of the restructuring plan? Jonathan Dickinson: The answer to that is yes. So the restructuring plan is fully embedded into the cash runway, which takes us to the end of Q3 2026. Stéphanie Cornen: And last question, concerning Phase III of lacutamab, can you provide an initial estimate of the investment requirements, if you decide to trial without a partner? Jonathan Dickinson: Again, this is something that we would not normally communicate on in terms of the cost. This is a standard Phase III study. So I think you can draw your own conclusions. It's nothing too dissimilar from similar oncology Phase III trials. Stéphanie Cornen: Thank you, Jonathan. There is no further question. Jonathan Dickinson: Okay. So thank you for everybody's time and attention and for your interest in Innate Pharma, and we'll look forward to meeting with you in person in the near future or on one of our next calls. Thank you, and goodbye. Operator: This concludes today's conference call. Thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Good morning, and welcome to General Mills' First Quarter Fiscal 2026 Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] As a reminder, this conference call is being recorded. I would now like to turn the call over to Jeff Siemon, Vice President, Investor Relations and Corporate Finance. Thank you. Please go ahead. Jeff Siemon: Thank you, Julienne, and good morning, everyone. Thanks for joining us today for this Q&A session on our first quarter fiscal '26 results. I hope everyone had time to review our press release, listen to our prepared remarks and view our presentation materials, which we made available this morning on our Investor Relations website. It's important to note that in this Q&A session, we may make forward-looking statements that are based on management's current views and assumptions. Please refer to this morning's press release for factors that could impact forward-looking statements, and for reconciliations of non-GAAP information, which may be discussed on today's call. I'm here with Jeff Harmening, our Chairman and CEO; Kofi Bruce, our CFO; and Dana McNabb, Group President of North America Retail and North America Pet. Now let me turn it over to Jeff for some opening remarks. Jeff, go ahead. Jeffrey Harmening: Yes. Thanks, and good morning, everybody. Before we start the call today for questions, I'd just like to share a few thoughts summarizing some of our key messages. And I think it's pretty evident. There's a lot of change in the world, a lot of uncertainty. I mean the same could be said of the food category. And there's been a lot of change within our business as you unpack the first quarter results and the Yoplait divestiture, which we're executing well, as well our Whitebridge acquisition, which we're also executing well. So there's a lot of change. But what I want you to hear from me is that amidst all of this we are staying laser focused and clear on our strategy, which is returning to profitable organic growth as the best way to create value for our shareholders. And importantly, we are increasingly confident that our approach is working. And I'll take you back as a reminder to Q3 of last year, when we told you we're going to make some significant investments to address price cliffs and gaps. And we said we're going to do that on Pillsbury and Totino's, and we saw really good results. And that gave us more confidence. So that in Q3 of last year, we told you that we would expand that to the cereal category, as well as soup and fruit snacks. And again, we saw a pound share growth on that in line, or ahead of, what we expected. And so coming into this year, we had a heightened degree of confidence that our approach is working. And -- at the same time, while addressing price is important, I mean, especially in this environment where consumers are looking for value, it's not sufficient to generate long-term growth. And so coming this year, we also said we're going to invest significantly in innovation and new product news, new brand campaigns and renovation across all of our top categories. And then we're going to support this with industry-leading HMM cost savings and transformational benefits. And so the other question is, how is that playing out? And the reason we're increasingly confident is playing out the way we thought that it was. So, so far, so good. We strengthened our pound share in 8 of our top 10 categories and now we're holding pound share in Pet. And we're continuing strong competitiveness in foodservices. As you probably saw, we've increased our growth and competitiveness in international at the same time. On the P&L, we expect our profit results in Q1 will be pressured significantly by our increased investment profile, but also by the impact from the yogurt divestiture and a few phasing comparisons. And we think that will continue into Q2, but importantly, it will improve in the back half of this year, certainly in Q4, but throughout the back half of the year. So I want you to know, from my perspective, just stepping back, just a little bit, we're really encouraged by the early signs of improvements we're seeing. And we have great initiatives for Q2. I'm sure we'll talk about fresh pet food. But that's not the only thing. I mean, our new product volumes are already up 25%. We have some other good new products coming in the second quarter, also backed up by really strong plans in baking and soup, and the fall and winter are key seasons for that. And we plan to improve -- continue our positive momentum in foodservice and international. And so again, with Q1 now in the rearview mirror and in line with what we expected, and increased confidence, we reaffirmed our fiscal '26 guidance. So with that, Jeff, let's open it up for Q&A. Jeff Siemon: Great. Thanks, Julienne. I think we can go ahead with the first question. Thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from Andrew Lazar from Barclays. Andrew Lazar: Jeff, maybe picking up on your comments. The ongoing debate in the food space, right, continues to be whether or not the current sort of challenging volume environment is more structural this time around than it has been in the past, or whether more of it is just a result of the significant pricing the industry was required to take combined with sort of a consumer that's under pressure? And I realize it's super early in your efforts. But as you've gotten some of the key price points in the right place and the other marketing levers can kind of start to work, as you said, you're starting to see some volume share improvement in a bunch of categories more recently. Yet I guess, if we look at NAR, right, volume did not yet improve sequentially from fiscal 4Q. So I guess what I'm wondering is, do you think recent results sort of support the thesis that while there are some external factors for the industry, maybe some of them are a little bit structural. There's still a lot more that in the industry's control and your control in terms of getting sort of volume back to bright? Jeffrey Harmening: Yes, Andrew, I think it's a really good question, a really fair question. And we believe it's largely in our control. I mean if you look at -- if you look at the last year or so, volumes in our category are about flat, which is about 50 basis points below what we've seen historically, but not too far behind. And -- and we -- there are a number of factors for that. Probably the most important, we believe, is that we saw in decades worth of inflation in a couple of years. And so consumers are still recovering that as wages have not yet caught up with all that inflation. And so we think that's the biggest driver. I mean GLP-1s has a -- we think, has had a small impact so far. And consumers seeking value and it stressed consumer may be a little bit. But again, it's a 50-point gap versus what we have seen historically. The bigger gap is actually on price/mix. And historically, we see some price and mix. But in this environment, we -- where the consumers are feeling the way they are, that's actually the more difficult piece rather than the volume piece. So volumes are pretty stable. And as we look at our year, we don't -- we need to be able to hold share in our categories to achieve the results we suggested for the year. But we don't need to gain massive amounts of share to hit the guidance that we already said and get back to flat, or a little bit of growth. And so we think it's mostly up to our control. Look, consumers their habits change over time, and we've been really good at changing with them. I'll give you an example, like I mentioned GLP-1s was a little bit of a headwind. But as a result of consumers looking for that, they want more protein. And there's a reason why Cheerios Protein is off to such a great start. Or Progresso Pitmaster, which is high-end protein is off to a really good start. We introduced Nature Valley creamy protein, and we like what we've seen with that so far. Or that our granola business is doing well. And so even though you can see something in a structure -- you can -- may say, is that a structural headwind, there are companies who are focused on the consumer, we are right now have means to seek opportunities in that, and that's what we're doing. Operator: Our next question comes from Robert Moskow from TD Cowen. Robert Moskow: So a couple of questions. One is, I just want to make sure I understand the path back to volume growth. Are you still expecting that to happen by fourth quarter of this year? And I'm trying to reconcile. So if your category volume is flat, but you're holding or gaining share in 8 out of 10 categories, why is your volume reported down negative one? It would seem just optically that you would be a little bit above category volume growth, not a little bit below? That's my question. Jeffrey Harmening: Yes. So let me -- let me have Dana McNabb take that math question from you, which is probably an important one. Dana McNabb: All right. Well, Rob, thanks for the question. It is true what you're saying in terms of our volume. But if you look at our top 10 categories, the volume improved by about 1 point in Q1 versus Q4. The total didn't, and that is because flower and desserts were down, and they significantly over-indexed on pounds, not on dollars. What's important, I think, is that where we're putting the price investments, we're encouraged in almost every case that we're getting the volume response we expected. And this is particularly on categories in Q1 like refrigerated dough, on fruit snacks, on salty snacks. And I'd also call out our snack bars. Even though we're comping in a period where our competitor lost distribution, the elasticities we've seen on the investments are at, or ahead, of model. So we, again, are feeling very confident that these investments are working. Now there's a few places where we still have work to do. Our Totino's business, volume was down a little bit in Q1, but we are in the middle of a price pack architecture change right now, where we're moving from a bag to a box. And so we need a little time to sort through that. And then, of course, our Cereal business, we did see an improvement, second consecutive quarter of pound share growth. Really good momentum behind Cheerios protein, our granola business up double digits. Our Cinnamon Toast Crunch business, when you get remarkability right, and have great advertising and great product news, it works. But the pounds in that category were down. Our performance was still down, and we have a little more work to do. But again, what we're encouraged is that in our top 10 categories, pounds have improved. And we believe our plans get better each quarter through the year. Jeff Siemon: Maybe, Rob, I'd just add one more point. If you get beyond North America Retail, we did see a shipment timing headwind in Pets to the tune of about 4 points. That's worth a little bit -- almost a full point to the company, about a little bit more than 0.5 point to the company. So that also weighed on total company pounds in the quarter. Operator: Our next question comes from Leah Jordan from Goldman Sachs. Leah Jordan: Just if you could provide more detail on your trends in dog food. I guess what can you attribute the slowdown in wilderness to? And how are you thinking about your ability to drive an improvement there? And then I was just also curious, on trends on pet treats, just excluding Whitebridge acquisition there, just given the discretionary nature? Dana McNabb: Yes. So if I think about -- thanks for the question, our BLUE Pet business, our core pet business, our results in Q1 were generally in line with where we were last year. We held our pound share in Q1. Our dollar share is down just a little bit, about 15 basis points. In terms of what is working, we're really encouraged by our BLUE Life Protection Formula business. This is our biggest business. It grew dollars and pounds. We have the value right. We have really good comparative advertising and strong in-store execution. Our cat feeding business is actually doing really well. So BLUE Tasteful, mid-single-digit growth. Again, we have a really good taste preference claim, and the kibble and gravy new product. That's working well for us. And then our Tiki Cat retail sales, they were up double digits. We've got good nutrition, a science formula that's launched on across different cat life stages, really good omnichannel excellence. So these big businesses are working really well for us. And then our Treats business, that has been a challenge, that inflected to some positive volume growth in Q1. So there are some things that we're really encouraged are working well on our BLUE business. The two areas that you rightly referenced that we need to see improvement on our Wilderness business. In this business, we have to improve our total product proposition. So we're coming with protein news and new products, comparative advertising, stronger in-store execution, we have to get better there, and we believe our plans are much stronger this year, but again, more work to do. And then our pet specialty channel continued to be a challenge. And this year, we're bringing Edgard & Cooper. So that's the super premium business that we had in Europe. We're launching an exclusive partnership with PetSmart, and that's already in market in Q1, and our turns are in line, or a little bit ahead of expectations. So there's a lot that we like about our pet business that's working. And two areas that we know we need to get better, and we're encouraged by the plans that we have in place. Leah Jordan: That's very helpful. And then I just wanted to step back and I have a higher-level question. There just seems to be a bigger debate around the industry scale versus complexity, and what's the right balance? I mean -- and you guys, you sound confident in the plan that you're putting forward today, but you've been battling a number of fronts over the last few quarters. So just maybe how do you think about what's the right balance? And as you go through driving better remarkability across your portfolio, what have been advantages, or disadvantages, with your portfolio mix today? Jeffrey Harmening: Yes, Thank you. The -- well, I'm going to turn the question a little on its side. So which is to say the most important thing is to focus on the consumers, and what they're looking for, and what they want, and then delivering that to them. And whether that's through better advertising, or product news, or new products, or whatever the case may be. That is the most important thing. Whether you're in one category or 15, that's the most important thing to do. Scale has some advantages for us. It's allowed us to invest in our capabilities like digital technology, digitizing our supply chain and SRM, and doing bundling consumer offerings across categories of stores, especially in the fall and back-to-school are really important for us. So we do see some scale advantages from that. Especially working across categories. When we kind of understand the consumer, I think more deeply than many others can, who are only in one category because we see the consumer from many different angles. Having said that, we've never been a believer in scale just for the sake of scale. And I don't think that just because you have scale it automatically accrues benefits. You have to be able to have to use the scale that you have to advantage and to make sure you're -- through all of the complexity that you have that you're staying focused on what the consumer wants in that particular occasion and that particular demand space, if you will. Operator: Our next question comes from David Palmer from Evercore ISI. David Palmer: Thanks for the great commentary in the prepared remarks. It looks like you continue to expect very strong growth from innovation and contribution to growth from innovation, but it also looks like there's a little bit more of an elongated timetable of the price promotion investments stretching into the second half of fiscal '26, perhaps more than you might have thought a few months ago. Perhaps where are the biggest changes in your reality when it comes to certain categories where the price promotions or investments are sticking around a little longer? And perhaps what are the categories where you're, perhaps, seeing what you would hope to see where you can, perhaps, get a little bit more balanced with price versus volume? And I have a quick follow-up. Dana McNabb: Thank you for the question. I think I'll start first with the price investment. And I think it's important to understand that initially, as Jeff said in his opening remarks, last year when we knew we had to improve value for the consumer, we had to move fast. And so the way we did that was we adjusted depth and frequency of promotion. And we are encouraged by the positive response that we saw. And as we shifted to this fiscal year, our focus has been on adjusting our base shelf price. Trying to get below key cliffs, or to make sure that we have a gap that's manageable to the competition. We need to do this across 2/3 of our portfolio, and we got the majority of that done in Q1, and again, results are ahead of what we expected. And we saw really good results on bars, on fruit snack, on salty snacks. We will complete the remainder of the base price adjustments in Q2, and that's going to make sure that we have the right market leading execution on our baking and on our soup season. And all of this gives us a guidance that we're on the right track. But as you pointed out, when you started the question, price is just one element of remarkability. Once we get the price rate, we're really focused on elevating our work on new products. We're moving from about 3.5% of net sales on new products to 5%. We feel really encouraged about the performance that we're seeing on things like Cheerios Protein, our Mott's bars. We have a lot of really good new products coming through the remainder of the year. And this just gives us confidence that this focus on remarkability and getting the total proposition right is the right thing to do. David Palmer: Great. And then just a follow-up on pet. You mentioned the 5,000 coolers going into initially some -- a big competitor out there, as well over 30,000. What -- how does that work where you get past this first step? I mean is it in the plans that this will continue to ramp? Or are you digesting this first sleeve of coolers, seeing how it goes, and will modulate the growth from there? And I'll pass it on. Dana McNabb: Well, we are excited to be moving from the planning phase of the fresh launch to the execution phase. And the plant production has started up really well. Our initial products are looking really strong. And as you mentioned, we're in the middle of installing coolers as we speak. So we'll have 1,000 coolers in place by the end of this month. 5,000 coolers by the end of our fiscal Q2. And our plan is to ramp up that distribution into the next calendar year in 2026. So again, so far, everything is going really well. We are encouraged by what we're feeling with cooler distribution. And I should remind you that we have over 50 years experience in the refrigerated channel. When you think about our Pillsbury business and our yogurt business, and so we feel like we have a very strong product and a measured plan for getting coolers that will increase. And again, we're feeling very good about this launch right now. Operator: Our next question comes from Matt Smith from Stifel. Matthew Smith: Kofi and Jeff. Kofi, I wanted to talk about the margin performance in the quarter, it was above your expectations. Can you provide a little more detail on the gross margin composition? I believe you called out the international timing benefit was about 3 points of that segment's net sales, or is that like 50 basis points to the overall company? And then how we should think about the phasing of inflation investment through the year from here? Kofi Bruce: Sure. Sure. I appreciate the question, Matt. So I think as you rightly pointed out, we did flag that our profit performance in the quarter was a little bit better than expected on operating profit and EPS. Some of that coming through gross margin. The first factor, probably in a slightly heavier measure, was that our inflation phasing was a little bit lighter than we expected in the quarter. Probably closer to 2%, a little bit below the annual run rate of 3% that's sitting in our annual guidance. So that factor first, followed by the trade expense timing benefit in international, which would put it at about $20 million on the top and the bottom line. We expect both of these to kind of unwind largely in Q2. So given that these are timing-related items, as we see them unwind in Q2, I'd expect our operating profit to be down more in Q2 than in Q1. And I expect that, that doesn't change our outlook for the sort of first half aggregate profit looking roughly in line with Q4 of fiscal '25. We do think, kind of just as we look at the Q2 profit decline, it's important to think the supply chain phasing costs on inflation. I'd expect Q2 to be a little bit higher, probably maybe even above the annual run rate as we step into some of the inflationary pressure plus some inflation, or some inventory absorption headwinds. It's important to note we won't have any contributions from yogurt in the quarter as well. This quarter, we had 1 month of sales and profit in our results from the recently divested U.S. yogurt business. We'll start to see normalization of our comp and incentive comp benefits in Q2. And obviously, the international trade expense timing benefits will unwind. So there is a bit of a transitory effect here, both on margin and profit growth as you think about how to digest this. Matthew Smith: And as a follow-up, you called out the trade expense phasing in North America retail was about a point of drag in the first quarter. Is that similar as we get into the second quarter, and then normalize as we get into the second half? Kofi Bruce: Yes. You have it largely right. I would expect it to be a big drag in Q1 -- in Q2 as we're comping last year where we had Q1 and Q2 was effectively no trade expense. So it was a benefit relative to the other quarters in last year. And modest headwind in Q3 last year, and a huge headwind in Q4. So we expect those comps to turn favorable as we step into Q3, modestly and then a pretty significant tailwind in Q4. Operator: Our next question comes from Michael Lavery from Piper Sandler. Michael Lavery: Can you touch on what categories or brands drove the household penetration gains? And maybe how broad that was? And how much you feel like was driven maybe by pricing adjustments versus innovation or other factors? Dana McNabb: Thanks for the question. As you stated, we did see our household penetration grow overall for NAR the first time since fiscal '22, really encouraged by that result. In terms of where we saw penetration improvement, we saw it on bars, on fruit snacks, on salty snacks, on our Cereal business. And we do believe that getting our price value, and again, this is about getting below key clicks on the shelf, making sure we have manageable gaps relative to the competition that was a driver of that penetration improvement. But also it's not a coincidence that where we had a great remarkability approach, where we had good advertising, really good new product innovation, or product quality, price pack architecture, that is where we saw the best results. We called out in the presentation, Cinnamon Toast Crunch is a really good example. Really good product news, great advertising. We have the price right on that business, and we gained pad dollar share and penetration. So again, we still have more work to do, but we believe that we are on the right track with these investments, and we're confident in what we're seeing so far. Michael Lavery: Okay. That's helpful. And I just wanted to follow up on some of the comments in the prepared remarks around demand planning. I think it can be maybe an underappreciated challenge. But it sounds like you've got improvement there. Can you maybe elaborate on kind of how that worked and what some of the benefits are? And it's maybe a little surprising the human touch seems unhelpful. Can you just kind of bring that to life a little bit? Jeffrey Harmening: So let me take that one a little bit, Michael. The -- I would start by saying, I mean, we have a phenomenal supply chain as you well know. I mean during COVID we showed that, we continue to show it. We showed it in the Q1 this year, whether it's productivity, or service, or low cost. I mean our supply chain is fantastic, and we've got a great marketing team, too. And over time, our forecasting has been pretty good. It's just taken us a lot to get to an accurate forecast. And so what you see us doing now is that we're having -- we were using AI and leveraging technology to get to good forecasting much more efficiently. And the importance of that then is it frees up our marketing team to do better demand generation. And I think that's why you're seeing some of these better ideas that we're talking about right now. Because our marketers are having more time doing marketing than forecasting. And then our supply chain people, they're not double checking numbers that people give and spending all their times and meetings looking at forecast. They're just trying to figure out, okay, making the right stuff, at the right time, in the right place. And you see our waste elimination improve. And so really what we wanted to highlight that it seems small, but it's actually quite large, and it's a great way for technology to enable a little bit better accuracy, but a lot more efficiency. And that frees up the talented people we have. We have a really talented team, really talented people to do what they do best. And that's what we wanted to highlight in this particular case. Operator: Our next question comes from Alexia Howard from Bernstein. Alexia Howard: Can I ask about your efforts on reformulation? You're obviously ahead of the game on the elimination of the artificial dyes, getting rid of those by next summer. But there are other state-level legislations that have been approved, for example, in Texas, I think there's something that's already been ratified by the governor. It's gone through, that's about 44 additive. So it's a broader list. First of all, I guess, as you've gone through your remarkable efforts with some of these brands, are the ingredient list and additives coming up as concerns for some group of consumers? And is that something that you're working through the portfolio to actively drive out, not just the dyes, but maybe other additives that people are concerned about? Or are you going to wait until the regulations and the legislation settles, which could be a year or 2 down the line, and then you'll do it once everything is very, very clear? Just trying to get a sense for how aggressively you're going after that, or whether it's really not something beyond the artificial dyes that you're focused on at the moment? Jeffrey Harmening: Yes, Alexia, I would start by saying we're always -- we always do our best when we follow what the consumers are looking for. And that's kind of our North Star and why we have this remarkability framework. And as you know, 10 years ago, we took some certified colors out of tricks and that didn't work so well here in the U.S. By the way, it worked really well in Canada. And Canadian's moms loved it. It didn't work as well here. And that's because consumers in the U.S. weren't quite ready for it yet. 10 years later, the reason why we made the commitments we have is that consumers are more ready for this. An increasing number of consumers don't want to certify colors in some of their food. And so that's why we look to remove those. And we have better technology now than we did 10 years ago. And we can get customers what they want. Whether it's the colors they want, or the shapes they want it, the texture, or what have you. And so that's why we're undertaking our efforts. When it comes to the regulatory environment, I'll start with a couple of things. One is that, I mean, we've been around for 160 years, and now getting global federal and state regulation for more than a century. And so I have high confidence we can do that now. When it comes to things like colors, I mean, 98% of our K-12 school offerings don't have certified colors now, and 85% of our retail doesn't. So we're talking about a relatively small sample. What I will say without commenting on any particular state is that there are a lot of state regulations being brought up now. And I think there's a challenge in that. And it's a challenge really for consumers because there's a cost associated with trying to do something state by state, rather than a federal level. And ultimately, consumers will pay the cost for that. As well as confusion, how can something be good in one state and not good in another state? And so the -- we've always been a believer working at a federal level, working with health and human services as we have been, working with the FDA and the USDA to work on federal legislation and regulation that really makes sense for consumers. And we believe that's the best approach that we have right now. And so we're confident we can navigate this environment. We're making really good changes, really good progress. And -- but I think there's a challenge for the whole industry with a state-by-state approach. And it's certainly not just our challenge. And ultimately, I think it's better if we can get to something that's consistent on a federal level. Alexia Howard: Great. As a quick follow-up, you mentioned that the pace of innovation is stepping up, I think, 25%, I believe that was in North America Retail. Are you able to say what percentage of sales are now coming from new products introduced over the last year, or over the last 3 years? Where are you at in absolute terms on that front? Jeffrey Harmening: Yes, I'm glad you asked. Really, I'm really proud of the way our entire team is innovating. And we're at about -- we're roughly 5% of new products coming from new product innovation where we were at 3.5% a year ago. But I think there are a couple of important things that lie beyond that, which I want you to know. First, it's not that we're introducing more things. Its that really that what we're introducing, we think, has our bigger and better ideas with more staying power, which is not only good for this year, but in years to come. And that's true in North America retail. When you look at Cheerios Protein, for example, some of the granolas that we are bringing to market. Some of the Mott's fruit snacks that we're bringing to market, really good new product innovation. It's true in our pet food business, bringing fresh pet food to the market and investing behind that. It's true in international, where I mean, look, we grew Haagen-Dazs retail double digits in China in the first quarter. And the reason we did that was because we introduced stick bars. And so now we're taking that all over China, and it's really working well. And in foodservice. We have -- we -- again, we picked up share in foodservice have continued great momentum there behind some biscuit innovation. And so what I'm pleased with is not just one part of the company that's innovating better. We have all of the segments innovating better and by better, I mean I think bigger more on consumer trend ideas, and we're supporting those with investment. And so that's what's exciting to me. Operator: Our next question comes from Megan Clapps from Morgan Stanley. Megan Christine Alexander: I have a quick follow-up and then another question for Kofi, if that's okay. So the first is just following up on some of the earlier line of questioning. Jeff, I think you mentioned you don't need massive share gains to hit the guide. But based on some of the things I think Dana mentioned later, it sounds to me like maybe some category trends are softer than you expected. So could you just clarify how category performance has evolved thus far year-to-date relative to your initial expectations? And whether we need to see improvement in areas like cereal, for instance, to deliver on the guide? And just related as well, since you brought it up, Jeff, can you maybe just expand a little bit on the GLP-1 comment in terms of what you're seeing in the data that you track? Jeffrey Harmening: Okay. I'm going to try to get to all your questions. You have a lot of good ones.If I miss one, that's because I just forgot. But I would say that the year so far has played out as we thought it would and the consumer environment is what we thought it would be. In terms of how our progress looks in Nielsen, our top 10 -- our top 10 categories in North America retail are about a point better than what we expected. And so -- it's when you get beyond that like Flower and Betty Crocker desserts and things like that, where you see a little bit softer. And look for those key baking season starts in September. So we'll see when the weather gets colder. But the -- but our top 10 are performing at or a little bit better, actually a little bit better than what we anticipated. So I would say broadly, consumer sentiment is what we anticipated. The growth in our categories is about what we anticipated. And certainly, our performance within those categories, growing share in our and foodservice and international are holding. That is kind of what we anticipated. So I would say so far so good as kind of as we expected. With the GLP-1s, there's been some impact on our categories but not significant yet. I would expect GLP-1 usage will continue to grow. Everything I read says that it will continue to grow. And -- and with that comes to reduced calories, clearly for those who are using GLP-1s. But also there's opportunity because we know that people taking those medications. We know a couple of things. One is that they are looking for more protein because people tend to lose muscle mass when they they're reducing their calories and they need more macro nutrients, things like fiber. And things like breakfast cereal are high-end. That's why Cheerios Protein, I think, is doing so well. It's good in protein. It's high-end fiber. By the way oats is also high in fiber. And so even though a macro trend that GLP-1 usage that we think will continue, and we'll put some macro pressure on some categories over time. There's also a lot of opportunity in that. And I want you to make sure that you hear that for us as well. And -- and one of the things we're introducing a lot of new products that we think will meet this demand. So we feel good about that. Megan Christine Alexander: Great. That's super helpful. And then just a follow-up for Kofi as we think about pet phasing into the second quarter just because there seems to be a lot of puts and takes. Can you just help us understand a little bit what these -- how to frame these puts and takes? Just to keep in mind, there was lumpiness in 2Q last year. Wildernesses may be a bit softer. You also have the fresh pet launch. I also think maybe the shipment headwind was a bit bigger in the first quarter than you had talked about last quarter. So just with all those things in mind, if you could just help us think about how to frame phasing in 2Q, that would be helpful. Kofi Bruce: Sure. I think it's fair to say we expected the shipment timing issue at Q4. It might be modestly larger than we expected. We're not expecting a change to the overall outlook for the year, and I'm not going to get in the business of making quarterly predictions on pet just because I've failed at that multiple times. There is some volatility quarter-to-quarter in that business just inherently in shipment timing. I think broadly, you have the contours right. We will start to see a modest contribution in revenue as we ramp up behind shipments on fresh pet. I think we're expecting some modest improvement as we step into Q2 and then into the back half of the year. Operator: Our last question will come from Peter Galbo from Bank of America. Peter Galbo: Kofi, maybe just one clarification. I think you said based on the puts and takes on Q2 operating profit in the first half of this year would be down kind of similar to Q4. I think that lands Q2 operating profit down like 25-ish percent, but I just wanted to make sure that my math on that was correct? Kofi Bruce: Yes. I think your math largely works. Peter Galbo: Okay. Super. And Jeff, maybe just a broader question, and this probably goes back to Andrew's first question. Dana spent a lot of time talking about getting below certain price cliffs, driving value. And I guess what we haven't really talked about is your competition, not so much on the shelf at retail, but the away-from-home channel is getting a lot sharper in terms of price points, in terms of trying to drive value in their messaging and even in the pricing that they're charging. Whether it's $5 boxes, $8 boxes. Just -- is the industry, or is the retail packaged food industry, adapting fast enough in your mind to be able to compete effectively against away from home that, again, seems to be much more focused on driving a value price point? And whether you've noticed just any share shift there that's become more pronounced as we've gotten just a plethora of kind of these offerings? Jeffrey Harmening: Yes. The -- as far as speaking for the -- I probably won't speak for the whole packaged food industry, but I would like us to go faster rather than slower. But I would say that the -- if I look at away-from-home eating, just the traffic has been pretty -- has been quite stable and despite all the efforts of quick-serve restaurants and all. The traffic has been stable over time. And if you look at it, what the trends that we see here that low- and middle-income consumers are -- traffic is declining, in what we call the commercial channel or restaurants, and high-income consumers, call it, $200,000 or more a year is growing. And so it nets out to flat. And the challenge that, that particular portion of the business has with the value meals is that the inflation is growing faster than food at home. And quite a bit faster than food at home, driven by labor. And so even though you may see a lot of advertising about value deals and so forth, just note the traffic in commercial remains very flat. There is growth in the noncommercial channel, which is where General Mills over indexes in its food service business. And so we're very well positioned to capture the growth there. In the noncommercial, I mean, things like K-12 schools, and hospitality, and business, and industry where people are going back to work. And those channels are growing about 2% or so, and we're gaining share. And so any growth you would see would really be in that place, and we're very well positioned through our foodservice business to take advantage of that growth. And we are. And that's one of the reasons why you see our food service business continue to perform well. Jeff Siemon: Okay, Julienne, I think we'll have to wrap it up there. Thanks, everyone, for the good questions and the good engagement. And the IR team is available all day for follow-ups. We look forward to talking to you next quarter. Thanks. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, this concludes today's conference call. Thank you for your participation. You may now disconnect.
Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, thank you for standing by. I'm Costantino, your Chorus Call operator. Welcome, and thank you for joining the Aegean Airlines conference call to present and discuss the first half 2025 financial results. [Operator Instructions] The conference is being recorded. At this time, I would like to turn the conference over to Mr. Eftichios Vassilakis, Chairman of the Board of Directors. Mr. Vassilakis, you may now proceed. Eftichios Vassilakis: Yes. Hello. Good afternoon, everybody, and welcome to our results presentation for the first 6 months of 2025. Just to remind that along with me, I have Mr. Kouveliotis, our Deputy CEO and CFO; Stella Dimaraki, our Treasurer and Investor Relations Director; and also Anthi Katelani, our Investor Relations Manager. So all 4 of us are here for you. Happy to answer any questions after my brief remarks. 2025, first half is, again, a quarter and 2 quarters where we had, I would say, modest growth driven by our particular restrictions in terms of how many of our neo aircraft are actually flying versus the ones grounded for GTF. And within the confines of those restrictions, the additional challenge of around 2 months in the second quarter where our important nearby markets, Israel, Lebanon, Israel, in particular, Lebanon and Jordan, we were not able to fly to due to the situation there, what's going on between Israel and Iran and the effect it had to the whole area and our inability to fly for around about 2, 2.5 months, which ended on the second week of July, if memory serves. So within the restrictions that we had, I think we've achieved a very strong set of results. We've managed to provide a revenue increase of 5%, which is 1% higher than the ASK, the ASK growth we put into the market, which was 4%, which meant that within an increasingly competitive environment, we have managed to actually increase our RASK marginally by 1%. This was done in both quarters in terms of growth, as you have already seen that the first quarter was significantly stronger in terms of ASK development versus the second. That is part of 2 things, one planned and one unplanned, first of all, we have indicated also in previous conversations and discussions with you that we see a gradual extension of the season. We also see an increasing pattern of Greeks traveling more. So within those 2 effects, we see ourselves operating growing more in what used to be referred to as the lowest months, so Q1 and Q4 relative to Q2 and Q3. That is also related to restrictions in ATC and airport capacities around our country. But that's the first part. The second part is, of course, what I referred to earlier, the fact that not being able to fly to Israel where at the peak of the season, we have around about 6 flights to 7 flights even a day from different places plus Jordan and Lebanon, that basically make the total amount of flights lost to be 9 for a period of 2, 2.5 months. This cost us around about 100,000 passengers on these routes. And on top of that, we lost around about 35,000 passengers on connecting routes. And in a way, the [ ConneX ] losses are more costly in the sense that those seats are not typically with the cancellation of flights close to departure, you're not able to redirect those lost [ ConneX ] seats route to other sources. So within the confines of that, achieving a revenue increase of 5% and achieving a significant increase in our bottom line and a modest increase in our EBITDA are, I think, significant positives as well as, of course, continuing to build -- to have extremely strong cash flows where despite a payout of dividends of circa EUR 70 million and an increase to our PDPs paid into Airbus by another EUR 40 million. So a total of EUR 110 million that have been spent this way. We still had an increase of circa EUR 60 million -- EUR 70 million, I'm sorry, in our available cash to EUR 840 million. And as we highlighted also on the report on the -- sorry, on the release, this is before, of course, the issuance of our early July bond of EUR 250 million that has further added in the middle -- beginning of July to our cash availability. It's fair to say, of course, that the development of -- the development in the same way that we lost passengers and capacity, both capacity and passengers and profitability in the second quarter due to the geopolitical problem. At the same token, we did have an advantage from the development of the euro and the development also of the fuel price. So there are effects both ways, positive and negative, which we can discuss in detail, if you like. But overall, we're happy what was done within the context of the restrictions that I previously announced or described. Within the difficulties that we're having with the fleet, the positive element is that gradually, we are flying more and more of the 321neo derivative. In particular, as you know, the big delta in seat capacity and in efficiency per seat comes from increasing the mix of those aircraft of the fleet due to the fact that they have a 220-seat capacity relative to 180 to the 320neo and 174 on the 320ceo. The important thing for the company is that going forward, all the remaining Airbus deliveries that we are to take are indeed of the 321neo type. So that is going to be building our efficiency going forward. And it's also important to understand that we are now in September of 2025, entering, I would say, the period for the next 12 to 14 months of maximum number of aircraft that will be on the ground awaiting these checks. Why? Because the aircraft that we have received up until the first quarter of 2024 were the ones affected with the initial defective or potentially defective part. As a result, those 28 aircraft that were accepted until April 2024 when they reach between 20 and 2,500 hours cycles they need to go for their preventive checks. And that maturity level is coming at its peak from what was basically last year 8 and what became 10 at the peak of this summer. Right now, we're at 11 to 12, and we will reach 14 -- between 12 and 14 for the next 12 to 14 months. So we're at the maximum part of the restriction in terms of how many aircraft will be on the ground. On the other hand, as we accept more aircraft gradually, we expect to have, of course, a higher number of flying neos and indeed a higher number of flying neo 321s, which will be contributing to our efficiency and to our competitiveness. I also need to say that I think there are adjustments that we've made in our network this year that have worked well and have allowed us to offset the effects of additional competition in several different markets and the consistent growth of the market to Greece in excess of the rate that Europe's overall shortfall is growing. So adjustments in the network have helped us retain profitability. And at the same time, I think many -- it's encouraging to continue to see that our business class product continues to have increasing penetration, still not at the level that one would like, but certainly much higher than in previous years and much, much higher than pre-COVID. So we've now -- I think this is an important aspect, especially as we're going towards the direction of introducing longer distance routes with the XLRs and the LRs that are coming forward. So we believe that this will also further help in this dimension and will have a reflection on what we should refer to as a traditional network as well. And another issue I would like to refer to is that certainly, there is no shortage of disruptions from air traffic control all over Europe, but also particularly in our country. We are significantly active in a hopefully constructive and consistent way over the last 4 or 5 years at least with our local authorities. And we hope that in the next months and years, the amounts that have been paid in by all airlines, including Aegean will finally be used in an effective way in our local market in order for the problem to be gradually mitigated because it is becoming significant for the quality of service that visitors to Greece overall experience. So we consider that a very important issue, which needs to be addressed, and we have highlighted that perhaps not in an equally aggressive way as others, but we have highlighted that consistently over the last 4 or 5 years. And we have made, I believe, specific suggestions on how parts of these issues could be mitigated. Finally, before we take questions, a word about our investment in Volotea. It's now been exactly a year since we started to invest in that company. I have reiterated that in the annual results, I said we got what we expected in terms of results from Volotea for 2024. I'm happy to report that it seems to be going positively and indeed in a more positive way for 2025. So we are significantly positive about the prospects of the company going forward. It is not yet beyond all possible risks and burdens because it was burdened during COVID by significant losses and significant debt. However, things seem to be evolving in a positive way. And we think that in the next 6 to 8 months, we will be called to make some decisions together with other shareholders about some additional injections of capital in a more significant way. And depending on what exactly the outcome of these conversations and the performance in the company in the meantime, we will also take our decisions about how to further proceed there. But overall, I think we're happy with the results. And we also think that it's possible in the future regardless of the amount of equity that we will now in the company to develop a somewhat complementary service to the regions of Greece. The reason it hasn't been done actually already is mostly because Volotea, much more than Aegean is restricted by the unavailability of aircraft in the market. We are restricted by our GTF Pratt & Whitney cycle. Therefore, we are both relatively conservative with our capacity development over the years. So we will need some more time to develop these particular commercial synergies. But overall, we're happy with the cooperation. So in a nutshell, also one more thing to say, expect our ASK development in the market to be somewhat higher, around about 3% in ASKs in Q3 and significantly higher than that between 9% and 10% of ASKs in Q4. I think it's fair to say that there is, again, a mix of factors going forward affecting our expectations. Demand is strong. Competition is also strong. There are fare pressures in different markets, not everywhere. Some markets are developing positively. I think in a great extent, what we have come to expect is an annual improvement year-on-year, particularly on the September to December period as opposed to the June to August period because, frankly, people are gradually changing their pattern of travel. And even though families will always need to travel for leisure at peak, the rest of customers seem to be modifying their behavior more. So we begin to see a spill of potentially positive results also in the latter part of the year. So I'll stop here and listen to your questions and hopefully, we'll give you a better idea of where we're at. Thank you. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The first question comes from the line of Lobbenberg Andrew with Barclays. Andrew Lobbenberg: Thank you so much for the clarity on capacity for the rest of this year. What's the right way to think about what we get in '26 given the more grounding but more deliberate? And then another question, could you perhaps give us more color on which markets are seeing the tougher competition and which are less? And you also spoke of doing some network adjustments that were positive. Can you remind us what those adjustments were? Eftichios Vassilakis: Well, thank you for the question. Let me first say that I'm not going to ask specific network -- I'm not going to respond to specific network questions because if I respond on where our RASK is improving and where it's deteriorating, it's like guiding other people to go after that. It's a mixed bag, and we are very dynamic about it. I think all airlines have become significantly more dynamic about network adjustments. There are opportunities, and we tend to make, I would say, 2% to 3% -- 1% to 3% ASK differential shifts in our overall market within a 3-month cycle. And whether that's up or down and where exactly it goes is something that we look at diligently and on a continuous basis. And I think the process itself is what brings the improvement. It's not specific trends in specific markets. Again, if you are to look at most incoming markets, most international markets in Greece, you will find between a 4% and a 7% capacity growth in all of them. So you can just not look at capacity and competition and adjust in advance. Now in terms of the aircraft there, I can be much more specific. Today, we have taken delivery of 36 neos, out of which this summer, 10 were idled. So we had 26 aircraft flying. Last summer, we had, if memory serves, 8 to 9 groundings with a total of 33 deliveries. So there were actually only 33 minus 820 books, no it's wrong. It's 30 -- no, 30 minus 8. There were 22 aircraft flying. So there were 4 more neos flying this year than last year. And next summer in peak, we expect to have 45 minus 12, that makes it 33 aircraft flying. So basically, you see an evolution where 8 grounded becomes 10 grounded this year and 12 grounded next year at peak. But at the same time, you see 22 aircraft flying in '24 at peak, new aircraft, of course, 26 this year and 33 next year. And what is particularly relevant even more than the increase in this number is that this year, we had 12 A321neos flying. Next summer, we'll have between 18 and 90 A321neos flying. So 50% more of the larger derivatives at work, which is what we expect more than anything else to support our results. So I hope at least on that part, I have been specific enough for you. Andrew Lobbenberg: That's helpful. Can I just come back on the network, and I appreciate the commercial sensitivities. But in that second quarter, we saw more growth on the domestic than on the international, which versus recent trends. So we meant -- I mean, what drove that? Was that really influenced by the Middle East? Or was that influenced by commercial decisions by... Eftichios Vassilakis: I would say both. I mean, certainly, the reason that you didn't have growth on the international network was the Middle East. We were planning to have small growth in the second quarter and a little bit more on the third and more on the fourth. Actually, the peak -- the maximum growth quarters for international were Q1 and Q4 by design. The lowest was going to be Q2 and in the middle was going to be Q3. Why? Because last year in Q3, we were not flying to Israel again and Lebanon and Beirut on and off. So one of the things that confuses the comparisons is that if you have markets that you're coming in and out, not by choice, but rather by what's going on in geopolitics, that makes things more confusing. But no, if we look at the year overall, we were not planning to have more of an increase in domestic than international. We were planning for an equivalent level of capacity increase of both. It turned out to be a little bit different on Q2 due to what happened. Now what I can say about the network is that within the international network. Certainly, we have emphasized a little bit more shorter destinations. So we do have, even if you're looking at the pure international network, a little bit of a drop in the average distance that we cover when we fly internationally. So that's as specific as I can be in the view. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Caithaml Jakub with Wood & Co. Jakub Caithaml: Three questions also from my side. On pricing, I understand that you're pricing slightly more softly in the summer than last year. Any comments on the extent of the softness? And also, could you tell us how the pricing was evolving during the individual months of the third quarter? And maybe related to that, are you now and to what extent flying back to Israel? Eftichios Vassilakis: Okay. Again, I'll start from the end because it's easier. Yes, we're flying back to Israel, and we're flying to Lebanon, and we're flying to Oman and Jordan. And we hope to increase our flying in the Middle East with some new destinations also in North Africa in the next 6 months. It is very important for us because we also sell connectivity through Athens to ensure that near destinations with a distance between 1.5 and 2.5 hours flying in particular, to our South and to our East are well connected and that Athens and the GN or GM and Athens are considered a valid route to the West, to the north, to the Balkans, at least even before we discuss flying further away like we plan to next year. So we are back and we are eager to expand our presence in different markets around there. But of course, I recognize that the stability of the region is not exactly stellar. And as we try to develop our network, we will have some instability depending on how conditions between the nations evolve. By the same token, I'm sure you understand that these markets are largely underserved. And therefore, when things are normal, you can expect a decent return, especially if you are positioned somewhere like Athens, which is convenient for these people either to come and visit for Greece and spend the holiday or business here or indeed just transit through Athens to another destination in Europe. So yes, these markets are important, and we'll continue to try to develop there, and we will accept that this might mean that sometimes we might have to stop for periods of time. And we, of course, are very careful to make sure we fly when other Western carriers fly and when our people are told that the situation is secure enough for us to fly. We don't take risks of that kind knowingly. And of course, #1 for everybody else is safe operation. For all of us, it's a safe operation. In terms of month-by-month evolution of -- I will say that international fares are somewhat lower, not in an alarming way. We are, at the same time, somewhat better 1 or 2 or 3 passengers more on average on people per aircraft. So that on passengers per aircraft, either because we're growing the aircraft or because we're getting small increases of load factors. So there is some measure of offset. And overall, the effect is there, but not super significant. So we'll have to wait a few more months to see how this evolves. At the rate that we are going now, we feel that it is likely to expect an improvement in our overall results for the year. But of course, one can never take this to the bank unless the whole year or most of the year is behind us. So that's the most I can give you in this direction. Jakub Caithaml: A quick follow-up on the Middle East. In terms of scale of the return? I mean, by September, I mean, are you back to where you would have been in your original expectations fully? Eftichios Vassilakis: Yes. In terms of capacity deployed, yes. Jakub Caithaml: Understood. Then the second question also on growth and pricing in the fourth quarter, where you are guiding for brisk growth of 9%, 10%. What kind of yield or RASK implications do you think this will have? And can you comment on the competition schedules, how they are looking for the shoulder season in the winter? Eftichios Vassilakis: The competition is also more or less applying higher increases in the winter than in the summer in terms of capacity. This is a pattern that we have seen for the last 3 years. So their capacity is higher also in winter, more so than in summer. And I don't have yet visibility on what the overall effect on RASK can be. But I would expect in terms of international fares, which is not necessarily RASK, the things to be a little bit softer again following the trend of the summer, I would consider that more likely than the reverse. But I have to say by the same token that we have seen and I've seen other airlines refer to that, an increasing trend of last-minute bookings. So it is becoming somewhat more difficult to be able to forecast exact RASK or exact load factor. Jakub Caithaml: Got it. This is very helpful. Last question from my side on engines. You mentioned that if I understood correctly, the powder metal engine issue can be resolved in 24, 28 months. Just to confirm, is this referring to today? Or is this referring to end of June? And the broader question on engines, could you share anything at this point on your expectations regarding the availability of the HS+ section upgrades in '26, '27, how many of the engines may be able to get this that you will be sending for shop visits? Or is there anything that you could share on the advantage engines availability and time line? Eftichios Vassilakis: Okay. First of all, I'm not sure I'm qualified to answer all of these questions, but I would at least answer the questions referring to the date and the significance of the number or the level of the number of the grounded aircraft. So as I said earlier in the discussion, the highest number, a number between 12 and 14, it will go up and down between those 2 figures will exist between September '25 and September, October '26. From October '26, we start having a decline, which will gradually lead to something like 7 aircraft in, I would say, September '27. And then between September '27 to March '28, it will probably go down to 0. Now this is -- takes into account what we have been promised in terms of slots for induction of engines for the next 12 months and then some expectation for -- in an equivalent fashion for '27. Unfortunately, these numbers are moving targets, but we believe that these numbers that we're giving are relatively conservative. We are continuously discussing and pushing Pratt & Whitney to give us priority in slots. And we, of course, have said many, many times that the compensation that we get does not fully cover the losses that we have from higher maintenance, a less efficient fuel consumption and of course, loss of seats per flight. The compensation barely covers the lease cost of the aircraft that is sitting down, but it is not covering the opportunity cost of not flying the improved aircraft, which is, of course, the reason why we made the investment. And on top of everything else, it makes our balance sheet more bloated because there are a significant number of idle leases, but we are not -- which are booked as a liability, but what we will receive as a compensation is not booked as an asset, not forward only once we receive it. Therefore, you have a level of inefficiency in your balance sheet. You have a level of inefficiency in your cost and you have a level of inefficiency in your utilization, which is, of course, the same thing as cost. And the 24 to 28 months is from the date of the announcement, meaning yesterday. So that's why I think the 28 months will expire around about early '28. I hope I have been thorough enough in the response. Jakub Caithaml: This is helpful. So I understand that at this point, it doesn't make sense to discuss the potential engine upgrades from Pratt & Whitney where they may be replacing some of the parts in the hot section of the engine... Eftichios Vassilakis: Mr. Kouveliotis would like to respond to that. Here he is. Michael Kouveliotis: The Advantage engine, yes, as the specs presented by Pratt & Whitney are promising. And we are expecting when the time comes to have more durability on time on wing. But actually, it's quite early to have a clear opinion and view because we are expecting to deliver some -- the first engines of the Advantage within '26. But again, it's not something very firm. So we hope and we believe that this is going to be an improvement, but too early to have. Eftichios Vassilakis: I mean in a nutshell, all of us knew that the Pratt & Whitney GTF engine was a new technology and that it presented potential benefits of evolution with versions coming out that would further improve mostly the fuel efficiency. So that was always the case there. Unfortunately, as you know, for the last 2 years already and for the next 2 years, as we've just said, this whole situation has been clouded by the problem regarding the early inspections and the effective grounded aircraft. So I think all of us need to get ourselves out of the first situation before we consider the second. But yes, we all think that there is potential for this engine to evolve in a positive way. But let's see the main problem we get out of the phase before we start counting what the benefit of that might be. And frankly, we are also all eager to make sure that we keep on the pressure to Pratt & Whitney to maximize either direct payouts for compensation, which are there, but they are inadequate or indeed to accelerate the availability of slots so that the program -- the problem can be dealt with more expediently. Operator: The next question comes from the line of Kumar Achal with HSBC. Unknown Analyst: I have 3 actually. So first of all, in terms of competitive landscape, so you mentioned that the increasing competitive environment. So just wanted to understand how the competitive environment looks like at Athens Airport versus the regional airports, the big cities. And especially, if I look at the table, it looks like the traffic growth at the airports operated by Fraport was quite slow, 1% flight growth and 2% passenger growth in the first half. So do you think with these kind of demand growth slowdown, the competitive environment could remain strong? Or do you think there is a possibility people could sort of take out the capacity? How do you see the demand versus supply going forward? Eftichios Vassilakis: Well, certainly, the demand growth -- sorry, the supply growth has been slower overall in Greece than in the past 2 years, where we were in '23, still in the, let's say, recovery path post-COVID and '24 had a strong follow-on both for Athens and all the regions. This year, we're seeing certainly a resurgence of growth of capacity to the north, to the Thessaloniki market, still some significant growth in Athens, but Athens is beginning to be significantly restricted both by ATC issues and also by terminal issues. The airport became facilitated, which is Level 2 this year for the first time. It will be even, I would say, more effectively facilitated because the ATC restrictions have been better translated into the coordinators planning next year. So that should -- well, hopefully allow us to operate a little better and at the same time, make it a little bit more difficult for too many people to add capacity. I think Greece has had a very good run. in terms of capacity development and demand development. And I think we should all be a little bit more moderate on what we expect going forward. Now this is still early to talk about what will happen next year. The only thing that I am certain about is that there will be some capacity growth. I would expect it to be, again, somewhat at least 1% or 1.5% higher than whatever the average capacity growth to Europe is going to be. We are now based effectively in a material way in 4 airports, Athens, which, of course, is the core of the network and the provider of all the connectivity and the network synergies. Thessaloniki in the North, where we have significantly invested this year and where we expect to invest even more next year. Larnaca in Cyprus, where we also have invested this year, and we expect we will invest some more again next year. And Heraklion in Crete, which is a very important, the second airport in the country, but is -- has been restricted in terms of capacity for many years now due to the terminal basically the terminal, the airport and the terminal itself. Heraklion is going to be replaced by a new airport in Crete probably March '28, so 2.5 years from now. We have 2 more years of operation on Heraklion, and we certainly consider Heraklion and the new airport of Heraklion a potential area of growth for us in the future. So these are the 4 places out of which we will be developing our capacity. I would say, if I were to say what's going to have the highest growth into next year, possibly that would be Thessaloniki because Thessaloniki is among the main Greek airport, the one which has lagged behind in terms of recovery from post-COVID. The average in Greece today is about 30% higher capacity and passengers relative to COVID, 30%, 32%. Thessaloniki is, I believe, right now at 15% and has shown better recovery trends during the last 12 months. So I don't know, I don't know how much I have answered and how much more you need. Unknown Analyst: No, perfect. And then you mentioned that Athens Airport remains constrained... Eftichios Vassilakis: It's beginning to be partially constrained. It's not Heathrow, right? But certainly, there are now times in the day, and there are a lot of times in the day where there will be significant difficulties in increasing capacity for us and for others [indiscernible]. Unknown Analyst: But does that mean there will be more opportunity or better opportunity for you to sort of get better pricing out of Athens if the capacity remains high, do you think? Eftichios Vassilakis: I promise to let you know as soon as I do, but I really don't know. I mean one would like to hope that. But in effect, what I'm mostly hoping for is that we reduced the number of operational -- the amount of operational problems that we are facing. Greece at this moment is not ranking well across Europe in delays, in ATC problems, we're ranking quite low. And it's impossible to escape the problems of your home country and of your hub if you are a carrier, particularly a carrier that does significant transfers in the airport. So what we're mostly concerned about is to improve -- that further improve the quality of our operation. The last 3 years have been very difficult in this direction for on-time performance due to these reasons. So we are more eager to see ATC problems and capacity problems expanded so that our operation regains both a certain amount of quality towards our customers, but also a lot of cost savings for us because delays in the air, delays on the ground, compensations for passengers, misconnections, all that stuff costs money and it costs to brand value. And those things are very important for us, and we hope this will be corrected. This will not be corrected next year and probably not the year after that. Will this create the adverse effect of somehow being able to support RASK? Possibly, but I don't know. I don't know. Unknown Analyst: Right. My second question is around the cost. So I can see in the first half, many of your costs have increased significantly, like your handling cost was up 20%, catering cost was up 14%, employee cost, 13%, other operating costs, 17%, while the capacity was ASK is up only about 4%. What's going on there? And particularly handling charge has [indiscernible] gone up by almost 20%, as I said. So is that because the new airports are pretty more expensive? And if that is the case, do you think the low-cost carriers will find it hard to stay? How do you see that? Eftichios Vassilakis: Let me say this. The -- well, certainly, the handling cost increase is the most important one, and that is related to basically increased labor costs in the country, new contract after 5 years, for the next 5 years, and that, in a great extent, has brought the increase in the handling cost. Catering is largely due to the higher amount of business class to some degree, but also to our effort to continue to provide a high-quality product. Perhaps we have overdone it a little bit there. The rest are not really significant. The part of the employees, the second -- the running rate as we go towards the year is actually at a much lower level. I would expect it to close the year between 9% and 10%, so significantly lower than 13%. Obviously, we were overstaffed and we were [ over planed ] as well in the second quarter relative to the capacity we actually displaced because, as I said, we didn't fly to 3 important markets. So that at least cost us 3% of our capacity for that quarter. Now also, you have to remember that we are continuing to beef up the staffing of our MRO. The MRO itself has added about 170 people in the last 18 months. And that is an effect on the payroll cost that is unrelated to the size of the operation. Therefore, I mean, to the size of the flight operation. So that is a factor there as well. I think that's what I have. I think the operating costs altogether did not have a very significant increase. The overall operating cost increase of the company was 5% in the first half. So this is the aggregate of everything -- that's excluding fuel. Including fuel. All right. So that includes fuel, which, of course, had a benefit, somewhat benefit because, of course, we were also hedged at the same time. But the overall expense was 5% for the operating expenses relative to a 4% increase in ASKs, right? Unknown Analyst: Okay. My last question is around your long-haul network. So you've just started -- you've just decided to start the flight -- direct flights to India. And you mentioned you're going to increase the long-haul operation. So I just want to understand... Eftichios Vassilakis: Longer haul, not long haul. Unknown Analyst: Yes, yes, exactly. So do you -- I mean, apart from India, do you have any other countries in plan or in mind what countries you are thinking about? And then if you find these longer-haul operations more profitable, do you think you can expand it? Or you're sticking yourselves to 4 XLRs which are planned currently? Eftichios Vassilakis: No. First of all, we don't have -- we have 2 XLRs and 4 LRs. So there are going to be, in aggregate, 6 aircraft that are competent to fly beyond 6 hours. Now we have told you in the past that we expect to invest these aircraft to a combination of routes that require the ability to fly further away, longer distance, but also to routes outside the EU that require a different aircraft configuration than the one that we're flying intra-Europe, which means a higher level business class because when we fly today to Saudi, as an example, or to Dubai, and we are -- we call ourselves a full-service carrier. We are competing with carriers on the routes to Athens as an example, to Riyadh or to Dubai where we have effectively an empty seat between 3 seats in business class, but other people have dedicated significantly more comfortable business class product. So the investment in the LRs and the XLRs is a combination of an effort to try to test longer distances, but also a recognition of the requirement to be able to serve customers outside the European Union in a product that looks more like the competitors that we have to face that don't call themselves low-cost carriers in these markets. So it's a combination of quality and ability to fly longer. Now our experience needs to be created out of the hopeful success of these initial efforts, be it how the improved product will be received in Dubai or be it how well we will do in the routes to India. So that's priority #1 for the next 2 years. And that's -- given we're getting 2 aircraft in '26, 2 aircraft in '27 and 2 aircraft in '28 out of these 6, as you might imagine, it will take us at least until the end of '27 to understand the initial response to these efforts. So beyond deploying these aircraft to India and beyond, which, by the way, India has got, as you know, many possible major destinations you can fly to. We're starting with Delhi and Mumbai. It doesn't mean that we'll be restricted to that if we seem to be doing well in that route. It's very important to note that just 2 days ago, we announced a signing of an MOU with IndiGo to develop code sharing to the Indian market. They will also be flying to Greece as of next year. But through their presence in India, we will have access and distribution to, of course, all the places within India that they fly to, and that's very important for us because Greece is small and India is big. So it's important to be known also in that country. So no, I don't have a particular idea of where beyond India. What I can say for sure is when and if Russia comes back in line, Russia is going to be served by some of these aircraft, mostly due to the comfort level and less so to the distance. The Indian market has got a lot of potential for development in the Middle East, whether it is Saudi Arabia, Dubai or some other potential destinations are going to take up capacity of the aircraft. So until the end of '27, I doubt very much we will see some other routes. Now if there appears to be some seasonal lags where we can try some long-haul leisure routes like Maldives or Seychelles in the winter for Greek people to fly out of Greece to go there, that will only happen if the seasonality pattern of usage of these longer distance aircraft seems to be such that it allows for idle capacity to go in those markets. We will not discontinue India to fly to -- for 3 months to the Maldives for a few Greeks to be able to go there directly, unless it doesn't make sense to fly to India in the winter. Our hope is that it will make sense to fly to these markets around the year. And our hope is that through flying to these parts of Asia that we can reach, we can further improve our seasonality because the pattern of travel of some of these nations is not exactly the same as Europeans. They tend to be a little bit less seasonal or place more -- some more interest in winter. And of course, whether that is with final destination Greece or somewhere in Europe, in both cases, it's interesting for us because we need the [ ConneX ] as well more in winter. So no, we don't have yet too many other ideas about where these aircraft might fly. Operator: [Operator Instructions] The next question comes from the line of [ Karanika Savagillos ] with NBG Securities. Unknown Analyst: Just a follow-up on unit costs for the second quarter. If my estimations are correct, there was around 7% increase in unit costs, excluding fuel at the operating level, EBIT so -- which seems a little bit high given the euro strength. Can you give us some more color behind this increase? And is it something that we could expect in the coming 2 quarters of the year? And also, if I may, perhaps some color on some big deviations in 2 expense lines, other operating expenses and leases? Eftichios Vassilakis: Yes. Again, underutilization of aircraft will cause costs to go up. Q2, we had basically 3 aircraft that were supposed to be flying in those 8 to 9 daily 2.5 to be precise, of aircraft that were supposed to be flying to these routes that were discontinued due to the geopolitical part idled and also the people manning the aircraft, maintaining the aircraft, supporting the aircraft. So the loss of 2.5 or 3% of expected capacity does not bring you, excluding fuel, as you said, an equivalent amount of saving because a lot of the things there stay constant, the aircraft, the people, okay, and the infrastructure to support them. So that's the reason that you had this particular spike in the second quarter, which is not the case for the whole -- it is not the case for the full 6 months, and it will not be the case for Q3 or Q4. I said earlier on also that both employee expenses and some other expense will be mitigated. The ones that will continue to have a higher than the activity, let's say, increase are handling for sure, and to a certain degree, maintenance costs and catering. The reason for the increase in the maintenance cost is like mainly the fact that we do not operate -- that we continue to operate the older aircraft which are getting older due to the grounding of the -- some of the younger aircraft. And that's a problem that will be retained to some degree while we still have the GTF problem in the next 24 to 28 months, as I said earlier on. Now in terms of why there is a drop in the operating -- you call it in the leases, the leases refer to ACMI. They are not the long-term operating leases or finance leases, which are dealt in EBITDA or EBIT. Those leases were committed in 2024 used to cover charter operation, and we didn't use ACMI again this year. So that's why there is a big delta on that line, a positive big delta on that line. Operator: Mr. Karas, have you finished with your questions? Eftichios Vassilakis: Okay. Is there another question? Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, no, there are no further questions at this time. I will now turn the conference over to Mr. Vassilakis for any closing comments. Thank you. Eftichios Vassilakis: Thank you all for attending. I know you'll be eager to follow how we continue to do in the year. I think I have tried to pass on a cautious optimism for the overall year. Not saying that there are no challenges, but that we think between the advantages and the problems will come out ahead of where we were last year. And I think in an airline where you see the cash flows as positive as ours, you shouldn't be too worried. So having said that, enjoy the rest of your day, and I hope to talk to you again in a few months. Thank you. Operator: Ladies and gentlemen, the conference has now concluded, and you may disconnect your telephone. Thank you for calling, and have a good afternoon.
Operator: Good morning all, and thank you for joining us on today's PZ Cussons full year results. My name is Drew, and I'll be the operator on the call today. [Operator Instructions] With that, it's my pleasure to hand over to Jonathan Myers to begin. Please go ahead when you're ready. Jonathan Myers: Thank you very much, Drew, and good morning, everyone, and thank you for dialing into our results presentation for the year ended 31st of May 2025. For those of you that can see the slides we're presenting this morning, it's worth calling out a successful example of our brand-building activities in the last year on the slide in front of you. Original Source advertising on a London bus as part of our Nature Hits Different campaign. I'll have some more detail on this later, but suffice to say for now that the activity helped deliver another year of growth for the brand in FY '25. Turning to the agenda then for this morning. I will start with a brief introduction before handing over to Sarah to take us through a review of the financials. I'll then provide a broader update on strategic progress and performance before moving to a summary and a chance for you to ask any questions. Note on this slide too, an example of how we've been building brands over the past year. This one, driving trial of Cussons Baby, specifically the Telon oil launched last year as shoppers browse a specialist baby store in Jakarta. Our Telon oil has now reached 10% household penetration in urban Indonesia and is growing market share. So moving to our main messages for this morning. We are making progress against our strategy. Our 4 priority markets delivered a strong performance. We have good momentum in the core of our business. The U.K. delivered a strong improvement in profitability, fueled by revenue growth and gross margin expansion. Indonesia ended the year with its fifth consecutive quarter of revenue growth with a healthy mix of high single-digit revenue and volume growth for the year. We continue to gain market share in Australia on each of our top 3 brands and grew operating profit overall, but we were still battling against the softer consumer backdrop holding back our revenue. Finally, our Nigerian business demonstrated its resilience, continuing to perform well in a high inflation environment. Meanwhile, we have also made progress pushing change through the business, strengthening our brand building capabilities, driving better integration of our marketing and R&D teams and extending our planning horizons to enable greater focus on sufficiency and quality of our multiyear innovation plans. Since the close of our financial year, we announced the sale of 50% stake in PZ Wilmar to our joint venture partner, Wilmar International, in line with the objectives of the strategic review we announced in April 2024 to streamline and simplify our portfolio. It was also after careful consideration of alternative value creation options that we announced the decision to retain St. Tropez, setting a new strategic direction with a new partner in the U.S. and a dedicated operating model within PZ to delivery. While I appreciate you will naturally have questions on our wider African business, all I'm able to say today is that we are continuing to progress our strategic review and will, of course, provide an update when we do have something to say. Finally, we are working hard on reducing costs and unlocking value in the business, whether that's through reducing discretionary spend, tacking our structural cost base or the sale of surplus nonoperating assets. I'll cover more on this later. So overall, we know there is more work to be done and that we have not yet delivered all that we set out to achieve, but there has been good progress to date, particularly the underlying momentum in the core of the business. And we are focused on delivering our strategic actions and operational improvements to evolve PZ Cussons into a business with a more focused portfolio and stronger brands, delivering sustainable, profitable growth. And with that, I'll hand over to Sarah to take us through the financials. Sarah Pollard: Thanks, Jonathan, and good morning, everyone. I'm going to share a summary of our FY '25 full year results, walk you through the key movements at the group level, then by segment and finish with current trading and guidance for the year ahead. As Jonathan mentioned, we've seen momentum across most of our portfolio, with a particularly strong performance in the U.K. and Indonesia. Group revenue declined by GBP 14 million to GBP 514 million, with a GBP 47 million reduction attributable to the naira, which while more stable in FY '25, was nearly 40% weaker on average versus sterling than in FY '24. Like-for-like revenue growth calculated on a constant currency basis was 8%, driven by pricing in Nigeria. Excluding Africa, like-for-like revenue growth was flat. Adjusted operating profit was GBP 55 million, down 6%, with adjusted operating profit margin lower by 30 basis points at 10.7%. However, as you can see from the bottom of the slide, excluding from each year's figures, the contribution of PZ Wilmar, the sale of which we announced in June, group adjusted operating profit margin would have increased by 30 basis points. On a statutory basis, operating profit was GBP 21 million compared to a loss of GBP 84 million in FY '24, which was primarily attributable to ForEx translation and U.S. dollar-denominated liability losses in our Nigerian subsidiaries following the currency devaluation of June 2023. And we have since significantly reduced our exposure to any future naira shocks as we have made good progress in extinguishing historical liabilities and repatriating surplus cash. We maintained a flat net interest charge in the year. With a higher adjusted effective tax rate more indicative of the higher rate going forward, adjusted FY '25 earnings per share declined ahead of operating profit, down 8.5%. The Board is proposing a final dividend of 2.1p per share, taking the total for the year to 3.6p, the same level as the prior year. Free cash flow was GBP 42 million, up slightly due to an improvement in working capital, partially offset by the reduction in operating profit. Net debt improved slightly to GBP 112 million with a net debt-to-EBITDA ratio of 1.7x. However, taking into account the proceeds from the sale of our Wilmar joint venture, which is expected to complete in the final quarter of calendar 2025, our pro forma ratio would have been 1.1x. Turning now to the financial performance details and firstly, revenue. To aid comparability, the first bar shows the impact of adjusting for FX translation, presenting FY '24 revenues at FY '25 exchange rates. The breakdown of the adverse GBP 55 million impact is, as usual, provided in the appendix. On this like-for-like currency basis, revenue increased 8% in the U.K. and Indonesia. And Jonathan will come on to the brand drivers of that revenue growth later. We again took pricing in Africa with multiple increases throughout the year to offset double-digit inflation in Nigeria. Jonathan will also outline the steps we're taking to turn around St. Tropez brand. Now to operating profit. As I mentioned, our overall adjusted operating profit margin decreased by 30 basis points to 10.7%. We've shown this chart excluding Wilmar, given this represents the more accurate basis for future profitability, lower in absolute sterling terms, but more cash-light and sustainable in nature versus an equity accounted share in a noncore, lower-margin joint venture. On a constant currency basis, group gross profit margin was lower in the year, reflecting the adverse mix impact of strong revenue growth in Nigeria, where gross margins are structurally lower. This was more than offset by a 220 basis point reduction in overheads. Around half of this represents structural cash savings relevant to our go-forward business. Also included within this number is a reduction in amortization to reflect the business decision to extend the useful economic life of our SAP software now that the manufacturer support period will run for longer, allowing us to extract a higher return from that IT asset. Marketing investment was broadly unchanged as a percentage of revenue, while the impact of ForEx translation had an overall adverse 70 basis point impact on margins. So let me now provide some more detail on the performance in each of our regional reporting segments. Looking first in Europe and Americas, where we saw growth in both like-for-like revenue and operating profit. Revenue grew 0.6%, driven by price/mix growth and with a very small overall volume decline. Growth in our main U.K. brands was offset by a challenging St. Tropez performance, without which Europe and Americas revenue growth would have been 2.4%. Adjusted operating profit was up GBP 4 million, with a margin increase of 230 basis points, driven by tight cost control and the full year impact of the integration of the U.K. Personal Care and Beauty businesses as well as ongoing revenue growth management and product margin improvement initiatives. This more than offset the GBP 3 million impact from the introduction in the U.K. of extended producer responsibility plans and new costs, which we will seek to mitigate over time through, among other things, a review of our entire packaging portfolio. Turning now to Asia Pac, where like-for-like revenue was flat. Continued momentum in Indonesia was offset by a decline in ANZ. All our core Cussons Baby segments drove volume-led growth in Indonesia, and ANZ saw market share gains in all 3 major brands despite the softer macro environment there. Both markets improved their profitability with higher gross margins and lower overheads. This, though, was offset by a reduction in profitability in some small Asian markets and lower profits in our business manufacturing non-branded [indiscernible]. Overall, adjusted operating profit reduced by GBP 3 million with a margin decline of 150 basis points. Revenue in Africa declined by 7% due to the depreciation of the naira. The 35% like-for-like revenue growth reflects 20 rounds of price increases as inflation in Nigeria remained elevated at over 30% for much of the year. Whilst volumes declined 12% as a result of those price increases, this was mitigated somewhat by further route-to-market improvements that Jonathan will describe later. We've seen our Nigerian business return to volume as well as price-led revenue growth so far this FY '26 financial year. Electricals revenue was GBP 47 million, up over 30% on a like-for-like basis. Adjusted Africa operating profit margin improved by 250 basis points or excluding PZ Wilmar, it improved by 450 basis points. The operating profit numbers shown here are excluding a GBP 9 million benefit that the Africa region reported in FY '24 related to intragroup debt forgiveness, the cost of which was shown in last year's central cost line and which had a net 0 impact to overall group operating profit. And I noted to explain that the Africa segmental results presented here are both comparable year-on-year and representative of underlying operations. So finally then, our central cost line, which equated to GBP 30.5 million in FY '25 and which was, on a reported basis, down slightly versus FY '24. However, we have also made the corresponding Nigerian debt forgiveness adjustment here to ensure comparability. And as such, central costs increased GBP 6.8 million in FY '25. This was split between underlying cost increases and investments in group-wide capabilities attributable to the performance of business units, but best housed at the corporate center for maximum return and so reported them. For example, the shifting of some marketing and some R&D roles to sit central. As we'll come on to, we see this number falling considerably over the next 12 months given the cost savings we're announcing today. So moving now to cash flow and net debt. Total free cash flow was GBP 42.3 million compared to GBP 41.6 million in the prior year, reflecting an improvement in working capital, offset by lower profits. Net debt was GBP 112 million compared to GBP 115.3 million last year, representing a net debt-to-EBITDA ratio of 1.7x, which, as mentioned earlier, will then see a significant reduction following the completion of the Wilmar sale. The group also continues to have no surplus cash held in Nigeria following our successful repatriation efforts. As we said in the statement this morning, trading year-to-date has been in line with our expectations. Group like-for-like revenue to the end of September is expected to be up around 10%. Strong revenue growth in Asia Pac is made up of Indonesia posting its sixth consecutive quarter of growth, plus ANZ also being up. Africa is showing encouraging volume momentum. Europe and Americas is down 2% or up 2%, excluding St. Tropez. We expect Europe and Americas to continue to strengthen across October and November, which would see us back to overall revenue growth there in half 1. In terms of profit guidance, we expect group adjusted operating profit to be between GBP 48 million and GBP 53 million. And this figure strips out any contribution from Wilmar, which is now treated as an asset held for sale in accounting terms. And so its profit contribution in FY '26 will be reported as part of the disposal calculations. Captured within the guidance are cost savings of between GBP 5 million and GBP 10 million, some of which will be reinvested in the business, subject to clear return criteria. Finally, net debt will fall significantly in FY '26 to less than 1x EBITDA. We expect cash proceeds of between GBP 15 million and GBP 20 million from the ongoing program to sell surplus nonoperating assets, of which we have received GBP 8 million so far this current financial year. We're expecting to receive proceeds of approximately GBP 47 million before the end of the calendar year from the sale of our Wilmar joint venture. Jonathan will talk a little more about the cost savings and noncore asset sale proceeds in a little detail. And so with that, I'll now hand back to him. Jonathan Myers: Thanks, Sarah. So let me give a broader update on progress and performance framed around the highlights and messages I covered at the beginning of the presentation. And let's start with the U.K. and what was behind the strong operating profit that I mentioned earlier. Beyond the cost savings Sarah talked about, a key driver of the revenue performance has been better commercial and brand building activities. Taking Original Source as an example, we delivered a bold marketing campaign from February through to May, firmly targeting younger consumers with an optimized mix of social media, out-of-home and TV, leveraging our partnership with social media influencer and personality, Jamie Laing. This is a good example of how we are enabling more competitive brand activation with the GBP 2 million media campaign reaching more than 15 million people. Pickup in brand awareness meant Original Source not only achieved its highest household penetration in almost 5 years, but thanks to considered price and promotional optimization as well, the brand also grew gross margin. Based on the success of the first wave of Nature Hits Different campaign, look out for the next wave of activity on Original Source over the next couple of months, a good example of us prioritizing brand support against activities with proven return on investment. Another way of driving revenue on our brands is to work in partnership with the owners of other brands to engage common target consumers and drive in-store activation. Six months ago, we highlighted the success of Carex and its Gruffalo partnership, which we have since expanded to Zog and Room on the Broom. Notably, Carex grew revenue and gross margin in FY '25, consolidating its #1 position in the hand wash market. We've also extended this type of brand partnership to Childs Farm to include a tie-up with Bluey and BBC Studios. Now if you don't have young kids or don't know Bluey, it's one of the most popular TV shows in the world for children and is enabling us to secure disproportionate levels of support across retail outlets. Just take a look at this tie-up with Bluey and Kellogg's at Sainsbury's as evidence. So we've seen encouraging FY '25 performance in the U.K., and we look forward to more to come, not least our plans for Christmas gifting, which is starting to hit the shelves this very month. Turning to Indonesia and Cussons Baby. You may remember the Childs Farm SlumberTime product range launch, addressing the importance of reassuring parents that their washing and baby products are giving their babies the best possible chance of a good night sleep for the wellbeing of both the baby and their parents. The CuddleCalm range takes the consumer insights and product formulation learnings from Childs Farm and applies them to Cussons Baby, albeit in a very different context. It's a good example of us leveraging shared baby insights across geographies and brands as we have sought to create a more integrated marketing and R&D organization. Elsewhere in our Indonesian business, we continue to see phenomenal growth in e-commerce, whether that's through established platforms such as Shopee or the ongoing success of our own live streaming capability. Turning to our business in Australia and New Zealand, where we continue to see softness in category values through the year, though reassuringly, we've seen the first signs of amelioration in the latest quarter. Against that backdrop, we continue to make market share gains on our top 3 brands, thanks to renewed efforts to drive better in-store presence, competitive pricing and promotion and broader distribution across retail channels. The Morning Fresh photo on the right-hand side is an example of those efforts. We are already the clear market leader in washing up liquid, and we are leveraging this strong position and our brand equity for winning performance and great value to help grow market share in the auto dish category. We've been using net hangers on bottles of Morning Fresh liquid to drive awareness and then offering hundreds of thousands of samples of auto dish tablets to drive trial. While auto dish is a highly competitive category, our position of strength in the washing up liquid market gives us a clear competitive advantage to leverage as we seek to build trial, distribution and market share. Turning to Nigeria. Perhaps the best example of brand activation was the recent relaunch of Carex. Carex has been available in Nigeria for some time, but has always been subscale as the product positioning has largely been taken from the U.K. Thanks to good work with Nigerian consumers, our campaign Win the War Against Germs means the brand now looks and feels new and relevant with clear antibacterial positioning, distinct brand assets, bold disruptive messaging and benefiting from professional endorsement. Just like the Original Source example I gave earlier, the execution was a multifaceted campaign: Digital, TV, out-of-home advertising and a series of in-person launch events. In fact, we estimate the campaign reached 125 million people. It's early days, but signs so far are promising. Carex will absolutely be one of the drivers of Nigeria's performance in FY '26. Beyond the excellent work on Carex, we have continued to strengthen our go-to-market presence. A key part of this, as we've mentioned before, has been the number of stores served directly by us as opposed to via wholesalers. Simply put, covering the stores directly leads to better retailer relationships and in-store presence as we can directly influence which products turn up in which types of outfit. From covering just under 70,000 stores directly 3 years ago, we exceeded our target of reaching 200,000 in FY '25, and we're now striving for even more stores in direct coverage in FY '26. A driving force in how we are seeking to serve consumers better in our core categories is the strengthened brand building operating model we have adopted over the past year as the next phase in the journey to raise the bar on how effectively and consistently we build stronger brands. Many of you will remember where we started, strong brands with good tactical plans, but more of a trading mindset and limited cohesion across the portfolio. We moved on from that in recent years, creating better alignment across the group and strengthening in-year plans. But we know there's more to do. So we now have put in place a brand-building setup, which balances staying close to consumers in our priority markets, whilst leveraging more effective integration and collaboration across both markets, meaning improved visibility of multiyear innovation and revenue growth plans in our priority market. Ultimately, we are building on our strength of in-year activation to add excellent multiyear innovation. Not only is this good for our consumers, it's also good for our marketing teams. We've seen a 7 percentage point improvement in engagement scores for the marketing function across the group. Ultimately, though, success will be measured in sustained progress on market share, revenue and profitability. Moving to portfolio transformation. In June, we announced the sale of our 50% stake in PZ Wilmar, our Nigerian cooking oils business to Wilmar International, our joint venture partner, for cash consideration of $70 million. This will simplify our portfolio and as Sarah said, significantly strengthen our balance sheet. It sees us exit a noncore category and reduce group reliance on Nigeria as part of our overall efforts to rebalance the portfolio and concentrate on our core categories of hygiene, beauty and baby. The sale also benefits a number of our wider sustainability metrics as PZ Wilmar represents around 10% of our Scope 3 inventory. Turning now to St. Tropez. As we explained back in June, although our intention was to sell the brand, after running a comprehensive process to do so, our firm belief is that the better course of action for our shareholders is to retain it and maximize value in the coming years. There are 3 reasons which give us the confidence. First, it's important to remember that whilst it's had a challenging performance recently, St. Tropez is regarded as an iconic brand. It established the self-tan category and has for many years been the driving force behind the market. It still has great brand equity and awareness with more than 30% share of the [indiscernible] self-tan beauty market in the U.S. and envy positions on the shelves of key U.S. beauty retailers such as Ulta and Sephora. Second, the key tenet of the new direction is the partnership we have formed with the Emerson Group, a leading U.S.-based partner to many brand owners, including some of the world's largest personal care and beauty businesses. They will provide customer management, logistics services and brand activation in the U.S. St. Tropez will be integrated into Emerson's dedicated selling teams to key U.S. retailers with initial meetings having already taken place. Not only does this partnership give us access to a strong go-to-market operator in the U.S. with significant scale and expertise, it also dramatically simplifies our own operating model. We no longer have a need for our own team on the ground nor the expense of a dedicated office in Manhattan. Next, for the U.S., our St. Tropez model is better, simpler and more cost effective. Finally, we have also appointed a new executive with significant experience of the beauty category, not least from many years spent at L'Oréal to lead the St. Tropez business with a single-minded focus on value creation and a dedicated team coming together beneath him. Looking ahead, therefore, we're busy with the innovation plans for the 2026 season and working on celebrating the 30th anniversary of the launch of St. Tropez next year. So lots more to come on St. Tropez. Moving now to the final slide before summing up. As Sarah touched on earlier, we have made progress driving cost efficiencies and identifying opportunities to unlock further pockets of value, all of which will help to fund future growth. To that end, we have announced this morning that we expect to generate GBP 5 million to GBP 10 million of cost savings in FY '26. It's a big number at the top end of the range, but we're hard at work to deliver it. We've already developed a track record and a playbook to do this with a GBP 3 million savings in the U.K. business as Sarah mentioned, removing duplicated structures and operating expense. But more importantly, the organization is increasingly building a mindset of ongoing cost optimization, sometimes through significant structural interventions driven by changes in operating model, but also through the relentless and rigorous pursuit of grinding out the inefficiencies that consumers do not value and should not be expected to pay for. Whether that's saving on the retendering of label production in the U.K., the shifting of surfactant suppliers for our Nigerian business or sourcing a different enzyme for our Radiant laundry brand in Australia. We're also unlocking value from noncore or nonoperating assets, mostly in Asia and Africa. These range from high-end residential property in Ghana and undeveloped land in Indonesia to empty warehouses in Nigeria that are no longer required by the business and pretty much everything in between. The market value of these assets is significant, and we estimate that after fees and taxes, we should generate net cash proceeds of around GBP 30 million from those disposals, the majority of which will complete during this financial year. Common across all the activities shown on this slide is a single-minded pursuit of simplification, whether processes, operations or portfolio and as a result, unlocking value. In summary, while there's a lot going on at PZ and still much more to do to deliver, I want to be really clear that our day-to-day focus is on continuing to drive the underlying business across our priority markets. We're building stronger brands in our core categories, and we're driving more competitive go-to-market execution in our largest markets. The combination of which means we can get more PZ products into the homes and hands of more consumers. So with that, enough of us and a chance for you to let us know what are your questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question today comes from Sahill Shan from Singer Capital Markets. Sahill Shan: Forgive me, I'm fairly new to the story, but I've got a couple of questions, if that's okay. Firstly, just on the St. Tropez brand. You've retained it and outlined a new U.S.-focused strategy with Emerson. I suppose my question is what internal KPIs or milestones are you using to evaluate success? And how quickly should investors expect signs of recovery in the brand's P&L contribution? So that's my first question. And the second one is around capital allocation. I think with the Wilmar proceeds and asset disposals, it looks like expected to significantly reduce net debt this year. How are you thinking about capital deployment priorities going forward around reinvestment, M&A or maybe returning capital back to shareholders? Jonathan Myers: So why don't I take the first of those questions relating to St. Tropez and I'll pass over to Sarah on capital allocation. So you're absolutely right. After a very considered process, we took the call to retain the brand because we saw more potential to create future value in doing so than in selling it. We're very clear as we did that, what are the strengths and what are the challenges that we need to address. And the most broken, if I can use that phrase, part of the business was in North America where we had seen double-digit declines. And it's for that reason, we have taken the most dramatic action of any part of the business model in North America effectively to adopt a new route-to-market partner and one who is very, very qualified because they're already operating with the likes of Ulta and Sephora as well as more mainstream retailers in driving both personal care but also high-end beauty care. So that's a sign of confidence for us that we are putting our business in the hands of a proven partner, one who we've known previously, by the way, through work together on Childs Farm. So as we look to the future, ultimately, the most important measure will be value creation. And that is indeed how we have structured our thinking and also our incentivization as we look at the team that will be leading that business. But obviously, what really matters will be driving growth in market share, growth in in-store distribution because ultimately it is a brand that wins in-store and online, but with sufficient social media activation and influencer support. And as that goes through perhaps 1 or 2 seasons, so coming to your question on how long, it's a very seasonal business. The summer is all important or late spring into summer is all important. So we are working hard for summer of '26, but we're also trying to make sure we get ahead of the game for the summer of '27. So I would be expecting to report to you improved momentum as we exit next season, but more importantly, the season after once we have a longer lead time to really address some of the more fundamental opportunities and challenges we see with the brand. But we're very hopeful and confident that we will see that improvement in value creation. Over to you, Sarah? Sarah Pollard: Thanks, Jonathan. Let me touch on the capital allocation point. So you're absolutely right to say we were very clear that the first use of any cash proceeds from the portfolio transformation would be to reduce our level of debt. It takes us for FY '25 to a pro forma leverage ratio of 1.1x and then with further surplus asset disposals and ongoing cash generation in FY '26, south of 1x. And that we see very much within our target range and a level of leverage we feel comfortable with. Then in terms of our broader use of capital, it's first and foremost to drive the organic growth of the business. And of course, as a brand-building organization, that is behind R&D investments, behind marketing campaigns to drive our brands and also CapEx, both to give us more capacity to grow volume, also automation to make sure our product margins remain very competitive. So first and foremost, we see the highest return on our capital being in driving the organic growth of the business. We also are retaining sufficient capital to support a sustainable level of dividend. We don't have a stated policy, but internally, we think a little bit around a targeted cover of 2x and that growing in line with earnings going forward. And then in the surplus capital, I think you can see us putting towards bolt-on M&A if we see opportunities that both sit very neatly within our core markets and our core categories or indeed the opportunity to acquire some additional capabilities, be that digital, and Childs Farm is our last such example in March 2022. And you should think about Childs Farm as being an example of something we might do again when the time is right. And I think we would say all of those things we consider to take precedence over surplus returns because we can do it. We believe we can deliver more return by deploying the capital internally. Sahill Shan: Super. That's really helpful. Just one final one for me. It would be really appreciated. Post these results, it would be good to catch up. Could you get the relevant IR person on your side to reach out to me, and we can take it from there. Operator: Our next question comes from Matthew Webb from Investec. Matthew Webb: I appreciate you've touched on this already, but I wonder if you could just provide a bit more detail on where the GBP 5 million to GBP 10 million of targeted savings are coming from. Jonathan, I think you sort of mentioned that GBP 10 million is quite a big number at the top end, and I would agree with that. So anything that could bring that to life would be very helpful. And then maybe also where your priorities are in terms of reinvesting a portion of those savings? That's the first question. Second question on the EPR. I mean, I infer from the way that you've talked about that, that you've really absorbed that GBP 3 million. I just wondered whether that's correct, whether there were any sort of discussions with your customers about passing that on, at least in part. And then also, I know you mentioned that this had prompted a review of your approach to packaging. And without sort of prejudging that review, I just wonder whether you could give any examples of some of the things you might consider there. And then the third question is just on Indonesia, where obviously, I appreciate your trading has been very strong. So probably the answer is no. But I just wondered whether you'd seen any impact from the recent political unrest in that country. Jonathan Myers: Right. So three good questions, Matthew. Sarah is going to be number one, and I'll come in with the EPR and the Indonesia response for you. Sarah Pollard: So Matthew, let me try and unpack that GBP 5 million to GBP 10 million a little bit. And as Jonathan mentioned, we're establishing a better understanding of where -- if you like, there might be opportunity in our overhead cost base as well as the muscle that we think we very definitely built in terms of optimizing product costs, having in FY '25 integrated our legacy U.K. Personal Care and Beauty businesses. So I think in terms of where we sit today on top of that historical overhead work is recognizing that we inherited a business that needed to unashamedly invest behind capabilities. And they were both commercial to drive the business, but they were also, if I use the word corporate, to meet the PLC bar to make sure we are doing things in the right way. And we have shown both good hard and soft benefits from those investments over the last 3 to 4 years. And we recognize we're in a position now where we can afford to maybe unpick some of those capabilities. So we have quite a strong corporate cost base. And in some of the enabling functions, most notably very close to home and finance, perhaps in HR and IT, we've now reached a level of capability that we think is sufficient. So we have been looking at some of the capabilities we can take away there. That GBP 5 million or GBP 10 million, we've got a good line of sight to the GBP 5 million. We're working on the additional GBP 5 million. It's probably split 2/3 people from increasing spans of control from internal promotions rather than external hires and yes, the net reduction in overall headcount. And then 1/3 is more, if you like, a little bit more tactial, be it the use of consultants, managing travel and expenses and just good continuous improvement and being very cost conscious. So some central capabilities on which we think we now no longer generate a level of return, 2/3 people, 1/3 on [indiscernible]. Jonathan Myers: So if I pick up on the EPR question, then I'll come on to Indonesia, Matthew. So first of all, on EPR, I would say we, along with other manufacturers, have been getting our heads around the implications of this tax. And we're one of the first to report just as the nature of our financial year-end, and we'll be all keenly looking to see what other people are saying as they report in the coming months as well. But I would say exactly as you've identified, really, there are 2 levers that we can pull as we try to deal with what is effectively a new cost in our cost structure. The first is absolutely as part of a broader revenue growth management effort, always looking at our ongoing optimization of pricing and promotion. And sometimes that is tweaking our promotional activity where you nudge up the price per liter or the price per pack. And other times, that can be literally straightforward price increases that we are communicating to retailers and working with them as they choose how much or little of those increases they want to reflect on [indiscernible]. And so that has clearly been one lever that we have been pulling, and we will continue to look at that over time. But also over time, particularly as we learn more about the exact drivers of the EPR tax and how it is applied is how we can optimize our packaging across our portfolio, be that primary packaging or secondary packaging to literally reduce the weight or volume that we are using. And so for example, over time, lightweighting of bottles or lightweighting of caps and also looking at our secondary packaging can be very important and very helpful as we learn how to more effectively optimize the EPR impact, but also continue to provide packaging that consumers find useful and usable. But obviously, then what it's also doing is helping us on our journey of delivering against our sustainability KPIs as well. So we're embracing the challenge, but obviously, we're also learning exactly how the tax works along those manufacturers. As for Indonesia, so just in case anyone else on the line didn't pick it up, there was some social unrest in Indonesia at the very tail end of August and the beginning of September. It was related to housing allowances for MPs and it rather snowballed from there. We obviously triggered our business continuity plan, put it into action. There was minimal disruption to our business. We did actually have our people working from home. So we closed our offices for a period of about 4 working days. Our factories continue to run and our distributors continue to operate. The interesting insight is rather as we have seen with previous events in Indonesia, what it leads to is the shopper actually going to their local open market, I think a wet market rather than a modern supermarket. And so we see a channel switch. And the good news is our distributors are very well placed to be able to support that switch. Our distributors will carry around 7.5 weeks of inventory. So even if we were unable to get some deliveries through, they still have sufficient product in their warehouses to deliver in their localities. So there's minimal disruption. I think in Q1, there's a little bit maybe in our P4 numbers, but all of that will come back in Q2. Operator: Our next question comes from Damian McNeela from Deutsche Numis. Damian McNeela: Two from me, please, this morning. Firstly, U.K. washing and bathing seems to be growing at around about 2%. Can you provide a little bit of insight into both the consumer experience of the category and also the competitive dynamics that you're managing at the minute, please? And then the sort of the last question is around marketing spend. And I think it was held broadly flat this year. What are your sort of expectations for the current year? And also to what extent is AI being used to try and optimize your marketing spend as well, please? Jonathan Myers: Damian, so I'll pick up a little bit on the washing and bathing category dynamics. Sarah can talk a little bit about M&C spend expectations, and I'll then come back with AI and how that can help us optimize and drive higher return on investment. First of all, I think probably in keeping with other consumer categories in the U.K. retail environment, we are seeing an increasingly competitive category of washing and bathing. There's growth to be had. There's still some growth in the market. So it's still an exciting and interesting segment of the market to be playing in, absolutely, particularly if you've got strong brands and strong relationships with the retailers and good go-to-market capabilities. But there is no doubt there is a significant tranche of shoppers, not all, so I don't want to generalize, but a significant tranche that is seeking value. And that's where it collides a little bit with where you're asking about competitive dynamics because we're also seeing some of our competitors, and you will be able to work out from their own comments, which ones I'm talking about, who are trying to rebalance for themselves a focus on value versus volume and perhaps they've been chasing value too much rather than volume. So how is that manifesting itself? There's no doubt there's still an awful lot of people that are interested in shower gels that sell at GBP 1 or less. So we need to make sure that we have pack sizes and promotional price points are absolutely delivered for that. But what we're also seeing is an increasing intensity in the competitive environment on larger pack sizes, and in particular, 500 and 600-milliliter bottles. So whereas in the past, they may have been relatively unpromoted versus the smaller circa GBP 1 price point bottle, you're now beginning increasingly to see quite a lot of price promotion on 500 mL and up [indiscernible]. So we are absolutely sharpening our pencil. We're absolutely trying to respond. It's always a little bit of a lag, as you know, in planning promotions based on the retailers' promotional calendars. But as we move through this year, we will be trying to make sure that we are responding to not just competitive pressures, but also how shoppers are evolving too. So as I say, very interesting subcategory to play in, but very competitive too. Sarah Pollard: Damian, let me address the M&C -- sorry, Damian, you come back. Damian McNeela: No, I'm just saying thank you, Sarah. So yes, brilliant. Sarah Pollard: Thank you, Damian. Let me talk to M&C then. So you're right in terms of the FY '25 margin bridge that we shared this morning. Effectively, what we're saying is that there was no positive contribution to our margin performance in FY '25 from M&C. Or the other way of putting that is we grew our marketing spend in line with our revenue growth, which is actually a good thing. So we probably shouldn't in reality, color code it red. What we've not done and what we won't do is either set internally or guide externally to a set of prescriptive marketing spend targets, either in absolute terms or with reference to our overall revenue because our brand portfolio is so diverse. So Cussons Baby, as Jonathan referenced being sold in wet markets through distributors in Indonesia has a very different support model in terms of the levers of profitable growth than will a St. Tropez being sold in the U.S. So what we do, do on a case-by-case basis is work out a level of sufficiency for each of our brands. And then with increasing scrutiny and data capability, and maybe Jonathan will touch on that as part of the AI topic, really understanding whether that M&C delivered incremental return or not, and if it doesn't move it or optimizing it. But I think what you should be very certain of is the overall direction of travel to underpin our brand building ambition will be a net increase in marketing investments. And if I think about the GBP 5 million to GBP 10 million of overhead cost savings that we're committing to in FY '26, where we talk about reinvesting a portion, marketing investment will absolutely be the #1 candidate on that list for investment, Damian. So hopefully, that answers the question. Jonathan Myers: I'll pick up on the AI part. My flip in response to you, Damian, having known you for a few years, I can say [indiscernible]. So what I mean by lemons is if you look at that Nature Hits Different campaign on the side of the bus I talked about earlier, those very first graphics were actually AI generated. So we are trying to embrace artificial intelligence and how it can help us. I'll come on to some other ways in which [indiscernible] actually AI can help us in the core elements of brand building and as fundamental as generating the graphics, which in that particular campaign, we were able to test and modify and then ultimately bring to market, whether that was on boring old traditional TV or much more interesting and exciting social media. So that's a good example of where we have been developing campaigns using artificial intelligence. But somewhat more fundamentally, as a company, we are also spearheading the use of data analytics and artificial intelligence in how we can improve revenue but also optimize processes and save some of the cost involved with that. So as part of forming a partnership with Microsoft on the Microsoft Fabric platform, we have been exploring, for example, how we can more effectively use our market share data to drive market and consumer insights to help us unlock opportunities for the future, but also how we can optimize our pricing and promotion planning a little bit in that whole area of revenue growth management, but also tackling some of our processes to optimize some of those, not least some of our financial forecasting process internally. So we'll have more to say on that in the future. I don't want to say we're just scratching the surface. It's not that we're doing nothing, but we do see that AI has an opportunity and a part to play for us in the future. Operator: Thank you. With that, that concludes the Q&A portion of today's call, and I'll hand back over to Jonathan Myers for some closing remarks. Jonathan Myers: Thank you, Drew. Thank you to everyone who's called in today and those who asked questions. Hopefully, you've got a sense of we are hard at work. There's plenty done, but we are firmly on the ground. We have plenty more to do, and we have a lot to get on with. So that is what we are going to go and do and ask for all of you in the U.K. as you go shopping in the next few weeks and you see our Christmas gift sets on the shelves, make sure you pick one up and put it in the stocking for someone in your family. And we'll thank you next time we talk. Bye-bye. Operator: Thank you all for joining. That concludes today's call. You may now disconnect your lines.
Operator: Good day, and thank you for standing by. Welcome to the Q4 and year-end 2025 Financial Results NanoXplore Earnings Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] Please be advised that today's conference is being recorded. I would now like to hand the conference over to your speaker today, Pierre-Yves Terrisse, Vice President, Corporate Development. Please go ahead. Pierre-Yves Terrisse: [Foreign Language] Good morning, everyone, and thank you for joining this discussion of NanoXplore financial and operating results for the fourth quarter and year-end results of fiscal 2025. The press release reporting this result was published yesterday after market close and can also be found on our website along with our financial statements and MD&A. These documents are also available on SEDAR+. Before we begin, I'd like to remind you that today's remarks, including management's outlook and answer to questions, contain forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements represent our expectation as of today, September 17, 2025, and accordingly, are subject to change. Such statements are based on assumptions that may not materialize and are subject to risks and uncertainties. Actual results may differ materially, and listeners are cautioned not to place undue reliance on these forward-looking statements. A description of the risk factors that may affect future results is contained in NanoXplore annual information form available on our corporate website and in our filings with the Canadian Securities Administrator on SEDAR+. On the call with me this morning, we have Soroush Nazarpour, NanoXplore Chief Executive Officer; and Pedro Azevedo, our Chief Financial Officer. After remarks from Soroush and Pedro, we'll open the call to questions from financial analysts. Let me now turn the call over to Soroush. Soroush Nazarpour: Thank you, Pierre-Yves, and good morning to everyone joining us on the call. By now, you're all aware that I decided to step down from my CEO role at AGM. Stay on the board thereafter and support the corporation from a technical and a strategic point of view. This decision was taken for personal reasons. I have built this company from the ground up with the Nano team, and I'm very proud of what we have accomplished since inception. At this point, in the growth of the company, it's the right time to make this transition. NanoXplore will, in the very near future embark on the launch of a major graphene contract, which has been a major objective from the team. My successor is inheriting a graphene market leader on a strong footing and will bring the company to its next stage of growth. With that being said, nothing is changing until the AGM. So let's start with a quick review of the broader economic picture particularly tariffs since they continue to affect both our customers and us. Then I will move to our recently announced sales contract and finish with some comments on capital allocation and other parts of our business. From a macro standpoint, the current U.S. administration's trade and economic policies have been disruptive. The impact shows up directly in our customers' planning cycle and therefore, in our own visibility. Practically, this has meant delays in some of our announced contracts and volume reduction on some of our ongoing business. As it relates to our drilling fluid customer, we have made significant progress in the quarter. Specifically, we have completed well trials and are finalizing contract terms we should be able to discuss in the near future. This contract involves supplying our tribograph powder to a major U.S. oil and gas company for its lubricant for both onshore and offshore drilling fluid applications. Tribograph is a high-performance carbon powder, which is being produced in our graphene production facility in Montréal. This high-performance specialty carbon mixture is engineered particularly as lubricant additive for drilling fluids, metal working and stamping, providing superior friction reduction for protection and suspension stability. Tribograph when formulated in drilling fluids has demonstrated outstanding results in the industrial standard tribology and friction testing. Evaluation carried out under a wide range of conditions show that our solution consistently outperformed leading alternatives currently available on the market. This product is the result of years of development and fine-tuning and has already proved its reliability and performance during demanding extended reach drilling operations in the United States. More in-depth data collected during drilling operation has confirmed that Tribograph directly improved drilling performance. The results show faster drilling speeds, reduced rig time and lower overall operating cost. Furthermore, there is clear evidence that tribograph reduces wear on downhole tools, helping extend equipment life and further lowering operating and maintenance expenses. Now moving on to our North Carolina expansion. We have completed installation and commissioning of the equipment and preproduction parts have recently been shipped to our new customer. Those parts are pending final approval. Once that comes true, we will move quickly to scale production at Statesville at the beginning of October. Stepping back, Q4 was a tough operating environment. Revenue declined year-over-year. On the positive side, adjusted EBITDA margins improved, reflecting in part a broader adoption of our high-margin products and cost management. Regarding our dry process graphene and CSPG project, we have made significant inroads with both levels of government and for our electricity allocation. We are satisfied with the progress made with our stakeholders in the project. We will inform investors as we progress and reach key milestones. At the same time, we have ordered equipment to begin industrial scale production of our dry process graphene at our Thimens facility targeting early calendar 2026. This first module gives us between 500 and 1,000 tons per year of capacity depending on product grade. This first production module will allow us to supply larger volumes to our testing partners and will eventually be the first line installed in our new facility. Looking ahead to the fiscal year, we see 2 stages. Our Advanced materials, plastic and composite segment is currently seeing volume reduction from our 2 major customers. That will translate into a challenging Q1 and Q2. But as we move into the back half, we expect growth to be driven by higher margin graphene powder cells, Statesville production ramp up and by volumes resuming in graphene-enhanced SMC. To sum it up, while there are softer volumes in the near term, there's plenty of good news as well. Q4 delivered strong adjusted EBITDA margin, we are in the final stages of securing a major new oil and gas customer while progressing with other ones for our highest margin business segment. We completed the Statesville expansion and already have parts shipping, and we made solid progress on the dry graphene project as we gear up for future growth. Overall, we expect both growth and profitability to be weighted toward the second half of the year. With that, I'll now turn the call over to Pedro to walk you through our financial performance. Pedro Azevedo: Good morning, everyone. Today, I will begin with a review of our Q4 and full year financial results followed by an update on financial aspects of our 5-year plan and conclude with some commentary on near-term CapEx spending. Total revenues in Q4 were 17% lower than Q4 2024 at $31.7 million. This decrease was mainly due to a reduction in demand from our 2 largest customers as volumes have slowed to historically low levels after strong demand levels last year. Our 2 largest customers, along with others in the industry have reported layoffs and cadence reductions due to the current economic environment. Although revenues from parts and materials were lower, tooling revenues were higher due to the continued supply of tools for new programs and expansion of an existing program now completed. As previously indicated, this higher level of tooling will be the case during fiscal 2026 until part production starts on new programs during calendar 2026 and early 2027. Adjusted gross margins, which exclude depreciation as a percentage of sales continued to increase during the quarter to reach 24.7%, an increase of 110 basis points year-over-year driven mainly by positive variances on tooling revenue recognition, partly offset by lower manufacturing overhead cost absorption on lower volume. This year-over-year margin improvement has been the trend for over the last 12 quarters, and we are pleased that it is continuing. Looking back at the progress made over the quarters, I wanted to highlight that we started with an adjusted gross margin of 3% in Q1 of 2022 and have progressively improved quarter-by-quarter to reach 24.7% this past quarter. These improvements have come from improved operational efficiency, increased volume of both graphene-enhanced parts and other non-graphene enhanced parts, increasing graphene powder sales and a higher U.S. dollar. Adjusted EBITDA was $2.5 million, equal to last year and was comprised of $2.7 million in the Advanced materials, plastics and composite products segment, a decrease of $600,000 versus last year and by a loss of $247,000 in the Battery cells and materials segment, an improvement of $600,000 versus last year. With regard to our balance sheet and cash flows, we ended the quarter with $18.6 million in cash and cash equivalent and $5.2 million in short-term and long-term debt. Operating cash flows amounted to $1.8 million, mainly from changes in working capital items. Cash flows from financing activities were positive $1.8 million resulting from equipment lease financing advances inflow of $3.9 million and debt and lease repayments of $1.9 million. Finally, cash flows from investing activities were negative $5.4 million, mainly due to capital expenditure payments related to our 5-year strategic plan. Our cash, along with the unused space in our revolving credit lines resulted in a total liquidity of $28.6 million at June 30. Looking at our full year results. While sales were strong in the first half of our fiscal year and in line with expectations, the second half was disappointing as our 2 largest customers reduced their production cadence. Nevertheless, within our total sales, usage on sale of graphene powder continue to grow. Sales for the year were slightly below last year at $129 million, but with a record adjusted EBITDA of $6.1 million. If we look at the segments, adjusted EBITDA in the Advanced materials, plastics and composite Products segment reached $6.9 million, an improvement of $1.7 million versus fiscal year 2024. During the year, gross margins, excluding depreciation, increased from an average of 21.1% in fiscal 2024 to an average of 22.3% in fiscal 2025. Adjusted EBITDA loss in the Battery cells and materials segment was $725,000 compared to a loss of $2.7 million last year, mainly due to the cost reductions in the VoltaXplore initiative. With regard to the expansions of graphene-enhanced SMC capacity, expansion in our Beauce, Quebec plant was completed during the quarter. This expansion increased our capacity to produce parts for one customer by 50%. However, the capacity expansion currently remains underutilized due to the reduced demand in the mid- and heavy transportation industry. Our U.S. expansion, which includes both graphene enhanced SMC as well as additional capacity for the composites business is near completion with most of the equipment having been delivered and installed during the summer months. Start of production of a new program at the Statesville site will begin in early October, adding to revenues in our Q2. Lastly, in August 2025, NanoXplore was selected to receive up to $2.75 million over the next 3 years from Natural Resources Canada under the Energy Innovation Programs Battery Industry Acceleration call for proposals for the research and development on the use of silicon graphene in ultrahigh-powered cylindrical cells. Turning now to our near-term CapEx spending. With regard to CapEx spending, as expected, we spent approximately $5 million on CapEx in Q4. And expect to spend another $3 million to $5 million in each of the next 2 quarters as we complete the spending on the U.S. expansion initiative and the graphene-enhanced SMC initiative of the 5-year strategic plan. As previously mentioned, this will be financed through our RBC credit facility and mainly with equipment lease financing. With that, I will turn back to PY. Pierre-Yves Terrisse: Thank you, Pedro. Operator, we can now open the line for questions. Operator: [Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Amr Ezzat from Ventum Capital Markets. Amr Ezzat: I'd like to first acknowledge yesterday's news, Soroush, congrats on everything you've achieved in building NanoXplore has been certainly great to follow the story from your early days, and I'm glad to see that you remain involved as adviser and Vice Chair but maybe if we could start there, can you walk us through what drove the decision and the timing of the decision that you guys are in the cusp of commercialization. Then from an investor viewpoint, how should we think about I guess, the continuity in customer relationships, especially when it comes to powder commercialization as well as the strategy going forward? Is the change signaling a different direction? Soroush Nazarpour: Right. Right. All right. So let me start by saying I'm pretty happy with this transition, and it was a work in progress for quite some time. It's -- just let's step back. It's very normal for startups to be highly dependent to the founder. And this has been something that has been recognized in the company for the last few years. So throughout the time, Rocco and Pedro that are both pillars of the company. They are -- they took slowly some of the responsibility that I have throughout the years. And the best example of that the last 2 years, both of them have been involved directly as well with the Board of Directors reporting. So this has been a transition in the making for quite some time. Rocco is a fantastic executive. We have been working together for many years, and I'm very, very happy for this transition, seeing Rocco coming on board and taking lead from the December. Now on the personal side, I have decided to move on sometime in the next year. So we decided to put the transition really on the AGM. So I have still a good 6 to 9 months of being present physically actually to be able to support Rocco in the transition. Going forward, I'm also continuing in the Board of Nano and I'm a big supporter of the company. I started this, and I will continue to be the cheerleader regardless of the title. Having said that, I'm actually continuing with the company. The concept is not for me to move away. I will -- I'm still continuing to be here in supporting the business. So I see it as a very positive transition. I actually think highly dependent corporation to the founders are a risk, I believe we've done a great job with the Board of Directors of Nano and Rocco and Pedro to really manage the transition in a very positive way and something that we, I believe, removed the risk from the company. So all in all, very positive. I'm very happy. And on the timing of that. So we are in the cusp of signing a contract with a major oil and gas company. And that's what we have reflected in the script as well. This is -- the good news is actually we've been able to conclude this contract very soon, we will release the news related to that. And I think it's the best time the company is doing fantastic. The graphene sales is in the best shape possible. So I think it's a great time actually for this transition. Amr Ezzat: Fantastic. That's extremely helpful and congrats again. So let's go to the other big news like that you just mentioned on the prepared remarks. I think the wording that you used is you are finalizing the contracts on the drilling fluid side for powder commercialization, obviously, can you give us -- and I'm not sure if you can, like a sense of size and pricing of such a contract, then do we think of that as a one-off contract or is that a multiyear sort of contract? Soroush Nazarpour: So let me say that we actually recorded this script yesterday, but today, I can tell you the contract is concluded. So that's the positive side. I mean the contract is done. The press release will come out. Let me talk about what is this tribograph. So tribograph is, as I said in the script, is the mixture of carbon. It's technically produced in our Thimens facility. It has quite extensive lubricity properties. So it's very useful for the drilling fluid application and also other sort of metal working and so on. What it does is it brings down the friction while drilling. So moving away from the technical that how is doing it, it translates into cost reduction for the oil and gas companies and for the drillers. So this type of graphene type solution has -- are always exposed to extra cost for users, hasn't something that we have to manage today. This product is actually reducing the cost. So adoption going to be very strong. In terms of details of the contract, you got to wait for the press release to come, but it's a multiyear supply contract. That's what I can say today. But you will see the details of the contract and all the commitments very soon. Amr Ezzat: Fantastic congrats on that. And if you'll allow me 1 more. I mean, you guys spoke at length about the economic environment and your 2 largest customers have like been holding back volumes and certainly in Quebec, there's been a lot of local, I guess, coverage around PACCAR Sainte-Thérèse plant, whether it's the layoffs or the production cutbacks and a lot of it actually is post your Q4. So I'd like to understand the magnitude of the volume softness in Q1 for both your large clients relative to Q4, then when thinking about fiscal '26, should we view this as largely a Q1 event, then Q2 is a rebound? Is that a fair statement? Pedro Azevedo: So Amr, Q1, in terms of specific percentages, I'd rather not talk about those because it is a subset of the whole of NanoXplore. The decrease has continued throughout Q1 from Q4. So you can make it with what you will. You're right, the PACCAR plant closure of a shift and downsizing is definitely a direct impact on our Beauce plant. It's not an impact on other businesses, if that helps a little bit. When it comes to Q1, Q2, yes, it is mainly a Q1 issue because we have a lot of stuff coming into Q2 that we've talked about in the script. New programs are starting in Q2, new customers starting in Q2. While the issue related to the 2 largest customers might continue into Q1 and Q2, A couple of things. Number one, all of these new programs will offset some of that in H2 in our second half, we expect the transportation industry to start recovering, even if it's just a little bit with everything that's being built up, we see H2 being a recovery. So coming back to your point, Q1, probably the area where the softness will be mostly viewed, but then Q2 ramp-up will start. And then H2 will be, I would say, back to normal and then some... Operator: One moment for our next question. Our next question comes from the line of Baltej Sidhu from National Bank of Canada. Baltej Sidhu: Congratulations on the transition, Soroush. So just a question on the 5-year strategic plan and mainly the graphene and battery material expansion. Can we get an update on the outlook for this portion of the strategic plan? Have you had any further conversations with Hydro-Québec on the required power allocation? And this is a follow-up to that. If not, have you decided to make any change to the initial plan, whether it's exploring different geographies or manufacturing sites and the like. Soroush Nazarpour: Right. So we can only discuss what we have been able to discuss from the energy side. But I can tell you, we are happy with the outcome of that. There is no changes today. We're continuing -- we were in a point to mix switch to the program in the last during the summer. But I'm happy that things evolved, and we have -- we're happy with the outcome. Having said that, any sort of release needs to be managed by the government. So we have to follow those requirements. There is no change. We are still on -- the plan is still the same, and I hope that in the next couple of months, we will get -- you guys will get a lot of positive updates about that. Baltej Sidhu: Sounds great. And then just on the financing side of things. Have we seen any additional sources of financing come through or increased customer contributions or is that still that same stack with investment tax credits probably debt and the government funding? Soroush Nazarpour: We will update some of the CapEx numbers for sure, a little bit later. But the main component of this is to announce the government supports. And following that, we will have -- you will have more clarity about the numbers. Baltej Sidhu: Great. And then on the CSPG side of things, given the newly proposed tariffs by the U.S. on Chinese graphite, are you seeing any more indications of customer and down on this port product or any evolution in conversations that you've had in the past few months? Soroush Nazarpour: CSPG continues to be really undersupplied in North America, and the demand is there even though some of the demand related to EV looks to be slower than in terms of growth than anticipated, but the production is still pretty much nonexistent. So further pressure on Chinese graphite supply really doesn't change at this point. There is no -- there's not enough CSPG supply in North America. As the graphite and the graphite -- secondary transport graphite products are more tariffed, there is still -- there's more need for local production. So I don't see this to make significant changes in the landscape today, but it certainly makes it more difficult for Chinese suppliers to provide the product to North America. So it's a positive momentum for us. We're seeing as well new entrants of large companies into the CSPG. So again, that shows that this supply/demand is still attractive for us to play in it. But at the end of the day, I think the impact of the tariff on the graphite is minimum. Baltej Sidhu: Great. And then just on the tariff situation, just another follow up here is given the pressure on graphite supply, have you seen any changes in your contract with your supplier and/or your supply chains in sourcing graphite. And if you're able to give us any sense of kind of a contract length with the current Canadian supplier. Soroush Nazarpour: No, we have multiple sources for the graphite. The graphite availability is still a -- graphite market as a whole is oversupplied. So we don't really see any challenge in getting the graphite that we need. So again, it's not something that we are concerned at this point. Baltej Sidhu: Okay. And then just the last one for me, if I may, on the SMC expansion. What's the order book looking like for this facility? I recall in Q3, you had mentioned that there were around 4 programs for around $30 million to $35 million in sales. Have you seen increased traction or an evolution in conversations there? Pedro Azevedo: So as Soroush kind of mentioned, one of the issues that we did see is that the awards that were made and we've announced have been delayed. So we thought that they would have started by now, but they haven't, but they will be starting in Q2. When it comes to order book, there are various programs that are in the magnitude of $10 million to $20 million in the next 12 months, let's say, and then further another $10 million, give or say, take in 2017. So we've been awarded all of these projects into the next 2 years. But for the plant in Statesville and the North Carolina operations, these programs will start in the next few months in the next month, actually, and grow to 2027 when all these awards will now be in production. Operator: One moment for our next question. Our next question comes from the line of Marvin Wolff from Paradigm Capital. Marvin Wolff: Okay. I'll try to tone it down, Soroush. I'd just like to say congratulations. You've built a great company here, Soroush. Hats off to you, it's a big achievement. And sorry to hear you stepping aside, but I fully understand it from the evolution of the firm, and I think all shareholders down the road will find this as a good move. I had a question with regard to shovels in the ground. On the expansions. What can we kind of think of there now? Soroush Nazarpour: Well, I mean, we talked a little bit about the dry process and CSPG project. There has been a couple of milestones for us to get there before starting the construction. Of course, the power requirement was one, government support was the other one and then putting everything together and starting the construction. I think we are almost there. We can't -- I can't update you as like a press release or something because there are other partners that need to let us announce it, like Hydro-Québec as well. the government. But I'm quite confident that this project can move forward. What I'm seeing today is positive and we can go forward. Now in terms of the shovel in the ground, we have to build a plant, and this potentially starts. Marvin Wolff: Yes. Do you think you'll be able to catch this season or you got to wait through the winter? Soroush Nazarpour: Yet to be seen, but I think the supply-demand dynamic is not going to change by a couple of quarters. that's for sure. But I hope that we can start this very soon. Operator: One moment for our next question. Our next question comes from the line of Michael Glen from Raymond James. Michael Glen: Soroush, thank you for everything with NanoXplore over the years, all your patience with me in touring the facilities and bringing me up to speed on the future of graphene's all been really, really fun and interesting to watch. Soroush Nazarpour: Thank you very much. Michael Glen: Just to come back on the SMC facility and that outlook that was asked previously. When you -- Pedro, I think you were speaking to that. Like when you add all this together, you mentioned a number of different order items in the order book. When you add all those together, looking out say, in 2 years from now, what would the -- can you give a range like what the revenue contribution from all of this might look like? Pedro Azevedo: So just on the SMC initiative that we've been putting together, we expect a minimum in 2 years, and I think your time line is right because it's going to still take a little bit longer than from today to ramp up to that, but it is ramping up. So think of this as a ramp up over the next few years. It should reach around $30 million to $40 million in the next 2 years as these programs are all rolled out and the SMC initiative has really come to fruition, let's say, as we had originally planned. Michael Glen: Okay. And would you say that, that is largely in line with current gross margins? Pedro Azevedo: That will all be at current gross margins and possibly even a little bit more as we fill plants, the margins, the overheads gets absorbed by more revenue and therefore, the margin should improve. Michael Glen: Okay. Okay. And then back to the drilling fluid products. I can't remember the name of it, but is this a patent protected product or IP protected, just... Soroush Nazarpour: Yes. It's protected by intellectual properties. And it's pretty much coming out of the same graphene production line. It's the modification that we did on the output that to make it more suitable for lubrication properties... Michael Glen: And how does -- I know that we're waiting for some of the details, but how does the anticipated customer demand aligned with the installation you have right now? Soroush Nazarpour: It's -- I will -- I think it's better to wait and see the press release before I speculate on the volume. Michael Glen: Sorry, I missed the last part. What was that? Soroush Nazarpour: I think it's better to wait for the press release. This is a little bit of a speculation at this point. Let's get the press release details are in there. All in all, I would say I'm very happy with the outcomes, potentially the biggest graphene contract -- well, it's the biggest graphene contract for Nano and potentially the biggest graphene contract in the history. But let's wait for the contract to come out, and there's more details in there. Operator: Okay. Thank you. At this time, I would now like to turn the conference back over to Pierre-Yves for closing remarks. Pierre-Yves Terrisse: Thank you, operator. Is there any further questions from the analysts? Operator: There is not. Pierre-Yves Terrisse: Okay. Well, I'd like to thank everyone for participating in this call, and have a great day. Operator: This concludes today's conference call. Thank you for participating. You may now disconnect.